{"id":"sl-1950-11","name":"Scaffolding and Lifts Regulation 1950","slug":"scaffolding-and-lifts-regulation-1950","collection":"regulation","jurisdiction":"act","status":"in_force","isInForce":true,"actNumber":"11 of 1950","makingDate":null,"administeringDepartment":null,"currentVersion":{"id":173804,"registerId":"act-sl-1950-11-current","compilationNumber":null,"startDate":"2026-04-05","status":"InForce","reasons":null,"registeredAt":null},"sections":[{"sectionNumber":"Part 2","sectionType":"part","heading":"Qualifications, powers and duties of the chief","content":"Part 2 Qualifications, powers and duties of the chief\ninspector and inspectors\n11 5\n\nPage\ncontents 2 Scaffolding and Lifts Regulation 1950\n13 5\n14 6\n","sortOrder":0},{"sectionNumber":"Div 4","sectionType":"division","heading":"1 Interpretation","content":"Division 4.1 Interpretation\n16 7\nPermit to erect or alter lifts\n17 7\nSafe working load of a lift\n18 8\n19 9\n20 9\n21 9\nCar loading automatic passenger lifts\n22 10\nSupporting structures and machine rooms\n23 10\nOverruns\n24 11\nStops and buffers\n25 12\nPermanent stops\n26 13\nPits\n27 13\n28 14\nEnclosure doors\n29 14\nClearance in wells\n30 15\n\nPage\ncontents 3\nRopes and sheaves\n31 16\nLift cars\n32 17\nCar gates\n33 18\nLighting and ventilation of cars\n34 19\nSafety gear\n35 19\nMachines\n36 20\nCounterweight\n37 21\nGuides\n38 21\nElectrical equipment\n39 21\nCar switch\n40 22\nLimit gear\n41 22\nSlack cable device\n42 23\nSafety gear switch\n43 23\nStop button\n44 23\nSignal call system\n45 24\nHydraulic equipment\n46 24\n\nPage\ncontents 4 Scaffolding and Lifts Regulation 1950\nEscalators\n47 25\nTrusses or girders\n48 25\nTrack arrangement\n49 25\nAngle of inclination\n50 26\nBalustrading\n51 26\nTreads and landings\n52 26\nPower unit\n53 26\nChains\n54 27\nAutomatic brakes\n55 27\nStarting switch and stop button\n56 27\nSafety devices\n57 27\nReverse phase relay\n58 28\nMachine room\n59 28\nConstruction of conveyors\n60 28\nElectrical installation\n61 29\nControl\n62 29\n\nPage\ncontents 5\n63 29\nProvision for maintenance\n64 30\nNo persons permitted to travel\n65 30\nLoad notice\n66 30\n67 30\n68 32\nChange of ownership\n69 32\n70 33\n71 33\n72 33\n","sortOrder":1},{"sectionNumber":"Part 5","sectionType":"part","heading":"Safeguards and measures to be taken for","content":"Part 5 Safeguards and measures to be taken for\nengaged in building work\n73 34\n74 38\nFencing of floors, landings, stairways and the like\n75 38\n","sortOrder":2},{"sectionNumber":"Div 5","sectionType":"division","heading":"2 Constructing, erecting, adding to, altering, repairing,","content":"Division 5.2 Constructing, erecting, adding to, altering, repairing,\nfinishing, painting and cleaning buildings and\nstructures\nStability of walls\n77 40\nProtection in liftwells and stairwells\n78 40\n\nPage\ncontents 6 Scaffolding and Lifts Regulation 1950\nTemporary ramps\n79 40\nProvision and use of ladders and stepladders\n80 41\nCleaning and maintenance of roof monitors, gutters, windows, louvres and\nventilators\n81 45\nWindow cleaning\n82 46\nSpray painting\n83 59\n84 64\n","sortOrder":3},{"sectionNumber":"Part 6","sectionType":"part","heading":"The proper design, construction, erection and","content":"Part 6 The proper design, construction, erection and\nuse of scaffolding\n","sortOrder":4},{"sectionNumber":"85","sectionType":"section","heading":"Definitions for pt 6 67","content":"85 Definitions for pt 6 67\n86 68\nConstruction of single and independent pole scaffolding\n87 72\nCantilever scaffolding\n88 87\nBracket scaffolding\n89 89\nSuspended scaffolding\n90 93\nLight swinging stages\n91 100\nBoatswain’s chairs\n92 105\nScaffolding for use on ships in dock or on slips\n93 107\n\nPage\ncontents 7\nRuns and ramps\n94 111\n","sortOrder":5},{"sectionNumber":"Part 7","sectionType":"part","heading":"Safeguards and measures to be taken for","content":"Part 7 Safeguards and measures to be taken for\nengaged in excavation work\n95 113\n96 116\n97 117\n98 119\n","sortOrder":6},{"sectionNumber":"Part 8","sectionType":"part","heading":"Safeguards and measures to be taken for","content":"Part 8 Safeguards and measures to be taken for\nengaged in compressed air work\n99 121\n100 137\n101 150\nApplication and interpretation\n118A 163\nOperators of explosive-powered tools\n118B 164\nGeneral requirements for explosive-powered tools and projectiles\n118C 164\nInspection and repair of explosive-powered tools\n118D 165\n\nPage\ncontents 8 Scaffolding and Lifts Regulation 1950\nUse of explosive-powered tools\n118E 167\nCare and storage of explosive-powered tools and cartridges\n118F 171\nProtective devices\n118G 172\nWarning notices\n118H 172\n","sortOrder":7},{"sectionNumber":"Part 10","sectionType":"part","heading":"Measures to be taken for securing the health","content":"Part 10 Measures to be taken for securing the health\nof persons in building work, excavation work\nand compressed air work by provision of\nfirst-aid equipment, shelter, change and\ndining accommodation, sanitary\n119 174\n120 180\n","sortOrder":8},{"sectionNumber":"Div 10","sectionType":"division","heading":"3 Sanitary conveniences and washing facilities","content":"Division 10.3 Sanitary conveniences and washing facilities\n121 183\n","sortOrder":9},{"sectionNumber":"Part 11","sectionType":"part","heading":"Basic requirements about design and","content":"Part 11 Basic requirements about design and\nconstruction, erection, use, maintenance,\ninspection and testing with particular\nreference to cranes, lifts, hoists, scaffolding\nand plant\n122 186\nWind loads\n123 197\nHorizontal forces (other than those due to wind)\n124 201\nDynamic and repealed loadings\n125 202\n\nPage\ncontents 9\nMaximum permissible stresses\n126 203\n127 226\nStability\n128 259\nTest loads\n129 263\nMechanical\n130 264\n131 283\nFencing—general\n132 287\nJointers\n132A 289\n133 289\nStiff-leg derrick cranes\n134 296\nCaterpillar cranes and mobile cranes\n135 299\nGravity operated overwinding limit devices\n136 301\nFork-lift trucks\n137 303\nCommercial type hoists\n138 305\nTower hoists for constructional, building, demolition, or excavation works\n139 307\n\nPage\ncontents 10 Scaffolding and Lifts Regulation 1950\nWhip or sheerleg hoists for constructional, building, demolition, or\nexcavation works\n140 315\n141 318\n142 318\nChain for use in connection with cranes, lifts, hoists, scaffolding, plant,\ngear, or building work, excavation work, or\n143 338\nSteel wire ropes for use in connection with cranes, lifts, hoists, scaffolding,\nplant, gear, or building work, excavation work, or\n144 351\nFibre rope for use in connection with cranes, lifts, hoists, scaffolding, plant,\ngear, or building work, excavation work, or\n145 389\nAirlocks\n146 393\nBordeaux connections\n147 393\nSockets for wire ropes\n148 393\nThimbles for wire and fibre rope\n149 393\nSteel eye bolts\n150 394\nMild steel rigging screws, and stretching screws and turnbuckles\n151 394\n\nPage\ncontents 11\nMild steel shackles\n152 394\nRings, links alternative to rings, egg links and Intermediate links\n153 395\n154 395\nRope clips\n155 396\nGin blocks used with fibre rope\n156 396\nLift boxes\n157 397\n","sortOrder":10},{"sectionNumber":"Part 13","sectionType":"part","heading":"Precautions and measures to be taken for","content":"Part 13 Precautions and measures to be taken for\nsecuring the safety of persons in connection\nwith roofs sheathed with asbestos cement or\nother brittle material\n158 399\n","sortOrder":11},{"sectionNumber":"Part 16","sectionType":"part","heading":"Miscellaneous and penalties","content":"Part 16 Miscellaneous and penalties\nGeneral penalty\n164 407\n\nPage\ncontents 12 Scaffolding and Lifts Regulation 1950\n","sortOrder":12},{"sectionNumber":"Sch 3","sectionType":"schedule","heading":"Method of treatment of silica paint for the","content":"Schedule 3 Method of treatment of silica paint for the\npurpose of ascertaining the percentage of\nfree silica present 408\n","sortOrder":13},{"sectionNumber":"Sch 4","sectionType":"schedule","heading":"Processes to which s 73 (1) (o) applies 409","content":"Schedule 4 Processes to which s 73 (1) (o) applies 409\n","sortOrder":14},{"sectionNumber":"Sch 5","sectionType":"schedule","heading":"Method of treatment of a lead compound for","content":"Schedule 5 Method of treatment of a lead compound for\nthe purpose of determining the percentage of\ndry compound of lead 410\nSchedule 7 411\nSchedule 8 Medical standards and examination report for\ncompressed air workers 441\nSchedule 9 Symptoms and treatment of compressed air\nillness 444\nDictionary 446\n1 About the endnotes 452\n2 Abbreviation key 452\n3 Legislation history 453\n4 Amendment history 457\n5 Earlier republications 468\n\n1 Name of regulation\nThis regulation is the Scaffolding and Lifts Regulation 1950.\n2 Dictionary\nThe dictionary at the end of this regulation is part of this regulation.\nNote 1 The dictionary at the end of this regulation defines certain terms used in\nthis regulation, and includes references (signpost definitions) to other\nterms defined elsewhere in this regulation.\nFor example, the signpost definition ‘cantilever scaffolding—see section\n85.’ means that the term ‘cantilever scaffolding’ is defined in that section.\nNote 2 A definition in the dictionary (including a signpost definition) applies to\nthe entire regulation unless the definition, or another provision of the\nregulation, provides otherwise or the contrary intention otherwise appears\n(see Legislation Act, s 155 and s 156 (1)).\n","sortOrder":15},{"sectionNumber":"3","sectionType":"section","heading":"Notes","content":"3 Notes\nA note included in this regulation is explanatory and is not part of this\nNote See the Legislation Act, s 127 (1), (4) and (5) for the legal status of notes.\n","sortOrder":16},{"sectionNumber":"4","sectionType":"section","heading":"Plates, figures and sketches","content":"4 Plates, figures and sketches\nAny plates, figures or sketches shown in this regulation and to which\nreference is made in the text should not be construed as specifications\nbut should be considered as types for information or guidance only in\nconstruction.\nIf the chief inspector is satisfied that for any particular class or\ndescription of crane, lift, hoist, scaffolding, plant or gear, or roof\nsheathed or intended to be sheathed with asbestos cement or other\nbrittle material or of any special description or method of building\n\nPreliminary Part 1\nwork, excavation work, or compressed air work, the application of\nany requirement of this regulation relating to safety or health is, in\nany class or description of circumstances, not necessary in the\ninterests of safety or health or is not reasonably practicable, the chief\ninspector may by written certificate (which the chief inspector may at\nthe chief inspector’s discretion revoke at any time) grant an\nexemption from that requirement for that class of description of crane,\nlift, hoist, scaffolding, plant or gear, or roof sheathed with asbestos\ncement or other brittle material or of that special description or\nmethod of building work, excavation work or compressed air work in\nthe circumstances and subject to the conditions that may be specified\nin the certificate.\n(1) If the obligation to observe any of the provisions of this regulation is\nnot by this regulation specifically imposed on any person it is the\nobligation of every person who directly or by his or her servants or\nagents—\n(a) carries out any building work, excavation work or compressed\nair work; or\n(b) designs, constructs, erects, sets up or builds, or sets or places in\nposition, works, uses, tests or maintains any crane, lift, hoist,\nscaffolding, plant or gear, or roof sheathed or intended to be\nsheathed with asbestos cement or other brittle material;\nto comply with the provisions of this regulation.\n(2) A person must not directly or by his or her servants or agents use any\ncrane, lift, hoist, scaffolding, plant or gear, unless it has been\nclassified, designed, constructed, erected, set up, built or set or placed\nin position, and installed, and unless the person uses and maintains it,\nin accordance with the provisions of this regulation.\n\nEvery person must use the safeguards given and provided in\naccordance with this regulation and a person must not interfere\ndetrimentally in any way with the use of the safeguards by any other\nperson, nor with the use of any safeguard method or process.\n\nQualifications, powers and duties of the chief inspector and inspectors Part 2\nPart 2 Qualifications, powers and duties\nof the chief inspector and\ninspectors\nA person must not falsely pretend to be an inspector.\nAn inspector has the power to—\n(a) conduct prosecutions whether the information is laid in the\ninspector’s name or not; and\n(b) attend and examine witnesses at any inquest into the cause of the\ndeath of any person following on an accident arising from the\nconstruction, erection, setting up or building or setting or\nplacing in position, installation, alteration, working or use of any\ncrane, gear, hoist, lift, plant, scaffolding or part of it, or\noccurring in relation to any building work, excavation work or\ncompressed air work or any roof sheathed with asbestos cement\nor other brittle material; and\n(c) direct the owner of, or person in charge or apparently in charge\nof any crane, lift, hoist, scaffolding, plant or gear, or the\ncontractor or person in charge or apparently in charge of any\nbuilding work, excavation work or compressed air work, to take\nthe measures and provide the equipment and assistance that the\ninspector may require to facilitate any inspection, and the person\nmust forthwith carry out the directions.\n\nPart 2 Qualifications, powers and duties of the chief inspector and inspectors\nAn inspector may require the production of any certificate or permit\nthat by the Act or this regulation is required to be held by any person\nor require the production of any notice, record or document that is by\nthe Act or by this regulation required to be kept or exhibited and to\ninspect, examine and copy it.\n\nInterpretation Division 4.1\nDivision 4.1 Interpretation\n(1) In this part:\nconveyor means a lift so arranged that goods are raised or lowered by\nmeans of an endless belt or chain or by fittings attached to the lift, in\nan inclined or vertical direction.\nsafety gear means a mechanical device or mechanism attached to the\nunderside of a lift car that on operation will stop and sustain the car\nindependently of the lifting ropes.\nservice lift means a lift the car of which has a floor area of not more\nthan 9 square feet and a height of not more than 4 feet, used to carry\ngoods only, and controlled from without the lift-well, and also\nincludes any lift certified by the chief inspector to be a service lift.\nS.A.A. Lift Code\n(2) The provisions of Code No C.A. 3—1947 published by Standards\nAustralia entitled ‘Australian Standard Rules for the Design,\nInstallation, Testing and Operation of Lifts and Escalators’ apply to\nany matter or thing not provided for in this regulation.\nDivision 4.2 Design, construction and erection of\nlifts\nPermit to erect or alter lifts\n(1) No person shall erect or alter a lift without first obtaining a permit\nfrom the chief inspector.\n\n(2) The applicant for a permit to erect a lift shall lodge with the chief\ninspector a description and plans of the lift that includes particulars\nof the machine, control, operating and safety devices, size and\nconstruction of car, and a general layout showing the size of the motor\nroom and means of access to it, supports for the machine and guides,\nthe overruns, the pit and the lift-well enclosures, and shall specify the\nmaximum load that the lift is designed to carry and the rated speed of\nthe lift.\n(3) The applicant for a permit to alter a lift shall lodge a description and\nparticulars of the proposed alterations.\n(4) The description and plans shall be filed in the office of the chief\n(5) Before granting a permit the chief inspector may require any\nalterations in the design to be made that appear to the chief inspector\nto be necessary for the safe working of the lift or to ensure compliance\nwith this regulation.\n(6) Every lift shall be erected in accordance with the description and\nplans submitted to and approved by the chief inspector and in\naccordance with any direction endorsed on the permit and in\nconformity with this regulation.\nSafe working load of a lift\n(1) The safe working load specified in the permit to erect or alter a lift\nshall be the safe working load of the lift.\n(2) The chief inspector may by written notice served on the owner vary\nthe safe working load of any lift and the safe working load as varied\nshall then be the safe working load of the lift until revoked or further\nvaried by the chief inspector.\n\n(3) The notice stating the safe working load required to be exhibited\nunder section 70 may state a safe working load less than the safe\nworking load as determined under this section.\n(4) The notice stating the safe working load required to be exhibited in\nthe car of a passenger lift shall state the maximum number of people\nto be carried, which number shall not be greater than the safe working\nload in pounds divided by 150.\n(5) The notice stating the safe working load required to be exhibited in\nrelation to lifts other than passenger lifts must state the load in\npounds.\nEvery lift and every part of it shall be of sound material, good\nAll work performed and all machines, equipment and material used\nin connection with any lift shall be subject to the approval of the chief\ninspector, who shall, as often as it appears to the chief inspector\nnecessary, cause them to be inspected and tested.\nNo person other than a person engaged on the erection, or alteration\nof a lift, shall work, use or interfere with the lift until the lift has been\napproved by an inspector for general use.\n\nCar loading automatic passenger lifts\n(1) Every passenger lift being an automatic lift shall be designed and\nconstructed on the basis of a load of not less than 75 pounds per\nsquare foot of net car or platform floor area.\n(2) The chief inspector may exempt from the operation of this section any\nlift designed to carry beds, stretchers or invalid chairs in a hospital or\nsimilar institution, or any lift with a car floor area not exceeding 9\nsquare feet.\nSupporting structures and machine rooms\n(1) The supporting structure of every lift shall be designed and\nconstructed in accordance with part 11.\n(2) The machine, control mechanism and all parts of the equipment of\nevery lift, other than those parts that must necessarily be placed\nelsewhere to effectively perform their functions shall be housed in a\nmachine room.\n(3) The area and height of the machine room shall be adequate to permit\nof free and safe access for purposes of inspection and maintenance of\nall parts of the machine and lift equipment located in it, and the\nmachine room shall be adequately illuminated and ventilated and\nshall be provided with safe and convenient means of access.\n(4) Every entrance to the machine room shall be provided with a door.\n(5) Every door to the machine room shall be provided with a lock that\ncan be opened from outside the room only by the use of a key.\n(6) If the door locks on closing, it shall be of a type that does not require\na key to unlock it from within the machine room.\n\n(7) If lift machine room equipment is situatedd on more than 1 floor,\neffective means of switching off the power shall be provided at each\nfloor.\nOverruns\n(1) The overrun provided for a car and for a counterweight of any lift\nother than for a service lift, shall be not less than that specified in table\n24:\nTable 24\nCar Counterweight\ntop overrun bottom overrun\ntop overrun (with\ncar landed)\nrated speed\nin feet per/min\ndrum\ndrum\ndrum\nft. in. ft. in. ft. in. ft. in. ft. in. ft. in.\n0 to 100 3 0 4 0 1 6 1 6 1 6 3 0\n101 to 200 3 0 4 0 2 0 2 0 1 6 3 0\n201 to 300 4 0 5 4 2 6 2 6 2 0 4 0\n301 to 400 5 0 . . 3 0 . . 2 6 . .\n401 to 500 6 0 . . 3 6 . . 3 0 . .\n501 to 600 7 0 . . 4 0 . . 3 6 . .\n(2) The top and bottom overrun for the car and the counterweight of any\nservice lift shall be that specified in table 24 except that the bottom\noverrun of a car shall be 12 inches.\n(3) The bottom overrun for the counterweight of a traction-drive lift\nwhen the car floor is level with the top landing shall not be greater\nthan 1/ 2 of the top overrun provided for the car.\n(4) The final limit gear of the lift shall operate before the counterweight\nlands.\n\n(5) The bottom overrun for the counterweight of a drum-drive lift when\nthe car floor is level with the top landing shall not be greater than 1/ 4\nof the top overrun provided for the lift car.\n(6) The final limit gear of the lift shall operate before the counterweight\nlands.\nStops and buffers\n(1) Approved stops or buffers of the type prescribed table 25 as\nappropriate to the running speed of the lift car or counterweight shall\nbe provided for the car and counterweight of all lifts other than service\nlifts.\nTable 25\nrunning speed of car or\ncounterweight\ntype of stop or buffer\nnot exceeding 100 feet/min solid stops, spring buffers, oil buffers\nor impact-absorbing stops\nexceeding 100 feet/min, but\nnot exceeding 200 feet/min\nspring buffers or oil buffers\nexceeding 200 feet/min oil buffers\n(2) Buffers so provided shall comply with the following requirements:\n(a) spring buffers—springs for buffers shall be so designed that they\nwill not take a permanent set on absorbing the energy of the fully\nloaded car at governor-operating speed; and\n(b) oil buffers—the minimum total stroke of oil buffers shall be\nbased on an average retardation of 32.2 feet per second per\nsecond, based on the governor-operating speed, and the\nmaximum retardation based on the governor-operating speed\nshall not be in excess of 80.5 feet per second per second (21/ 2\ntimes gravity retardation).\n\n(3) Effective means shall be provided for readily ascertaining the\nadequacy of the oil supply.\n(4) Provision shall be made, by fitting a spring or by other suitable means,\nfor taking the initial impact between the car or counterweight and the\nbuffer.\nPermanent stops\nThe final obstruction at the top and bottom of every lift-well shall\nensure that in the event of an overwind the car and counterweight will\nremain in their guides with the car floor and the horizontal faces of\nthe counterweight level.\nPits\n(1) The wells of all lifts shall continue to solid earth except in the\ncircumstances and subject to the conditions that the chief inspector\nmay approve.\n(2) The pits of all lifts shall be constructed to remain dry and shall be\nprovided with safe and convenient means of access.\n(3) Suitable means of access and lighting to permit of safe and efficient\nmaintenance of safety gear shall be provided.\n(4) The pits of all lifts other than service lifts shall be of sufficient depth\nto provide the overrun specified in section 24 and in addition a\nclearance of not less than 24 inches between the underside of the car\nplatform and the floor of the pit when the car is landed with the\nbuffers fully compressed.\n\n(1) All liftwells shall be completely enclosed from the bottom of the pit\nto the underside of the overhead supporting beams with approved\nmaterial of adequate strength.\n(2) All windows in lift-well enclosures shall be closed and fixed.\n(3) All windows and openings accessible from fire-escapes, stairways,\nplatforms, adjacent roofs and those on ground floors and basement\nlevels as well as any window up to a height of 20 feet and opening on\nto a public place, cartway or yard or similar area shall be barred or\notherwise permanently protected.\nEnclosure doors\n(1) Every enclosure door of every automatic lift other than a service lift\nshall be provided with 2 separate electromechanical interlocks each\narranged to electrically and mechanically interlock the enclosure door\nwith the control of the lift.\n(2) If latches are used they shall be of a design that will prevent fingers\nprojecting through the latch hole and the latch shall be clear of the\ndoor surrounds when the door is fully open.\n(3) These electromechanical interlocks shall ensure that—\n(a) the car cannot move or continue in motion unless every\nenclosure door is closed and locked.\n(4) For subsection (3) (a), an enclosure door may be considered locked if\ncomplete locking occurs within the period that the car takes to move\n9 inches from the landing on which the enclosure door is situated.\n(5) Each enclosure door may only be unlocked and opened when the car\nis stationary and its floor is level with the landing or within 9 inches\n\nof it at which the enclosure door is situated or the car is within the\ncontrol of the levelling device at that landing.\n(6) Every enclosure door of every lift other than an automatic lift shall be\nprovided with an electromechanical interlock that shall ensure that\nthe car cannot move or continue in motion unless every enclosure\ndoor is closed and locked and that the enclosure door can only be\nunlocked from the car.\n(7) Every enclosure door of every service lift shall be interlocked with\nthe control so that the car cannot move or continue in motion unless\nevery enclosure door is closed and locked and so that the enclosure\ndoors can only be opened when the car floor is level with the landing\nor within 9 inches of the landing on which the enclosure door is\nsituated.\n(8) For this section, an enclosure door may be considered locked if\ncomplete locking occurs within the period that the car takes to move\n9 inches from the landing on which the enclosure door is situated.\n(9) Except for a lift fitted with both power-operated doors and a position-\nindicating device, every enclosure door of an automatic lift shall be\nprovided with a panel, not less than 1 square foot in area, through\nwhich the car may be clearly seen from the landings.\nClearance in wells\n(1) Adequate clearances shall be provided for the car and counterweight\nin every lift-well.\n(2) Piping, conduit, or other equipment not forming part of the lift\ninstallation shall not be installed in a lift-well, except with the\napproval of the chief inspector.\n\nRopes and sheaves\n(1) Flexible steel or iron wire ropes shall be used for the lifting, governor\nand compensating ropes of all lifts, and the ropes shall not be spliced\nfor purposes of repair or extension.\n(2) Chains shall not be used for suspending cars or counterweights of\nlifts.\n(3) The minimum number of lifting ropes for cars and counterweights of\nlifts, other than service lifts, shall be 2 for drum-drive lifts and\nhydraulic lifts and 3 for all other types.\n(4) The factor of safety for lifting ropes shall not be less than 10.\n(5) The minimum diameter of suspension ropes for cars and\ncounterweights shall be 3/ 8 of an inch except for service lifts where\nthe minimum diameter shall be 1/ 4 of an inch.\n(6) The ratio of the diameter of any drum or sheave to the diameter of the\nrope used on it shall be not less than—\n(a) 45:1 for passenger or goods lifts; and\n(b) 40:1 for service lifts; and\n(c) 38:1 for compensating ropes; and\n(d) 25:1 for governor ropes.\n(7) All drums and sheaves shall be grooved to correctly embrace the\nropes, and to prevent any overriding or jamming.\n(8) Lifting ropes shall be effectively anchored to drums and not less than\n11/ 2 turns of each rope shall remain on a drum when the lift car or\ncounterweight has landed.\n(9) If compensating ropes are used, provisions shall be made for\nautomatically stopping the lift in the event of the compensating\nsheave rising or falling beyond predetermined limits.\n\n(10) If 2:1 roping is used provision shall be made to prevent the ropes\nleaving their correct grooves, and the sheaves on the car shall be\neffectively guarded and a convenient handhold provided.\nLift cars\n(1) Steel shall be used for the bow, side members, safety gear bearers and\nplatform frames for the car of every lift, other than a service lift.\n(2) The bow of every service lift shall be strapped to the car floor with\nsteel.\n(3) Every passenger lift car shall have a roof that covers the whole area\nof the car, and the cars of goods lifts shall have a roof when so\ndirected by an inspector.\n(4) The roof of every lift car shall be constructed to provide a sound, flat\nsurface of as large an area as practicable and affording a firm\nfoothold, and shall be of adequate strength to support safely the\nweight of the workers that might go on it and any equipment required\nto be placed on it.\n(5) Glass shall not be used in car roofs.\n(6) The roof of every lift car other than a service lift shall be provided\nwith a hinged panel, capable, if necessary, of being raised from inside\nor outside the car and when partly or fully opened shall not foul any\nenclosure or fitting in the lift-well.\n(7) The panel opening to be of such size as to permit the easy ingress or\negress of a man.\n(8) The hinged panels on automatic lifts shall be electrically and\nmechanically interlocked with the control of the lift.\n(9) The roof of every service lift car shall be set back not less than\n6 inches from the line of the car floor nosing, or for such distance the\nroof shall be in the form of a hinged flap capable of lifting.\n\n(10) The sides of every lift car shall extend from the car floor to the car\nroof.\n(11) If a roof is not provided to the car of a goods lift, the sides shall be of\nthe height that an inspector may direct but shall not be less than 6 feet\nin height, and adjacent to the counterweight shall not be less than the\nheight of the car bow.\n(12) Plain glass shall not be used in lift cars other than for covering notices\nand indicators.\n(13) Lamps and lamp fittings shall be of adequate strength and security to\nwithstand the operation of the safety gear without damage.\nCar gates\n(1) A gate or door affording adequate protection and electrically\ninterlocked with the control shall be provided across every car\nentrance of—\n(a) every automatic lift other than a service lift; and\n(b) every passenger lift other than an automatic lift, except that a\ngate or door need not be provided at 1 entrance of the car of a\npassenger lift, if the control is adjacent to it so that the attendant\ncan conveniently extend his or her arm across the entrance and\nthe width of the entrance does not exceed 42 inches and the\nwhole face of the well including the enclosures adjacent to the\ncar entrance is flush and not more than 11/ 2 inches from the car\nfloor nosing; and\n(c) every goods lift other than an automatic lift, except that a gate\nor door need not be provided at 1 entrance of the car of a goods\nlift, if the control is adjacent to it and the whole face of the well\nincluding the enclosures adjacent to that car entrance is within\n31/ 4 inches of the car floor nosing.\n\n(2) Any offsets in the face of an enclosure mentioned in subsection (1)\n(c) shall be bevelled on the underside at not less than 3 inches vertical\nto 1 inch horizontal.\n(3) All power driven car gates or doors shall be so constructed as to be\ncapable of being opened manually.\n(4) The electric interlock of the car gates of every automatic lift shall be\nplaced in a position inaccessible to a person standing on the car floor.\n(5) If levelling devices are used the car floor shall be provided with a\nsubstantial toe-guard flush with its outer edge extending a sufficient\ndistance below the car floor so that there shall be no opening into the\nlift-well while the car is within the levelling zone.\nLighting and ventilation of cars\nThe car of every lift other than a service lift shall be provided with—\n(a) adequate ventilation; and\n(b) effective means for interior electrical illumination; and\n(c) facilities on the car roof for attaching an electric light if an\ninspector so directs; and\n(d) unless other provision is made for illuminating the pit of the lift,\nan electric light on the underside of the car.\nSafety gear\n(1) The car of every suspended lift other than a service lift shall be\nprovided with effective safety gear.\n(2) A speed governor operating the safety gear shall be provided if the\ntravel of the lift car exceeds 30 feet and on lifts erected after\n","sortOrder":17},{"sectionNumber":"19","sectionType":"section","heading":"September 1957 if the travel exceeds 18 feet.","content":"19 September 1957 if the travel exceeds 18 feet.\n\n(3) The safety gear shall be of a type that brings the car to an easy and\ngradual stop when the rated speed of the lift exceeds 200 feet per\nminute.\n(4) Instantaneous safety gear operating on timber backings for guides\nmay only be used on lifts the rated speed of which does not exceed\n200 feet per minute, or if operating on steel guides may be used on\nlifts the rated speed of which does not exceed 125 feet per minute.\n(5) Speed governors shall be constructed, adjusted and maintained as to\ncause the operation of the safety gear at or before the speeds specified\nin table 35.\nTable 35\nrated speed of lift\nfeet/min\nmaximum operating speed of\ngovernor\nfeet/min or % of rated speed\nup to 100 140 feet/min\nfrom 100 to 500 40% in excess of rated speed\nover 500 200 feet/min in excess of rated\nspeed\n(6) Speed governors of electric lifts whose speed exceeds 200 feet per\nminute shall have a switch that shall open before or at the time the\ngovernor grips the governor rope, and shall open the motor and brake\ncircuits and stop the machine.\nMachines\n(1) All lift machines other than hydraulic shall be provided with efficient\nbrake gear.\n(2) Traction sheaves, except for service lifts, shall not be overhung.\n(3) Worms and their shafts shall be constructed in a single piece.\n\n(4) No drum-drive lift shall have a speed greater than 300 feet per minute.\nCounterweight\n(1) The top 15 feet of the counterweight guides of all drum-drive\nmachines, except for service lifts, shall be enclosed by a substantial\nand firmly secured screen.\n(2) If a counterweight, other than the one balancing the car travels\nadjacent to that car, then the path of travel of this counterweight shall\nbe screened from that car.\nGuides\n(1) The car and counterweight of every lift shall run between guides of\nadequate section and so supported as to withstand the loads from\nguide shoes and the operation of the safety gear without undue\ndeflection.\n(2) Car and counterweight guides shall be of steel except for service lifts\nand for lifts operating at a speed not exceeding 100 feet per minute.\nElectrical equipment\n(1) All electrical conductors, appliances and equipment used in\nconnection with every lift shall be of sufficient size and so\nconstructed, installed, protected and maintained as to be safe for, and\n(2) If more specific provision is not made elsewhere in this regulation,\nthey shall conform with the provisions of the S.A.A. Wiring Rules.\n\n(3) All electrical wiring in every lift-well, and on every lift car, other than\nflexible conductors, shall be in screwed conduit.\n(4) The electric controlling gear of every lift must operate without\ncausing excessive strain in any part of the apparatus, and shall\nautomatically slow down the car and cut off the control current at both\nlimits of travel, and shall ensure that acceleration in starting and\ndeceleration in stopping is not excessive.\n(5) The control circuits of all lifts shall not exceed 250V and 1 side of the\ncircuits shall be at earth potential.\n(6) The metal frames and covers of all motors, interlocks and electrical\nequipment and conduit of every lift shall be effectively earthed.\nCar switch\n(1) The switch used in a lift car for normal operation of the lift shall\nautomatically return to the ‘stop’ position on the removal of the\noperator’s hand, and provision shall be made for the securing of the\nswitch handle in the ‘stop’ position.\n(2) If the switch in centring does not immediately stop the lift, an\nemergency switch shall be provided for this purpose and car gates\nextending the full width of the car openings shall be provided.\nLimit gear\n(1) Every lift shall be provided with limit gear that will automatically\nstop the machine before the car or counterweight lands.\n(2) Drum-drive machines shall be provided with limit gear integral with\nthe machine and limit gear operated by the movement of the car.\n(3) Electric lifts other than traction-drive service lifts shall be provided\nwith 2 separate and independent limit gears, 1 of which shall open the\n\ncontrol circuit and the other shall completely cut off all electrical\npressure from the motor, control and brake.\n(4) Every electric service lift, other than a drum-drive service lift, fitted\nwith a thermal overload switch shall be provided with a time switch\nset to stop the machine at not greater than twice the interval of time\nnormally taken for the car to run its full length of travel.\n(5) The time switch shall be of the normal reset type.\nSlack cable device\nEvery drum-drive lift, other than a service lift, shall have a device that\nwill automatically stop the machine should the car lifting ropes\nbecome slack from any cause whatsoever.\nSafety gear switch\nAll automatic lifts shall be provided with a device that will cut off the\ncurrent and stop the machine in the event of the safety gear operating.\nStop button\nAutomatic lifts, other than service lifts, shall be provided with an\nemergency stop button clearly marked as such and placed in close\nproximity to the control buttons in the car.\n\nSignal call system\nEvery lift, other than an automatic lift, shall have a signal call and\nindicator in the car that can be operated from each floor except for\nlifts where response to a call is an automatic function.\nHydraulic equipment\n(1) Only piping, fittings and gear made specially for hydraulic pressures\nshall be used on hydraulic lifts.\n(2) The whole of the machinery, gear and piping subject to hydraulic\npressure shall be tested to twice the working pressure in the presence\nof an inspector after the erection of every lift and before it is used.\n(3) A similar test shall be conducted in relation to any part of machinery,\ngear and pipes subject to hydraulic pressure on re-erection,\nreinstatement or renewal.\n(4) Rams of all hydraulic lifts shall be provided with permanent stops that\nwill prevent them being forced out of their cylinders.\n(5) Every hydraulic lift shall be provided with a control valve, a screw\ndown pressure stop valve, a non-return valve, and a tee piece for\ntesting purposes.\n(6) The non-return valve shall be as close as practicable to the control\nvalve and the tee piece shall be between the non-return valve and the\npoint of entry of the service.\n(7) The control valve of every hydraulic lift shall automatically cut off\nthe power at both limits of travel of the car before the car lands or the\nram reaches its permanent stop and also in the event of the breakage\nof the control rope.\n\n(8) The construction of the valve must preclude the possibility of the\nvalve spindle blowing out should it become parted and both ends of\nthe control rope shall be connected to the control valve mechanism.\n(9) An air cock shall be fitted at the top of the hydraulic cylinder of every\nhydraulic lift and provision made to prevent the syphoning of water\nfrom the cylinders.\n(10) The rams of every direct-acting hydraulic lift shall be positively\nattached to the car, such attachment to have sufficient working\nclearance.\n(11) Provision shall be made to permit of the safe and efficient\nmaintenance of all machinery and control mechanism of every\nhydraulic lift.\nEscalators\nEvery escalator and every part of it shall be of sound material, good\nTrusses or girders\nEvery truss or girder shall be capable of safely keeping the steps and\nrunning gear in the event of failure of the track system to keep the\nrunning gear in its guides.\nTrack arrangement\nThe track arrangement of all escalators shall be so designed as to\nprevent displacement of the treads and running gear in the event of a\ntread chain breaking.\n\nAngle of inclination\nThe angle of inclination of every escalator shall not exceed 30° from\nthe horizontal.\nBalustrading\n(1) Every escalator shall be provided on each side with a solid balustrade.\n(2) On the escalator side the balustrade shall be smooth without\ndepressed or raised panelling save that flush panels may be separated\nby metal mouldings of a thickness of not more than 1/ 8 of an inch and\nhaving bevelled edges.\n(3) Glass shall not be used on the inside of any balustrade.\n(4) Every balustrade shall be provided with a continuous handrail without\nopen joints moving at the same speed and in the same direction as the\ntreads.\nTreads and landings\nThe treads and landings of every escalator shall be of a material that\nwill afford a secure foothold.\nPower unit\nAn electric motor shall not be used to drive 2 or more escalators\nunless the escalators are situatedd side by side and are operated as a\nsingle unit.\n\nChains\nAll chains of every escalator shall have a factor of safety of not less\nthan 10, except if the chain is composed of cast steel links which shall\nbe thoroughly annealed, in which case the factor of safety shall be not\nless than 20.\nAutomatic brakes\nEvery escalator shall be provided with an electrically released\nmechanically applied brake that shall stop the escalator automatically\nwhen the power supply is cut off.\nStarting switch and stop button\n(1) The starting of every escalator shall be by means of a key operated\nswitch or a switch inaccessible to the public.\n(2) A button for stopping the escalator shall be placed accessible to the\npublic at the top and bottom landings of every escalator.\n(3) The buttons shall be permanently and prominently marked ‘Stop\nButton’.\n(4) The release or pressing of a stop button must not start the escalator.\nSafety devices\nEvery escalator shall be equipped with safety devices that will cause\nthe power to be cut off—\n(a) in the event of the breaking of any tread chain; or\n\n(b) whenever the speed of the escalator exceeds the rated speed by\n20%; or\n(c) in the event of the accidental reversal of the escalator when it is\nset to operate in the ascending direction.\nReverse phase relay\nEvery escalator operated by a polyphase electric motor shall be\nprovided with a device that will prevent the motor being started while\nthe phase rotation is in the wrong direction or while there exists a\nfailure of any phase.\nMachine room\nThe machine room of every escalator shall be of such size as will\npermit of the safe and efficient maintenance of all parts of the\nmachinery and other equipment located in it, and the machine room\nshall be adequately lighted and shall be provided with safe means of\naccess.\nConstruction of conveyors\nEvery conveyor and every part of it shall be of sound material, good\nsuitable and safe for the purpose for which it is intended to be used.\n\nElectrical installation\n(1) All electrical conductors, appliances and equipment used in\nconnection with every conveyor shall be of sufficient size and so\nconstructed, installed, protected and maintained as to be safe for, and\n(2) If more specific provision is not made elsewhere in this regulation,\nthey shall conform with the provisions of the S.A.A. Wiring Rules.\nControl\n(1) Provision shall be made on every conveyor—\n(a) to ensure that the conveyor will stop when the driving power is\ncut off and remain stopped until the power is restored; and\n(b) to permit the conveyor being stopped at each point of loading or\ndelivery; and\n(c) to prevent the conveyor being restarted from any point until the\ndevice by which it was stopped has been reset in the running\n(2) Any push button used for stopping the conveyor must be capable of\nbeing secured in the stop position.\n(1) Every conveyor shall be adequately enclosed and guarded.\n(2) The enclosing and guarding shall be to the satisfaction of the\n\nProvision for maintenance\nProvision shall be made to permit of the safe and efficient\nmaintenance of all machinery and control mechanism of every\nconveyor.\nNo persons permitted to travel\nNo person shall travel or be permitted to travel on a conveyor.\nLoad notice\nA safe working load notice shall be exhibited at each point of loading\nof every conveyor.\n(1) Every lift and all parts of it shall be maintained in conformity with\nthis regulation and in safe and proper working condition, and in\naccordance with the following provisions:\n(a) all motor rooms, wells and pits shall be kept clean and free from\naccumulation of rubbish, dirt, dust or impedimenta;\n(b) pits shall be kept dry;\n(c) all guides, safety gear, machinery and equipment shall be kept\nlubricated, and machines and equipment shall be kept clean and\nfree from accumulation of dust and dirt;\n\nMaintenance of lifts Division 4.3\n(d) all ropes showing indications of excessive wear, splintering,\nstranding, bunching or rust shall at once be replaced by new\nropes;\n(e) ropes liable to rust shall be treated with a suitable lubricant or a\nrust preventive compound;\n(f) all enclosures shall be maintained in a safe and effective\ncondition;\n(g) all enclosure doors shall be maintained in proper working\ncondition, and so that they cannot leave their tracks or guides;\n(h) the enclosure door interlocks shall be maintained in conformity\nwith section 29;\n(i) all safety gear shall be kept in effective working condition;\n(j) all limit gear, and other safety devices shall be maintained in\nproper working condition and correct adjustment;\n(k) the rams of all hydraulic lifts shall be kept in such condition that\nthere shall be no leakage at the gland, and this without unduly\npinching the ram;\n(l) the controlling mechanism of all hydraulic lifts shall be\nmaintained in such condition that—\n(i) the lift will automatically stop before the car lands or the\nram reaches its permanent stop; and\n(ii) the lift will stop in the event of breakage of the control\nrope, and\n(iii) creeping will not occur when the valve is in the ‘stop’\n(2) It shall be the duty of the owner of a lift to observe the provisions of\nthis section.\n\n(1) No person shall operate any lift by manipulation of the enclosure door\ninterlocks or car gate interlocks or of the control mechanism in the\nmachine room.\n(2) No person shall operate any rope control lift, other than a service lift,\nfrom any landing or any place other than the car.\n(3) No person shall load any lift in excess of its safe working load.\n(4) No person in charge of any lift shall—\n(a) load or permit the lift to be loaded in excess of the safe working\nload; or\n(b) move the car from any landing unless all the enclosure doors are\nclosed and locked and the car gates are closed; or\n(c) permit the car to be loaded or unloaded or take in or let out\npassengers unless the car is at rest, the power shut off and the\ncar switch is secure in the stop position; or\n(d) for a rope controlled lift—leave the car unless the rope is locked\nin the stop position.\n(5) This section shall not apply to any bona fide worker engaged in\nerecting, repairing, inspecting or testing a lift, or to an inspector.\nChange of ownership\nIf the ownership of any lift has been changed, the new owner shall,\nwithin 7 days of the change give notice of the change to the chief\n\nUse of lifts Division 4.4\nThere shall be placed and kept in the car of every lift other than a\nservice lift—\n(a) a legible notice stating—\n(i) the safe working load of the lift; and\n(ii) for a goods lift—the names of the persons specifically\nempowered by the owner to work or operate the lift; and\n(iii) the name, address and telephone number of the company\nor person maintaining the lift or engaged to attend the lift\nin case of stoppage or accident; and\n(iv) for multi-tenanted buildings without resident caretakers—\nif the inspector so directs, the name and address of the\nowner of the lift; and\n(b) a copy of section 68 and section 69 and a statement as follows:\nSection 18 of the Act requires accidents to be notified to the chief\ninspector by the owner or person in charge of a lift, and prohibits the\nuse of a lift after an accident without permission of an inspector.\nFor the purposes of the Act, owner of a lift includes the owner,\nmortgagee in possession, lessee, hirer or borrower thereof.\nThere shall be placed and kept beside the control at the principal\nlanding and the other landings that the inspector may direct of every\nservice lift a copy of section 68 (1) and (3) and a notice stating the\nsafe working load of the lift.\nThe owner of a lift shall be responsible for the observance of the\nprovisions of section 70 and section 71.\n\nPart 5 Safeguards and measures to be\nbuilding work\n73 (1) Any person who directly or by his or her servants or\nagents (including every independent contractor from time to time\nengaged in that work) carries out any building work shall take all\nmeasures that appear necessary or advisable to minimise accident\nrisk and to prevent injury to the health of persons engaged in the\nbuilding work and for this purpose, without limiting the generality\nof the foregoing, the person shall—\n(a) provide suitable and safe scaffolding, which shall conform to the\nrequirements of this regulation, for all work that cannot be done\nsafely by a person standing on permanent or solid construction,\nexcept when the work can be done safely from ladders\nconstructed in conformity with the provisions of this regulation;\nand\n(b) provide and maintain safe means of access to every place where\nany person has to work at any time; and\n(c) provide means by fencing or otherwise for securing the safety of\nany person working at a place from which the person would be\nliable to fall a distance of more than 6 feet; and\n(d) make provision to secure and maintain lighting (natural or\nartificial) sufficient and suitable for the illumination of all work\nplaces, stairways, corridors and passageways where persons\nmust frequent, pass or use in the performance of their work or in\npassage to or from their work; and\n\n(e) whenever artificial lighting is provided—ensure that the lamps\nare so placed and shaded that they will not affect the safety of\npersons by producing glare or deep shadows and that the lamps\nare protected against breakage by wire guards; and\n(f) keep all stairways, corridors and passageways free from loose\nmaterials and debris, building materials, supplies and\nobstructions of every kind; and\n(g) where practicable provide overhead protection for persons\nworking below other persons or where there is a likelihood of\npersons being injured by objects falling from above; and\n(h) ensure that the overhead protection is by means of timber or\nother material of strength and construction reasonably adequate\nto catch, deflect or hold any reasonable weight of material or\nobjects that may fall on the protective construction; and\n(i) provide head protective helmets, of an approved type, for the use\nof persons working in places over which it is impracticable to\nfix overhead protection; and\n(j) effectively fence in the way prescribed by this regulation, all\nplatforms, the open sides of all floors, openings in floors, roofs\nand platforms into which persons could accidentally walk, the\nopen sides of stairways and stairway landings and all\nexcavations and holes more than 5 feet deep; and\n(k) cause all working places and approaches to them to be\nadequately ventilated by the circulation of fresh air the\nventilation to be such as to render harmless all fumes, dust or\nother impurities that may be injurious to health, generated or\nproduced by any means in any such working place and\napproach; and\n(l) if in connection with any chipping, grinding, cleaning, spraying\nor manipulation of any material, there is given off any dust or\nfume of such a character and to such extent as to be likely to be\ninjurious to the health of persons employed—take all practicable\n\nmeasures either by securing adequate ventilation or by the\nprovision and use of respirators (of a type approved by the chief\ninspector) or otherwise to prevent inhalation of the dust or fume;\nand\n(m) cause all exhaust gases of every engine used in an enclosed or\nconfined space to be conducted to the open air and the place to\nbe adequately ventilated so as to prevent danger to health from\nthe exhaust gases; and\n(n) if any persons are employed in a process in which a lead\ncompound or other poisonous substance is used—provide for\nthe use of persons liable to come into contact with the compound\nor substance adequate and suitable facilities for washing, which\nshall include nail brushes, soap and towels; and\n(o) provide, where there is carried on any process specified schedule\n4, the goggles of the types that are approved by the chief\ninspector, or effective screens to protect the eyes of persons\nemployed on the building work; and\n(p) cause measures to be taken to ensure that scaffolding materials,\ntools and other objects and materials (including waste material)\nshall not be thrown, tipped or shot down from a height where\nthey are liable to cause injury, but to be properly lowered, and\nin any place where proper lowering is not practicable and also\nwhere any part of a structure is being demolished or broken off\nto cause adequate steps to be taken, if necessary, to protect\npersons from falling or flying debris; and\n(q) cause protruding nails to be knocked in or removed from all\nmaterials used in the construction of scaffolding, false work and\nshuttering and take measures to ensure that no timber or material\nwith projecting nails is allowed to remain in any place where\npersons are liable to come into contact with them; and\n(r) take all practicable precautions by the use of adequate temporary\nguys, stays, supports and fixings or otherwise to prevent danger\n\nto any person through the collapse of any part of a building or\nstructure during any temporary state of weakness or instability\nof the building or structure or part before the building or\nstructure is completed; and\n(s) if any building work is carried on that is likely to reduce, so as\nto endanger any person, the security or stability of any part of an\nexisting building or structure or of a building or structure in\ncourse of construction—take all practicable precautions by\nshoring or otherwise to prevent danger to any person from the\ncollapse of the building or structure or the fall of any part of it;\nand\n(t) not move or permit or allow to be moved on the site of the\nbuilding work any ironwork or steelwork on which there is wet\npaint other than paint for the purpose of jointing; and\n(u) if on or adjacent to the site of any building work to which this\nregulation applies there is water into which a person employed\nis in the course of his or her employment liable to fall with risk\nof drowning—provide and keep ready for use suitable rescue\nequipment of an approved type and take all steps necessary for\nthe prompt rescue of any such person in danger of drowning;\nand\n(v) cause electric light and electric power installations and the\nelectrical equipment of cranes, hoists, and plant to be installed,\nused and maintained in conformity with the provisions of this\nregulation; and\n(w) provide adequate and suitable overhead protection to prevent\npersons being struck by the falling products of an electric arc or\nflame metal cutting process; and\n(x) provide the first-aid equipment, sanitary conveniences, washing\nfacilities, drinking water and shelter, change and dining\naccommodation that are prescribed by this regulation.\n\n(2) However, despite subsection (1) (j) it shall be permissible to remove\nwhen necessary any guardrail, fence or part of it for the purpose of\nhandling materials or for the installation of other work, subject to the\nguardrail, fence or part being at once replaced on completion of the\nwork.\n(3) For this section:\nlead compound means any material containing lead which, when\ntreated in the way prescribed in schedule 5, yields to an aqueous\nsolution of hydrochloric acid a quantity of soluble lead compound\nexceeding, when calculated as lead monoxide, 5% of the dry weight\nof the sample taken for analysis.\nIf the special nature or circumstances of any part of a building work\nrender impracticable compliance with the provisions of section 73\ndesigned to prevent the fall of any person engaged on that part of the\nbuilding work, then those provisions shall be complied with so far as\npracticable and, except for persons for whom there is adequate hand\nhold and foothold, the contractor or person in charge of the building\nwork shall provide safety nets or safety belts and life lines of a type\napproved by the chief inspector which will so far as practicable enable\nthe persons to carry out work without risk of serious injury.\nFencing of floors, landings, stairways and the like\n(1) Wherever, by this part, it is required that a floor, platform, landing,\nworking place, stairway or stairway landing, excavation or hold, or\nan opening in a floor, roof, platform or landing or that any other place\nshall be fenced, then the fencing shall be effected by—\n(a) positively fastening in position uprights or posts of 4 inch by 2\ninch timber at a distance of not more than 8 feet apart; and\n\n(b) bolting to each upright or post mentioned in paragraph (a) the\nlength or lengths of 4 inch by 2 inch timber that are necessary to\nform the top guardrail of the fence, the 4 inch by 2 inch timber\nbeing bolted at such position to each upright or post that the\ndistance from its top edge to the level of the place being fenced\nis 3 feet 6 inches; and\n(c) positively fastening to the upright or posts mentioned in\nparagraph (a) toe or fender boards, of not less than 9 inches by 1\ninch timber, in such way that the bottom edge of each toe or\nfender board is level with the place being fenced and so that an\nopening or gap is not left between the bottom edge of the toe or\nfender board and the surface of the place being fenced.\n(2) Alternatively the fence may be constructed of steel members,\nprovided that each steel member used possesses the strength and\nrigidity of its corresponding timber member as provided in this\n(3) As a further alternative the 4 inch by 2 inch guardrail may be replaced\nby a flexible steel wire rope, or by a fibre rope not less than 3 inches\nin circumference, provided that the rope is kept taut and is properly\nsecured to the uprights or posts.\n\nDivision 5.2 Constructing, erecting, adding to,\naltering, repairing, finishing, painting\nand cleaning buildings and structures\nStability of walls\nNo wall or part of a wall shall, during its construction, be built to a\ngreater height than 5 feet or 6 times its thickness, whichever is the\ngreater, unless it is supported by temporary shores, proper scaffolding\nor buttresses at intervals of length not greater than 30 times its\nthickness until roof or floor ties or cross walls are in position.\nProtection in liftwells and stairwells\n(1) When workers are working in a lift-well or stair-well during the\nconstruction, alteration or equipping of a building, protection shall be\nprovided not more than 2 stories above nor 1 storey below the level\nat which the workers are working.\n(2) The protection shall be of timber planks not less than 2 inches thick,\nlaid across the lift-well or stair-well.\nTemporary ramps\n(1) A temporary ramp built to provide access for vehicles to the site of a\nbuilding work shall have a grade safe for vehicles using it and shall\npossess adequate strength and stability under the effects of the\nmaximum loads to which it is subjected.\n\n(2) The minimum width of every such ramp shall be 10 feet and a guide\nor kerb, at least 9 inches in height and 6 inches in width, shall be\npositively fixed in position at each side.\nProvision and use of ladders and stepladders\nladder—see section 142.\nstepladder—see section 142.\nDesign and construction\n(2) Every ladder and every stepladder used for any purpose covered by\nthis regulation shall be designed and constructed as prescribed by this\nTo be provided and maintained\n(3) Any person who directly or by his or her agents or servants carries\nout any building work shall provide and maintain in place during\nworking hours the ladders that are necessary to provide safe means of\naccess to all floor levels and to all places where any person has to\nwork until the time that temporary or permanent stairways are\ncompleted and are available as such safe means of access.\nPlacing of ladders\n(4) Ladders shall be placed so that—\n(a) each side rail or stile has a level and firm footing and the top rest\nfor each side rail or stile is level, reasonably rigid and of\nadequate strength to support the maximum applied load; and\n\n(b) the side rails or stiles are not supported by boxes, loose bricks,\nor other loose packing.\nIn front of doors\n(5) A ladder shall not be placed in front of a door, opening towards the\nladder, unless the door is fastened open or is locked or guarded.\nTo be securely fixed\n(6) Every ladder shall so far as practicable be securely fixed so that it\ncannot move either from its top or from its bottom points of rest.\n(7) If it cannot be so securely fixed it shall where practicable be securely\nfixed at the base or if such fixing at the base is impracticable a person\nshall be stationed at the base of the ladder to prevent slipping.\nIn public thoroughfares\n(8) Effective means shall be provided to prevent the displacement of a\nladder set up in a public thoroughfare or in any other place where\naccidental collision with the ladder may occur.\nPlaced against window frames\n(9) A ladder so placed that its top end rests against a window frame shall\nbe fitted with a board fixed to its top end the board being of such\ndimensions that the applied load is safely distributed over the window\nframe.\nFootings for stepladders\n(10) A stepladder shall be set up on a level and firm footing and shall not\nbe stood on loose bricks or other loose packing.\n\nLadders not to support scaffolding planks\n(11) No ladder except a trestle ladder shall be used to support a plank on\nwhich a person has to work.\nHeight above landings\n(12) Ladders used for the purposes mentioned in subsection (3) shall rise\nto a height of at least 3 feet 6 inches above the place of landing for\npersons using the ladders.\nHeight when used as a working place\n(13) A ladder used as a place from which a person has to work shall rise\nto a height of at least 3 feet 6 inches above the highest rung to be\nreached by the feet of the person working on the ladder or if that is\nimpracticable then to the greatest practicable height.\nLanding places\n(14) A landing place at least 27 inches in width and 48 inches in length\nshall be provided at the head and base of every ladder for the purposes\nmentioned in subsection (3) and if any person is liable to fall for a\ndistance of more than 6 feet from it then the landing place shall be\nfenced in the way mentioned in section 75.\n(15) If a ladder passes through an opening in the floor of a landing place,\nthe opening shall be as small as is reasonably practicable.\n(16) Every ladder or run of ladders rising a vertical distance of 20 feet or\nover shall be provided with an intermediate landing place or places\nso that the vertical distance between any 2 successive landing places\nshall not exceed 20 feet.\n\nAngle of ladders\n(17) Every ladder shall, if possible, be used at such an angle that the\nhorizontal distance from the top support to the foot of the ladder is\nequal to 1/ 4 of the length of the ladder.\nCrowding on ladders\n(18) Persons shall not crowd together on ladders.\nSeparate ladders for ascent and descent\n(19) If, in connection with any building work, traffic conditions on ladders\nare such as to warrant the use of separate ladders for the purposes of\nascent and descent, then such separate ladders shall be provided,\ndesignated, and used for such purposes.\nLadders to be faced\n(20) Persons using ladders shall face them while in the act of ascending or\ndescending.\nLadders not to be joined\n(21) Ladders shall not be joined together to form a longer ladder unless a\nlonger ladder so formed is of the strength and rigidity prescribed for\nladders by this regulation.\nSingle rail ladders prohibited\n(22) Ladders made by fastening cleats across a single rail shall not be used.\nDefective ladders and stepladders\n(23) No ladder or stepladder shall be used that has—\n(a) a missing or a weakened, broken or otherwise defective rung or\ntread or a broken or defective stile; or\n\n(b) any rung or tread that depends for its support solely on nails,\nspikes, or other similar fixing.\nProhibited uses of ladders\n(24) A ladder shall not be used as a guy, brace, tom, strut, beam or skid or\nfor any other than its intended purpose.\nCleaning and maintenance of roof monitors, gutters,\nwindows, louvres and ventilators\nSafe means of access to be provided\n(1) The owner of any building (other than a private domestic dwelling\nhouse) or of any structure shall provide and maintain in good order\nand condition, on all roofs of it permanent means of safe access to\nany monitors, gutters, windows, louvres, ventilators or other fixtures,\nparts, or equipment that require periodical cleaning or maintenance.\nCatwalks\n(2) If catwalks are provided for the purposes mentioned in subsection (1),\nthe catwalks shall be of hardwood or other approved material.\n(3) They shall be not less than 10 inches in width and if of hardwood not\nless than 2 inches in thickness.\n(4) The upper surfaces of all catwalks shall be approximately horizontal\nin transverse planes and the surfaces shall be flat and free from\nobstructions or projections.\n(5) Catwalks shall be adequately supported and positively and strongly\nsecured in position.\n(6) If catwalks are inclined longitudinally at more than 10° to the\nhorizontal, or if they are so placed that a person, or object could fall\n\na distance of more than 6 feet from them, they shall be fenced in\naccordance with section 75.\nWindow cleaning\nanchor means a fitting secured to a window frame or wall to which\nfitting a safety strap or line terminal is or is intended to be attached.\nbody belt means a belt constructed to fit the body, at or about the\nwaistline, of a person engaged in window cleaning.\nsafety belt means the complete assembly of body belt, safety strap or\nline and all fittings.\nsafety strap or line means the safety strap or line that passes through\nloops fitted at the back of a body belt and is provided with terminal\nfittings to enable each of its terminals to be secured to an anchor.\nwindow cleaning includes the operations of washing, wiping or other\nmethod of cleaning windows of buildings.\nLiabilities of owners\n(2) The owner of a building, the windows of that are cleaned from the\noutside, shall install and maintain anchors on each such window, the\nlowest part of the frame of which is more than 12 feet above the\nground or adjoining flat roof, or the owner shall provide other\napproved safe means for cleaning every such window of such\nbuilding.\n(3) The owner of any building shall not require, permit, suffer or allow\nany window in such building to be cleaned unless anchors or other\n\napproved means are provided to enable such work to be done in a safe\nway.\nLiabilities of contractors\n(4) Every contractor shall use and require his or her employee to use\nwhile engaged in window cleaning the equipment and safety devices\nrequired by this section to be provided and used.\nExemption—cleaning exterior face of windows from inside\n(5) This section shall not apply to any window that is constructed in an\napproved way so that the exterior face can be and is cleaned entirely\nfrom the inside and during which cleaning operation no part of the\nwindow cleaner’s body except 1 arm or hand is required to project\nbeyond the frame in which the window is set.\nExemption—windows on balconies, fire-escapes and flat roofs\n(6) This section shall not apply to any window opening on a balcony\nhaving a railing 36 inches high, nor to a window opening on a\nfire-escape, nor to any window opening on a roof if the roof has a\npitch of not more than 1 inch in 12 inches, is 6 feet or more in width\nand is capable of safely sustaining the weight of the window cleaner\nand his or her equipment.\nExemption—cleaning inside face of windows\n(7) This section shall not apply to the cleaning of the inside face of any\nwindow except if the window cleaner performs the operation while\nresting on a level that is more than 6 feet above a floor.\nGeneral requirements—windows more than 12 feet above ground\n(8) No person shall clean a window required to be provided with anchors\nunless the person wears an approved type of safety belt and the person\nshall only clean the windows while the safety strap or line terminals\n\nare in position on the anchors, provided that windows may be cleaned\nby any other safe means that are approved or are permitted by this\nGeneral requirements—portable auxiliary sills\n(9) If any window is by this section required to be cleaned by a person\nwearing a safety belt and the sill of the window extends less than 6\ninches out from the window frame or is inclined at a slope of more\nthan 1 in 12 or is otherwise unsafe for the person to stand on, the\nowner shall provide an approved portable auxiliary sill or other\napproved device on which the person can stand with safety.\n(10) Every such portable sill shall be not less than 10 inches wide and it\nshall be equal in length to the clear width of the window opening, less\n3 inches.\n(11) Every such portable sill and other device shall be so designed and\nconstructed that it is safely held in place and so that it can be safely\nand readily put into position and removed.\nGeneral requirements—limitation on use of safety belts and anchors\n(12) Anchors shall be deemed adequate safety devices only if the window\nand its approaches are so constructed and maintained that the window\ncleaner can safely reach the sill and attach 1 safety strap or line\nterminal to the anchor before stepping out on to the sill and if it is\npossible for 1 belt terminal to remain attached to the anchor while the\nwindow cleaner steps back into the building.\n(13) No person shall use a safety belt in any place where it is liable to be\ndetrimentally affected by acids or other deleterious chemicals.\nGeneral requirements—use of corrosive substances\n(14) Acids or other deleterious chemicals may be used for window\ncleaning only under the following conditions:\n\n(a) scaffolding, conforming to the provisions of this regulation,\nshall be used but if scaffolding of the light swinging stage type\nis used it shall be suspended by flexible steel wire rope instead\nof fibre rope;\n(b) the use of fibre rope in connection with any scaffolding for this\npurpose is prohibited;\n(c) a highly dilute solution (not more than 5%) of hydrochloric\n(muriatic) acid or hydrofluoric acid shall be used;\n(d) the window cleaner shall wear rubber gloves and shall apply the\nacid solution with a brush;\n(e) all parts of the scaffolding and other equipment so used shall be\nliberally washed with water after each use to prevent corrosive\nreactions.\nGeneral requirements—maintenance of equipment\n(15) All equipment and safety devices required by this section shall be\nmaintained by the owners of them in good order and condition and in\naccordance with this regulation.\nGeneral requirements—detachable draft deflectors\n(16) Detachable draft deflectors fitted to window openings shall be\nremoved before a window cleaning operation is begun.\nGeneral requirements—broken sash chains or cords\n(17) No person shall clean a window having broken sash chains or cords.\nGeneral requirements—skilled operators for scaffolding and boatswain’s chairs\n(18) Only experienced and properly trained persons shall be permitted or\nemployed to clean windows by working on scaffolding or in\nboatswain’s chairs.\n\nGeneral requirements—screws and expansion bolts\n(19) No person shall use wood screws, coach screws, or expansion bolts\nas a means of fastening anchors.\nGeneral requirements—passing from window to window prohibited\n(20) A window cleaner shall not pass on the outside of a building from one\nwindow to another window.\nGeneral requirements—wide fixed sash windows\n(21) Wide fixed sash windows, having adjacent to them an openable small\nwindow separated by a mullion from it, shall have 2 anchors installed\non each mullion.\n(22) The window cleaner shall attach both safety strap or line terminals to\nthe anchors on 1 mullion so as to permit 1/ 2 of the larger window to\nbe cleaned from each side.\nGeneral requirements—wide window frames\n(23) In buildings where the width of a window frame exceeds 6 feet there\nshall be installed special approved anchors, additional to other\nanchors, required by this section, at each side of the window frame.\n(24) These special anchors shall be set 42 inches above the window sill.\n(25) The owner shall provide for each such window, when it is being\ncleaned, an approved cable to be attached to the special anchors to\nform a back support for the window cleaner.\nInstallation and maintenance of anchors—anchors for all buildings\n(26) All anchors required by this section shall be installed as specified in\nthis section except as may be otherwise approved.\n(27) All anchors and anchor fastenings shall be provided with means to\nprevent them inadvertently turning, backing off or becoming loose.\n\nInstallation and maintenance of anchors—anchor location\n(28) Anchors shall be attached to the side frames of the window or to the\nbuilding at a point not less than 44 inches nor more than 51 inches\nabove the window sill.\n(29) Care shall be taken, when screwing up anchor fastenings, to prevent\nproducing excess stresses.\nInstallation and maintenance of anchors—timber—existing and new buildings\n(30) Anchors shall be attached to timber or metal-covered timber window\nframes by bolts of not less than 3/ 8 of an inch in diameter that shall\npass through the entire window frame and shall be securely fastened\nby a nut and washer.\n(31) The diameter of the washer shall be at least twice the diameter of the\nbolt hole.\n(32) The ends of the bolts shall be upset to prevent loosening or removal\nof the nuts.\n(33) The back face of anchors for installation on timber window frames or\nmullions shall be provided with at least 2 sharp lugs to prevent turning\nof the anchor after installation, or other equally effective methods\nmay be used.\nInstallation and maintenance of anchors—masonry and brickwork—new\n(34) Anchors attached to walls of masonry or brickwork units, erected\nafter 19 September 1957, shall be installed while the wall is under\nconstruction and shall be shaped to build into the joints between\nmasonry or brickwork units.\n(35) The anchors shall be not less than 8 inches long, have a\ncross-sectional area of not less than 1/ 4 of a square inch, have a fluke\nor flukes having a holding surface of not less than 1 inch in length\nand, be firmly embedded in the masonry or brickwork.\n\nInstallation and maintenance of anchors—masonry and brickwork—existing\n(36) Anchors shall not be installed in existing masonry or brickwork but\nshall be attached to the window frames in accordance with\nsubsections (30) to (33), subsection (38) or subsections (39) to (42),\nas the case may be.\nInstallation and maintenance of anchors—concrete—new and existing buildings\n(37) Anchors shall not be installed in new or existing concrete but shall be\nattached to the window frames in accordance with subsections (30) to\n(33), subsection (38) or subsections (39) to (42), as the case may be.\nInstallation and maintenance of anchors—hollow metal—existing and new\n(38) Anchors shall be attached to hollow metal construction as follows:\n(a) at least 2 bolts not less than 3/ 8 of an inch in diameter and of\nproper length shall pass through the frame and a steel reinforcing\nplate at least 5/ 16 of an inch thick, not less than 6 inches long and\n3/ 4 of an inch wide, placed on the inside of the frame and secured\nby means of nuts and lock washers;\n(b) if it is impracticable to provide nuts and lock washers the\nreinforcing plate may be tapped to receive 3/ 8 inch diameter\nmachine screws and machine screws shall pass through the\nplate;\n(c) if the screw bolt is an integral part of the anchor—it shall be at\nleast 1/ 2 inch in diameter and shall be secured by means of a nut\nand lock washer and a steel reinforcing plate as described in\nparagraphs (a) and (b) or it may be screwed into a tapped hole\nin the reinforcing plate;\n(d) all anchors and anchor fastenings shall be provided with means\nto prevent them from turning, backing off or becoming loose.\n\nInstallation and maintenance of anchors—solid metal—existing and new\n(39) Anchors shall be attached to solid metal frames by at least 2 bolts not\nless than 3/ 8 of an inch in diameter and of proper length, which shall\npass through the frame and be secured on the inside by a nut and lock\nwasher.\n(40) However, if it is impracticable to provide such nuts and lock washers,\nthe frame shall be tapped its entire thickness and the screw fastenings\nshall extend through the frame.\n(41) In such instances at least 5/ 16 of an inch of thread shall be provided in\nthe frame, otherwise a tapped reinforcing plate as specified in\nsubsection (38).\n(42) If the screw bolt is an integral part of the anchor, it shall be at least 1/ 2\nan inch in diameter and shall be secured to the frame by means of a\nnut and lock washer or the frame member may be tapped through to\nreceive the screw bolt provided the metal is at least 3/ 8 of an inch\nthick.\nInstallation and maintenance of anchors—maintenance of anchors\n(43) The owner of every building shall maintain all anchor installations in\na safe condition.\nAnchor material and specifications—anchors\n(44) Anchors shall not be made of any of the copper base alloys such as\nbrass, bronze, silicon bronze, aluminium bronze or similar alloys.\n(45) Anchors shall not be cast but shall be forged or machined from\napproved corrosion resistant rolled metal alloy.\n(46) Every forging made of such alloy shall be heat treated in an approved\nway.\n\n(47) Every anchor shall be free of imperfections and all corners of an\nanchor shall be properly filleted or rounded.\n(48) If bolt or set screw fastenings are used, the forgings shall be spot faced\nto receive the bolt or set screw head.\n(49) Anchor heads shall conform to the dimensions mentioned in schedule\n7, plate 1, figures 1 and 2.\nAnchor material and specifications—bolts and set screws\n(50) Bolts and set screws used to fasten anchors shall not be made of any\nof the copper base alloys mentioned in subsections (44) to (49).\n(51) The bolts and set screws shall not be cast but shall be forged or\nmachined from approved corrosion resistant rolled metal alloy.\n(52) Each bolt and set screw shall have an unthreaded part of the shank\nnot less than 3/ 16 of an inch in length adjacent to its head.\n(53) The junction of the head and shank shall not form a sharp corner.\nAnchor material and specifications—corrosion resistant metal\n(54) In this section:\ncorrosion resistant metal means a metal so alloyed as to provide\nresistance to rust and corrosion under normal atmospheric conditions.\n(55) Such metal shall be so processed as to conform to the best current\npractices to minimise segregation, oxides, flaws and internal stresses\nand shall have a minimum tensile strength of not less\nthan 55,000 pounds per square inch with an elongation of 25%\nin 2 inches.\n(56) Such metal where specified to be used in the manufacture of devices\nrequired in this section shall be approved.\n\n(57) Two tensile test bars shall be taken from each heat or batch of pieces\nat the time of forging or from bar stock of machined items for use by\nthe chief inspector in performing the tests the chief inspector\nconsiders necessary.\nSafety belts—approved safety belts to be provided\n(58) The person employing, directing or suffering another to clean\nwindows provided with anchors shall provide or cause to be provided\na properly fitting approved safety belt if the cleaning of the windows\nrequires any part of the window cleaner’s body other than 1 arm or\nhand to project beyond the frame in which the window is set.\nSafety belts—construction\n(59) Straps used in the construction of safety belts shall be of woven fabric\nor cotton or manilla rope and shall be made of first quality material,\nwhich shall be treated against mildew by a non-acid and non-\ncorrosive anti-mildew agent.\n(60) Stitching of the material shall be done with hot waxed, best quality\nlinen thread and shall be lock stitching.\n(61) Fabric ends shall be bound or dipped in wax to prevent unravelling.\nSafety belts—approval test of safety belts\n(62) Before approval by the chief inspector of a safety belt, a sample of\nthe belt shall be tested in accordance with the following subsections.\n(63) The test shall be performed by a recognised, disinterested authority,\nacceptable to the chief inspector.\n(64) Two copies of the report of the testing authority, which shall include\na detailed description of the test sample, the test procedure and test\nresults, shall be submitted to the chief inspector with the application\nfor approval.\n\n(65) The complete assembly of the safety belt shall be capable of holding\na 250 pound weight falling free for a distance of 4 feet.\n(66) For the purposes of the test—\n(a) the test weight shall be a rigid object 45 inches in girth and\nhaving a weight of 250 pounds; and\n(b) it shall be held by the body belt that shall be secured by the belt\nbuckle in the same way as when the belt is worn by a window\ncleaner; and\n(c) 1 belt terminal shall be attached to a rigid anchor; and\n(d) the test weight shall fall free for a distance of 4 feet from a point\nin vertical alignment with the point of suspension.\n(67) A safety belt or any of its parts that have been used for testing\npurposes shall not afterwards be used.\nSafety belts—metal thimbles\n(68) Metal thimbles shall be provided if safety straps or lines are secured\nto eyes or rings.\n(69) Fabric straps shall be reinforced with leather at such points of wear.\n(70) Thimbles for fabric straps shall run free, shall be finished smooth\nthroughout and shall have rounded edges.\nSafety belts—terminals and other metal fittings\n(71) Safety strap and line terminals and other safety belt metal fittings\nsubject to stress during use shall not be cast but shall be forged or\nmachined from approved corrosion resistant rolled metal alloy.\n(72) If steel is used, it shall conform to an approved specification.\n(73) The finished product shall be free of imperfection.\n(74) After forging, the metal shall be properly heat treated.\n\n(75) Such terminals and other metal fittings shall meet the strength\nrequirements of subsections (30) to (33).\n(76) The dimensions of terminal slots shall conform to the dimensions\nmentioned in schedule 7, plate 1, figure 3.\n(77) An approved safety catch shall be included as part of each safety strap\nor line terminal.\nSafety belts—method of use\n(78) A window cleaner using a safety belt shall attach 1 safety strap or line\nterminal to an anchor before stepping out on to a window sill and 1\nsafety strap or line terminal shall remain attached to an anchor while\nthe window cleaner is stepping back into the building.\n(79) During window cleaning, both safety strap or line terminals shall be\nattached to anchors.\nMaintenance of safety belts—examination\n(80) All safety belts shall be frequently examined by the person\nemploying, directing or permitting another to engage in window\ncleaning and they shall also be examined by the window cleaner\nbefore use each day and no belt shall be used that does not provide\nthe safety required by this section.\nMaintenance of safety belts—storage and handling\n(81) All safety belts shall be so stored and handled as to prevent rust or\ninjury to them.\n(82) Safety belts shall not be stored in the same room with acids or other\ndeleterious chemicals.\nMaintenance of safety belts—affected by mildew or corrosive agent\n(83) No safety belt shall be used that has been affected by mildew, by the\naction of acid, or by any other corrosive or deleterious chemicals.\n\nWear and replacement—safety straps and lines\n(84) Safety straps or lines that have become damaged or unduly worn or\nshow broken threads or fibres shall be replaced by new straps or lines.\nWear and replacement—belt terminals\n(85) No belt terminal shall be used if any point in the slot will\naccommodate a 9/ 16 of an inch plug gauge.\nWear and replacement—links\n(86) No link shall be used in a safety strap or line if any dimension of a\nsection of it is less than 0.300 inch.\nUse of ladders in window cleaning—when to be used\n(87) No person shall use a ladder for window cleaning except if the\nwindows cannot be cleaned safely and practicably by other approved\nmeans.\nUse of ladders in window cleaning—prevention of slipping\n(88) All ladders used in connection with window cleaning shall be\nprovided with approved means to prevent slipping.\nUse of ladders in window cleaning—person to hold ladder\n(89) No person shall use a ladder more than 18 feet in length for window\ncleaning unless a person is stationed at all times at the foot of the\nladder to hold it in place while the window cleaner is on it.\n(90) The person at the foot shall face the ladder and hold it with both\nhands.\n(91) The provisions of this section shall not apply to any private domestic\ndwelling house.\n\nSpray painting\nspray painting means coating interiors of buildings or coating other\nstructures by spraying with lead paint, silica paint, enamel, vitreous\nenamel, lacquer or other material.\ninflammable liquid means a liquid that, when tested in the way\nmentioned in the Inflammable Liquid Act, 1915-1946, schedule, gives\noff an inflammable vapour at a temperature less than 90° Fahrenheit.\nlead paint means any paint, paste, spray, stopping, filling or other\nmaterial used in painting, that, when tested in the way prescribed in\nschedule 5, yields to an aqueous solution of hydrochloric acid, a\nquantity of soluble lead compound exceeding, when calculated as\nlead monoxide, 5% of the dry weight of the part taken for analysis.\nsilica paint means any paint, paste, glaze, spray or other material that,\nwhen tested in the way prescribed in schedule 3, contains free silica\nto the extent of 2% or more of the dry weight of the part taken for\nanalysis.\n(2) Except as otherwise provided in this section, the person who directly\nor by his or her servants or agents carries out spray painting shall be\nresponsible for compliance with the provisions of this section.\nProhibited substances\n(3) The following substances shall not be used in spray painting: carbon\nbisulphide, carbon tetrachloride, arsenic or its compounds.\n\nRestricted substances\n(4) Material used in spray painting shall not contain benzol or methyl\nalcohol in excess of 1%.\nProvision of fire-extinguishers\n(5) A sufficient number of fire-extinguishers of the foam or other\napproved type shall be maintained in the place where any material\nhaving a nitrocellulose or inflammable liquid content is being\nsprayed.\nMetal containers for used cleaning rags\n(6) Metal containers, with close-fitting lids, shall be provided for the\ndeposit of cotton waste, cleaning rags or similar materials that have\nbeen used.\n(7) The containers shall at the close of work each day be removed from\nthe building or structure where the spray painting operations are being\ncarried out.\nSmoking and naked lights prohibited\n(8) No person shall—\n(a) smoke; or\n(b) have any fire, naked light, flame or other source of ignition\nwithin any place in a building or structure where spray painting\nis being carried out.\nDoors to open outwards\n(9) If any building or structure or any place within a building or structure\nwhere place spray painting is being carried out, is fitted with doors,\nthe doors shall be arranged to open outwards.\n\nVentilation of work places\n(10) The air in any room or place where spray painting is being done shall\nbe changed by natural ventilation, exhaust fan or other means at least\n20 times in each hour.\n(11) If any spray painting is done in a confined space without such air\nchanges, the contractor shall provide a positive pressure helmet for\nuse by each person working in the space.\nStorage of lead and silica paint\n(12) Lead paint and silica paint shall not be stored or kept otherwise than\nin receptacles legibly marked ‘LEAD PAINT’ and ‘SILICA PAINT’,\nrespectively.\n(13) However, subsection (12) does not apply to receptacles—\n(a) containing lead paint or silica paint in actual use in spray\npainting; or\n(b) for mixing lead paint or silica paint for immediate use.\nPreparation of stopping\n(14) White lead, or sulphate of lead, shall not be manipulated or used in\nthe preparation of painters’ stopping material, except under an\nefficient exhaust draught so arranged as to remove the dust produced,\nas nearly as may be, at its point of origin.\n(15) However, subsection (14) does not apply if the stopping material is\nprepared by a worker solely for his or her own use.\n(16) Every person who directly or by his or her servants or agents carries\nout spray painting shall—\n(a) provide and maintain for the use of all persons engaged in, or\nexposed to the spraying of lead paint or silica paint, approved\noveralls, head coverings and gloves; and\n\n(b) ensure that the overalls, head coverings and gloves are\nthoroughly washed and cleaned at the expense of the person\nproviding them at intervals of not more than 1 week; and\n(c) provide and maintain for the use of every person engaged in\nspray painting a sufficient quantity of material capable of\nremoving paint or spraying mixture from his or her hands and\nface; and\n(d) provide for persons employed in spraying lead paint or silica\npaint an adequate supply of hot water for washing purposes and\na sufficient supply of towels, nail brushes and soap; and\n(e) provide approved respirators and maintain them in an efficient\ncondition for all persons engaged in—\n(i) spray painting in which lead paint or silica paint is used; or\n(ii) spray painting in which any other material detrimental to\nhealth is used; or\n(iii) the dry rubbing down or scraping of a surface painted with\nlead paint or silica paint;\nand for all persons otherwise exposed to the lead paint or silica\npaint or to such other detrimental material.\nSampling material used for spray painting\n(17) When requested by an inspector a sample of any material in use or\nmixed for use in spray painting shall be provided by the user and this\nshall be taken in the presence of the inspector who shall forthwith seal\nthe sample and give it to a competent analyst.\n(18) Should the user so desire, a second sample shall be sealed at the same\ntime by the inspector and handed to the user.\n\nHealth register\n(19) Every person employing any person in spray painting shall keep a\nhealth register in which shall be entered the names of all persons\nemployed in, or exposed to spray painting and if any employee is\nabsent from work for 3 days or more owing to illness attributable to\nspray painting or exposure to it, the name of the employee, together\nwith his or her age and address and the date of cessation from work\nand duration of absence, shall be entered by the contractor in the\nhealth register.\n(20) The health register kept under this section shall, on demand being\nmade by an inspector at any reasonable time, be produced for\nexamination.\nDuties of spray-gun operators\n(21) Every spray-gun operator shall—\n(a) so adjust the atomisation pressure of the spray-gun as to avoid\ncreating undue mist; and\n(b) so use a spray-gun that neither the operator nor any other worker\ncontinuously comes between the outlet of the spray-gun in\noperation and any fan provided for the purposes of ventilation;\nand\n(c) not test the spray-gun by spraying promiscuously about any\nroom or place; and\n(d) wear the overalls, head covering and gloves prescribed in\nsubsection (16) when engaged in or exposed to the spray\npainting of lead paint or silica paint; and\n(e) wear the respirators required to be provided by subsection (16)\nwhen engaged in or in connection with any of the processes\nreferred to in that subsection.\n\nDuties of other persons employed\n(22) Every person shall—\n(a) wear the overalls and head covering and gloves prescribed in\nsubsection (16) while exposed to spray painting of lead paint or\nof silica paint; and\n(b) wear the respirator required to be provided by subsection (16)\nwhile engaged in or in connection with any of the processes\nreferred to in that subsection; and\n(c) cause all cotton waste, cleaning rags or similar materials that\nhave been used for cleaning up in a spray painting operation to\nbe deposited in the metal containers provided in accordance with\nsubsection (6); and\n(d) refrain from smoking and from introducing, keeping, preparing\nor partaking of any food or drink in a room or place where a\nspray painting operation is being carried on; and\n(e) after being employed in, or exposed to spray painting,\nthoroughly cleanse his or her face and hands before partaking of\nfood or leaving the site of the building work.\nDivision 5.3 Demolition of buildings and\nstructures\n(1) This section shall apply to the demolition of any building or structure\nor substantial part of a building or structure.\n(2) However, subsections (6), (9) and (11) do not apply in relation to the\nuse of explosives within the meaning of the Dangerous Substances\n(Explosives) Regulation 2004.\n(3) Except as otherwise provided in this section, the person who directly\nor by his or her servants or agents carries out demolition work shall\nbe responsible for compliance with this section.\n\nDemolition of buildings and structures Division 5.3\n(4) Before demolition is begun and also during the progress of the\nwork—\n(a) no electric cable or apparatus that is liable to be a source of\ndanger, other than a cable or apparatus used for the operation,\nshall be allowed to remain electrically charged; and\n(b) all practicable steps shall be taken to prevent danger to all\npersons—\n(i) from fire or explosion through leakage or accumulation of\ngas or vapour; and\n(ii) from flooding from water mains, drains or sewers.\n(5) All glazed sashes and glazed doors shall be removed or boarded up at\nthe start of the demolition work.\n(6) Demolition of walls shall be executed storey by storey beginning at\nthe roof and working downward.\n(7) Masonry and brickwork shall be taken down in reasonably even\ncourses.\n(8) All walls unsupported for a height of 12 feet or more shall be\nprotected against falling by the use of shoring or ties, or both.\n(9) If walls are thin or structurally weak, scaffolding shall be erected and\nworkers shall work from the scaffolding for the purpose of\ndemolishing the walls.\n(10) All practicable precautions shall be taken to avoid danger from\ncollapse of the structure when any part of the framing is removed\nfrom a framed or partly framed building or structure.\n(11) All practicable precautions shall be taken to avoid danger from any\nsudden twist, spring or collapse of any steelwork, ironwork or\nreinforced concrete when the steelwork, ironwork or reinforced\nconcrete is cut or released.\n\n(12) Demolished material, debris, or spoil shall not be allowed to remain\non any floor or structure if the weight of the material exceeds the safe\ncarrying capacity of the floor or structure.\n(13) Demolished material, debris or spoil shall be so piled or stacked that\nit will not endanger workers or other persons.\n(14) Accumulated dust creating material, unless thoroughly dampened,\nshall not be thrown or dropped from the building or structure, but\nshall be lowered by hoisting apparatus or removed by material chutes\nthat are completely enclosed.\n(15) The bottom of each material chute shall be equipped with a gate or\nstop, with suitable means for closing or regulating the flow of\n(16) The gate or stop shall be kept closed except for the discharge of\n(17) Proper tools shall be provided and kept available to loosen material\nthat becomes jammed in the chute.\n(18) A danger sign shall be placed at the discharge end of every chute.\n(19) During demolition, chutes, floors, stairways and other places affected\nshall be sprinkled frequently to keep down dust.\n(20) Stairs and stair railings shall be kept in place and in usable condition\nas long as possible.\n(21) Steps and landings shall be kept free from debris.\n(22) Openings in floors, unless covered or otherwise protected, shall be\nprovided with guardrails and toe boards.\n(23) If workers or other persons may be exposed to the danger of being\nstruck by material or objects falling from upper working levels, the\nexposed area shall be shut off from access by means of guardrails and\ndanger signs shall be posted.\n\nPart 6 The proper design, construction,\nerection and use of scaffolding\n85 Definitions for pt 6\nIn this regulation:\nbirdcage scaffolding means independent pole scaffolding used in\nconnection with the interior decoration of buildings or for fixing\nbuilding ceilings or for other like work in the course of which loads\nrequired to be carried by the scaffolding are small in weight when\ncompared with the weight of persons using the scaffolding.\ncantilever scaffolding means scaffolding the platform of which is\nsupported by cantilevers.\nheavy duty scaffolding means scaffolding used by bricklayers,\nmasons, plasterers and other like tradespeople who in the course of\ntheir work require that heavy materials be deposited on the\nindependent pole scaffolding means scaffolding supported from the\nbase by 2 or more rows of standards independent of support from a\nwall or other structure.\nlight duty scaffolding means scaffolding for the use of carpenters,\npainters, plumbers, electricians and other like tradespeople and that is\nrequired to support material of weight greater than that carried by\nbirdcage scaffolding but not so great as that carried by heavy duty\nlight swinging stage means a scaffolding the working platform of\nwhich is suspended from overhead supports and does not\nexceed 18 feet in length, and whose weight, inclusive of all gear,\nropes, tackle, and blocks in addition to all parts integral with the\nworking staging but exclusive of needles, does not exceed 600\n\npounds, and that is so used that the total load on the working platform\nincluding workers and material does not at any time exceed 500\npounds.\nrun means a stationary incline provided as a means of ascent and\ndescent from one level to another.\nsingle pole scaffolding means a scaffolding supported from the base\nby but 1 row of standards, the inner edge of the working platform\nbeing supported by putlogs fixed to a wall or structure.\nsuspended scaffolding means a scaffolding the platform of which is\nsuspended from overhead supports by round steel wire ropes and is\ncapable of being raised and lowered by means of winches or like\nmechanism.\ntoe board means a board 9 inches in height erected at right angles to\na scaffolding platform and tightly against the platform for protection\nto workers as well as to prevent material or tools falling from the a\nplatform.\nScaffolding construction\n(1) Every scaffolding and every part of scaffolding shall be of sound\nmaterial, good construction, adequate strength, free from patent\ndefects and be suitable and safe for the purpose for which it is\nintended.\nTimber\n(2) All timber used in the construction of scaffolding shall be an\napproved Australian hardwood or Oregon pine (Douglas fir) or other\napproved timber of equivalent strength and characteristics.\n(3) Timber shall be thoroughly inspected before use.\n\nWorking platforms—dimensions of scaffold planks\n(4) Except as otherwise provided in this section, the cross-sectional\ndimensions of scaffold planks shall be not less than 9 inches by\n1 1/ 8 inches if of hardwood or 9 inches by 1 1/ 2 inches if of Oregon\npine.\nWorking platforms—scaffold planks to be of uniform thickness\n(5) Scaffold planks used in the construction of working platforms shall\nbe of uniform thickness so as not to cause unevenness of surface.\nWorking platforms—scaffold planks to lap\n(6) Except as otherwise provided in this section, scaffold planks shall be\nlapped 9 inches over supports.\n(7) Unless approved measures are taken to prevent uplift, no plank shall\noverhang a support more than 9 inches.\nWorking platforms—minimum width of working platforms\n(8) Except as otherwise provided in this section, a working platform shall\nbe not less than 18 inches in width.\nWorking platforms—scaffold planks to be laid full width of frame\n(9) Scaffold planks shall be laid over the full width of the scaffolding\nframe and, in laying the planks, care shall be taken to avoid traps.\nGuardrails and toe boards—where required\n(10) Guardrails and toe boards shall be provided on the outer edges and\nends of all scaffolding from which a person or object could fall a\ndistance of 10 feet or more.\n\nGuardrails\n(11) Guardrails shall be of equivalent strength and rigidity to Oregon pine\ntimber of cross-sectional dimensions four inches by 2 inches and shall\nbe 36 inches in height.\n(12) Guardrails of metal piping shall be not less than 1 11 / 32 inches external\ndiameter and if of rope not less than 3 inches in circumference.\n(13) All guardrails shall be secured to uprights at intervals of not more\nthan 8 feet.\nToe boards\n(14) Toe boards shall project not less than 9 inches above the top of the\nplatform planks and shall be set up so as to leave no space between\nthe platform planks and the toe board bottom edge.\nFixings\n(15) Fixings shall be steel bolts 5/ 8 of an inch in diameter with washers and\nnuts, lashings of round fibre rope or other approved fixing.\n(16) For timbers not more than the dimensions provided in section 87 (3)\nto (9) and (29) to (55), fibre rope lashing for scaffolding shall be—\n(a) for scaffolding of more than 30 feet in height—18 feet in length\nby 11/ 2 inches in circumference; and\n(b) for scaffolding of 30 feet or less in height the lashings—16 feet\nin length by 1 1/ 2 inches in circumference.\n(17) For timbers of greater dimensions the length of fibre rope lashings\nshall be as approved.\n(18) It shall be an offence to use a fixing that has not been approved or that\ndoes not conform to the requirements of subsections (15) to (17).\n\nPipes for tubular scaffolding\n(19) Pipes for use in the construction of tubular scaffolding shall be\nstraight and free from indentations, corrosion and other defects.\n(20) The ends of all pipes shall be squared to ensure even bearing over the\nwhole area of the section at joints and other connections.\n(21) The pipes shall be of the dimensions and material specified in this\nFittings for tubular scaffolding\n(22) Only approved fittings shall be used for connecting the various\nmembers of a tubular scaffolding.\n(23) All such fittings shall accurately embrace, over the whole area of their\nbearing surfaces, the member or members on which they are used.\n(24) If the efficacy of the fittings is dependent on frictional grip, the\nfittings shall not be used to transmit primary tensile forces.\n(25) Fittings having screw threads in blind bosses or nuts, in which the\namount of screw thread within the nut cannot be directly observed,\nshall not be used.\nElectrical hazards\n(26) Scaffolding in which a metal member is used shall not be set up\nwithin 15 feet of any overhead electricity transmission line or main\nor within 15 feet of any electricity transmission apparatus until the\ntransmission line, main, or transmission apparatus has been protected\nin an approved way by the electricity supply authority.\n(27) Scaffolding built of timber members shall not be set up within 5 feet\nof any such transmission line, main, or transmission apparatus until\nthe protection mentioned in subsection (26) has been effected.\n\nNew types of scaffolding\n(28) All scaffolding for which specifications have not been given in this\nregulation, and all patented or manufactured scaffolding, parts of\nscaffolding or scaffolding devices, and all types of scaffolding\ndeveloped subsequent to 25 May 1950 shall be of an approved type.\nRepair of damaged scaffolding\n(29) Any scaffolding that has been damaged or weakened by any cause\nshall be immediately repaired and workers shall not be permitted on\nthe scaffolding, except for the purpose of effecting repairs, until all\nrepairs have been completed.\nRestriction on use of fibre rope\n(30) Fibre rope shall not be used on or in connection with any scaffolding\nset up in any acid manufacturing plant or in any other plant where\nacids are generated or released in quantity or in other location where\nthe rope is likely to be detrimentally affected by acid.\nConstruction of single and independent pole scaffolding\n(1) Single pole and independent pole scaffolding shall comprise a\nnumber of standards to which are fixed horizontal members (ledgers)\nsupporting putlogs on which are laid scaffold planks, the structure\nthus constituted being braced, both longitudinally and transversely.\nBracing\n(2) This type of scaffolding shall be adequately braced in all directions\nto form a rigid structure capable of maintaining a wide margin of\nstability under all possible conditions.\n\nStandards\n(3) The base of every standard shall bear on a firm footing.\n(4) If there is a possibility of settlement of any standard, the standard\nshall be provided with a foundation of such size and of such strength\nas to spread the load from the standard over a large enough area to\nprevent settlement.\n(5) If splices are necessary in round pole standards, butt jointed double\npoles shall be used instead of single poles and the double poles shall\nbreak joint at least 9 feet, poles being secured together with 2 rope\nlashings at the base and 1 rope lashing on each side of each butt joint.\n(6) When necessary as a protection against the impact of trucks or other\nheavy moving equipment, the bases of standards shall be protected\nfrom displacement by bumpers.\n(7) Sawn timber standards shall be butt jointed with 2 (two) 3-feet lengths\nof 4 inch by 2 inch timber fixed 1 on each side of the butt joint and\nbolted through with 4 5/8 inches diameter bolts, fitted with washers\nand nuts, spaced at 9 inch centres.\n(8) Fish plates and bolts shall be symmetrically arranged at each such\njoint.\n(9) Joints in the standards of tubular scaffolding shall not be at distances\ngreater than 9 inches from ledgers or other members capable of\neffectively constraining the joints against lateral displacement.\nLedgers\n(10) Each ledger shall be secured to each standard at each crossing by use\nof the appropriate fixing prescribed by section 86 (15) to (17).\n(11) Each ledger shall be so fixed that the greater rectilinear dimension of\na section of it shall stand vertically.\n(12) Ledgers shall be continuous and kept continuous for the whole length\nof a scaffolding frame.\n\n(13) A joint shall not be made in a ledger of a single span.\n(14) Joints shall not be made in ledgers in the vicinity of the end, or outer\nstandards.\n(15) Joints shall not be made in adjacent spans of any ledger.\n(16) If a straight ledger is supported by a row of not less than 3 standards,\n1 joint only may be made in the ledger, provided that the joint is not\nplaced at a greater distance than 2 feet 3 inches from the central\nstandard.\n(17) If a straight ledger is supported by a row of 4 or more standards, the\nledger joints may be placed at any position but not within adjacent or\nend spans.\nPutlogs\n(18) Putlogs shall be set above ledgers and they shall be securely fixed to\nledgers or standards.\n(19) Every putlog shall have not less than 41/ 2 inches bearing in walls and\nthey shall be securely wedged in position in walls.\n(20) If one end rests on a structure, it shall be effectively secured to the\nstructure.\n(21) A joint shall not be made in the span of a putlog.\n(22) Putlogs shall be arranged so as to provide true and even support to\nscaffold planks.\n(23) On each ledger at least 1 putlog within 2 feet of each standard shall\nremain in the scaffolding until the scaffolding is finally removed.\n(24) The spacing of putlogs in scaffolding constructed of timber shall not\nexceed 6 feet.\n(25) For tubular scaffolding, 1 putlog shall be placed at each side of each\nstandard except the standards at each end of the scaffolding frame,\nwhere only 1 need be used.\n\n(26) The putlogs for tubular scaffolding shall be positioned not more than\n9 inches from a standard measured centre-line of standard to centre-\nline of putlog except as provided in this section.\n(27) The maximum span of a putlog in tubular scaffolding shall not exceed\n5 feet 21/ 2 inches for a mild steel putlog, or 4 feet 8 1/ 2 inches for a\nputlog of high tensile aluminium alloy measured centre to centre of\nsupports.\n(28) If 1 end of a putlog is supported by a wall or by part of a structure,\nthe span shall be considered as the distance between the face of the\nwall and the centre-line of the ledger supporting the other end.\nheight—permissible loads\n(29) The load due to the weight of people and materials uniformly\ndistributed over the area of a scaffolding platform shall not exceed 35\npounds per square foot of platform area.\n(30) The weight of a concentrated load imposed on any bay of a\nscaffolding of this type shall not exceed 400 pounds provided that this\nload and the uniformly distributed load shall not act simultaneously.\nheight—permissible number of working platforms\n(31) Not more than 2 working platforms shall be set up and used on a\nscaffolding frame at any one time, but short platforms may be set up\nin different positions on the frame, provided that the total area of these\nplatforms supported by any standard would not exceed that supported\nwhen 2 full length platforms are set up.\n\nheight—height\n(32) For subsections (29) to (31) and (33) to (43), the height of the\nscaffolding means the perpendicular distance measured from the base\nfrom which the scaffolding rises to the top surface of the topmost\nplatform.\nheight—standards\n(33) All standards shall be effectively tied to the building or structure or\nbe otherwise braced at points not more than 12 feet apart in the length\nof each standard, and shall be—\n(a) of sawn timber 4 inches by 3 inches sectional dimensions; or\nor\n(c) for tubular scaffolding only—of round metal pipes, steam\nquality, mild steel, or pipes of an approved high tensile\naluminium alloy or other approved alloy, all such pipes being of\nan outside diameter of not less than 1 29 / 32 inches, a nominal bore\nof 11/ 2 inches and a wall thickness of not less than 0.192 inches\nfor pipes of mild steel and 0.176 inches for pipes of an approved\nalloy; or\nheight—spacing of standards\n(34) Sawn timber and pole standards shall be spaced not more than 10 feet\napart measured from the centre-line of one standard to the centre-line\nof the adjacent standard in the same row.\n\n(35) Pipe standards in tubular scaffolding shall be spaced not more\nthan 7 feet 6 inches apart in any row measured as mentioned in\nsubsection (34).\n(36) If 2 or more rows of standards are used, the rows shall be spaced so\nas to be not more than 5 feet apart for scaffolding constructed of\ntimber or of mild steel pipes and not more than 4 feet 6 inches apart\nfor scaffolding constructed of pipes made of an approved aluminium\nalloy.\nheight—ledgers\n(37) Ledgers shall be spaced not more than 6 feet apart, provided that if\ncircumstances so necessitate, the distance measured from the base of\na scaffolding to the first ledger may be increased to not more than 10\nfeet, and shall be—\n(a) of sawn timber not less than 6 inches by 1 1/ 2 inches sectional\ndimensions if of hardwood and not less than 6 inches by 2 inches\nsectional dimensions if of Oregon pine; or\n(b) of timber poles not less than 21/ 2 inches diameter at the small\nend; or\n(c) for tubular scaffolding only—of round metal pipes of the\nprescribed in this section, or that may be approved.\nheight—putlogs\n(38) Putlogs shall be—\n(a) of sawn timber not less than 3 inches by 3 inches sectional\ndimensions if of hardwood and not less than 4 inches by 3 inches\nif of Oregon pine; or\n\n(b) for tubular scaffolding only—of round metal pipes of the\n(c) of the other material, construction and dimensions that may be\nheight—spacing of putlogs\n(39) Sawn timber putlogs shall be spaced at not more than 6 feet apart.\n(40) For scaffolding constructed of metal pipes, a putlog shall be placed at\neach side of each standard except the standards at each end of the\nscaffolding frame, where 1 only need be used.\n(41) The putlogs for scaffolding constructed of metal pipes shall be\npositioned not more than 9 inches from a standard, measured centre-\nline of standard to centre-line of putlog.\n(42) The maximum span of a mild steel pipe putlog shall not exceed 5 feet\n2 1/ 2 inches and the maximum span of a putlog of high tensile\naluminium pipe shall not exceed 4 feet 81/ 2 inches.\nheight—bracings\n(43) Bracings shall be—\n(a) sawn timber not less than 9 square inches in sectional area; or\n(b) timber poles not less than 21/ 2 inches diameter at the small end;\nor\n(c) for tubular scaffolding—round metal pipes as mentioned in\nsubsection (33) (c); or\n\nexceeding 150 feet in height—general\n(44) The requirements of subsections (29) to (32) shall also apply to this\ntype of scaffolding.\nexceeding 150 feet in height—standards\n(45) Standards shall be—\n(a) of sawn timber not less than 4 inches by 4 inches sectional\ndimensions; or\nor\n(c) for tubular scaffolding—round metal pipes of the description\nand dimensions mentioned in subsection (33) (c); or\nexceeding 150 feet in height—spacing of standards\n(46) Sawn timber and pole standards shall be spaced not more than 9 feet\napart measured from the centre-line of one standard to the centre-line\nof the adjacent standard in the same row.\n(47) Pipe standards in tubular scaffolding shall be spaced not more\nthan 7 feet 6 inches apart in any row measured as mentioned in\nsubsection (46).\n(48) If 2 or more rows of standards are used the rows shall be spaced so as\nto be not more than 5 feet apart for scaffolding constructed of timber\nor of mild steel pipes and not more than 4 feet 6 inches apart for\nscaffolding constructed of pipes of approved aluminium alloy.\n\nexceeding 150 feet in height—ledgers\n(49) Ledgers shall be spaced not more than 6 feet apart, provided that if\ncircumstances so necessitate, the distance measured from the base of\na scaffolding to the first ledger may be increased to not more than 10\nfeet, and shall be—\n(a) of approved sawn hardwood timber not less than 6 inches\nby 2 inches sectional dimensions or of Oregon pine timber not\nless than 6 inches by 2 1/2 inches sectional dimensions; or\nor\n(c) for tubular scaffolding only—of round metal pipes of the\n(d) of the other material construction and dimensions that may be\nexceeding 150 feet in height—putlogs\n(50) Putlogs shall be—\n(a) of sawn hardwood timber not less than 3 inches by 3 inches\nsectional dimensions; or\n(b) for tubular scaffolding only—of round metal pipes of the\n(c) of the other material, construction and dimensions that may be\n\nexceeding 150 feet in height—spacing of putlogs\n(51) Sawn timber putlogs shall be spaced at not more than 6 feet apart.\n(52) For scaffolding constructed of metal pipes, 1 putlog shall be placed\nat each side of each standard, except the standards at each end of the\nscaffolding frame where only 1 putlog need be used.\n(53) All putlogs for scaffolding constructed of metal pipes shall be located\nnot more than 9 inches from a standard measured from the centre-line\nof the standard to the centre-line of the putlog.\n(54) The maximum span of a mild steel pipe putlog shall not exceed 5 feet\n2 1/ 2 inches and the maximum span of a putlog of high tensile\naluminium pipe shall not exceed 4 feet 8 1/ 2 inches.\nexceeding 150 feet in height—bracings\n(55) Bracings shall be—\n(a) sawn timber, not less than 9 square inches in sectional area; or\n(b) timber poles not less than 21/ 2 inches diameter at the small end;\nor\n(c) for light duty scaffolding—round metal pipes mentioned in\nsubsection (33) (c); or\nLight duty single and independent pole tubular scaffolding—permissible loads\n(56) This type of scaffolding shall be used only by painters and decorators\nand other like tradespeople in building work of such description that\nthe scaffolding is subjected only to small loads from the combined\nweight of workers and materials.\n\n(57) The total load due to the weight of workers and material on the\nplatform of a light duty scaffolding shall not exceed the equivalent of\na uniformly distributed load of 10 pounds per square foot of platform\narea.\n(58) This loading equals the combined weight of 4 workers plus material\nweighing 50 pounds.\nLight duty single and independent pole tubular scaffolding—height\n(59) The height of the topmost platform shall not exceed 100 feet, such\nheight being the distance measured from the base from which the\nscaffolding rises to the top surface of the platform.\nLight duty single and independent pole tubular scaffolding—permissible number\nof working platforms\n(60) Not more than 2 working platforms shall be set up and used on a\nscaffolding frame at any time, but short platforms may be set up in\ndifferent positions on the frame provided that the total area of these\nplatforms supported by any standard would not exceed that supported\nwhen 2 full length platforms are set up.\nLight duty single and independent pole tubular scaffolding—standards\n(61) Standards shall be of round metal pipes, steam quality, mild steel, or\npipes of an approved high tensile aluminium alloy, or other approved\nalloy, all such pipes being of an outside diameter of not less than\n129/ 32 inches, a nominal bore of 1 1/ 2 inches and a wall thickness of\nnot less than 0.192 inches for pipes of mild steel and 0.176 inches for\npipes of an approved alloy.\n(62) All standards shall be effectively tied to the building or structure or\nbe otherwise braced at points not more than 12 feet apart, measured\ncentre to centre.\n\nLight duty single and independent pole tubular scaffolding—spacing of\nstandards\n(63) Standards shall be spaced not more than 12 feet apart measured from\nthe centre-line of one standard to the centre-line of the adjacent\nstandard in the same row.\n(64) If 2 or more rows of standards are used the rows shall be spaced so as\nto be not more than 6 feet apart measured from the centre-line of one\nrow to the centre-line of another row.\nLight duty single and independent pole tubular scaffolding—ledgers\n(65) Ledgers shall be of round metal pipes of the description and\ndimensions mentioned in subsection (61).\n(66) Ledgers shall be spaced not more than 10 feet apart.\n(67) For this type of scaffolding the distance of a joint in a ledger from a\nvertical shall not exceed 1 foot 9 inches.\nLight duty single and independent pole tubular scaffolding—putlogs\n(68) Putlogs shall be round metal pipes of the description and dimensions\nmentioned in subsection (61).\nLight duty single and independent pole tubular scaffolding—spacing of putlogs\n(69) A putlog shall be placed at each side of each standard except the\nstandards at each end of the scaffolding frame, where 1 only need be\n(70) The distance measured between the centre-line of a putlog and the\ncentre-line of a standard shall be 2 feet.\n(71) The span of a putlog shall not exceed 6 feet 41/ 2 inches.\n\nLight duty single and independent pole tubular scaffolding—bracings\n(72) Bracings shall be round metal pipes of the description and dimensions\nmentioned in subsection (61).\nTubular birdcage scaffolding—permissible loads\n(73) The total load on the platform in any bay at any time of this type of\nscaffolding shall not exceed the weight of 2 workers plus material\nweighing 50 pounds.\nTubular birdcage scaffolding—arrangement and construction\n(74) The general arrangement, construction and materials shall be as\nmentioned in subsections (56) to (72) subject to the following:\n(a) platform planks may be spaced not more than 7 inches apart;\n(b) the span of a mild steel putlog may be increased to 8 feet and the\nspan of a high tensile aluminium putlog may be increased to 6\nfeet;\n(c) standards shall be spaced not more than 10 feet apart in any row,\nunless additional putlogs are provided to support cantilevered\nends of platform planks;\n(d) not more than 1 working platform shall be set up on a\nscaffolding frame at any time.\nsteel tube—uses of scaffolding\n(75) This type of scaffolding shall only be used by painters, repairers,\ndecorators, electric welders and other like tradespeople.\n\nsteel tube—tubes\n(76) Tubes shall be mild steel round pipes of steam quality, not less\nthan 111/ 32 inches outside diameter, having walls not less in thickness\nthan 0.16 inch.\nsteel tube—fittings\n(77) The fittings or devices used for connecting the various members of\nthe scaffolding shall be only those that have been approved.\nsteel tube—height\n(78) The height of the topmost platform above the surface on which the\nscaffolding is erected shall not exceed 15 feet for scaffolding having 1\nor 2 rows of standards and shall not exceed 24 feet for scaffolding\nhaving 3 or more rows of standards.\nsteel tube—standards\n(79) Standards shall be spaced not more than 5 feet apart measured\nhorizontally centre to centre along any row.\n(80) If 2 or more rows of standards are used, the rows shall be\nspaced 3 feet 9 inches apart measured horizontally centre to centre.\nsteel tube—ledgers\n(81) Each ledger shall be supported by and at each standard.\n(82) The vertical distance of one ledger to the next adjacent in the height\nof a standard shall not exceed 6 feet.\n\n(83) The lowest ledger shall be fixed at a height not exceeding 18 inches\nabove the feet of the standards.\nsteel tube—putlogs\n(84) Putlogs shall be connected directly to the standards and the fittings\nemployed shall be set together as closely as is practicable.\nsteel tube—bracing\n(85) Diagonal bracings of steel scaffolding tubing shall be so arranged and\nfixed as to directly and effectively prevent longitudinal movements\nof all putlogs and of all ledgers.\n(86) Alternatively the putlogs shall be effectively braced from an adjacent\nbuilding or structure and the bracing shall be at least of equal effect\nto that otherwise required.\nsteel tube—general limitations\n(87) In connection with this type of scaffolding no person shall—\n(a) impose or cause to be imposed on any putlog a greater total load\nthan 470 pounds weight, inclusive of workers, tools, equipment,\nmaterials and platform timbers; or\n(b) impose or cause to be imposed simultaneously on any\nscaffolding framework a greater number of working platforms\nthan 2, but short platforms may be set up in different positions\non the frame provided that the total area of these platforms\nsupported by any part of the framework shall not exceed that\nsupported when 2 full length platforms are set up; or\n\n(c) use or cause to be used in connection with the scaffolding any\nconnector, clip, socket, fitting, jack, base, finial, fastening,\nwheel or caster, unless it has been approved; or\n(d) use or cause to be used any such connector, clip, socket, fitting,\njack, base, finial, fastening, wheel or caster in any way or for\nany purpose other than that for which it has been approved, or\nfor any greater loading than that for which it has been so\napproved; or\n(e) fix or use or cause to be fixed or used any putlog of greater span\nthan 3 feet 9 inches measured horizontally centre to centre of the\nstandards or from the centre of a standard to the nearest face of\nthe other support; or\n(f) load or cause to be loaded any member of the scaffolding\nframework in any way other than that mentioned in this section.\nCantilever scaffolding\n(1) The general arrangement of cantilever scaffolding shall be as shown\nin schedule 7, plate 2.\nPlatform width\n(2) The platform width for this type of scaffolding shall not exceed 5 feet\nunless otherwise approved.\nPlatform planks\n(3) The platform planks shall be spiked, strapped, lashed, or wired in\nposition to overcome creep and to prevent displacement by wind.\n\n(4) The dimensions of a section of any platform plank shall be not less\nthan 10 inches by 11/ 2 inches for spans to 6 feet and 10 inches\nby 2 inches for spans exceeding 6 feet but not exceeding 10 feet.\nGuardrails and toe board\n(5) A toe board shall be securely fixed at the open sides of all platforms\nand guardrails at the open sides and ends of all platforms.\n(6) Guardrails of the dimensions and description provided for by this\nregulation shall be fixed at the open sides and ends of all platforms.\nCantilevers\n(7) The length of a cantilever inside a building or structure shall not be\nless than 8 feet measured horizontally from the centre-line of the\ncantilever support to the centre of the bolt securing the inboard end to\nits support.\n(8) The dimensions of a section of a cantilever shall not be less\nthan 9 inches by 21/ 2 inches for Oregon pine timber, or 9 inches\nby 2 inches for approved hardwood timber if the distance between the\ncentre-lines of adjacent cantilevers does not exceed 6 feet.\n(9) If the distance is more than 6 feet but does not exceed 10 feet, the\ndimensions of the section shall be 10 inches by 21/ 2 inches for oregon\nand 10 inches by 2 inches for hardwood.\n(10) The diameter of a bolt used for fixing the inboard end of a cantilever\nto its support shall be not less than 5/8 of an inch.\nToms\n(11) If the inboard end of a cantilever is fixed to a tom, the dimensions of\na section of the tom shall be not less than 4 inches by 3 inches.\n(12) Each tom shall rise from a pair of fox wedges, which shall be driven\ntight and then nailed, or it shall be fixed in an equally secure way.\n\nBracing\n(13) All toms shall be effectively braced by the use of 3 inch by 2 inch\ntimber diagonal braces as indicated in schedule 7, plate 2.\n(14) Each cantilever shall be braced as shown in schedule 7, plate 2\nby 3 inch by 2 inch timber braces.\n(15) All braces shall be fixed by bolts not less than 1/ 2 an inch in diameter.\nBracket scaffolding\nbracket scaffolding means a working platform supported by brackets,\neither of timber or metal, constructed and erected as mentioned in this\n(2) Bracket scaffolding shall be used only by carpenters, painters, tuck\npointers, electricians, plumbers and other like tradespeople who do\nnot require their working platform to carry quantities of materials or\nto withstand the effects of marked physical activity.\n(3) The general arrangement of a timber bracket scaffolding shall be as\nshown in schedule 7, plate 3, figure 1, provided that the brackets shall\nnot be spaced at a greater distance apart than 14 feet.\nConstruction of timber brackets—general arrangement\n(4) The general arrangement of brackets shall be as shown in schedule 7,\nplate 3, figure 2 or 3.\n\nConstruction of timber brackets—vertical legs\n(5) The minimum length of the vertical leg of a bracket shall be 4 feet\nand the minimum cross-sectional dimensions shall be 4 inches\nby 3 inches for Oregon pine timber and 4 inches by 2 inches for\nhardwood timber.\nConstruction of timber brackets—horizontal legs\n(6) The overall length of the horizontal legs shall not\nexceed 2 feet 6 inches and the cross-sectional dimensions of the legs\nshall be as set out in subsection (5) for vertical legs.\nConstruction of timber brackets—connection vertical to horizontal legs\n(7) The inboard end of the horizontal leg shall sit fair and square on the\nupper end of a vertical leg and one shall be connected to the other\neither by a 14 inch by 14 inch gusset of 14 gauge mild steel plate,\nsecured by 4 3/ 8 inches diameter mild steel bolts, 2 in each leg as\nshown schedule 7, plate 3, figure 2, or by the insertion of\na 3/ 16 of an inch thick mild steel plate connected by 3 (three)\n3/ 8 of and inch diameter mild steel bolts as shown in schedule 7, plate\n3, figure 3.\nConstruction of timber brackets—bracing between vertical and horizontal legs\n(8) If the vertical leg is connected to the horizontal by a gusset, 1 pair of\nbraces of 3 inch by 11/ 4 inch timber shall be used as shown in schedule\n7, plate 3, figure 2, or if a mild steel insert is used for this connection\n2 pairs of braces of those dimensions shall be used for the purpose as\nshown in schedule 7, plate 3, figure 3.\n(9) In both cases the ends of each brace shall be cut to form a shoulder\nthat shall bear against the horizontal and vertical legs of the bracket,\nrespectively.\n\nConstruction of timber brackets—handrail brackets\n(10) Handrail brackets constructed of mild steel plate 3/ 16 of an inch thick\nshall be fixed to the outer end of the horizontal leg of each bracket by\n3/ 8 of an inch diameter mild steel bolts as indicated in schedule 7,\nplate 3, figure 5 and the handrail upright shall be bolted to this\nbracket.\nStruts\n(11) The strut used for holding a bracket against a wall shall not be less\nthan 4 inches by 3 inches cross-sectional dimensions for lengths up\nto and including 20 feet.\n(12) The strut shall be so positioned that the 3 inch face is uppermost.\n(13) For lengths longer than 20 feet, the cross-sectional dimensions shall\nbe so increased that a strut of equal strength is provided.\n(14) The lower ends of the struts shall be effectively secured against\nmovement.\n(15) The angle of the struts with the horizontal shall not be greater than 60°\nor less than 50°, with the exception that for seasoned brickwork the\nangle may be flattened to between 40° and 60°.\nBracing between struts\n(16) Struts shall be braced one to the other as indicated in schedule 7, plate\n3, figure 1.\n(17) The braces, marked ‘B’ in the figure, shall have cross-sectional\ndimensions not less than 3 inches by 1 1/ 4 inches for both hardwood\nand Oregon pine, and may be spiked, clamped or bolted in position.\nPlatform\n(18) The platform may be of Oregon pine or hardwood scaffold planks.\n\n(19) The overall width of the platform shall not exceed 2 feet 6 inches and\nthe minimum width shall be 1 foot 6 inches.\n(20) The scaffold planks shall be spiked or otherwise effectively secured\nto the brackets at each end and shall be cleated at mid length in the\nway shown in schedule 7, plate 3, figure 4.\n(21) If the distance between brackets does not exceed 12 feet, the thickness\nof the scaffold planks shall be not less than 11/2 inches for Oregon\npine timber and 11/ 8 inches for hardwood timber.\n(22) If the distance between brackets exceeds 12 feet but does not\nexceed 14 feet the thickness of the scaffold planks shall be not less\nthan 13/ 4 inches for Oregon pine and 1 3/ 8 inches for hardwood.\n(23) Handrails shall be fixed at the outer edges and ends of all bracket\nscaffolding and shall be not less than 3 inches by 2 inches\ncross-sectional dimensions.\n(24) Handrail uprights shall be effectively and rigidly attached to the\nbrackets as mentioned in subsection (10).\nMetal brackets\n(25) Metal brackets shall be so designed and constructed that they conform\nto the appropriate design requirements of part 11.\n(26) Working platforms supported by metal brackets shall conform to the\nrequirements of this section.\n\nSuspended scaffolding\nLoading\n(1) Suspended scaffolding constructed and erected in accordance with\nthis section or to an approved design and description shall not at any\ntime be loaded, except in a bona fide test in the presence of an\ninspector, in excess of the maximum load permitted by this section or\nspecified by the chief inspector in an approval.\n(2) The load on the platform over any one bay of a suspended scaffolding,\nconstructed in accordance with this section, due to the weight of\nworkers and materials shall not exceed 1 200 pounds and the gross\nweight, that is, the weight of scaffolding platforms, machine, ropes,\nworkers and materials on any one outrigger shall not exceed 1 800\npounds or the load that is approved.\n(3) The moving parts of every scaffolding machine shall be inspected at\nleast twice a month and a record shall be kept of the findings of the\ninspections.\n(4) This record shall be accessible to an inspector at all times.\n(5) The owner of a scaffolding machine shall be notified to at once\nreplace any defective or worn parts and the use of the machine shall\nbe discontinued until the required replacements have been made.\n(6) In addition the owner or lessor of every scaffolding machine shall\nmake a monthly inspection of every scaffolding machine in use and a\nrecord of the findings shall be kept.\n(7) This record shall also be accessible to an inspector at all times.\n(8) When a scaffolding machine is removed from a location, it shall be\nthoroughly inspected and overhauled before again being used.\n\nPlatform\n(9) The total width of the working platform shall not exceed 5 feet.\n(10) The working platform shall be formed of scaffold planks laid so that\ntheir edges abut and fit tight.\n(11) Scaffold planks shall be of Oregon pine not less than 10 inches wide\nand 2 inches thick.\n(12) Each scaffold plank shall overlap its support by at least 12 inches but\nnot more than 24 inches at the ends of the scaffolding.\n(13) The ends of the scaffold planks of each unit, comprising 4 machines,\nshall be cleated and the cleats shall be made of 4 inches by 1 1/ 2 inches\ntimber, or of 2 inches by 3/ 8 of an inch steel placed near the ends of\nthe planks and outside the bearers and be so arranged as to ensure that\nthe ends of the planks cannot lose their bearing on a bearer.\n(14) Each scaffold plank shall be secured to the cleats by bolts not less\nthan 3/ 8 of an inch in diameter.\n(15) Every such platform shall be supported on bearers made of steel, or\nother approved metal, having a transverse strength at least equivalent\nto a 2 inches by 2 inches by 3/ 8 of a inch Australian Standard steel\nangle section.\nGuardrails and fender boards\n(16) Guardrails constructed in conformity with this regulation shall be\neffectively secured at a height of not less than 3 feet above the\nplatform surface.\n(17) Fender boards 9 inches high and 11/2 inches thick shall be effectively\nsecured on the outside, inside and ends of each platform.\nPrevention of swaying\n(18) Ropes or hooks shall be used and fastened to the platform of the\nscaffolding and to the building or structure in such way and at such\n\nintervals as to prevent the scaffolding swaying away from the\nbuilding or structure.\n(19) Likewise fenders shall be provided if required to prevent the\nscaffolding from swinging against the building or structure.\nSuspended scaffolding machines\n(20) No scaffolding machine, winch or other like mechanism shall be used\nas the lifting or lowering mechanism of a suspended scaffolding\nunless drawings, or a sample of the machine, winch, or mechanism,\ntogether with a complete description in writing of how the machine,\nwinch, or mechanism is to be set up, used, and maintained, have\npreviously been submitted to the chief inspector and have been\n(21) All such machines, winches, and mechanisms shall be designed, set\nup, used and maintained as provided in the section and in accordance\nwith the approved design and description, and while in use shall be\nkept lubricated and maintained in an efficient state of repair, free from\naccumulation of dust, dirt or foreign matter.\nWire ropes for suspended scaffolding\n(22) Steel wire ropes of approved flexibility shall be used for suspended\n(23) The terminal ends of every such rope shall be effectively secured to\nanchorages of ultimate strength at least equal to that of the rope.\n(24) Ropes shall be evenly wound on the drum and not more rope than can\nbe accommodated between the drum flanges shall be wound on the\ndrum.\nPlatform steel structural members\n(25) The steel structural members of a suspended scaffolding platform\nshall be so designed, constructed and used that under maximum\n\nconditions of loading the stress in each and every part of the members\nand in the connections of one part or member to another shall not\nexceed that prescribed by part 11.\nCantilevers supporting a suspended scaffolding\n(26) The cantilevers constituting the overhead supports for a suspended\nscaffolding shall be rolled steel joist sections at least equivalent in\nstrength to a 7 inches by 31/ 2 inches by 15 pounds per running foot\nAustralian Standard rolled steel joist section.\n(27) The cantilevers shall be at least 15 feet in length and they shall not\nproject more than 6 feet 6 inches from the outside point of support on\na building or structure.\n(28) These cantilevers shall be spaced at not more than 10 feet apart\nmeasured from the longitudinal centre-line of one to the longitudinal\ncentre-line of the adjacent cantilever.\nSupports for suspended scaffolding cantilevers\n(29) Every such cantilever shall be provided with an adequate and firm\nsupport and the support shall be so arranged that the projecting or\ncantilever part shall be as short as possible.\nFixing of suspended scaffolding cantilevers\n(30) The inner end of each cantilever shall—\n(a) be secured to the building or structure with bolts or other suitable\nfittings; or\n(b) be counterbalanced with weights in accordance with the\nprovisions of part 11; or\n(c) be shored from a higher floor or steel frame of a building or\nstructure, provided that every shore used is positively secured in\nits correct position and in such a way that no lateral movement\ncan occur, and provided further that every shore so used is of\n\nadequate strength for the purpose and is so placed and fixed that\nundue load is not imposed on any part of the building or\nstructure supporting the cantilever.\n(31) The bolts or other fittings mentioned in subsection (30) (a), and also\nthe parts of the building or structure to which the cantilever is fixed,\nshall provide a factor of safety of at least 4 under maximum\nconditions of loading.\nSuspended scaffolding cantilever supports\n(32) Every platform or structure, or beam, bearer, or other structural\nmember used for supporting any such cantilever and the loads from it\nor from any counterbalance or used for supporting and transferring\nthe weight of counterbalance to cantilever, or used for transferring the\nloads from a cantilever to part of a building or structure shall be of\nsuch construction that a factor of safety of at least 6 shall obtain in all\ntimber parts, taking into consideration the resultant loads from the\ncantilever when the suspended scaffolding is fully loaded, and also,\nwhen the scaffolding is unloaded.\n(33) Every such platform, or structure, or beam, bearer, or other structural\nmember shall be so constructed and fixed and secured that lateral\nmovement cannot occur in any direction.\nBolt diameters\n(34) Every bolt used for anchoring a cantilever or used in connections in\nthe structure supporting a cantilever or for securing a shore in\nposition, or for securing bracing or other structural member shall not\nbe less than 5/ 8 of an inch in diameter and shall be provided with\nstandard washers.\n\nWeight of cantilever counterbalance\n(35) The net weight of the counterbalance on any cantilever shall not be\nless than 3 times that necessary to balance the load on the projecting\npart of the cantilever when the scaffolding is fully loaded.\nSuspended scaffolding rope anchors\n(36) A fitting of mild steel stock having sectional dimensions not less than\n2 inches by 3/ 8 of an inch shall be fitted at the outer end of every\nsuspended scaffolding cantilever for the purpose of anchoring the\nscaffolding suspension rope or rope block.\n(37) Every such fitting shall fit snug at the top and sides of the cantilever.\n(38) Each leg shall be so forged as to make an angle of not less than 75°\nwith the bottom surface of the cantilever, until the inside faces of each\nleg are 1 inch apart.\n(39) Each leg shall then be forged so as to assume a vertical position.\n(40) The legs are to be of such length that the vertical portions are parallel\nfor not less than 21/ 2 inches.\n(41) The vertical part of each leg shall then be drilled to take a 3/ 4 of an\ninch diameter steel bolt, the centre of the bolt hole being not less than\n1 inch distant from the lower bend.\n(42) A steel bolt not less than 3/ 4 of an inch in diameter shall be inserted\nin the holes in the vertical legs, the bolt nut then being screwed on\nand the end of the bolt riveted over, or alternatively a split pin may\nbe fitted in a hole drilled through the bolt end outside the nut.\n(43) Every such fitting shall be secured to the cantilever by a bolt through\nthe sides of the fitting and through the mid-section of the cantilever\nweb or by a bolt passing through the cantilever web nearer the end of\nthe cantilever than the spot where the fitting is positioned.\n\nUse of suspended scaffolding machines\n(44) No person under 18 years old and no person unless specifically\nauthorised by his or her employer so to do, shall work a machine,\nwinch, or mechanism used for raising or lowering a suspended\nscaffolding and no person shall in any way interfere with it.\n(45) No person shall employ, instruct or direct any person under 18 years\nold to act in contravention of this provision.\n(46) The handles of the scaffolding machine, winch, or mechanism shall\nbe left in that position that will prevent the platform from descending\nwhen the machine, winch, or mechanism is not actually in use for\nraising or lowering the platform.\nPlatform to be kept level\n(47) The process of raising and lowering a suspended scaffolding shall be\nsuch as to ensure that the working platform shall remain substantially\nlevel.\nRestrictions on use of suspended scaffolding\n(48) Suspended scaffolding shall not be used if in the opinion of an\ninspector—\n(a) the position of the scaffolding and the conditions under which\nthe scaffolding is or would be used are dangerous to human life\nor limb; or\n(b) the building or structure to which the scaffolding is attached or\nis proposed to be attached is not suitable for safely supporting a\nsuspended scaffolding; or\n(c) the scaffolding is not suitable for the work contemplated.\n\nLight swinging stages\nDesigns to be submitted\n(1) If it is impracticable to construct and use a light swinging stage of a\ntype conforming to the requirements of this section, completely\ndetailed working drawings together with a full description of the\nproposed methods of use of the light swinging stage proposed to be\nerected and used shall be submitted to the chief inspector and be\napproved before any person is allowed on the stage.\nWorking platform\n(2) The working platform of a light swinging stage shall be not less\nthan 20 inches nor more than 24 inches wide and shall be formed of\nstraight grained oregon scaffolding planks not less than 1 1/2 inches\nthick, running the full length of the platform.\n(3) These planks shall be stiffened with strong cleats fixed at the centre\nand immediately adjacent to each hanger.\n(4) The total length of the working platform shall not exceed 18 feet and\nthe span of the scaffold planks from the centre-line of one hanger to\nthe centre-line of the other shall not exceed 12 feet.\n(5) The overhang of the scaffold planks at each end shall not exceed 1/ 4 of\nthe distance between the centre-lines of the hangers.\nGuardrails and toe boards\n(6) A guardrail of straight grained Oregon pine having sectional\ndimensions not less than 3 inches by 2 inches or of galvanised steel\nwater pipe of 1 inch internal diameter, or of a section and material\nensuring equivalent strength and stiffness for the span, securely\nfastened to the hangers at not less than 30 inches above the surface of\nthe working platform shall be provided on the outer side of the\n\nplatform, and also, if in the opinion of an inspector it is necessary in\nthe interests of safety to human life and limb, on the inside and ends\nof the platform.\n(7) A toe board of not less than 6 inches by 1 inch sectional dimensions\nshall be provided and securely fixed on edge on the other side of the\nplatform in all cases and if material or tools are to be loosely placed\non the platform, a toe board of like section is to be provided on both\nsides and ends.\nHangers\n(8) The hangers supporting the working platform of a light swinging\nstage shall be constructed of steel bar 2 inches by 1/ 2 an inch sectional\ndimensions or of steel rod 1 inch in diameter.\n(9) Each hanger shall pass under the platform planks and shall be\nsecurely fixed to them.\n(10) The distance measured between the vertical legs of a hanger shall not\nexceed that necessary to accommodate the full width of the platform\nscaffold planks.\n(11) An anchorage of approved design shall be incorporated in the\nconstruction of each hanger, such anchorage to be used for the\npurpose of attaching the bottom block of the rope tackle used for\nraising and lowering the platform.\nTackle for raising and lowering light swinging stages—rope\n(12) The fall rope of a tackle used for raising and lowering a light swinging\nstage shall be constructed of Manila or sisal fibre, shall be not less\nthan 2 1/ 2 inches in circumference and shall be reeved through a\ndouble and a single block so as to form 4 parts of rope.\n(13) At all times other than when the stage is being raised or lowered the\nhauling part of the fibre rope is to be made fast with a self-locking\nhitch to the lower block.\n\nTackle for raising and lowering light swinging stages—fibre rope blocks\n(14) The carcase of every block for fibre rope, both single and double\nsheave, used in the tackle for raising and lowering a light swinging\nstage, shall be constructed of steel and the sheaves of each such block\nshall be not less than 4 inches in diameter, measured at the bottom of\nthe rope groove.\n(15) The rope groove shall be of such size and shape as to afford ample\nsupport for the fibre rope passing over the sheave.\n(16) No such block shall, unless approved, be used in which the rope\nanchorage or becket is fixed to the block carcase by welding.\n(17) Rope blocks shall be adequately secured to a needle by a steel wire\nrope lashing or by a steel fitting designed in conformity with the\nrequirements of part 11.\n(18) The mouth of every rope block hook shall be moused to prevent\ninadvertent displacement.\nNeedles\n(19) For this section, the cantilevers from which a light swinging stage\ntackle is suspended shall be known as needles.\n(20) Timber needles of at least equivalent strength to Oregon pine shall in\nno case be of smaller sectional dimensions than 6 inches by 4 inches\nand shall be placed on edge.\n(21) If needles of this minimum section are used, the point of suspension\nof the fall rope top block shall not be more than 2 feet from the point\nof bearing of the needle on the building or structure.\n(22) If this dimension cannot be kept within this limit, needles of larger\nsectional dimensions shall be used and the transverse strength of such\nlarger section shall bear the same proportion to a 6 inch by 4 inch\nsection on edge as the longer length of the cantilevered portion bears\nto 2 feet.\n\n(23) If timber needles are counterbalanced, their length shall not be less\nthan 12 feet and not less than 9 feet of the length shall be on the\ncounterbalanced side.\nFixing of needles\n(24) Needles shall either be firmly secured to the building or structure with\nbolts, approved steel fittings, or lashing, designed in conformity with\nthe provisions of part 11 or they shall be counterbalanced with\nweights in accordance with that part.\n(25) Provision shall be made to prevent needles turning over or moving\nlaterally, and any planking, platform or other structure provided for\nsupporting needles or the counterbalance on needles shall have\nadequate strength to sustain the maximum weight imposed without\nundue deflection.\nCounterbalance\n(26) The net weight of the counterbalance on any needle shall not be less\nthan 3 times the weight necessary to balance the weight of the load\non the projecting part of a needle when the stage is fully loaded.\n(27) In calculating the net weight of counterbalance, due regard shall be\ngiven to the points of suspension of the stage, the disposition of the\ncounterbalance, and the point of substantial bearing of the needle\nbetween them.\n(28) Every such counterbalance shall be secured to the needles in a way\nthat will prevent it accidentally shifting or being inadvertently\nremoved.\n(29) Sand or liquids shall not be used as a counterbalance.\nUse of parapet hooks prohibited\n(30) A parapet hook shall not be used for the purpose of suspending a light\nswinging stage.\n\nStage to be kept level\n(31) In raising and lowering a light swinging stage the process shall be\ncarried out in such a way as to ensure that the platform will remain\nsubstantially level.\nWinches for light swinging stages\n(32) A machine, winch or other mechanism may be used for raising and\nlowering a light swinging stage provided that—\n(a) a design; or\n(b) a sample together with a written description of how the machine,\nwinch or mechanism is to be set up, used and maintained;\nhas previously been submitted to the chief inspector and has been\n(33) All such machines, winches and mechanisms shall be designed, set\nup, used, and maintained as provided in the section and in accordance\nwith the approved design and description, and while in use they shall\nbe kept lubricated and maintained in an efficient state of repair and\nfree from any accumulation of dust, dirt, or foreign matter.\n(34) Ropes shall be wound evenly on the drum of such machine, winch or\nmechanism and not more rope than can be accommodated between\nthe drum flanges shall be wound on the drum.\n(35) The handles of all such machines, winches and mechanisms when not\nactually in use for raising or lowering shall be kept in that position\nthat will prevent the stage from descending.\nRestrictions of light swinging stages\n(36) Light swinging stages shall not be used where, in the opinion of an\ninspector—\n\n(a) the position of the scaffolding and the conditions under which\nthe scaffolding is or would be used are dangerous to human life\nand limb; or\n(b) the building or structure to which the scaffolding is attached or\nis proposed to be attached is not suitable for safely supporting\nthe type of scaffolding used or proposed to be used; or\n(c) the scaffolding is not suitable for the work contemplated.\n(37) No person under 18 years old and no person unless specially\nauthorised by his or her employer so to do shall work a machine,\nwinch or mechanism used for raising or lowering a light swinging\nstage and no person shall interfere with it.\n(38) No person shall employ, instruct, or direct any person under 18 years\nold to act in contravention of this provision.\n(39) Immediately before the erection of a light swinging stage and at\nfrequent intervals afterwards, the person actually responsible for\nerecting the stage and the scaffolder in charge of the work shall\ninspect all parts of the stage and its supports and satisfy himself or\nherself as to its safety and conformity with the section.\nBoatswain’s chairs\nSeat construction\n(1) The seat of a boatswain’s chair shall be constructed of timber not less\nthan 1 inch in thickness and the seat shall be so arranged that a person\nseated in it shall have a seating space of not less than 18 inches by 10\n\n(2) Cleats made of timber not less than 3 inches by 1 inch sectional\ndimensions shall be firmly fixed to the ends of the timber, on the\nunderside, forming the seat.\nSlings\n(3) The slings supporting the seat of a boatswain’s chair shall be of fibre\nrope, not less than 11/ 2 inches in circumference.\n(4) These slings shall be crossed underneath the chair seat and each leg\nshall pass through a suitable hole, 1 in each of the 4 corners of the\nseat and be arranged to form a loop over the seat to take a rope pulley\nblock hook.\n(5) These slings shall be fixed to the underside of the seat to prevent the\nseat tilting in the slings.\nTackle—blocks\n(6) The rope blocks included in the tackle for suspending and raising and\nlowering a boatswain’s chair shall be 1 (one) 2-sheave upper block\nand a single sheave lower block.\n(7) The carcase of each block shall be of steel and the rope anchor or\nbecket on the bottom block shall not unless approved be fixed to the\nblock by welding.\n(8) The rope sheaves shall be not less than 4 inches in diameter and they\nshall be grooved to accommodate the tackle rope.\nTackle—rope\n(9) The rope of the tackle suspending a boatswain’s chair shall be of\neither Manila or sisal fibre.\n(10) The rope shall be so reeved as to form a 4-part rope tackle and shall\nbe not less than 2 inches in circumference.\n\nSupport\n(11) All overhead support for a boatswain’s chair shall be safely secured\nin position and shall be of sufficient strength to sustain not less than\n4 times the weight to be suspended from it.\n(12) Immediately before the erection of a boatswain’s chair, and at\nfrequent intervals afterwards, the person actually responsible for the\nerection of the chair, or the person in charge of the work, shall inspect\nthe overhead supports and the tackle to see that it is safe for use and\nScaffolding for use on ships in dock or on slips\nLarge flying stages—working platforms\n(1) The working platform of this type of scaffolding shall be Oregon pine\nplanks not less than 12 inches by 3 inches sectional dimensions and\nif the distance between the ropes supporting the stage exceeds 18 feet\nan intermediate supporting rope shall be used.\n(2) Staging planks shall lap at least 4 feet.\nLarge flying stages—stage ropes\n(3) The stage ropes shall be flexible steel wire ropes not less\nthan 11/ 2 inches in circumference and shall have a long eye spliced in\none end to go round planks, the eye to be not less than 4 feet 6 inches\nin length.\n(4) A short eye shall be spliced in the other end to take a tail rope.\n(5) Tail ropes shall be flexible steel wire ropes not less than 1 1/ 2 inches\nin circumference and of sufficient length to pass over the bulwarks.\n\n(6) Stage ropes shall be attached to planks, in the middle of plank laps,\nwith 1 full turn of the large eye.\nLarge flying stages—guys\n(7) A sufficient number of guy ropes shall be used to secure proper\nsteadiness of every stage.\n(8) The guys shall be of flexible steel wire, not less than 1 1/ 4 inches in\ncircumference with fibre tail ropes not less than 2 inches in\ncircumference.\n(9) Guy and tail ropes shall be attached by means of spliced eyes.\n(10) All stages shall have effective end guys.\nLarge flying stages—life-lines\n(11) All stages shall be provided with life-lines of not less than 21/ 2 inch\ncircumference fibre rope properly secured to the stage ropes by means\nof fibre rope lanyards not less than 11/ 4 inches in circumference at a\nheight of not less than 2 feet 6 inches above the surface of the planks.\nSmall flying stages—working platform\n(12) The working platform of this type of scaffolding shall be Oregon pine\nplanks not less than 12 inches by 2 inches sectional dimensions and\nnot more than 14 feet in length.\nSmall flying stages—stage ropes\n(13) The stage ropes shall be flexible steel wire ropes not less than 1 inch\nin circumference and shall be attached to planks by making 1 full turn\naround the plank, seizing the rope beneath the plank and stapling it in\nposition at the sides of the plank.\n(14) The stage ropes shall be attached to flexible steel wire tail ropes not\nless than 1 1/4 inches in circumference and of sufficient length to pass\nover the bulwarks.\n\nSmall flying stages—distance spars\n(15) Small flying stages shall be provided with spars securely fixed to\nplanks, and sufficiently long to ensure effective working conditions.\nSmall flying stages—life-lines\n(16) When it is necessary for workers to work standing on small flying\nstages an efficient life-line shall be provided.\nSmall flying stages—restriction of use\n(17) A small flying stage shall not be used in any operation in which power\noperated tools are employed.\nSuspended stages for engineers and boilermakers—general\n(18) All suspended stages for the use of engineers and boilermakers shall\nbe so designed and constructed as to bear not less than 3 times the\nweight of the load to be put on them.\nSuspended stages for engineers and boilermakers—suspension\n(19) This type of stage must be suspended from overhead catheads or\nneedles of adequate strength properly lashed or otherwise securely\nand safely fixed in position.\nSuspended stages for engineers and boilermakers—working platform\n(20) The working platform of this type of scaffolding shall comprise\nOregon pine planks not less than 12 inches by 3 inches free from\nknots and shakes.\n(21) It shall be supported at intervals of not more than 14 feet and shall be\nnot less than 2 planks in width.\n(22) Planks shall lap at least 4 feet.\n\nSuspended stages for engineers and boilermakers—platform bearers\n(23) Platform spawls or bearers shall be of Oregon pine or other approved\ntimber not less than 6 inches by 6 inches sectional dimensions.\nSuspended stages for engineers and boilermakers—supporting ropes\n(24) The supporting ropes for this type of stage shall be flexible steel wire\nropes not less than 11/ 2 inches in circumference.\n(25) They shall be secured to the overhead needles or catheads and to the\nplank spawls or bearers.\nSuspended stages for engineers and boilermakers—life-lines\n(26) If the use of life-lines will not interfere with the operations being\ncarried on and workers have to work standing on a stage, life-lines of\nnot less than 21/ 2 inches circumference fibre rope shall be effectively\nlashed to the supporting ropes or to special stanchions by means of\nrope lanyards 1 1/ 2 inches in circumference.\nSuspended stages for engineers and boilermakers—guys\n(27) Guy ropes of adequate strength and sufficient in number shall be used\nto secure proper steadiness of every such stage.\nSuspended stages for engineers and boilermakers—smaller stages\n(28) Stages in which the distance between supports is appreciably less than\nprovided for in this section may have planks and spawls of lesser\ndimensions than provided for in this section subject to the scaffolding\nhaving a strength equivalent to the scaffolding covered by this\n\nEngineers and boilermakers trestle scaffolds\n(29) Trestles conforming to the requirements of this regulation may be\nused for supporting a working platform of adequate strength for\nengineers and boilermakers.\nAccess to Stages\n(30) Safe means of access shall be provided to all stages used on ships in\ndock or on slips.\n(31) If a builders’ ladder is used as a means of access, it shall extend to a\nheight of at least 3 feet 6 inches above the place of landing for persons\nusing the ladder.\nRuns and ramps\n(1) All runs, ramps, gangways and similar structures used as a means of\ncommunication in building work shall be of sound material, good\nconstruction, adequate strength, free from patent defects and be safe\nfor the purposes for which they are intended.\n(2) They shall be constructed of timber planks not less than 10 inches by\n2 inches sectional dimensions and shall be not less than 2 feet 6 inches\nwide.\n(3) When the planks overlap, the plank that runs from below shall be\nplaced so that it laps over the one running from above.\n(4) Such planks shall be positively fixed in position.\n(5) The supports for the planks shall be of adequate strength and shall be\neffectively braced.\n(6) The construction of runs, ramps and gangways at an incline greater\nthan 1 foot rise in 3 feet is prohibited.\n\n(7) The planks of runs, ramps and gangways shall be cleated or otherwise\nfastened together to prevent unequal sagging.\n(8) If runs, ramps and gangways are more than 8 feet in height, the\noutside edges at least shall be provided with guardrails and toe boards.\n\nGeneral Division 7.1\nPart 7 Safeguards and measures to be\nexcavation work\n(1) An adequate supply of timber of the required dimensions, or other\napproved material, shall if necessary be provided and used to prevent,\nso far as is reasonably practicable and as early as is reasonably\npracticable in the course of the work, danger to any person employed\nfrom a fall or dislodgment of earth, rock or other material forming the\nside of or adjacent to any excavation work.\n(2) In addition to any other examination necessary to ensure compliance\nwith this regulation, every part of an excavation work, other than a\npart to which subsection (3) (a) applies, shall be specially examined\nbefore any person works in it and afterwards at least once in every\nperiod of 7 days for the purpose of ensuring compliance with this\nregulation and in particular to see that timber and other supports are\nadequate, properly secured and in good condition.\n(3) However—\n(a) subsections (1) and (2) shall not apply if, having regard to the\nnature and slope of the side of the excavation and other\ncircumstances, no fall or dislodgment of earth or other material\nso as to bury or trap a person employed, or so as to strike a\nperson employed from a height of more than 5 feet is liable to\noccur; and\n\n(b) subsections (1) and (2) shall not apply in relation to a person\nactually engaged in timbering or other work (including an\nexamination as mentioned in subsection (2)) that is being carried\nout for the purpose of compliance with subsections (1) and (2),\nif appropriate precautions are taken to ensure his or her safety as\nfar as circumstances permit; and\n(c) the requirement in subsection (2) as to a special examination\nonce in every 7 days shall not apply until the work has been in\nprogress for a period of 5 working days (whether continuous or\nnot).\n(4) No excavation work that is likely to reduce, so as to endanger any\nperson employed, the security or stability of any part of any building\nor structure, whether temporary or permanent, shall be begun or\ncontinued unless adequate steps are taken before and during the\nprogress of the work to prevent danger to any person employed from\ncollapse of the building or structure or the fall of any part of it.\n(5) Timbering used to retain or support any part of an excavation work\nshall be of good construction, sound material and adequate strength\nfor the purpose for which it is used.\n(6) If any timbering used to retain or support any part of an excavation\nwork is liable to inward movement at the bottom and bracing or\nstrutting at the bottom is not practicable, the timbering shall be\nadequately strutted or braced at a higher level so as to prevent such\nmovement.\n(7) All struts, braces and walings in any excavation work shall be\nproperly and adequately secured so as to prevent their accidental\ndisplacement or fall.\n(8) Safe means of access shall be provided to every place where persons\nare employed in an excavation work.\n\nGeneral Division 7.1\n(9) If there is reason to apprehend danger to persons employed in any\nexcavation work due to rising water or from an irruption of water or\nmaterial, there shall be provided means to enable every person to\nreach a position of safety.\n(10) If persons are employed in a shift and other persons are working\nabove them, there shall be provided as early as is reasonably\npracticable an effective diaphragm to prevent the firstmentioned\npersons from being struck by tools or other objects falling from the\nplace where the other persons are working.\n(11) The doors in the diaphragms shall be as small as practicable, shall\nopen upwards and shall be kept closed except when necessarily open\nfor the passage of persons and gear.\n(12) Every accessible part of an excavation work into which a person is\nliable to fall a distance of more than 6 feet shall be provided with a\nsuitable barrier to a height of at least 3 feet and as close as is\nreasonably practicable to the edge.\n(13) However, subsection (12) shall not apply to any part of an excavation\nwork while (and to the extent to which) the absence of the barrier is\nnecessary for the access of persons or for the movement of plant, gear,\nor materials or while (and to the extent to which) it has not yet been\npracticable to erect the barrier since the formation of that part of the\nexcavation work.\n(14) Material shall not be placed or stacked near the edge of any\nexcavation work so as to endanger persons employed below.\n(15) No load shall be placed or moved near the edge of any excavation\nwork where it is likely to cause a collapse of the side of the excavation\nwork and thereby endanger any person.\n\n(1) Every cofferdam or caisson and every part of it shall be of good\nconstruction, sound material, and adequate strength and shall be\nproperly maintained.\n(2) A cofferdam or caisson shall if necessary be specially secured in\nposition so as to prevent movement in a way dangerous to persons\nemployed.\n(3) The bracings and ties of every cofferdam or caisson shall be properly\nand adequately secured to prevent their accidental displacement or\nfall.\n(4) The person in charge of the work of constructing, placing in position,\nsubstantially adding to, altering, or dismantling a cofferdam or\ncaisson, and as far as possible every worker employed for any such\nwork, shall possess adequate experience of this kind of work.\n(5) All material for the construction or fixing of a cofferdam or caisson\nshall be inspected on each occasion before being taken into use for\nsuch a purpose, and material that is unsuitable or defective in any\nrespect shall not be so used.\n(6) Safe means of access shall be provided to every place where persons\nare employed in a cofferdam or caisson.\n(7) Adequate means for persons to reach places of safety shall be\nprovided in every cofferdam or caisson in case of an inrush of water.\n\nTrenches Division 7.3\n(1) All trenches of over 8 feet in length and 5 feet or more in depth in\nhard compact ground shall be braced at intervals not exceeding 6 feet\nwith 6 inches by 11/ 4 inches hardwood runners or heavier material,\nplaced vertically in the trench opposite each other against the trench\nwalls.\n(2) The runners shall, if possible, extend to the bottom of the trench,\notherwise as low as possible to clear the top of the pipe, sewer,\nconduit, or other material to be placed in the bottom of the trench.\n(3) Runners shall be supported by walings placed horizontally and held\nin position by screw-jacks or by struts.\n(4) Side and end walings abutting at the corners of excavations shall be\njoined by halving one to the other so that each waling will sustain its\ncorrect proportion of any external load imposed on them.\n(5) The cross-sectional dimensions of hardwood walings shall be not less\nthan 6 inches by 3 inches.\n(6) Walings of other materials or timbers shall be at least of equivalent\nstrength to hardwood walings.\n(7) Walings shall be spaced at not more than 3 feet apart measured\nvertically from centre to centre of walings.\n(8) Struts or screw-jacks shall be spaced at not more than 6 feet apart\nexcept at the joints of walings where they must be closer.\n(9) The cross-sectional dimensions of struts relative to the width of a\ntrench shall be not less than is shown in table 97\nTable 97\nWidth of trench Dimensions of strut\n1 foot to 2 feet 11 inches 4 inches by 3 inches\n\n3 feet to 4 feet 11 inches 6 inches by 3 inches\n5 feet to 6 feet 11 inches 6 inches by 4 inches\n7 feet to 9 feet 6 inches by 6 inches\n(10) The timbering of trenches shall proceed as the work of excavation\nprogresses.\n(11) If a mechanical digger is used the timbering shall be kept as close as\npracticable to the digger but the length of untimbered trench shall not\nexceed 10 feet, measured from the lower edge of the digger jib.\n(12) Trenches in saturated, filled, or otherwise unstable ground (other than\nof the nature of wet running sand) shall be close timbered.\n(13) The cross-sectional dimensions of the runners shall be not less than 6\ninches by 11/ 4 inches for hardwood timber runners.\n(14) The cross-sectional dimensions for hardwood timber walings shall be\nnot less than 6 inches by 3 inches and they shall be spaced as required\nby subsection (7).\n(15) Struts shall be of the cross-sectional dimensions prescribed by\nsubsection (9).\n(16) If running material, as wet running sand, is encountered runners shall\nbe kept 1/ 2 an inch apart and the spaces thus formed shall be caulked\nwith straw or other suitable material.\n(17) If practicable straw, grass, bags, or other suitable material shall be\npacked behind the runners.\n(18) Walings and struts shall be of the materials and cross-sectional\ndimensions and shall be placed as prescribed, respectively, by\nsubsections (5) to (7) and subsections (8) and (9).\n(19) An inspector, should the inspector considers it necessary, may order\nheavier timbering than that prescribed by this section.\n\nShafts, wells and tunnels Division 7.4\n(20) Excavated material shall not be placed nearer than 1 foot to the edge\nof a trench.\n(21) For a trench in running material, provided circumstances permit, no\nmaterial shall be placed nearer than 3 feet to the edge of the trench.\n(22) All trenches 5 feet or more in depth shall be supplied with 1 ladder\nfor each 200 feet of trench or fraction of it, which ladder shall extend\nfrom the bottom of the trench to at least 3 feet 6 inches above the top.\n(1) Every shaft and well shall be securely cased, lined or otherwise made\nsafe.\n(2) Every drive and tunnel shall be securely protected and made safe for\npersons employed in it.\n(3) All entrances between the bottom of every shaft and the poppet head\npulley wheel shall be securely fenced, including any entrances from\nan elevated platform.\n(4) Any fence or cover may be temporarily removed, to facilitate the\nwork that is in progress, if proper precautions are taken.\n(5) If a fence or cover has been removed from any shaft entrance to allow\nwork to proceed, 2 horizontal bars shall be fixed across the entrance\nnot less than 2 feet nor more than 4 feet from the floor.\n(6) If access to workings is by way of a shaft and the shaft is also used\nfor haulage purposes, the shaft shall be divided into 2 compartments,\none to be used for a ladder way the other for haulage purposes.\n(7) The ladder way compartment must be securely fenced from the\nhaulage compartment.\n\n(8) In addition to any mechanical means of ingress and egress, every shaft\nshall have at least 1 proper ladder or footway communicating from\nthe surface to the workings.\n(9) A ladder permanently used in a shaft for the ascent and descent of\npersons shall not be fixed in a vertical or overhanging position, except\nin shafts used exclusively for pumping, and every such ladder shall\nbe inclined at the most convenient angle that the space in which the\nladder is fixed allows.\n(10) Every ladder-shaft shall have substantial platforms fixed at intervals\nof not more than 20 feet.\n\nPart 8 Safeguards and measures to be\n(1) No person under 20 years old or over 55 years old shall dive, and no\nperson shall employ any such person to dive except that the upper age\nlimit of 55 years old may be exceeded for divers with special\nqualifications who after special medical examination have been\ncertified by a medical officer as being fit to continue to dive after\nhaving reached the upper age limit.\nInstruction\n(2) No diver and no attendant shall engage or be employed in a diving\noperation unless the person has received such instruction in the work\nthat the person is capable of carrying out his or her duties safely.\n(3) This instruction shall be such that it will impart a full working\nknowledge of the safe use of signals, compression and decompression\ntables, diving dress with its ancillary fittings and gear, of air pumps,\npressure gauges and depth gauges.\n(4) A legally qualified doctor shall be appointed to carry out the duties\nprescribed by this section as being the duties of a medical officer.\n\n(5) The chief inspector shall be notified in writing of the name and\naddress of the medical officer so appointed.\nPreliminary medical examinations\n(6) No person shall dive or be employed to dive unless on or after such\ndate the person has been examined by an appointed medical officer,\nand has been certified by the medical officer as being fit to work in\ncompressed air.\n(7) The examination shall include an X-ray examination of the chest.\n(8) The medical officer’s report shall be kept and produced to an\nSupervision of health during diving work\n(9) It shall be the duty of the medical officer to inform each diver at the\norgans, a chill, or any other disease that may come on the person\nduring or after work may have the most serious consequences to his\nor her health and the person shall be instructed that immediately on\nnoticing any such indisposition the person must report it to the\nmedical officer, or to a medical orderly, or failing either, to the\ncontractor or a responsible representative of the contractor.\n(10) The symptoms and treatment of compressed air illness as set out in\nschedule 9 shall be exhibited in a conspicuous position in the divers’\nchange room.\n(11) A contractor shall not allow any person—\nor any other illness or disease; or\n(b) under the influence of intoxicating liquor;\n\nto be employed under water as a diver.\n(12) If divers are employed continuously in diving operations they shall\nbe medically re-examined regularly at the following intervals:\n(a) working at depths less than 60 feet—every 6 months;\n(b) working at depths between 60 feet and 90 feet—every 3 months;\n(c) working at depths in excess of 90 feet—every 4 weeks,\nand unless so re-examined and found fit as mentioned in this section\nno person shall dive or be employed to dive.\n(13) A diver who has been absent from work due to illness of any kind for\nmore than 7 days, or has been absent from work due to any other\ncause, except for recreation, for a period of more than 3 weeks shall\nnot dive or be employed to dive without first producing a certificate\nof fitness from the medical officer.\n(14) No person shall dive or be employed to dive after 12 months or any\nlesser period that the medical officer may determine, has elapsed from\nthe date of the last X-ray examination of his or her chest.\nCompressed air workers’ badge\n(15) It shall be the duty of a contractor to supply to every diver in the\ncontractor’s employ a compressed air worker’s badge.\n(16) It shall be the duty of every diver at all times to wear a compressed\nair worker’s badge.\n(17) A compressed air worker’s badge shall be made of non-corrodible\nmetal and shall be arranged to be worn either in a coat lapel or\nsuspended by a chain or cord placed around the neck.\n(18) The badge shall be in the form of a disc, 1 1/ 4 inches in diameter and\nnot less than 1/ 16 of an inch in thickness.\n(19) The face shall bear the following inscription, arranged in the\nfollowing way:\n\nSafe diving periods\n(20) Except in case of emergency, no person shall dive or be employed to\ndive under water in any period of 24 hours for longer than the total\ntimes and periods corresponding to the depth of dive set out in\ntable 99.1:\nTable 99.1 Safe diving periods for varying depths*\ndepth of\ndive\nfeet\npressure\nlb. per sq. inch\nsafe diving period*\nhours minutes\n0—42 0—18 1/ 2 6 0 provided that the period of any\ndive shall not exceed 1 1/ 2\nhours duration, and that 15\nminutes is allowed on the\nsurface after each such period\n42—60 18 1/ 2—261/ 2 5 0 provided that the period of any\ndive shall not exceed 1 hour\nduration, and that 15 minutes\nis allowed on the surface after\neach such period\n60—66 26 1/ 2—291/ 2 3 0 provided that the period of any\ndive shall not exceed 1 hour\nduration, and that 15 minutes\nis allowed on the surface after\neach such period\n\ndepth of\ndive\nfeet\npressure\nlb. per sq. inch\nsafe diving period*\nhours minutes\n66—72 291/ 2—32 2 0\n72—78 32—341/ 2 1 30\n78—84 341/ 2—37 1 15\n84—90 37—40 1 0\n90—96 40—421/ 2 . . 55\n96—108 421/ 2—48 . . 40\n108—120 48—531/ 2 . . 35\n120—132 531/ 2—59 . . 30\n132—144 59—641/ 2 . . 25\n144—156 641/ 2—70 . . 20\n156—168 70—75 . . 16\n168—180 75—801/ 2 . . 14\n* Safe diving period means the time spent within any period of 24 hours from the\nbeginning of the first descent to the beginning of the last ascent.\n(21) If, in the case of emergency, it is necessary for a diver to remain under\nwater at a depth of 66 feet or over for a period of time exceeding the\nlimits set out in table 99.1, the decompression of the diver shall be\nregulated in the way set out in schedule 7, table 7.1.\n(22) When a diver is brought to the surface with stoppages in accordance\nwith schedule 7, table 7.1, the diver shall not dive or be employed to\ndive again within 12 hours except in case of grave emergency.\n(23) Should it be necessary for a diver to descend a 2nd time to a depth of\n66 feet or over with an interval of less than 4 hours between\nthe 2 descents, the following method of calculating the stoppages\nrequired shall be observed:\n\n(a) read from schedule 7, table 7.2 the stoppages for the 2nd dive\nand from schedule 7, table 7.1, the stoppages required for a dive\nof duration equal to that of the 2 dives combined; and\n(b) divide the number of stoppages by 2 for those at the greater\ndepth check the diver for the periods shown for the 2nd dive,\nand for the remainder check the diver for the periods shown for\nthe combined dive, and should there be an odd number of\nstoppages the greater number shall be used for the dive as\ncombined.\n(24) The tables shall be interpreted to give the diver the maximum time in\nthe minimum depth of water.\n(25) Stoppages at 20 feet and 10 feet are the most beneficial to the diver.\n(26) When the prescribed limits of time under water have not been\nexceeded, the stoppages in ascending shall be as shown in schedule 7,\ntable 7.2.\n(27) The stoppage points shall be determined by the attendant who shall\nbe guided by the depth gauge readings after making due allowance\nfor gauge error.\n(28) The diver shall not be brought up from the bottom to the first stopping\nplace at a rate faster than 1 foot in 1 second, and his or her ascent shall\nbe at once checked if this rate is exceeded.\n(29) While the diver is ascending, the diver must undertake as much\ngymnastic exercise as possible, especially using those muscles that\nwere in use on the bottom.\n(30) The minimum quantity of air supplied to divers at various depths shall\nbe as set out in table 99.2, except that during the descent the pump\n\nshall be operated at the maximum revolutions or the air supply shall\nbe considerably increased:\nTable 99.2 Quantity of air required by a diver at various depths\ndepth quantity of air at\natmospheric pressure\nrequired per minute\n*number of\nneeded\n*revolutions of\nhand pump per\nMinute\nFathoms ft cu. ft\n0 0 1.5 1 15\n23/ 4 16 2.2 1 22\n51/ 2 33 3.0 1 30\n11 66 4.5 2 22\n161/ 2 99 6.0 2 30\n22 132 7.5 4 21\n271/ 2 165 9.0 4 27\n33 198† 10.5 † †\n* These figures are based on a double-acting pump with cylinder diameter 4 inches,\nstroke 7 1 /2 inches, working at 80%, efficiency.\n† Handworked pumps are unsuitable at a depth of 180 feet and over.\n(31) Not more than 1 diver shall be supplied from each air line.\nAir Pipe\n(32) The air pipe shall be constructed of alternate layers of rubber and\ncanvas and shall be reinforced with steel wire.\n(33) The piping shall have been tested by the manufacturer and shall\nwithstand a test pressure of 200 pounds per square inch without\nshowing any appreciable increase in diameter.\n(34) The manufacturer shall provide a certificate of test for each length of\npipe manufactured.\n\n(35) A length of about 50 feet of floating air hose may be attached to the\ndiver’s helmet to keep weight off the diver.\n(36) No person shall dive or be employed to dive under water unless—\n(a) a sufficient number of suitable and competent persons are also\nemployed in attendance on the diver, so as to ensure his or her\nsafety; and\n(b) there is provided and used suitable and sufficient diving\nequipment consisting of helmets, corselets, waterproof dresses\nto completely enclose a diver’s body, and warm clothing; and\n(c) such equipment to include at least 1 diving helmet and dress with\nits necessary equipment and warm clothing in excess of the\nnumber of divers under water at any one time; and\n(d) sufficient and suitable diving plant and equipment, including air\npumps, pressure gauges and means of access to and from the\nwater are provided and properly maintained.\nCare and testing of equipment—hand pumps\n(37) Pumps shall be maintained in an efficient condition and shall be\ncapable of delivering the necessary quantity of air against pressure\nfor at least 2 divers.\n(38) Particular care shall be given to the condition of the leather piston\ncups and piston rod glands to prevent leakage.\n(39) Pump delivery shall be measured at least every 3 months and at\nshorter intervals if the pump has not been performing satisfactorily.\n(40) The pump cylinder walls and pistons shall be lubricated only with\nolive oil or neatsfoot oil.\n(41) Standby pumps where provided and when not in use shall be turned\nfor a period of 5 minutes at least once in every week.\n\nCare and testing of equipment—gauges\n(42) Gauges shall be calibrated by a method approved by the chief\ninspector at least every 3 months or at shorter intervals if error is\nsuspected.\n(43) The gauge error, as determined by test, shall be tabulated and a copy\nof the tabulation shall be displayed inside the pump lid.\nCare and testing of equipment—inlet valves\n(44) Inlet valves of helmets in use shall be tested at least once in\nevery 3 months at a pressure of not less than 15 pounds per square\n(45) The springs shall be examined on every occasion before use and at\nleast once in every day while the helmets are in use.\nCare and testing of equipment—air pipes\n(46) Air pipes shall be tested at least once a month and immediately before\neach descent to a pressure equivalent to 25% greater than that at the\ngreatest depth at which a diver is likely to work.\n(47) The air pipe shall be lashed to ring bolts on the pump chest to relieve\nthe connection of the air pipe to the pump nozzle of any undue load\nfrom the weight of the air pipe.\n(48) The connection shall be inspected at frequent intervals.\n(49) All air pipe connections shall be effectively lashed to prevent\ninadvertent disconnection.\nCare and testing of equipment—ropes and lines\n(50) Breast ropes, shot ropes and distance lines shall be of tarred hemp or\nother approved material.\n(51) Ropes shall be carefully handled and shall not be sharply bent.\n\nCare and testing of equipment—dress and equipment\n(52) All diving dress and equipment on the works shall be kept when not\nin use in a substantially constructed room or locker, and such room or\nlocker shall not be used for the storage of any other gear, tools, or\nequipment used on the works.\nCare and testing of equipment—general\n(53) Air pipes, valves, cocks, corselets, helmets, diving dresses, gauges,\nropes, lanyards, and all other apparatus shall be maintained in an\nefficient condition, cleaned with fresh water after use, drained and\ndried before being stored in the room or locker provided for the\npurpose.\n(54) Particular care shall be taken to ensure that air pipes and diving\ndresses are kept free from condensed moisture and from contact with\ngrease, oil or tar.\n(55) Material for dress repairs shall be provided and made available on the\nsite of the works.\nWarm clothing\n(56) Separate sets of warm clothing, woollens or flannels, shall be\nprovided for each diver.\n(57) A diver shall not be required to wear clothing previously worn by\nanother diver unless the clothing has been first thoroughly washed\nand disinfected.\nDiving dress previously worn\n(58) A diver shall not be required to wear a diving dress previously worn\nby another person unless the inner surfaces of the dress have been\nfirst thoroughly washed with hot water and soap and dried in the sun.\n\nDistance line\n(59) A diver working on muddy or dangerous ground shall use a distance\nline firmly attached to the shot rope about 3 feet above the sinker.\nPower driven compressor units—high pressure air supply\n(60) A supply of air at high pressure may be drawn for the use of divers\nfrom either the works compressor or a compressor supplying divers\nequipment only.\nPower driven compressor units—compressor\n(61) The compressor shall be capable of delivering air at the required\npressure and at a rate sufficient to meet the requirements of all divers,\nmachines, tools and other compressed air equipment supplied from it.\n(62) The compressor shall be of such construction that overheating does\nnot take place, and the lubricant used shall be odourless and shall\nproduce a minimum amount of noxious fumes if overheating should\ninadvertently take place.\n(63) Provision shall be made at the compressor to prevent undue pressure\nbuilding up if the delivery pipe from the compressor becomes blocked\nin any way.\n(64) This provision shall take the form of a safety valve on the air chest of\nthe compressor or on the delivery pipe as it leaves the compressor.\n(65) If the air is supplied by a compressor of such construction, size, or\narrangement that, in the event of a breakdown of the power unit, it\ncannot be instantly worked by hand, the following equipment\nconnected in the order set down in this section shall be used in\nconjunction with the compressor.\n(66) First, a main air receiver of sufficient capacity shall be connected to\nsupply the maximum number of divers with sufficient air to bring\nthem to the surface in reasonable time in the event of a breakdown of\nthe compressor power unit.\n\n(67) The pressure maintained in this receiver shall be much higher than\nthat corresponding to the depths of water where the divers are\nworking.\n(68) Every such air receiver shall be designed and constructed in\naccordance with the Standards Australia, Boiler Code.\n(69) Second, an efficient non-return inlet valve shall be connected on the\nreceiver to prevent back flow of air for failure of the delivery pipe or\nits fittings.\n(70) Third, a subsidiary air receiver fitted with a spring loaded type safety\nvalve shall be connected.\n(71) Forth, an approved type of pressure-reducing valve fitted in the pipe\nline between the main air receiver and the subsidiary air receiver shall\nbe connected.\n(72) Fifth, an air filter of approved type shall be connected in the pipe line\nbetween the subsidiary air receiver and the air control panel.\n(73) Sixth, an air control panel of robust construction equipped with an\nair-distributing arrangement of throttle valves, depth gauges and\nsubsidiary receiver pressure gauge, controlling the air supply to the\ndivers shall be connected.\n(74) The throttle valves shall be of the slow acting needle valve type, fitted\nwith graduated dial and pointer and only 1 diver shall be supplied\nfrom each such valve.\n(75) The air control panel shall be connected to the air filters by suitable\nflexible hose and each such hose shall be so supported that undue\nstrain is not imposed on the air filter or air control panel connectors.\n(76) Seventh, emergency air connections and stop valves on the diver’s\nside of each throttle valve on the air control panel shall be connected.\n(77) Eighth, a manual pump or other reliable source of air supply shall be\nconnected and shall remain connected throughout diving operations.\n\n(78) The fittings and equipment mentioned in subsections (66) to (77)\nshall be constructed, used and maintained in accordance with the\nStandards Australia Code for Work in Compressed Air, Part II—\nDiving, as at 1 July 1950.\n(79) The control of the air supply shall be in charge of a competent\nattendant whose duties shall be restricted to the operation of the\ncontrol panel and attendance on not more than 1 diver.\n(80) When several divers are operating from the 1 air control panel, each\ndiver shall have a separate attendant.\n(81) Ladders for divers shall be capable of supporting a safe working load\nof 4 hundredweights on any one rung.\nSignalling system\n(82) No person shall dive or be employed to dive under water unless—\n(a) arrangements are made for a suitable signalling system between\nthe diver and persons on the surface; and\n(b) the diver and all persons in attendance on the diver are\nconversant with the signalling system.\nMeals\n(83) A diver who is to work under water at a depth of over 30 feet shall\nnot have a meal within 1/ 2 an hour of beginning to dive and the last\nmeal before diving should only be a light one.\nDressing and sending down diver\n(84) The diver shall be dressed by the following routine method:\n(a) air pipe and breast rope connected to helmet;\n(b) telephone tested (if used);\n\n(c) diver dressed in woollens;\n(d) diving dress and shoulder pads put on;\n(e) corselet placed on diver, care being taken to clear the inner collar\nof creases and with number marked on the corselet\ncorresponding with the helmet number;\n(f) jock strap, if used;\n(g) boots, with buckles outward, drawn on, and lanyards if used, to\nbe well secured above the boots around the suit;\n(h) helmet, without front glass, to be secured in position;\n(i) air pipe and breast rope to be secured respectively to the left and\nright side of the body;\n(j) belt, with knife (if used) attached and hanging at left side, to be\nsecured in position;\n(k) pump to be turned to enable diver to check air pipe connections;\n(l) diver to be placed on ladder and breast rope hitched to the\nladder;\n(m) weights to be placed in position, back one first;\n(n) helmet front glass to be screwed in position, but before doing so\ncare is to be taken that the diver clearly understands all\ninstructions relating to the work the diver is to undertake.\n(85) When the source of air supply is a power-driven compressor, the\nfollowing precautions, additional to those mentioned in\nsubsection (84), shall be taken:\n(a) before the helmet is secured in position, the attendant shall test\nthe air lines and valves through their full range;\n(b) if the diver suspects the presence of fumes or other impurities in\nthe air supply—the diver shall report the matter to the contractor\nor his or her representative.\n\nUndressing Diver\n(86) A suitable room, shed, screen or cover shall be provided for the use\nof a diver when undressing.\n(87) Procedure, the reverse of that required by subsections (84) and (85),\nshall be adopted in undressing a diver.\n(88) Each diver should do further light exercise after undressing.\nAttendants\n(89) Each diver, while under water, shall have an attendant to hold the\nbreast rope and air pipe.\n(90) A sufficient number of other workers, if warranted, shall be stationed\nto see that the breast rope and air pipe pay out clear and also to coil\ndown the rope and pipe when required.\n(91) When a diver is working at depths greater than 100 feet, an additional\nworker shall be available, if warranted, to watch the air pipe.\n(92) Every breast rope and air pipe shall be held clear of the gunwale and\nshall be kept moderately taut but care shall be taken not to have them\nso taut as to inconvenience the diver.\n(93) The attendant shall maintain such control of the breast rope as to\nprevent the diver accidentally falling from staging or from rocks.\n(94) Each attendant shall give his or her whole attention to his or her\ncharge from the time the diver steps onto the ladder until the diver\nreturns to the surface.\n(95) The diver shall keep a close watch on the depth gauge to note changes\nin depth.\nRecords\n(96) The times of a diver’s descent and ascent shall be taken by an accurate\ntimepiece and recorded, as also shall be all changes of depth and\n\ngauge readings when a diver is working at depths greater than 16\nfathoms.\n(97) All records shall be carefully preserved and made available to an\ninspector as and when required by the inspector.\nGeneral Precautions\n(98) The symptoms and treatment of compressed air illness as set out in\nthe schedule 9 shall be kept exhibited in a conspicuous position on\nthe works.\n(99) A diver who has been blown up shall be sent down again to the\noriginal depth, but care shall be exercised that the diver has a firm\nhold of the shot rope or that the attendants have taken in the slack of\nthe breast rope and air pipe, before the valve is opened to allow the\ndiver to descend.\n(100) Special care shall be taken to prevent a diver, who is working under\na large flat surface, being blown up.\n(101) If the diver is inadvertently blown up, provision shall be made for the\ndiver to be cleared without risk of injury.\n(102) When an additional pump is to be connected by means of a four-way\nconnection, the additional pump shall be operated against the shut\ncock until the gauge shows the same pressure as the other pump\ndelivering air for the diver, before the cock may be opened.\n(103) When a pump is to be disconnected with the diver down, the cock on\nthat pump connection shall first be shut.\n(104) The air pipes serving 2 divers shall on no account be joined up to the\nsame junction.\n(105) If 1 hand pump is used to serve 2 divers, each diver’s air supply shall\nbe independently controlled by a suitable air-distributing valve.\n(106) This section shall apply to any diving operation that is a compressed\nair work within the meaning of the Act.\n\n(1) This section shall apply to any tunnelling operation that is a\ncompressed air work within the meaning of the Act.\n(2) No person shall work or be employed in tunnelling—\n(a) at pressures up to 30 pounds per square inch if the person is over\n50 years old; or\n(b) at pressures over 30 pounds per square inch if the person is over\n45 years old.\n(3) No person under 20 years old shall work or be employed in tunnelling\nwork in compressed air.\n(4) However, in exceptional circumstances the medical officer may set\naside the age limits in individual cases.\n(5) A legally qualified doctor shall be appointed to carry out the duties\nthat are prescribed by this section as being the duties of a medical\nofficer.\n(6) The chief inspector shall be notified in writing of the name and\naddress of the medical officer immediately after he or she is\nappointed.\nAppointment of medical officers—medical orderly\n(7) When the working pressure exceeds 25 pounds per square inch an\nexperienced medical orderly shall be constantly in attendance for the\npurpose of recompressing any person who shows symptoms of\n\ncompressed air illness, and for the purpose of attending to minor\ninjuries.\n(8) The medical orderly shall be a person approved by the medical officer\nand, preferably, shall be the holder of a St. John Ambulance\ncertificate or equivalent qualification.\n(9) The medical orderly may work on other duties provided these are\nsuch that he or she will be readily available for medical orderly duties\nwhen required.\n(10) No person shall work or be employed to work in compressed air\nunless on or after the date the person has been examined by an\nappointed medical officer, and has been certified by the officer as\nbeing fit to work in compressed air.\n(11) The examination shall include an X-ray examination of the chest.\n(12) The medical officer’s report shall be kept and produced to an\nSupervision of health during work\n(13) It shall be the duty of the medical officer to inform each person at the\norgans, a chill, or any other disease that may come on the person\nduring or after work may have the most serious consequences to his\nor her health and the person shall be instructed that immediately on\nnoticing any such indisposition the person must report it to the\nmedical officer, or to a medical orderly, or failing either, to the\ncontractor or a responsible representative of the contractor.\n(14) The symptoms and treatment of compressed air illness as mentioned\nin schedule 9 shall be exhibited in a conspicuous position in the\nworkers’s change room.\n(15) A contractor shall not allow any person—\n\nor any other illness or disease, or\n(b) under the influence of intoxicating liquor;\nto enter any compressed air chamber.\n(16) Persons employed continuously in compressed air shall be medically\nre-examined regularly at the following intervals:\n(a) at pressures not exceeding 25 pounds per square inch—every\n6 months;\n(b) at pressures exceeding 25 pounds per square inch but not\nexceeding 35 pounds per square inch—every 3 months;\n(c) at pressures exceeding 35 pounds per square inch but not\nexceeding 45 pounds per square inch—every 6 weeks;\n(d) at pressures exceeding 45 pounds per square inch—every\n4 weeks.\n(17) Unless so re-examined and found fit as mentioned in this section no\nperson shall work, or be employed to work in compressed air.\n(18) Any employee who has been absent from work for more than 7 days\nowing to illness of any kind, or who has been absent from work due\nto any other cause, except for recreation, for a period of more\nthan 3 weeks shall not work or be employed to work in compressed\nair without first producing a certificate of fitness from the medical\nofficer.\n(19) No person shall work or be employed to work in compressed air after\n12 months, or any lesser period that the medical officer may\ndetermine, has elapsed.\n(20) Every person not accustomed to work in compressed air shall be\ntested to the working pressure obtaining at his or her place of work\nby being subjected to the pressure in the medical or airlock.\n\n(21) If the employee shows serious symptoms after test, or after the first 2\nfull working periods, the employee shall not work in compressed air.\nCompressed air workers’ badge\n(22) It shall be the duty of a contractor employing persons to work in\ncompressed air to supply to every such person a compressed air\nworkers’ badge.\n(23) It shall be the duty of every person employed or working in\ncompressed air to, at all times, wear a compressed air workers’ badge.\n(24) Every compressed air workers’ badge shall be manufactured and used\nin the way mentioned in section 99 (17) to (19).\nSafe working periods—general\n(25) Except in case of emergency, no person shall work or be employed to\nwork in compressed air for longer in any period of 24 hours than the\nperiod corresponding to the pressure in which the work is carried out\nas set out in table 100:\nTable 100\ngauge pressure\nworking period gauge pressure\nworking period\n0-15 8 hours 40-50 3 hours\n15-25 6 hours 50-55 2 hours\n25-40 4 hours 55-60 1 1/ 2 hours\n(26) Provided that—\n(a) the 8 hour and 6 hour working periods each include a meal break\nof 1/ 2 an hour; and\n(b) the 8 hour working period includes times required for\ncompression and decompression, but the other working periods\n\nshown in the table do not include times for those purposes nor\ntime occupied in changing shifts.\nSafe working periods—observation period\n(27) After decompression from pressures between 25 and 40 pounds per\nsquare inch, all persons shall be detained for observation\nfor 45 minutes before leaving the site of the work.\n(28) This period of detention shall be increased to 1 hour after\ndecompression from pressures between 40 and 60 pounds per square\nCompression\n(29) During compression, the pressure shall be increased gradually and\nuniformly to ensure that no person is distressed.\n(30) The rate of compression shall not exceed 5 pounds per square inch\nper minute.\n(31) Decompression shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions\nof schedule 7, table 7.3.\n(32) However, at pressures lower than 18 pounds per square inch,\ndecompression shall be conducted at a rate that will not\ninconvenience any person, but shall not be completed in less\nthan 5 minutes.\n(33) A copy of schedule 7, table 7.3 shall be posted in the man-lock.\nAirlock attendants\n(34) Every airlock shall be serviced only by a reliable, and specially\ntrained and selected person.\n\n(35) The airlock attendant, if without previous experience of either\nworking in or controlling airlocks, shall be specially trained.\n(36) The airlock attendant shall at no time operate more than 1 man-lock.\n(37) The airlock attendant shall remain outside the lock near the entrance,\nand shall not be employed for more than 8 hours in any 24 hours.\n(38) Written instructions about the gauge pressure in the working chamber\nand compression and decompression times shall be given to each\n(39) A copy of the instructions shall be suitably exhibited in a conspicuous\nposition near the man-lock.\nAirlock records\n(40) A record of workers employed in compressed air shall be kept.\n(41) This record shall show for each employee the period of stay in the\nworking chamber, the gauge pressure and the time taken for\ndecompression.\n(42) When the working pressure exceeds 20 pounds per square inch,\nautomatic recording instruments shall be installed to record the\npressure in the working chamber and in the man-locks, and these\nrecords shall be carefully kept.\n(43) All the records shall be made available to an inspector on demand at\nall reasonable times.\nMan-lock—size\n(44) Each bulkhead shall be provided with 1 operating man-lock\nand 1 emergency man-lock, each of sufficient size to hold at any one\ntime the entire force of workers engaged in any 2 successive shifts,\nwith a minimum of 3 square feet of floor space per worker.\n\nMan-lock—access\n(45) The door between the man-lock and the working chamber shall\nremain open except during compression and decompression and\nduring the procedure of passing material through the lock.\n(46) In tunnels of large diameter the emergency man-lock shall be near the\nroof and within the protection of the safety curtain, with proper access\nto it from both inside and outside.\n(47) In tunnels of small diameter if it is not practicable to provide an\nemergency man-lock near the roof, the emergency chamber with\nsafety door shall be at the end of the operating man-lock nearer the\nworking face, and shall be of the same size as the operating man-lock.\n(48) The safety door shall never be closed while there is any person in the\n(49) Except in an emergency, the workers shall be prohibited from\nemerging through the material locks, or, when the material lock and\nthe man-lock are one and the same, the material lock valves shall not\nbe used when workers are in the lock.\nMan-lock—fittings\n(50) Every lock in which persons are compressed or are decompressed\nshall be fitted with a suitable instrument panel on which shall be\nmounted the necessary pressure gauges in duplicate, an accurate\ntimepiece and a copy of schedule 7, table 7.3.\n(51) The instrument panel shall be adequately illuminated.\n(52) The man-lock shall have valves both inside and outside the lock.\n(53) The valves to which the airlock attendant has not access shall be\ncovered with a case, the door of which is locked and has a glass panel\nthat may be broken in case of emergency so as to permit the valves to\nbe operated.\n\n(54) Except in case of emergency, valves shall only be operated by the\nMedical lock\n(55) A medical lock at least 5 feet in diameter shall be provided when work\nis being carried out at a pressure of 25 pounds per square inch or over.\n(56) Should any case of compressed air illness occur when the working\npressure is less than 25 pounds per square inch, it may be dealt with\nin the man-lock.\n(57) The medical lock shall have 2 compartments, so that entry may be\nobtained to the inner chamber while it is under pressure.\n(58) The lock shall be adequately ventilated, protected from the direct rays\nof the sun or adequately heated if required, and shall be adequately\nlighted.\n(59) The lock and its equipment shall be kept in a clean state.\n(60) The lock shall be provided with suitable equipment including a couch\nnot less than 6 feet in length, clean blankets, dry woollen garments, a\nfood lock and a telephone.\n(61) The medical lock shall be located within the immediate vicinity of the\nworks and arrangements shall be made to ensure that the lock is ready\nfor operation during the 12 hours after the end of any shift.\n(62) The medical lock shall be equipped with a small, glazed aperture so\nthat a patient under treatment in the lock can be kept under\nobservation by the attendant from outside the lock.\n(63) It shall be provided with a pressure gauge and an accurate timepiece\nfor each compartment.\n(64) The timepiece and the pressure gauge for the main compartment shall\nbe in a position that they can be readily seen by the attendant whether\nthe attendant is inside or outside the lock.\n\nAdditional bulkhead\n(65) Wherever the gauge pressure in the working chamber\nexceeds 30 pounds per square inch, a 2nd bulkhead with airlocks\nshall be provided after the tunnel has been constructed for a\nreasonable distance.\n(66) The working pressure in the outer section shall be maintained at\napproximately 1/ 2 of the absolute pressure in the working chamber.\nCommunication\n(67) The working chamber and the airlock shall be in telephonic\ncommunication at all times with the airlock attendant, who shall also\nbe provided with telephonic or other satisfactory means of\ncommunicating with the contractor or his or her representative on the\nworks.\n(68) The contractor shall depute a representative to be at all times available\nfor communication with the airlock attendant.\n(69) In the event of telephone failure, signals shall be transmitted by\ntapping.\n(70) A suitable code of signals shall be formulated on the job and a copy\nof this code shall be posted inside and outside the man-lock.\nOverhead gangway\n(71) In all tunnels 16 feet and over in diameter or height, an overhead\ngangway shall be provided from the working face to the nearest\nairlock.\n(72) An overhead clearance of 6 feet shall be maintained unless otherwise\n\nSafety curtains\n(73) Safety curtains shall be provided in all tunnels if there is the\npossibility of a ‘blow’ causing an inrush of water or material being\nexcavated.\n(74) The safety curtain shall at no time be distant more than 200 feet from\nthe working face.\nFire precautions\n(75) If danger of fire exists, a fire hose at least 50 feet in length with a\nsuitable nozzle connected, shall be provided on both sides of the\ntunnel bulkhead.\n(76) Water lines shall extend into the tunnel with a hose connection every\n200 feet, and this system shall be maintained ready for use at all times.\nLighting\n(77) All lighting in compressed air chambers shall be by electricity only,\nexcept in cases of emergency.\n(78) One worker in the airlock shall be provided with an electric pocket\nlamp, and candles and damp-proof matches shall be provided in the\nworking chamber and in each man-lock.\n(79) All portable incandescent lamps shall be guarded by a wire cage large\nenough to enclose both lamp and socket.\n(80) The lamps shall be constructed in accordance with the Standards\nAustralia, Approval and Test Specification No C. 118, Electric Hand\nLamps.\nElectric installation—voltage\n(81) The voltage used for electric lighting circuits between the last\nbulkhead and the working face shall not exceed 32V for alternating\ncurrent and 50V for direct current.\n\nElectric installation—wiring\n(82) Except as otherwise provided in this regulation, all wiring for light\nand power circuits shall comply with the requirements of the S.A.A.\nWiring Rules, for damp or hazardous locations.\n(83) A minimum of 25 cubic feet of clean, fresh air shall be supplied each\nminute to each worker in the working chamber, and a minimum of 10\ncubic feet per minute to each worker in the man-lock.\n(84) In the event of any reduction of the air pressure below a point to be\nspecified from time to time by the engineer in charge of the work, the\nairlock attendant shall notify the workers in the working chamber, and\npreparations shall be made immediately for their withdrawal from the\nFree air intake\n(85) The free air intake shall be so situatedd as to ensure an ample supply\nof clean, fresh air.\n(86) The utmost care shall be taken to avoid contamination of the air by\nfumes from the exhausts of compression ignition or\ninternal-combustion engines and from all other sources.\nPurification and refrigeration of compressed air\n(87) An approved oil separator shall be used between the compressor and\nthe air receiver and an air filter of approved type shall be installed\nbetween the air receiver and the working chamber.\n(88) The air shall be cooled after compression, if necessary, so that the\ntemperature in the working chamber does not exceed 80° Fahrenheit\nwhen measured with a dry bulb thermometer.\n\nCompressed air plant\n(89) If the air compressor, used for supplying air under pressure for the\npurposes of compressed air work in tunnelling is driven by electric\npower, stand-by compressor plant shall be provided and shall be of\nsuch capacity that, in the event of failure of the electrically-driven\nunits, at least 50% of the air supply may be maintained.\n(90) With other than electrically-powered compressors not more than 50%\nof the compressor units shall be driven from any 1 power unit and, if\npracticable, the power units shall be interchangeable.\nAir lines and fittings\n(91) Each air line shall be equipped with the following fittings connected\nin the order shown:\n(a) an air receiver of such capacity as to be capable of delivering at\nleast 2 000 cubic feet of air to the working chamber at normal\nworking pressure, for the purpose of reserve storage in the event\nof failure of the compressor plant;\n(b) a stop valve;\n(c) a pressure-reducing valve located close to the man-lock;\n(d) a non-return valve located close to the man-lock.\n(92) The air supply shall be through duplicate air lines between the air\nreceiver and the working chamber.\n(93) An adjustable safety valve shall be fitted on the outside of the\nbulkhead to a separate pipe leading from the working chamber\nthrough the bulkhead to the outside air.\nTesting of equipment\n(94) All locks and air receivers shall be subjected to test and inspection in\naccordance with the provisions of the Australian Standard Rules for\nthe Design, Construction, Inspection and Operation of Boilers and\n\nUnfired Pressure Vessels and their Appurtenances published by\nStandards Australia, as revised in May, 1942.\n(95) Pressure gauges shall be installed and tested in accordance with the\nrelevant provisions of the rules mentioned in subsection (94).\nChange rooms\n(96) Without prejudice to the requirements of part 10 (which among other\nthings relates to the provision of certain accommodation for the health\nof persons), there shall be provided and maintained for the use of\npersons employed in compressed air work in tunnelling—\n(a) properly heated, lighted and ventilated change rooms and drying\nrooms; and\n(b) bathing accommodation, namely, 1 shower equipped with\nrunning hot and cold water for every 8 men employed on the\nsame shift and 1 for every 8 women employed on the same shift,\nand 1 for any number less than 8 such men or women, as the\ncase requires; and\n(c) suitable and adequate earth or water closets at the rate of 1 closet\nfor every 10 men employed on the same shift and 1 for every 10\nwomen employed on the same shift, and 1 for any number less\nthan 10 such men or women, as the case requires.\nInformation to be posted in change room\n(97) A copy of the following information shall be posted in the change\nroom for the information and instruction of persons employed in\ncompressed air work in tunnelling:\n(a) subsections (13) to (21) and (98) to (100); and\n(b) schedule 9; and\n(c) the name, address, and telephone number of the medical officer.\n\nProhibition of smoking and intoxicating liquor\n(98) No person shall smoke in the man-lock or in the working chamber.\n(99) No person shall carry on his or her person any smoking materials\nwhile in the man-lock or in the working chamber but shall leave all\nsuch materials in the change room.\n(100) No intoxicating liquor shall be brought into the vicinity of the\nworking chamber, provided that the carrying of alcoholic spirits or\nother stimulants into such places for medical purposes may be\napproved by the medical officer.\nCopy of pt 8 to be available\n(101) A copy of this part shall be kept at the works office and shall be\navailable to every person on the works who is engaged in the\ncompressed air work.\n(1) No person shall work or be employed in compressed air work in\ncaissons—\n(a) at pressures up to 30 pounds per square inch if the person is over\n50 years old; or\n(b) at pressures over 30 pounds per square inch if the person is over\n45 years old.\n(2) No person under 20 years old shall work or be employed in\ncompressed air work in caissons.\n(3) However, in exceptional circumstances the medical officer may set\naside the age limits in individual cases.\n\n(4) A legally qualified doctor shall be appointed to carry out the duties\nprescribed by this regulation as the duties of a medical officer.\n(5) The chief inspector shall be notified in writing of the name and\naddress of the medical officer so appointed.\nMedical orderly\n(6) When the working pressure exceeds 25 pounds per square inch, an\nexperienced medical orderly shall be constantly in attendance for the\npurpose of recompressing any worker who shows symptoms of\ncompressed air illness and for attending to minor injuries.\n(7) The medical orderly shall be a person approved by the medical officer\nand the orderly shall be the holder of a St. John Ambulance certificate\nor equivalent qualifications.\n(8) The medical orderly may work on other duties provided these are\nsuch that the medical orderly will be readily available for medical\norderly duties when required.\nPreliminary medical examination\n(9) No person shall work or be employed to work in compressed air\nunless on or after such date the person has been examined by an\nappointed medical officer, and has been certified by the officer as\nbeing fit to work in compressed air.\n(10) The examination shall include an X-ray examination of the chest.\n(11) The medical officer’s report shall be kept and produced to an\n\nSupervision of health during compressed air work in caissons—advice to\nemployees\n(12) It shall be the duty of the medical officer to inform each person at the\norgans, a chill, or any other malady that may come on the person\nduring or after work in a caisson, may have the most serious\nconsequences to his or her health, and the person shall be instructed\nthat immediately on noticing any such indisposition the person must\nreport it to the medical officer, or to a medical orderly, or failing\neither, to the contractor or to a responsible representative of the\ncontractor.\n(13) The symptoms and treatment of compressed air illness as set out in\nschedule 9 shall be exhibited in a conspicuous position in the\nworkers’s change room.\nSupervision of health during compressed air work in caissons—entry prohibited\n(14) A contractor shall not allow any person—\nor any other illness or disease, or\n(b) under the influence of intoxicating liquor,\nto be employed in compressed air work in a caisson.\nSupervision of health during compressed air work in caissons—periodical\nmedical examination\n(15) If persons work continuously in compressed air in caissons they shall\nbe re-examined regularly at the following intervals:\n(a) for pressures not exceeding 25 pounds per square inch—every 6\nmonths;\n\n(b) for pressures above 25 pounds and not exceeding 35 pounds per\nsquare inch—every 3 months;\n(c) for pressures above 35 pounds and not exceeding 45 pounds per\nsquare inch—every 6 weeks;\n(d) for pressures above 45 pounds per square inch—every 4 weeks.\n(16) Unless so re-examined and found fit as mentioned in this section, no\nperson shall work or be employed to work in compressed air.\nExamination after absence\n(17) An employee who has been absent from work in compressed air in\ncaissons, due to illness of any kind for a period of more than 7 days,\nor who has been absent from such work due to any other cause, except\nfor recreation, for a period of more than 3 weeks shall not work or be\nemployed to work in compressed air without first producing a\ncertificate of fitness from the medical officer.\nNew employees\n(18) Every person who is not accustomed to work in compressed air shall\nbe tested to the working pressure in the medical or airlock.\n(19) If any person shows serious symptoms after test, or after the\nfirst 2 full working periods, the person shall not work in compressed\nair.\nX-ray examination\n(20) No person shall work or be employed to work in compressed air after\n12 months, or any less a period that the medical officer may\ndetermine, has elapsed from the date of the last X-ray examination of\nhis or her chest.\n\nCompressed air worker’s badge\n(21) It shall be the duty of a contractor to supply to every person engaged\nin compressed air work in caissons in his or her employ a compressed\nair worker’s badge.\n(22) It shall be the duty of every person engaged in compressed air work\nin caissons at all times to wear a compressed air worker’s badge.\n(23) A compressed air worker’s badge shall be made of non-corrodible\nmetal and shall be arranged to be worn either in a coat lapel or\nsuspended by a chain or cord placed round the neck.\n(24) Every badge shall be manufactured in accordance with the provisions\nof section 99 (18) and (19)\nWorking periods—general\n(25) Except in case of emergency, no person shall work or be employed to\nwork in compressed air for longer in any period of 24 hours, than the\nperiod corresponding to the pressure in which the work is carried out\nas set out in table 101.\nTable 101\ngauge pressure\nworking period gauge pressure\nworking period\n0-15 8 hours 40-50 3 hours\n15-25 6 hours 50-55 2 hours\n25-40 4 hours 55-60 11/ 2 hours\n(26) Provided that—\n(a) the 8 hour and 6 hour working periods each include a meal break\nof 1/ 2 an hour; and\n(b) the 8 hour working period includes times required for\ncompression and decompression, but the other working periods\n\nshown in table 101 do not include times for those purposes nor\ntime occupied in changing shifts.\nObservation period\n(27) After decompression from pressures between 25 and 40 pounds per\nsquare inch, all persons shall be kept for observation for 45 minutes\nbefore leaving the site of the work.\n(28) This period of detention shall be increased to 1 hour after\ndecompression from pressures between 40 and 60 pounds per square\nCompression\n(29) During compression the pressure shall be increased gradually and\nuniformly to ensure that no person is distressed.\n(30) The rate of compression shall not exceed 5 pounds per square inch\nper minute.\n(31) Decompression shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions\nof schedule 7, table 7.3, provided that at pressures lower than 18\npounds per square inch decompression shall be conducted at a rate\nthat will not inconvenience any person, but shall not be completed in\nless than 5 minutes.\n(32) A copy of schedule 7, table 7.3, shall be posted in the man-lock.\nAirlock Attendants\n(33) Every airlock shall be served only by a reliable, and specially trained\nand selected person.\n(34) The airlock attendant, if without previous experience of either\nworking in or controlling airlocks, shall be specially trained.\n\n(35) The airlock attendant shall at no time operate more than 1 man-lock.\n(36) The airlock attendant shall remain outside the lock near the entrance,\nand shall not be employed for more than 8 hours in any 24 hours.\nAirlock records\n(37) A record of workers employed in compressed air shall be kept.\n(38) This record shall show for each employee the period of stay in the\nworking chamber, the gauge pressure and the time taken for\ndecompression.\nMan-lock—size\n(39) The chambers serving for compression and decompression shall be of\nsuch dimensions that the space available to each person using the\nchambers at any time shall be at least equal to 16 cubic feet with a\nminimum floor space of 3 square feet per person.\nMan-lock—access\n(40) The door between the man-lock and the working chamber shall\nremain open except during compression and decompression and\nduring the procedure of passing material through the lock.\n(41) A ladder conforming to the requirements of this regulation shall be\navailable for access to and from the working chambers.\nMan-lock—fittings\n(42) Every lock in which persons are compressed or decompressed shall\nbe fitted with a suitable instrument panel on which shall be mounted\nthe necessary pressure gauges in duplicate, an accurate timepiece, and\ndecompression tables or charts.\n(43) The instrument panel shall be adequately lighted.\n\n(44) The man-lock shall be fitted with valves both inside and outside the\nlock.\n(45) The valves to which the airlock attendant has no access shall be sealed\nin a box provided with a glass panel that can be broken to permit the\nuse of the valves in case of emergency.\n(46) Except in cases of emergency valves shall be operated only by the\nRegulation of temperature in airlock\n(47) The temperature in every airlock shall be regulated as required by\nheating or by protection against loss of heat, or by protection against\nthe direct rays of the sun by means of a covering that can be sprayed\nwith water.\nCommunication\n(48) The working chamber and the airlock shall be in telephonic\ncommunication at all times with the airlock attendant, who shall also\nbe provided with telephonic or other satisfactory means of\ncommunicating with the contractor or his or her representative on the\nworks.\n(49) The contractor shall depute a representative to be at all times available\nfor communication with the airlock attendant.\n(50) In the event of telephone failure, signals shall be transmitted by\ntapping.\n(51) A suitable code of signals shall be formulated on the job and a copy\nof this code shall be posted inside and outside the man-lock.\nHeight of working chamber\n(52) The height of the working chamber, measured between the roof and\nthe lower cutting edge, shall be at least 8 feet.\n\nMedical lock\n(53) A medical lock at least 5 feet in diameter shall be provided when work\nis being carried out at a pressure of 25 pounds per square inch or over.\n(54) Should any case of compressed air illness occur when the working\npressure is less than 25 pounds per square inch it may be dealt with\nin the man-lock.\n(55) The medical lock shall have 2 compartments, so that entry may be\nobtained to the inner chamber while it is under pressure.\n(56) The medical lock shall be adequately ventilated, protected from the\ndirect rays of the sun or adequately heated if required, and it shall be\nadequately lighted.\n(57) The lock and its equipment shall be kept in a clean state.\n(58) The medical lock shall be provided with suitable equipment,\nincluding a couch not less than 6 feet in length, clean blankets, dry\nwoollen garments, a food lock and a telephone.\n(59) The medical lock shall be located within the immediate vicinity of the\nworks and arrangements shall be made to ensure that the lock is ready\nfor operation during the 12 hours after the end of any shift.\n(60) The medical lock shall be equipped with a small glazed aperture so\nthat a patient under treatment in the lock can be kept under\nobservation by the attendant from outside the lock.\n(61) It shall be provided with a pressure gauge and an accurate timepiece\nfor each compartment.\n(62) The timepiece and pressure gauge for the main compartment shall be\nin such a position that they can be readily seen by the attendant\nwhether the attendant is inside or outside the lock.\nLighting\n(63) All lighting in compressed air chambers shall be by electricity only,\nexcept in case of emergency.\n\n(64) One man in an airlock shall be provided with an electric pocket lamp,\nand candles and damp-proof matches shall be provided in the working\nchamber and in each airlock.\n(65) All portable incandescent lamps shall be guarded by a wire cage large\nenough to enclose both lamp and socket.\n(66) The lamps shall be constructed in accordance with the provisions of\nStandards Australia, Approval and Test Specification No C. 118,\nentitled Electric Hand-Lamps.\nElectric installation—voltage\n(67) The voltage used for electrical apparatus and lights in compressed air\nchambers shall not exceed 32V for alternating current supply\nand 50V for direct current supply.\nElectric installation—wiring\n(68) Except as otherwise provided in this regulation, all wiring for light\nand power circuits shall comply with the requirements of the\nStandards Australia Wiring Rules for damp or hazardous locations.\n(69) A minimum of 25 cubic feet of clean fresh air shall be supplied per\nminute to each worker in the working chamber, and a minimum of 10\ncubic feet per minute to each worker in the man-lock.\n(70) In the event of a failure of the air supply exceeding 5 minutes in\nduration, all workers shall be withdrawn from the working chamber.\nFree air intake\n(71) The free air intake shall be so situatedd as to ensure an ample supply\nof clean, fresh air.\n\n(72) Care shall be taken to avoid contamination of the air by fumes from\nthe exhausts of compression ignition and internal-combustion\nengines and from all other sources.\nPurification and refrigeration of compressed air\n(73) An approved oil separator shall be used between the compressor and\nthe air receiver and an approved air filter shall be placed between the\nair receiver and the working chamber.\n(74) The air shall be cooled after compression, if necessary, to ensure that\nthe temperature in the working chamber does not exceed 80°\nFahrenheit when measured with a dry bulb thermometer.\nCompressed air plant\n(75) If the air compressor, used for supplying air under pressure for the\npurposes of compressed air work in caissons is driven by electric\npower, stand-by compressor plant shall be provided and shall be of\nthe capacity that in the event of failure of the electrically-driven units\nat least 50% of the air supply may be maintained.\n(76) With other than electrically-powered compressors not more than 50%\nof the compressor units shall be driven from any 1 power unit and, if\npracticable, the power units shall be interchangeable.\nAir lines and fittings\n(77) Each air line shall be equipped with the following fittings connected\nin the following order:\n(a) an air receiver of such capacity as to be capable of delivering at\nleast 50 cubic feet of air to the working chamber at normal\nworking pressure, for the purpose of reserve storage in the event\nof failure of the compressor plant;\n(b) a stop valve;\n(c) a pressure-reducing valve located close to the man-lock;\n\n(d) a non-return valve located close to the man-lock.\n(78) The air supply shall be through duplicate air lines between the air\nreceiver and the working chamber.\n(79) An adjustable safety valve shall be fitted on the outside of the airlock,\nexhausting to the outside air.\nTesting of equipment—general\n(80) All airlocks, shafts and air receivers shall be subjected to test in\naccordance with the provisions of the Australian Standard Rules\nrecommended for the Design, Construction, Inspection and Operation\nof Boilers and Unfired Pressure Vessels and their Appurtenances\npublished by Standards Australia as revised in May, 1942.\nTesting of equipment—pressure gauges\n(81) Pressure gauges shall be installed and tested in accordance with the\nrelevant provisions of the rules mentioned in subsection (80).\nChange rooms\n(82) Without prejudice to the requirements of part 10 (which among other\nthings relates to the provision of certain accommodation for the health\nof persons) there shall be provided and maintained for the use of\npersons employed in compressed air work in caissons—\n(a) properly heated, lighted and ventilated change rooms and drying\nrooms; and\n(b) bathing accommodation, namely 1 shower equipped with\nrunning hot and cold water for every 8 men employed on the\nsame shift and 1 for every 8 women employed on the same shift,\nand 1 for any number less than 8 such men or women, as the\ncase requires; and\n\n(c) suitable and adequate earth or water closets at the rate of 1 closet\nfor every 10 men employed on the same shift and 1 for every 10\nwomen employed on the same shift, and 1 for any number less\nthan 10 such men or women, as the case requires.\nInformation to be posted in change room\n(83) A copy of the following information shall be posted in the change\nroom for the information and instruction of persons engaged in\ncompressed air work in caissons:\n(a) schedule 9, concerning the Symptoms and Treatment of\nCompressed Air Illness;\n(b) section 101 (12) to (17);\n(c) the name, address and telephone number of the medical officer.\nProhibition of smoking and intoxicating liquor\n(84) No person shall smoke in a man-lock or working chamber.\n(85) No person shall carry smoking materials into a man-lock or into a\n(86) All such smoking materials shall be left in the change room.\n(87) No person shall bring any intoxicating liquor into the vicinity of the\nworking chamber, provided that the carrying of alcoholic spirits or\nother stimulants into such places for medical purposes may be\napproved by the medical officer.\nRegulation to be available\n(88) A copy of this section shall be kept on the works so as to be easily\naccessible to all persons who are responsible for giving effect to its\nprovisions.\n(89) This section shall apply to compressed air work in caissons, being a\ncompressed air work within the meaning of the Act.\n\n","sortOrder":18},{"sectionNumber":"Part 9A","sectionType":"part","heading":"Explosive-powered tools—safety","content":"Part 9A Explosive-powered tools—safety\nmeasures\nApplication and interpretation\n118A\n(1) This part shall apply to and in relation to the use of explosive-powered\ntools in building work, excavation work and compressed air work.\n(2) In this part:\nexplosive-powered tool means a tool by which a projectile may be\ndriven against, into or through any substance by means of an\nexplosive, and includes every attachment to and accessory of the tool\nand every device used or adopted or intended to be used with it.\nprojectile means stud, pin, dowel screw, rivet, spike or other object\ndriven against, into or through any substance by means of an\nexplosive-powered tool, or adapted or intended to be so driven.\nqualified operator means a person who—\n(a) is over 18 years old; and\n(b) has been thoroughly trained in the correct use, adjustment,\nassembly and taking apart of explosive-powered tools; and\n(c) has been fully instructed about the dangers associated with\nexplosive-powered tools and the precautions to be taken in\nrelation to them; and\n(d) has a thorough knowledge of this part.\ntool means explosive-powered tool.\nwork means building work, excavation work or compressed air work.\n\n(3) For this part, a person shall be deemed to use an explosive-powered\ntool if the person loads, unloads or fires, or attempts to load, unload\nor fire, the tool.\nOperators of explosive-powered tools\n118B\nOperators to be qualified\n(1) No person who is not a qualified operator shall use a tool in any work.\n(2) No person shall employ, instruct or allow any person to use a tool in\nany work without first ensuring by proper inquiry that the person is a\nqualified operator and is not because of any infirmity, disability or\nincapacity unfit to use the tool.\nTraining of operators\n(3) Nothing in subsection (1) or (2) shall apply to the use of any\nexplosive-powered tool by a person who, under the immediate\nsupervision and control of a qualified operator, is being trained to be\na qualified operator.\nGeneral requirements for explosive-powered tools and\nprojectiles\n118C\n(1) No person who directly or by his or her servants or agents carries out\nany work shall directly or by his or her servants or agents—\n(a) use in that work any tool unless—\n(i) the tool has been approved; and\n(ii) there is permanently engraved or embossed on the metal of\nthe tool a clearly legible notice as follows: ‘DO NOT\n\nREMOVE TOOL FROM WORK SURFACE FOR AT\nLEAST 10 SECONDS IF TOOL FAILS TO FIRE’; and\n(iii) there is permanently engraved or embossed on the metal of\nthe tool a clearly legible serial number by which it can be\nreadily identified; and\n(iv) there is permanently attached to the tool at its muzzle end\na protective shield or device designed to arrest the ricochet\nof projectiles and the free flight of other objects and\nparticles liberated by the firing of the tool; and\n(b) use in that work, in a tool, any projectile that is not capable of\nundergoing the following test without cracking or breaking:\n(i) smooth shanked projectiles shall be bent through an angle\nof 60°;\n(ii) knurled shanked projectiles shall be bent through an angle\nof 30°.\n(2) The test shall be carried out by bending the shank of the projectile\nabout a pin of a diameter equal to that of the shank of the projectile\nunder test.\n(3) The test shall be made by applying a continuous steady load to the\nprojectile until the required deformation has been reached.\nInspection and repair of explosive-powered tools\n118D\nInterpretation\nauthorised person means—\n(a) a maker of tools or a person authorised by the maker to\nrepair tools; or\n\n(b) a gunsmith; or\n(c) a competent person in the employment of a person referred\nto in paragraph (a) or (b).\ndefect means any defect that might impair or affect the safe and\nnormal operation of a tool.\nrepair means repair, modify, alter or adjust or attempt to repair,\nmodify, alter or adjust; but a qualified operator or a person who under\nthe immediate supervision and control of a qualified operator is being\ntrained to be a qualified operator shall not be deemed to repair a tool\nonly because of his or her making or attempting to make any minor\nadjustments to it that are incidental to its ordinary operation.\n(2) The person who directly or by his or her servants or agents carries out\nany building work—\n(a) shall cause each tool used in the work—\n(i) to be carefully inspected for defects on each day when it is\nso used, before it is so used; and\n(ii) after each 7 days use and before it is again used in any\nwork, to be dismantled and thoroughly examined for\ndefects; and\n(b) shall not directly or by his or her servants or agents use in the\nwork a tool that—\n(i) has not been inspected and examined as prescribed by\nparagraph (a); or\n(ii) has any defect that has been or should have been revealed\non the inspection or examination.\n(3) No person shall, knowing that a tool has any defect, use the tool in\nany work.\n\nRepair\n(4) No person other than an authorised person shall, knowing that a tool\nis being used or is intended to be used in work, repair the tool.\n(5) No person shall—\n(a) knowing that a tool is being used or is intended to be used in\nwork, employ, instruct or allow any person other than an\nauthorised person to repair the tool; or\n(b) knowing that a tool has been repaired by a person other than an\nauthorised person, use the tool in any work or employ, instruct\nor allow any person to use the tool in any work, unless it has\nsince been overhauled by an authorised person.\nUse of explosive-powered tools\n118E\n(1) No person shall use in any work, or employ, instruct or allow any\nperson to use in any work, any tool or other substance or thing\ncontrary to this section, or without the measures and precautions\nprescribed by this section being taken.\nLimitation of use—hard substances\n(2) No tool shall be used on high tensile steel, steel hardened by heat\ntreatment, cast iron or other unusually hard or unyielding substance.\n(3) In subsection (2):\nhigh tensile steel means steel the nominal ultimate tensile value of\nwhich exceeds 45 tons per square inch.\n\nReadily shattered substances\n(4) No tool shall be used on hard tile, hard terracotta, glazed brick, glass,\nmarble, granite, thin slate or other readily shattered substance.\nUse near edges and holes\n(5) No tool shall be used to drive a projectile into any substance—\n(a) at a point so close to an edge of the substance or to any hole in\nit that, because of the nature of the substance, the size and shape\nof the projectile or the strength of the charge to be used, there is\nany appreciable risk that the substance might crack or break or\nthe projectile fly from it; or\n(b) if the substance is steel—within 1/ 2 an inch of an edge of it; or\n(c) if the substance is brick, concrete or the like—within 3 inches of\nan edge of it.\nExplosive or dangerous atmosphere\n(6) No tool shall be used in the presence of an explosive or inflammable\ngas, dust or vapour, or in compressed air, or in any place where the\nexplosive charge might be exploded or rendered dangerous by heat.\nStrength of explosive charges\n(7) Every reasonable precaution, including if advisable the making of\nsuitable tests, shall be taken to ensure that the explosive charge used\nin a tool—\n(a) is of no greater strength than is necessary for the purpose for\nwhich the tool is being used; and\n(b) is not of such strength that the whole of the projectile might pass\nthrough the substance on which the tool is being used, unless the\nsubstance is backed by protective material capable of fully\nabsorbing the energy of the projectile.\n\nUse of barrel extensions\n(8) If the muzzle end of the barrel of a tool cannot be brought into contact\nwith any surface at the point where the projectile driven from the tool\nis to strike or penetrate the surface, an effective barrel extension shall\nbe used to extend the barrel into contact with the surface at that point.\n(9) The length of the barrel extension shall not exceed by more than 1/ 2 an\ninch the maximum length that is required to clear the obstruction that\nrenders the use of the barrel extension necessary.\nCare in handling of tools\n(10) Every person while using a tool or carrying or handling a loaded tool\nshall at all times—\n(a) keep all parts of his or her body clear of the open end of the\nbarrel of the tool and keep the end pointed away from himself or\nherself and all other persons; and\n(b) exercise the utmost care to avoid injury to himself or herself and\nothers.\nFiring of tools\n(11) No person shall fire a tool unless—\n(a) the person is in a safe, well-balanced position so that inadvertent\ntilting or misalignment of the tool at the time of firing will not\noccur; and\n(b) the person is holding the tool perpendicular to the surface on\nwhich the person is using the tool and so that the muzzle end of\nits barrel or barrel extension is in contact with that surface.\nMechanical failure\n(12) If when any person attempts to use a tool on any surface the tool fails\nto fire, the person shall continue to hold it perpendicular to and in\n\ncontact with the surface for at least 10 seconds, and if the tool has not\nthen fired the person shall unload it or place it in such a position that\nit will do no harm if it fires.\nRemoving foreign matter\n(13) A person using a tool shall, after each firing, carefully examine it and\nremove from it all pieces of projectile or cartridge and other foreign\nmatter that may be present.\nFlying projectiles\n(14) No person shall intentionally fire a tool in such a way as to cause the\nprojectile to fly free.\nUse of suitable equipment\n(15) There shall not be used in or with any tool any projectile, explosive\ncharge, breech plug, barrel extension or adaptor that is not of a type\ncorrectly suited to the particular tool and to the purpose for which the\ntool is being used.\n(16) No tool shall be used for a purpose for which it is not properly\nadapted.\nManufacturer’s recommendations\n(17) If there appears on the container of any tool or in any printed matter\nsupplied with any tool any instruction, advice or recommendation, not\ninconsistent with this regulation, about the safe use of the tool or the\nuse with it, for reasons of safety, of any substance or thing, the tool,\nsubstance or thing shall be used in accordance with the instruction,\nadvice or recommendation.\n(18) Subsection (17) does not require the use of any particular brand or\nmake of any substance or thing.\n\nCare and storage of explosive-powered tools and cartridges\n118F\nContainer for tools\n(1) The person who directly or by his or her servants or agents carries out\nany work in which any explosive-powered tool is used shall keep or\ncause to be kept each such tool, at all times when it is not required to\nbe removed for use, inspection, repair or other necessary purpose, in\nthe container supplied by the maker of the tool or in an equally\nsuitable container.\n(2) No person shall take or keep any explosive-powered tool out of its\ncontainer unless the tool is for the time being required for use,\ninspection, repair or other necessary purpose.\nSafekeeping of tools\n(3) No person shall leave unattended on the site of any work, or any\ncartridge intended for use in a tool, unless effective precautions are\ntaken to ensure that it will not be taken away, handled or used by\nunauthorised persons.\nLoaded tools\n(4) No person shall, elsewhere than at the place where the tool is to be\nused, load any tool for use in any work.\n(5) No person shall in the course of any work carry or transport a loaded\ntool from place to place, unless because of mechanical failure the tool\ncannot be unloaded.\nCartridges\n(6) The person who directly or by his or her servants or agents carries out\nany work in which a tool is used shall ensure that the cartridges for\n\nall such tools are kept in a metal container or metal containers, and\nshall ensure that each such container—\n(a) is kept clearly marked with the word ‘EXPLOSIVE’; and\n(b) is kept locked at all times except when cartridges are being\nplaced in it or removed from it; and\n(c) is not, while it is on the site of the work, opened except by a\nperson using a tool or assisting in the use of a tool; and\n(d) contains nothing except cartridges.\nProtective devices\n118G .\n(1) The contractor shall provide, for the use of each person employed by\nthe contractor in any work who in the work uses or assists in the use\nof an explosive-powered tool, an effective device of an approved type\nfor the protection of the eyes of the person from missiles and flying\nparticles.\n(2) The device so provided for the use of any person shall not be one that\nhas been used by any other person, unless it is of metal, plastic or\nother non-absorbent material and has been thoroughly cleaned.\n(3) No person for whose use such a device has been provided in\naccordance with this section shall in the work use or assist in the use\nof any tool unless the person is using that device.\nWarning notices\n118H\nAt all times when an explosive-powered tool is being used in any\nwork, the person who directly or by his or her servants or agents is\ncarrying out that work shall cause to be displayed on the site of the\nwork, so as to be clearly legible by all persons who are at or near the\nplace where the tool is being used, a notice or notices as follows:\n\nSection ‘Warning—Explosive-Powered Tool In Use’.\n‘Warning—Explosive-Powered Tool In Use’.\n\nPart 10 Measures to be taken for\nsecuring the health of persons in\nbuilding work, excavation work\nand compressed air work by\nprovision of first-aid equipment,\nshelter, change and dining\naccommodation, sanitary\nconveniences and washing\nfacilities\n(1) On every building work, excavation work or compressed air work\nwhere not more than 25 persons are employed, there shall be provided\na first-aid chest that shall be equipped and maintained to contain at\nleast the following requisites and appliances, unless otherwise\napproved:\nSolyptol solutions, 4 oz\ncastor oil, 1 oz with glass rod bulged, pendant\nsal volatile, 2 oz\n\nfinger dressings (12) To be of gauze 12 inches long ×\nadhesive strapping, 1 inch\n(1 reel)\ncotton wool, 4 oz to be sterile and to be enclosed in\nbicarbonate of soda, 2 oz to be sterile and enclosed in 1 oz\nboracic acid, 2 oz to be sterile and enclosed in 1 oz\nplain gauze, 1 yard enclosed in a sealed carton\nroller bandages, 1 inch (3) to be enclosed in a sealed envelope\ntriangular bandages (3) of 1st quality\nmedicine glass, 2 oz (1) to be marked for teaspoon,\ndressing forceps, 5 inch (1 pr)\nsplinter forceps, 5 inch (1 pr)\nscissors, 5 inch (1 pr)\ntowels (1) of 1st quality\n\nenamel basin, 7 1/ 2 inches\ndiam. (1)\nsafety pins (12) of 1st quality\n(2) On every building work, excavation work or compressed air work\nwhere more than 25 and not more than 100 persons are employed,\nthere shall be provided a first-aid chest that shall be equipped and\nmaintained to contain at least the following requisites and appliances\nunless otherwise approved:\nSolyptol solutions 8 oz\ncastor oil, 1 oz with glass rod bulged, pendant\nsal volatile, 4 oz\nfinger dressings (24) To be of gauze 12 inches long ×\nadhesive strapping, 1 inch\n(2 reels)\ncotton wool, 8 oz to be sterile and enclosed in 1 oz\n\nbicarbonate of soda, 4 oz to be sterile and enclosed in 1 oz\nboracic acid, 4 oz to be sterile and enclosed in 1 oz\nplain gauze (2 yds) in yard quantities each enclosed in a\nsealed carton\nroller bandages, 1 inch (6) to be enclosed in a sealed envelope\nroller bandages, 2 inch (6) to be enclosed in a sealed envelope\ntriangular bandages (4) of 1st quality\nmedicine glass, 2 oz (1) to be marked for teaspoon,\nenamel feeding cup (1) of 1st quality\ndressing forceps, 5 inches\n(1 pr)\nsplinter forceps, 5 inches (1 pr)\nscissors 5 inches (1 pr)\ntowels (2) of 1st quality\nenamel basin, 9 inches diam.\n(1)\nsafety pins (12) of 1st quality\n\n(3) On every building work, excavation work or compressed air work\nwhere more than 100 persons are employed there shall be provided a\nfirst-aid chest that shall be equipped and maintained to contain at least\nthe following requisites and appliances unless otherwise approved:\nSolyptol solutions, 12 oz\ncastor oil, 2 oz with glass rod bulged, pendant\nsal volatile, 6 oz\nfinger dressings (48) To be of gauze 12 inches long ×\nadhesive strapping, 2 inches\n(2 reels)\ncotton wool, 1 lb to be sterile and to be enclosed in\nbicarbonate of soda, 8 oz to be sterile and enclosed in 1 oz\nboracic acid, 4 oz to be sterile and to be enclosed in\nplain gauze, 4 yards in yard quantities each enclosed in a\nsealed carton\nroller bandages, 1 inch (12) to be enclosed in a sealed envelope\nroller bandages, 2 inches (8) to be enclosed in a sealed envelope\ntriangular bandages (6) of 1st quality\n\nmedicine glasses, 2 oz (2) to be marked for teaspoon,\nenamel feeding cup (1) of 1st quality\ndressing forceps, 5 inches\n(1 pr)\nsplinter forceps, 5 inches (1 pr)\nscissors, 5 inches (1 pr)\ntowels (3) of 1st quality\nenamel basin, 15 inches\ndiam. (1)\nsafety pins (36) of 1st quality\n(4) First-aid chests provided for this section may be constructed of wood\nor metal, but each chest so provided and constructed shall be\ndustproof, fitted with a lock and key, and shall be distinctively\nmarked with a white cross on a green ground.\n(5) First-aid chests shall properly accommodate their contents.\n(6) Nothing except requisites or appliances for first-aid shall be kept in\nthe first-aid chest, which shall always be readily accessible.\n(7) If not more than 100 persons are employed, the first-aid chest shall\nbe fitted with a carrying handle and so constructed and maintained\nthat it can be easily carried from job to job.\n\n(8) The first-aid chest shall normally be kept in the change room.\n(9) If more than 100 persons are employed, a first-aid post shall be\nprovided in a room set aside for the purpose and equipped with\nfacilities for washing and for boiling water, and with a couch,\nblankets, a portable stretcher and also a first-aid chest as previously\ndetailed.\n(10) Each first-aid chest and first-aid post shall be placed under the charge\nof a responsible person or persons, who or 1 of whom shall always be\nreadily available during working hours.\n(11) The person or persons shall, if practicable, be the holder of a\nSt. John’s Ambulance Medallion with current label.\n(12) A notice shall be prominently attached in every change room and\nfirst-aid post where the first-aid chest is normally kept.\n(13) This notice shall clearly state the name or names of the person or\npersons in charge of the first-aid chest.\nDivision 10.2 Shelter, change and dining\naccommodation\nwork means building work, compressed air work or excavation work.\nGeneral—accommodation to be provided\n(2) Immediately on beginning a work, suitable and adequate\naccommodation where persons employed can keep their clothes and\npersonal belongings safe from damage and theft, eat their meals and\nshelter from the weather, shall be provided on the site.\n\nShelter, change and dining accommodation Division 10.2\nGeneral—shelter shed on small works\n(3) On works where less than 10 workers are employed at any one time\na small shed of such dimensions as to provide not less than 10 square\nfeet of floor area per person will meet the requirements of subsection\n(2).\n(4) This shed may also be used for the storage of the workers’s tools but\nshall not be used for the storage of building material.\n(5) When part of a building in course of construction has been made\nweatherproof and secure it may be made available to employees for\nthe purposes of this section.\n(6) On works where more than 10 workers are employed at any one time\na shed or sheds shall be provided exclusively for the use of the\nworkers.\n(7) Each shed or sheds shall be of such dimensions as to provide in the\naggregate not less than 10 square feet of floor area for every worker\nemployed on the work at any one time.\n(8) Any one shed shall not be used for the accommodation of more\nthan 50 persons.\n(9) All sheds shall be absolutely weatherproof, soundly constructed with\na sufficient number of openable windows, shall be floored and shall\nbe adequately ventilated and lighted.\n(10) Every shed shall be kept clean and brooms, mops, buckets and\ncleaning compounds shall be provided for the purpose.\nFacilities to be provided in change and shelter sheds—hat and coat hooks\n(11) Hat and coat hooks spaced not less than 18 inches apart for hanging\nclothes shall be provided in each change shed.\n\nFacilities to be provided in change and shelter sheds—seating accommodation\n(12) Seating accommodation shall be provided in each change shed for the\nuse of workers when changing boots and when sheltering from the\nrain.\n(13) A bench not less than 16 inches wide and of such length as to provide\nnot less than 18 inches for each worker will meet the requirements of\nsubsection (12).\nFacilities to be provided in change and shelter sheds—heating\n(14) In wet or cold weather reasonable heating facilities, such as a portable\ncoke stove with flue exhausting outside the shed, a kerosene heater,\nor electric radiator, shall be provided in every shelter and change shed\nfor warmth and for drying clothes.\nFacilities to be provided in change and shelter sheds—safekeeping of employees’\ntool kits\n(15) Provision for the safekeeping of employees’ tool kits when\nemployees are not on the work shall be made.\n(16) On works where less than 10 workers are employed at any one time\nthis may be achieved by means of substantially constructed locked\nchests in the supervisor’s office or by provision of suitable\naccommodation in the change shed.\n(17) On works where more than 10 workers are employed at any one time\nspecial storerooms equipped with racks shall be provided.\nDining facilities—tables and seating\n(18) Adequate table and seating accommodation, in the proportion of not\nless than 22 inches run for each employee for use at meal period shall\nbe provided in the change shed, or in a separate shed, provided that\nthe accommodation need be provided only in relation to employees\nremaining on the site during meal period.\n\nSanitary conveniences and washing facilities Division 10.3\nDining facilities—storage of food\n(19) Hygienic provision, such as a fly-proof ventilated cupboard fitted\nwith shelves, shall be provided for storing employees’ food.\nDining facilities—supply of boiling water\n(20) An ample supply of boiling water for tea making and for washing\nutensils shall be provided.\nDining facilities— provision of garbage tins\n(21) Garbage tins that are both rat-proof and fly-proof shall be provided\nand they shall be emptied each day.\nDining facilities—drinking water\n(22) An adequate supply of clean, cool and wholesome drinking water\nshall be provided on the site.\nDivision 10.3 Sanitary conveniences and washing\nfacilities\nMeaning of work\nwork means, building work, excavation work, or compressed air\nwork.\nNumber to be provided\n(2) One closet shall be provided on every work where not more than\n10 men employed at the one time and 1 for every 10 women\nemployed at the one time, and 1 for any number less than 10 such\nmen or women, as the case requires.\n\nDivision 10.3 Sanitary conveniences and washing facilities\nLocation\n(3) The closet accommodation shall be located so as to be readily\naccessible from the place where men or women are working, but shall\nbe far enough removed to avoid nuisance.\n(4) All closets shall be soundly constructed and roofed with weatherproof\n(5) The floor of each closet shall be well drained and constructed of\nconcrete, bricks and cement or of other approved material that shall\nbe impervious to water.\n(6) Every closet shall be well lighted by natural or artificial light and shall\nbe well ventilated.\n(7) Each closet shall have a hinged door capable of being fastened both\non the inside and on the outside.\nClosets to be kept clean\n(8) Closets shall be maintained in a clean condition.\nWashing facilities—number of basins\n(9) One wash basin shall be provided on every work where not more than\n20 persons are employed at the one time, and 1 additional wash basin\nfor each additional 20 persons or part of 20 persons so employed.\nWashing facilities—location\n(10) Washing facilities shall be located under cover and conveniently\nclose to the change shed.\nWashing facilities—water supply\n(11) Clean cold and hot water and soap shall be provided on every work.\n\nSanitary conveniences and washing facilities Division 10.3\n(12) Cold water shall be readily available in sufficient quantities from a\ncock close to the wash basins.\n(13) Hot water may be supplied from the same source as that used for tea\nmaking.\nWashing facilities—drainage\n(14) Drainage shall be provided for the disposal of waste water.\nWashing facilities—duckboards\n(15) Duckboards shall be provided underfoot if necessary or desirable.\nWashing facilities—washing facilities to be kept clean\n(16) Washing facilities shall be kept clean.\n\nPart 11 Basic requirements about design\nand construction, erection, use,\nmaintenance, inspection and\ntesting with particular reference\nto cranes, lifts, hoists,\nscaffolding and plant\n(1) Every crane, lift, hoist, plant, scaffolding, and all gear shall be so\ndesigned, constructed and maintained that after taking into full\naccount the magnitude, incidence, conditions, and way of all loadings\nand forces, the proportioning of each member, component, part and\nattachment of it or to it is such that the maximum stress imposed or\ndeveloped in it is less than 75% of the minimum stress liable by\nrepetition or otherwise to impair its elastic properties.\n(2) Every member, component, part and attachment shall be robust and\nso proportioned that it functions without excessive elastic action,\ndeflection, vibration, movement, or distortion and without undue or\nuntimely deterioration.\n(3) Subsections (1) and (2) shall not be construed as allowing any greater\nstress or deflection, or any less provision in relation to wind loads,\nsideloads or dynamic effects than may be more specifically\nprescribed in this regulation.\n(4) Unless more specifically prescribed elsewhere in this regulation, the\nminimum stress liable by repetition or otherwise to impair the elastic\nproperties of a material shall be deemed equal to the least of the\nfollowing stresses:\n(a) the 1/ 10 of 1% proof stress for such material when tested in a way\nproductive of the same type and character of stress as that under\n\nconsideration (namely, tensile, compressive or shearing stress);\nor\n(b) the stress applied as an average stress by an approved authority\nduring endurance tests, plus 1/ 2 of the endurance range,\ncoincident to it, as determined by the authority on a 10 million\ncycle basis, provided that the stress thus determined is of the\nsame type and character as that under consideration (namely,\ntransverse, tensile, compressive or shearing stress) and that,\nunless the chief inspector specifically approves otherwise, the\naverage stress shall be assumed to be zero.\n(5) If it can be estimated with reasonable certainty that the stress cannot\nbe imposed or developed in whole or in part more than 2 million times\nduring the working life of the material, the stress prescribed by\nsubsection (4) (b) may be disregarded.\n(6) If a material is subject to solely transverse or torsional stress (or both),\nand if the 1/ 10 of 1% proof stress is less than 1/ 2 of the endurance range\nmentioned in subsection (4), the stress prescribed by subsection (4)\n(a) may be disregarded.\n(7) For the purpose of estimating the numbers of stress repetitions to\nwhich any member, component, part or attachment of any crane, lift,\nhoist, scaffolding, plant or gear is liable, the working life of the crane,\nlift, hoist, scaffolding, plant or gear shall, unless the chief inspector\notherwise approves, be deemed to be at least 80 thousand hours.\n(8) Except as may be otherwise prescribed in this regulation—\n(a) every crane or hoist and the parts of it and all gear shall be\nclassified numerically in conformity with the following table,\naccording to its working period, effective load and the dynamic\neffects to which it is subjected taking into consideration all of\nthe circumstances and conditions under which it is to work and\nto which it is to be exposed, as also all of the functions it is to\nperform, and, in the event of uncertainty or dispute, the\nclassification may be determined by the chief inspector; and\n\n(b) every scaffolding shall be deemed to be within classification 3,\nexcept that the timbers of it may be deemed within classification\n2; and\n(c) every lift and every hoist used for raising or lowering workers\nshall be deemed to be within classification 4; and\n(d) for the purpose of determining stresses in timbers, cranes and\nhoists and their supporting structures, they shall be deemed to\nbe within classification 1 if indoor, and classification 2 if\noutdoor; and\n(e) no person shall cause or effect any change in the circumstances\nor conditions under which any crane, lift, hoist, scaffolding,\nplant or gear is to work, or to which it is to be exposed, or in the\nfunctions it is to perform, unless after the change the\nclassification of the crane, lift, hoist, scaffolding, plant, or gear\nwould on reconsideration remain unaltered or revert to a\nnumerically lower order; and\n(f) no person shall use a crane, lift, hoist, scaffolding, plant, or gear\nafter such change unless the classification of it would on\nreconsideration remain unaltered or revert to a numerically\nlower order; and\n(g) nothing in this subsection shall prevent any person from\ndesigning, constructing, erecting or using a crane, lift, hoist,\nscaffolding, plant, or gear of greater safety, strength, and\nstability than that prescribed in this subsection.\nTable 122.1 Classification of cranes and hoists and gear for purposes of design,\nconstruction and use\nclassification working period effective load dynamic effects\n1 short low low\n2 long\nlow\nhigh\nlow\nlow\nlow\nhigh\n\nclassification working period effective load dynamic effects\n3 long\nlong\nhigh\nlow\nhigh\nlow\nhigh\nhigh\n4 long high high\n(9) In applying table 122.1 the following subsections apply.\n(10) The working period of any crane, hoist, or gear shall be considered to\nbe short if it operates or may reasonably be expected to operate for\nless than 500 hours per annum, or long if it operates or may\nreasonably be expected to operate for more than 500 hours per annum.\n(11) The effective load of any crane, hoist or gear shall be considered to\nbe low unless it lifts or may reasonably be expected to lift loads\ngreater than 2/ 3 of its safe working load on more than 1 000 occasions\nper annum.\n(12) The effective load shall otherwise be considered to be high.\n(13) Dynamic effects may be considered low if the speed of travelling of\nboth crab and crane or hoist are each less than 300 feet per minute, or\n400 feet per minute if the active surfaces of the respective track rails\nare uninterrupted by gaps or joints.\n(14) Dynamic effects shall be considered high if the crane, hoist or gear or\nany part or motion of it is used for any purpose, or in any way likely\nto produce greater shock effects than those caused by travelling on\nsteel track rails at the speeds mentioned in subsection (13).\n(15) Dynamic effects may be considered low for mobile cranes or mobile\nhoists having well-sprung road wheels and travelling at moderate\nspeeds on surfaces not less regular than closely laid decking of sawn\ntimber.\n\n(16) Road wheels having approved pneumatic balloon tyres of the\n‘off-the-road’ type may be considered equivalent to well-sprung road\nwheels.\n(17) Dynamic effects shall be considered high for other mobile cranes or\nmobile hoists.\n(18) Reference should also be made to examples given in table 122.2 and\ntable 122.3, in determining the classification of a crane or hoist, or\ngear, or part of it.\n(19) If any single crane or hoist travelling in relation to its supporting\nstructure, does not cause the major loadings to recur principally on\nportions only of the supporting structure, the structure if supporting a\ncrane or hoist within classifications 2, 3 or 4, may be deemed to be\nwithin the next lower classification to that of the crane or hoist.\n(20) However, this shall not apply to supporting structures constructed of\ntimber.\n(21) Table 122.2 is for reference in classifying crane and hoist frame and\nsupporting structures in the respective groups shown in table 122.1.\nTable 122.2\nhand cranes (except vehicular types)\nconveyors (belt, tyne, slat, scraper, tray, chain,\netc, but not bucket)\nengine house cranes\ncranes for occasional use only, in commission\nnot more than 500 hours per annum\nsingle and twin derrick poles\n\nbucket conveyors\n*slings, yokes and general lifting gear used in\nmedium factories and workshops for moderate\nwork (but not used in handling hot articles,\napparatus or materials, or substances or liquids\ninjurious to human life or limb)\ntower and portal cranes and hammer-headed\ncranes\ncupola hoists for light and medium foundries\nfloating cranes\nstacking machines\noverbraced or underbraced jib cranes (except\nblacksmiths, boilermakers, welders)\ngiant cranes and fixed and travelling gantries\nice works cranes\nlight duty cranes in commission not more than\n750 hours per annum\nhand cranes mounted on vehicles\nderrick cranes\nwinches or hoists used in building and\nconstructional works\nsheerlegs and gallows frames\nsprung mobile cranes (other than vehicular used\nin building and constructional works)\nshipbuilding cranes\nmachine shop secondary cranes\npile-drivers and pile-tilters\nmonorail runway hoists\n\nlocomotive cranes\noverbraced or underbraced jib cranes used in\nblacksmithing, boilermaking or welding, or\nanalogous duties\ncupola hoists for heavy foundries\ncranes used for pulling piles or sheet piling\noverhead traveller cranes not elsewhere\nincluded\nmagnet cranes not handling scrap\nderrick and other cranes having grabs, lifting\nmagnets, or light skull breaker devices\ntravelling gantry derrick cranes\ncaterpillar cranes\n(power) vehicular cranes used in building and\nconstruction works\nconcentrates, ore, coal or cargo-handling cranes\nunsprung mobile cranes\nNote See ss (13) to (17).\nlogging cranes and logging winches\nback-end and front end-loaders\n*slings yokes and general lifting gear used in\nbuilding or constructional works or on wharfs\nor in medium foundries\nfork-lift trucks\n3 This\nincludes the\ngenerality of\ncranes and\nhoists in\ncommission\nnot more than\n2 500 hours\nper annum, and\nnot commonly\nengaged in\nshift work, or\nfor such\narduous duties\nas are\ncustomary in\nthe heavy\nindustries.\nAppliances\nwithin\nclassification 3\nmay be\nregarded as\ndesigned for\nnormal duties.\n\n*cranes, hoists, lifts, slings, yokes and general\nlifting gear used in heavy industries, and\ngenerally in commission more than 2 500 hours\nper annum\npassenger and goods lifts\nhoists for raising or lowering workers\nmagnet cranes, or hoists, handling scrap\nskull breaker cranes (except light duty types)\nnavvys and excavators\ncranes and hoists used in connection with\nunderwater operations\n* Refer also to s 143 in relation to chains, s 144 in relation to steel wire ropes, and s 147 to\ns 153 and s 155 in relation to terminal fittings.\n(22) Table 122.3 is for reference in classifying crane and hoist\nmechanisms in the respective groups prescribed in section 122 (8).\n(23) If not listed in table 122.3, the mechanism should have the same\nclassification as the crane frame structure.\nTable 122.3\nelectric or pneumatic hoisting blocks\nhand-operated chain blocks used on\nmonorail runways, etc, but not on\nblacksmiths, boilershop or welders cranes\nor hoists, or any analogous to it\nhand-operated chain blocks used for\ngeneral purposes or with blacksmiths or\nboilershop or welders cranes or hoists or\nany analogous to it\n\ncrab mechanisms of coal and ore bridges\nmechanisms of derrick cranes\nmechanisms of vehicular cranes\nmechanisms of caterpillar cranes\nmechanisms of shipbuilding cranes\nmechanisms of hoists used in building and\nconstructional works, including pile-\ndrivers, etc\nhand or power winches used in connection\nwith scaffolding\ncrab or other relevant mechanisms of grab,\nskull breaker, or magnet cranes\nmechanisms of coal, ore concentrates, or\ncargo-handling cranes or hoists\n(24) Every crane and every hoist shall have constantly maintained on it a\npermanent notice, prominently and legibly exhibiting all of the safe\nworking loads of the crane or hoist, together with the information\nabout the conditions, incidence and way in which the loads may be\nlifted or handled as is necessary or desirable for the safe use or\nmanipulation of the crane or hoist.\n(25) The loads, conditions, incidences and ways shall be those determined\nby and in conformity with this regulation as limiting values of the\nloads, conditions, incidences and ways of loadings.\n(26) No other load or conditions of loading shall be marked or exhibited\non the crane or hoist, unless first approved by the chief inspector.\n(27) No person shall subject, or instruct, allow, or permit any person to\nsubject any crane, lift, hoist, scaffolding, plant or gear to a greater\nload, or more adverse incidence or way or condition of loading than\n\nthat determined by and in conformity with this regulation as a limiting\nload, incidence or way or condition of loading.\n(28) However, subsection (27) does not prevent the crane, lift, hoist,\nscaffolding, plant or gear being tested in the presence of an inspector,\nin the way that the chief inspector may direct.\n(29) No person shall procure, incite, advocate, enjoin or counsel the\nsubjection of a crane or lift or hoist or scaffolding to a greater load or\nmore adverse incidence or condition or way of loading than that\nmentioned in this section or than has been directed by an inspector.\n(30) No person shall represent a crane or lift or hoist or scaffolding to be\ncapable of lifting or handling a greater load or of sustaining a more\nadverse incidence or condition or way of loading than that mentioned\nin this section or than has been directed by an inspector.\n(31) The presence of any load in a position into which it has apparently\nbeen placed by a crane, lift or hoist shall constitute prima facie\nevidence that it has been lifted or handled and so placed by the crane,\nlift or hoist and that the crane, lift or hoist has been subjected to the\nload, and to whatever incidence and condition and way of loading is\nindicated by the position and nature of the load.\n(32) If a crane, lift, hoist or scaffolding has been overloaded by lifting or\nhandling or attempting to lift or handle a load exceeding by more than\n100% that determined by and in conformity with this regulation as a\nlimiting load, incidence, way or condition of loading, the chief\ninspector may require the owner or the person in charge or apparently\nin charge of the crane, lift, hoist or scaffolding to immediately\ndismantle it in whole or in part and to clean it together with its\nmechanisms and gearings and to lay out the parts, members,\nmechanisms and gearings in a place and way convenient to the chief\ninspector in order that investigations may be made to ascertain if\nmaterial damage has ensued.\n(33) If the chief inspector considers necessary, to assure the safety of the\ncrane, lift, hoist or scaffolding, the chief inspector may require the\n\nowner, or the person in charge or apparently in charge of it to give the\nmetallurgical or radiographic evidence that the chief inspector may\ndirect.\n(34) No person shall effect or procure or cause to be effected,\nmodifications, alterations, or repairs to or in connection with a crane,\nlift, hoist, scaffolding, plant or gear in such way or of such nature as\nto be conducive to conditions of hazard, uncertainty or danger.\n(35) No person shall effect or procure or cause to be effected\nmodifications, renewals, alterations, changes or repairs of the\nfollowing nature to or in connection with any crane, lift, hoist,\nscaffolding, plant or gear without first having obtained the approval\nof the chief inspector:\n(a) peg, dovetail or weld a tooth or teeth to any gear wheel, ratchet\nor other toothed wheel or clutch;\n(b) repair any such wheel or clutch by welding or by mechanical\nmeans;\n(c) repair or rebuild shafts, spindles, pins or axles by welding;\n(d) weld together, members, components, parts or attachments\nmetallurgically different from one another;\n(e) repair iron castings by welding or brazing;\n(f) subject to heat treatment any member, component, part or\nattachment without first establishing and recording the chemical\nand physical properties of it;\n(g) subject any member, component, part or attachment to any\nprocess of heat treatment that might reasonably be expected to\naffect it in a deleterious, uncertain or hazardous way;\n(h) reforge any forged or rolled or drawn metal member,\ncomponent, part or attachment that has become noticeably bent,\ndistorted or cracked;\n\n(i) renew, replace or substantially alter or interchange or exchange\nfor another, any main structural member of a crane;\n(j) renew, replace or substantially alter or interchange or exchange\nfor another the machinery, mechanism or gearing of any crane.\n(36) However, subsection (35) shall not apply if complete failure of the\nmember, component, or part concerned would not be dangerous or\nconducive to danger to life or limb.\n(37) Every crane and every hoist shall have constantly maintained on it a\npermanent brand, plainly and legibly exhibiting the classification of\nthe crane or hoist, determined as prescribed by this regulation, and\nthe brand shall be stamped, engraved, or welded on the crane or hoist\nat its main driving station.\n(38) No person shall falsely brand any crane or hoist as mentioned in\nsubsection (37), or alter or remove any brand except with the approval\nof the chief inspector.\nWind loads\n(1) If cranes or lifts or scaffolding are exposed either in whole or in part\nto wind loadings they shall have additional strength, stability, and\nfixity with which to resist the loadings.\n(2) Wind loadings shall be deemed to act normally to resistant surfaces,\nand to consist of a positive pressure on the windward and a negative\npressure on the leeward side of the resistant structure or member.\n(3) The wind load acting on any resistant body shall be determined from\nP = cp .\n(4) In subsection (3):\n\nP means the force exerted in pounds per square foot of area of the\nbody as projected on a vertical plane normal to the direction of the\nwind.\nc means a coefficient selected table 123.1, and appropriate to the form\nand nature of the resistant body.\n(5) The value of p shall be 16 for bodies between ground level and a\nheight of 60 feet above ground level, 22 for bodies between 60 and\n300 feet above ground level, and 25 for bodies at greater heights;\nprovided that water level shall, for floating cranes, floating hoist, or\nfloating scaffolding, be deemed to be ground level.\n(6) If a resistant body is partially sheltered from wind by effective\npermanent protection, the chief inspector may determine and fix any\nlesser value for p that the chief inspector considers appropriate.\n(7) The value of p shall be taken at not less than 5 during that period in\nwhich an exposed crane or hoist or scaffolding is lifting or handling\nits safe working load, provided that if a crane or hoist is sheltered by\nits own supporting structure p shall, in relation to the supporting\nstructure, take the value assigned in this section.\nTable 123.1 Coefficient of resistance to wind as dependent on shape or form\nof resistant body or surface\ncoefficient of resistance, ‘c’ for—\ntype of body or surface windward\nleeward\ntotal\nsheds or simple buildings, or simple\nprismatic bodies\n0.8 0.4 1.2\nsolid web girders . . . . 1.6\nplane surfaces normal to direction of\nwind, or at an angle not greater than 20°\nto direction of wind\nNote See also s 123.\n0.66 0.54 1.2\ncylindrical bodies . . . . 0.66\n\ncoefficient of resistance, ‘c’ for—\ntype of body or surface windward\nleeward\ntotal\nsphere . . . . 0.44\nlattice girders . . . . 0.96\nconcave surface . . . . 1.6\nwedge with base to wind and vertex\nangle of 90°\n. . . . 1.0\nwedge with point to wind and vertex\nangle of 90°\n. . . . 0.75\n(8) The wind load acting normally to sloping surfaces, such as roofs of\ncrane or hoist supporting structures, or roofs of cabins, or machinery\nhouses of cranes or hoists shall be determined from the formula—\nR = np.\n(9) In subsection (8):\nR means the force exerted in pounds per square foot of sloping\nsurface.\np has the value assigned by subsection (5).\nn is a coefficient selected from table 123.2, and appropriate to the\nslope of the surface.\nTable 123.2\ncoefficient ‘n’’\nslope of roof in degrees,\nmeasured from the\nwindward slope, or\nwindward half if\nleeward slope or\nleeward half if\n—0.1\n—0.25\n0 } —0.5\n\ncoefficient ‘n’’\nslope of roof in degrees,\nmeasured from the\nwindward slope, or\nwindward half if\nleeward slope or\nleeward half if\n70 and over\n0.25\n0.66 —0.54\n(10) The wind loads acting on curved roof surfaces shall be taken to be the\nsame as for sloping roof surfaces of the same rise, and shall be\nassumed to act radially.\n(11) For sawtooth or other multi-span roofs if the windward bay of roofing\neffectively shelters succeeding bays the following reductions in wind\nloading may be made so that stability and fixity of the structure as a\nwhole is affected:\n(a) on the bay adjoining the windward bay—50%;\n(b) on the next bay—75%;\n(c) on the remaining bays—87%.\n(12) All projections above the general roof level shall be considered fully\nexposed to wind.\n(13) If members are so disposed that a windward member shelters a\nleeward member from wind forces, the forces may be considered\neffective on only the windward member if—\n(a) the windward member being of solid web construction is not\nspaced at a distance greater than its own depth from the sheltered\nmember, or\n(b) the windward member, being of perforated, open web or lattice\nconstruction, is not spaced at a greater distance than its own\nwidth from the sheltered member.\n\n(14) Parts of leeward members projecting beyond sheltering members as\nmentioned in subsection (13) shall be deemed fully exposed to wind\nforce.\n(15) If the spacing of members is greater than, but not more than 3 times\nthat mentioned in subsection (13) the wind resistant surface of the\nleeward member may be considered to be reduced by 40%, provided\nthat parts of it projecting beyond sheltering members shall be deemed\nfully exposed to wind forces, and provided that the total reduction in\nsurface does not exceed 1/ 2 of that of the windward member.\nHorizontal forces (other than those due to wind)\n(1) Full allowance shall be made for all horizontal forces including those\nincidental to operation of the crane or hoist, or lift, or scaffolding.\n(2) The braking force at each braked wheel, arising from deceleration of\nthe travelling or traversing motion of any crane or hoist or lift or\nscaffolding or relevant part of it shall be deemed equal to 1/ 7 of the\ngreatest weight borne by the wheel.\n(3) It shall be considered to act at track-rail level.\n(4) Each live load shall be assumed to set up or cause incidentally a\nlateral horizontal force not less in magnitude than the greatest of the\nfollowing:\n(a) 5% of the live load; or\n(b) 120 pounds; or\n(c) whatever more exact force may be determined by approved\nmethods.\n(5) It shall not be necessary to increase the horizontal force so determined\nin the way otherwise provided by section 125, but the force shall be\nassumed to act simultaneously with the live load.\n\n(6) Full allowance shall be made for horizontal forces due to slewing,\noscillating, reciprocating, or centrifugal actions, misalignments or\nsettlements, heeling of supporting structure, or operation on sloping,\nirregular or soft surfaces.\n(7) The rate of deceleration of the slewing motions of derrick or jib cranes\nshall be deemed to be not less than 1 foot per second, per second,\nmeasured at the jibhead, irrespective of its position.\nDynamic and repealed loadings\n(1) To make allowance for frequently repeated loadings their variable\nmagnitudes, and the effects of shocks, all internal forces or moments\ncaused by live loads shall be increased in the ratio shown in table 125\nor as may be in this section more specifically provided as appropriate\nto the classification of the crane, hoist, lift or scaffolding or part of it\nthat is under consideration.\n(2) However, the following forces or moments need not be so increased:\n(a) those due to braking forces arising from decelerating travelling\nor traversing live loads;\n(b) those due to inertia and momentum of live loads if those due to\nwind together with those referred to in the paragraph (a) are so\ngreat that they govern the proportion of the member concerned;\n(c) those due to wind.\nTable 125 Compensation ratio for live loads\nclassification of\ncrane or hoist or lift\nor scaffolding or\nrelevant part of it\nratio in which internal\nforce or moment must\nbe increased\nclassification of crane\nor hoist or lift or\nscaffolding or relevant\npart of it\nratio in which\ninternal force or\nmoment must be\nincreased\n1 1.2 3 1.6\n2 1.4 4 1.9\n\n(3) Table 125 applies if more specific provision is not made in this\n(4) To make allowance for shocks caused by travelling or traversing\nmovements of cranes or hoists or lifts or scaffolding, internal forces\nor moments caused by dead loads shall be increased by 10% if the\ntrack rails are interrupted by joints or gaps, and the speed of travel or\ntraverse is 200 or less feet per minute, or 20% if the speed is exceeded.\n(5) If the track rails are not so interrupted, the internal forces or moments\nshall be increased by 10% if the speed is 300 or less feet per minute\nor 20% if the speed is exceeded.\nMaximum permissible stresses\n(1) The stresses imposed or developed in any member, component, part,\nor attachment, of any crane, hoist, lift, scaffolding, plant or gear shall\nbe computed and after inclusion of all relevant increases\nconsequential to section 125 and the other sections as may be\napplicable shall not exceed the relevant and appropriate maximum\nprescribed by this regulation.\n(2) If the member, component, part or attachment is of timber, the stress\nimposed or developed in it shall not exceed the relevant and\nappropriate maximum shown in table 126.1, or any other stress that\nmay be more specifically prescribed elsewhere in this regulation.\nTable 126.1 Maximum permissible stresses for timbers\nmaximum permissible stress in lb/in 2\ncontinually dry 2 000 1 450 6 000 4 500 4 000 3 000\n\nmaximum permissible stress in lb/in2\noccasionally wet but\nquickly drying\n1 720 1 250 5 700 4 270 3 800 2 800\nmore or less\ncontinually wet or\ndamp\n1 330 970 5 700 4 270 3 800 2 800\ngrain; continually dry\n430 390 1 000 1 000 880 880\ngrain; occasionally\nwet but quickly\ndrying\n300 270 1 000 1 000 750 750\ngrain; timber more or\nless continually wet\nor damp\n270 240 1 000 1 000 750 750\n*longitudinal shear;\nin flexural members 112 86 340 340 300 300\nshearing; parallel to\ngrain 230 170 1 000 1 000 750 750\ntensile; parallel to\ngrain\nmay be taken to be of the same values as transverse stresses\ncompression; parallel\nto grain; continually\ndry\n1 440 1 200 4 000 3 000 3 600 2 700\n\nmaximum permissible stress in lb/in2\ncompression; parallel\nto grain; occasionally\nwet but quickly\ndrying\n1 320 1 080 3 800 2 800 3 400 2 500\n* Generally termed ‘horizontal shear’.\n† Hardwood includes only Australian hardwoods of approximately the same strength and\nreliability as spotted gum.\n(3) Table 126.1 applies if more specific provision is not made in this\n(4) If the member, component, part or attachment is of any other material,\nthe stress imposed or developed in it shall not exceed that prescribed\nby section 122 (4) to (23), and amplified in relation to certain\ncommonly used materials by table 126.2:\n\nPart 11 Basic requirements about design and construction, erection, use, maintenance, inspection and testing with particular\nTable 126.2 Physical properties of materials\n1/ 10 of 1% proof\nstress (t/in 2 )\n1/ 2 endurance range\nfor average stress\nzero (t/in 2 )\nof\nelasticity\nof rigidity\nnominal\nultimate tensile\nstrength (t/in2 )material tensile shear transverse* torsional†\nmild steel 17 10.2 12.5 6.3 13 000 5 200 28\nhigh tensile structural steel conforming to\nBritish Standard Specification No 548—1934 20 12 15 7.5 13 000 5 200 37\nhigh tensile structural steel conforming to\nBritish Standard Specification No 968—1941 18 10.8 13.25 6.6 13 000 5 200 33\ncast steel (annealed) 17.5 10.5 15 7.5 13 000 5 200 35\nmalleable cast iron (‘black heart’) 9 4.5 11 5.5 11 200 4 480 22.3\ngood grey cast iron 3 2.9 5.3 4.25 6 700 2 680 10\nphospur bronze (89 copper 11 tin) 8.7 5.2 10.7 8.5 5 540 2 220 15.5\n\n1/10 of 1% proof\nstress (t/in 2 )\n1/ 2 endurance range\nfor average stress\nzero (t/in 2 )\nof\nelasticity\nof rigidity\nnominal\nultimate tensile\nstrength (t/in2 )material tensile shear transverse* torsional†\ngunmetal (‘admiralty bronze’) 7.5 4.5 5 4 5 700 2 280 13.4\ncast aluminium bronze (90 copper, 10\naluminium) 11.1 6.7 11.6 9.3 6 700 2 680 35\nphenolic laminated material‡ . . . . 2.68 . . 400 . . 2.9\n* As determined by rotating bar test on 10 million cycle basis.\n† As determined by reciprocating bar test on 10 million cycle basis.\n‡ If approved by chief inspector.\n\n(5) If the stresses include those due to wind loads, they may exceed the\nmaximum mentioned by 25% provided—\n(a) that the increase is solely due to wind loading; and\n(b) that the strength of the structure so determined will not be less\nthan it would have been if wind loading had been disregarded.\n(6) If a mild steel member of H, T or I section is used as a beam or\ncantilever, the stress imposed or developed in the tension flange shall\nnot exceed 12 tons per square inch.\n(7) The stress imposed or developed in the compression flange of a\ncantilever shall not exceed that prescribed for a beam of twice the\nlength of the cantilever; each half length of the beam shall be assumed\nloaded with identical loading and incidence of loading to that on the\ncantilever.\n(8) The beam thus loaded will have a central reaction equal in magnitude\nto twice the algebraic sum of the loads on the cantilever, and the\nposition of the point of application of this reaction shall determine\nwhether the beam load is applied to the compression flange, or tension\nflange, or centroid of the beam section.\n(9) If the principal external loading is concentrated and is applied to the\ncompression flange of a beam of the section, the stress imposed or\ndeveloped in the flange shall not exceed the lesser of the following\nstresses:\n(a) 14 4/ 10 tons per square inch, or\n(b) that determined by the formula 8210\nld bt/ tons per square inch.\n(10) In subsection (9):\nb means the least breadth of the compression flange that can be\nmeasured within a distance of 1/ 4 of the span of the beam of the\nsection at which the stress is determined.\n\nd means the overall depth of the section of the beam at which the\nstress is determined, exclusive of any track rail laid on it.\nl means the maximum length of compression flange that is not\nsupported laterally by adequate external means.\nt means the thickness of the compression flange measured as provided\nfor flange thickness of Australian Standard Beam Sections by\nAustralian Standard Specification No AI—1940, for structural steel.\n(11) If the compression and tension flanges of a beam are of different\nsections, or if the beam is of the single plate web girder type, the\nflange thickness t must be determined from the formula—\nt = 5Iy\nb3 .\n(12) In subsection (11):\nb—see subsection (10).\nIy means the moment of inertia of the cross-section of the beam about\nits minor rectilinear axis, provided that if the compression and tension\nflanges are of different section.\n(13) Iy must be taken as equal to twice the moment of inertia of the\ncompression flange about the aforesaid axis, and provided that if the\ncompression flange of an Australian Standard Beam Section is not\ncompounded, t may be determined as prescribed in this section for the\nstandard beam section.\n(14) Track rails need not be included when determining flange\nthicknesses, t.\n(15) If the principal external loading is concentrated and is applied at the\ncentroid axis of the beam, the formula btld /\n9980 tons per square inch\nmay be substituted for the formula stated in subsection (9) (b).\n\n(16) If the principal external loading is concentrated and is applied to the\ntension flange of the beam, the formula btld /\n12120 tons per square inch\nmay be substituted for the formula stated in subsection (9) (b).\n(17) These maximum stresses are permissible only for beams or\ncantilevers of mild steel conforming to Australian Standard\nSpecification No A.I—1940, ‘Rolled Steel Sections for Structural\nPurposes’.\n(18) For a beam or cantilever of the same type but of steel conforming to\nBritish Standard Specification No 548—1934, ‘High Tensile\nStructural Steel for Bridges, etc, and General Building Construction’,\nor British Standard Specification No 968—1941, ‘High Tensile\n(Fusion Welding Quality) Steel for Bridges, etc, and General\nBuilding Construction’, the stress imposed or developed in the\ntension flange shall not exceed 15 tons per square inch, and in the\ncompression flange of the beam, the lesser of the following stresses:\n(a) 176/ 10 tons per square inch; or\n(b) that determined by the formula stated in subsection (9) (b) or the\nalternative provided in subsection (15) or (16).\n(19) If a member of H, T or I section is used as a beam and the principal\nexternal loading is applied to the compression flange, and if the\nloading is evenly distributed throughout the span of the beam and is\ngreater in magnitude than any concentrated loading that may be\nsimultaneously applied, the stress imposed or developed in the flange\nshall not exceed the lesser of the following stresses—\n(a) 144/ 10 tons per square inch, or\n(b) that determined by the formula btld /\n7140 tons per square inch.\n(20) In subsection (19):\nb—see subsection (10).\n\nd—see subsection (10).\nl—see subsection (10).\nt—see subsection (10).\n(21) If the external loading is applied at the centroid axis of the beam, the\nformula btld /\n8570 tons per square inch may be substituted for that stated\nin subsection (19) (b), and if the loading is applied to the tension\nflange of the beam, the formula btld /\n9640 tons per square inch may be\nso substituted.\n(22) These maximum stresses are permissible only for beams or\ncantilevers of mild steel conforming to Australian Standard\nSpecification No A.I.—1940, ‘Rolled Steel Sections for Structural\nPurposes’.\n(23) For a beam or cantilever of the same type, but of steel conforming to\nBritish Standard Specification No 548—1934, ‘High Tensile\nStructural Steel for Bridges, etc, and General Building Construction’,\nor British Standard Specification No 968—1941, ‘High Tensile\n(Fusion Welding Quality) Steel for Bridges, etc, and General\nBuilding Construction’, the stress imposed or developed in the\ntension flange shall not exceed 15 tons per square inch, and in the\ncompression flange of the beam, the lesser of the following stresses:\n(a) 176/ 10 tons per square inch; or\n(b) that determined by the formula stated in subsection (19) (b) or\nthe alternative provided in subsection (21).\n(24) The computed deflection of a steel beam in the direction of either the\nmajor or minor rectilinear axis of any cross-section shall not exceed\n1/ 380 part of the span of the beam.\n(25) The computed deflection at the extremity of a steel cantilever shall\nnot, when measured in the direction of either the major or minor\n\nrectilinear axis of any cross-section, exceed 1/ 190 part of the length of\nthe cantilever.\n(26) For the purpose of computing the deflections, the modulus of\nelasticity of steel shall be deemed to be 13 000 tons per square inch.\n(27) In computing deflections it shall be necessary to increase the forces\nproducing the deflections in the way provided by section 125.\n(28) Forces shall be considered to act simultaneously, and the horizontal\nforces referred to in section 124 shall be included.\n(29) The maximum vertical shearing stress in the webs of rolled steel\njoists, channels or plate-web girders of mild steel conforming to\nAustralian Standard Specification No A.I—1940 ‘Rolled Steel\nSections for Structural Purposes’ shall not exceed 6 tons per square\n(30) If the members are of steel conforming to British Standard\nSpecification No 548—1934, ‘High Tensile Structural Steel for\nBridges, etc, and General Building Construction’, or British Standard\nSpecification No 968—1941, ‘High Tensile (Fusion Welding\nQuality) Steel for Bridges, etc, and General Building Construction’,\nthe maximum vertical shearing stresses in the webs shall not exceed\n7 1/ 4 tons per square inch.\n(31) The shearing stresses mentioned in subsections (29) and (30) are\npermissible only if the ratio—\ndoes not exceed 83 for the mild steel or 75 for the high tensile steel\nmembers.\n(32) For the purposes of web-shearing computations the depth of web of a\nrolled steel joist or channel may be taken as the full depth of the joist\nor channel, and the depth of web of a plate girder may be taken as the\n\ndepth of the girder, measured between the centroid axes of the\nrespective compression and tension flanges.\n(33) If the ratios of depth to web thickness mentioned in subsection (31)\nare exceeded, the maximum vertical shearing stress shall not exceed\nthat determined by the formula—\ninch.squarepertons\nK5100 2\n\n\n\n\n\n\n(34) For subsection (33), the value of K shall be selected from table 126.3\nin conformity with, and as appropriate to the ratio d\nd\n1 where d1 is the\nlonger and d the lesser rectilinear dimensions of the panels into which\nthe web is divided by effective stiffeners, measured in the vicinity of\nthe stress assessed.\nTable 126.3\nratio d1\nd 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.5 3.0 ∞\nK 9.42 8.0 7.3 7.1 7.0 6.8 6.6 6.3 6.1 5.35\n(35) If vertical shearing stresses are low and the depth of web is less\nthan 132 times the web thickness for mild, or 120 times the web\nthickness for high tensile steels as mentioned in subsections (29) and\n(30), the following compressive stresses shall not be exceeded at any\nsection of the web:\n(a) for such mild steel—8 tons per square inch;\n(b) for such high tensile steel—9 tons per square inch.\n(36) If relationships of web depths to thicknesses mentioned in subsection\n(35) are exceeded, the compressive stress in the web shall not exceed\nthat determined by the formula—\n\ninch.squarepertons\nK6200 2\n\n\n\n\n\n\n(37) For subsection (36), the value of K shall be selected from table 126.4\nin conformity with, and appropriate to the ratio d\nd\n1 with the same\nmeaning as mentioned in subsection (34).\nTable 126.4\nratio d1\nd 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.67 0.75 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 8\nK 23.9 21.1 19.8 19.7 19.8 20.1 21.1 21.1 19.8 19.7 19.8 19.7\n(38) The stress at the bottom of the Whitworth thread of a bolt or tie rod\nor other threaded member of mild steel shall not exceed—\n(a) 8 000 pounds per square inch for threads up to and including 1/ 2\nan inch in diameter;\n(b) 12 000 pounds per square inch for threads 5/ 8 of an inch in\n(c) 16 000 pounds per square inch for threads 3/ 4 of an inch in\n(d) 20 000 pounds per square inch for threads 7/ 8 of an inch in\n(e) 24 000 pounds per square inch for threads 1 inch in diameter;\n(f) 25 000 pounds per square inch for threads 1 1/ 8 inches in\n(g) 26 000 pounds per square inch for threads 1 1/ 4 inches in\n(h) 27 000 pounds per square inch for threads 1 3/ 8 inches in\n\n(i) 28 000 pounds per square inch for threads 1 1/ 2 inches and over\nin diameter.\n(39) The stress in a compression member, or strut, of mild steel shall not\nexceed that shown in table 126.5, relevant and appropriate to the ratio\nof slenderness of the member.\n(40) If the member is of high tensile structural steel, the stress shall not\nexceed that shown in table 126.6 relevant and appropriate to the ratio\nof slenderness of the member.\n(41) The ratio shall be determined by dividing the greatest length of\nmember that is not supported effectively against lateral deflection, by\nthe least radius of gyration of any cross-section of the member within\nthe central 1/2 of the length of the member.\n(42) If 1 end of the member is fixed and the other end free, the ratio of\nslenderness shall be determined by dividing twice the length of the\nmember by the least radius of gyration of any cross-section within 1/ 2\nof the length of the member of the fixed end.\nTable 126.5 Maximum stresses permissible in mild steel* compression members\nor struts subject only to concentric axial loading\nmaximum permissible stress in t/in 2\n10 14.2 10.8 14.2 12.5 12.5 14.3\n20 13.8 10.7 14.0 12.4 12.4 14.2\n30 13.2 10.6 13.6 12.3 12.3 14.0\n40 12.4 10.4 13.0 12.0 12.0 13.6\n50 11.4 10.0 12.3 11.6 11.6 13.2\n60 10.1 9.5 11.4 11.1 11.1 12.7\n70 9.0 8.8 10.6 10.5 10.5 12.2\n\nmaximum permissible stress in t/in2\n80 7.8 7.8 9.7 9.7 9.7 11.6\n90 6.8 6.8 8.9 8.9 8.9 11.0\n100 5.8 5.8 8.0 8.0 8.0 10.3\n110 5.1 5.1 7.3 7.3 7.3 9.5\n120 4.5 4.5 6.6 6.6 6.6 8.7\n130 4.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 7.9\n140 3.5 3.5 5.4 5.3 5.3 7.2\n150 3.1 3.1 4.9 4.7 4.7 6.4\n160 2.8 2.8 4.5 4.2 4.2 5.6\n170 2.5 2.5 4.1 3.7 3.7 4.9\n180 2.3 2.3 3.8 3.3 3.3 4.3\n190 2.2 2.2 3.5 3.0 3.0 3.8\n200 2.1 2.1 3.3 2.7 2.7 3.4\n210 2.0 2.0 3.1 2.5 2.5 3.1\n220 1.9 1.9 2.9 2.4 2.4 2.9\n* Mild steel conforming to Australian Standard Specification No A1—1940, ‘Rolled Steel\nSections for Structural Purposes’. Column ‘B’ is applicable to members of angle, tee or tube\nsection, and to members of latticed, battened or other framed construction.\n\nTable 126.6 Maximum stresses permissible in high tensile* steel compression\nmembers or struts subject only to concentric axial loading\nmaximum permissible stress in t/in 2\n10 17.9 13.7 18.0 16.0 18.2 18.2\n20 17.6 13.6 17.8 15.9 18.1 18.1\n30 16.9 13.5 17.4 15.7 17.9 17.9\n40 16.0 13.1 16.7 15.4 17.5 17.5\n50 14.7 12.5 15.8 14.7 17.0 17.0\n60 12.8 11.5 14.4 13.8 16.0 16.0\n70 10.6 10.3 12.5 12.3 14.4 14.4\n80 8.5 8.5 10.5 10.5 12.6 12.6\n90 7.0 7.0 9.1 9.1 11.3 11.3\n100 5.9 5.9 8.0 8.0 10.3 10.3\n110 5.1 5.1 7.3 7.3 9.5 9.5\n120 4.5 4.5 6.6 6.6 8.7 8.7\n130 4.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 8.0 7.9\n140 3.5 3.5 5.4 5.3 7.4 7.2\n150 3.1 3.1 4.9 4.7 6.8 6.4\n160 2.8 2.8 4.5 4.2 6.2 5.6\n170 2.5 2.5 4.1 3.7 5.7 4.9\n180 2.3 2.3 3.8 3.3 5.2 4.3\n190 2.2 2.2 3.5 3.0 4.8 3.8\n200 2.1 2.1 3.3 2.7 4.4 3.4\n\nmaximum permissible stress in t/in2\n210 2.0 2.0 3.1 2.5 4.2 3.1\n220 1.9 1.9 2.9 2.4 3.9 2.9\n* High tensile steel conforming to British Standard Specification No 548—1934, ‘High Tensile\nSteel for Bridges, etc., and General Building Construction’, of British Standard Specification\nNo 968—1941, ‘High Tensile (Fusion Welding Quality) Steel for Bridges, etc., for General\nBuilding Construction’. Column ‘B’ is applicable to members of angle, tee, or tube sections\nand to members of latticed, battened or other framed construction.\n(43) If the radius of gyration of the cross-section of a compression member\nor strut of metal or alloy is less near the ends of the member than in\nthe vicinity of the half-length of the member, the radius of gyration\nof a cross-section at the half-length shall for the purpose of assessing\nthe slenderness ratios, be reduced in the ratio—\nKq\n0.75.K .\n(44) In subsection (43):\nK is the least radius of gyration of a section at the half-length of the\nmember.\nKq is the least radius of gyration of the least section that is 1/ 4 of the\nlength of the member from either end.\n(45) If a steel member is subject to simultaneous axial compression and\ntransverse stress it shall be designed as a beam, or if free at 1 end, a\ncantilever, in which the maximum transverse stress is determined by\n\n( cf\n1.67f p\n+fx + fy ) tons per square inch\nwhere, in relation to the section under consideration:\nc is a constant, having the value 18 for mild steel, or 22 for high tensile\nstructural steel.\nf is the maximum axial compressive stress.\nfp is the maximum permissible axial compressive stress as prescribed\nin this section for the same member if assumed subject solely to axial\nstress.\nfx and fy are the maximum transverse stresses due to external flexural\nforces acting or resolved about the respective principal rectilinear\naxes.\n(46) The stress in a compression member or strut of timber shall not\nexceed that shown in table 126.7, relevant and appropriate to the ratio\nof slenderness of the member, and to the kind of timber and its\nsectional dimensions.\n(47) The ratio of slenderness shall be determined by dividing the greatest\nlength of member that is not supported effectively against lateral\ndeflection, by the diameter of the greatest inscribed circle of any\ncross-section of the member within the central half of the length of\nthe member.\n(48) If 1 end of the member is fixed and the other end free, the ratio of\nslenderness shall be determined by dividing twice the length of the\nmember by the diameter of the greatest inscribed circle of any\ncross-section of the member within half the length of the member of\nthe fixed end.\n\nTable 126.7 Maximum stresses permissible in timber compression members or\nstruts subject only to concentric axial loading\nmaximum permissible stress in lb/in 2\nslenderness\nironbark less\nthan 6 in2 in\nironbark 6 in 2 or\nmore in section\nand hardwood*\nless than 6 in 2 in\nhardwood*\n6 in2 or more in\nDouglas fir\n(Oregon pine)\n0 5 000 4 000 3 000 1 400\n5 4 390 3 560 2 714 1 320\n10 3 780 3 123 2 428 1 200\n15 3 170 2 685 2 144 1 080\n20 2 560 2 247 1 859 960\n25 1 950 1 808 1 574 850\n30 1 370 1 370 1 290 730\n35 1 005 1 005 1 005 610\n40 770 770 770 490\n45 608 608 608 384\n50 493 493 493 312\n55 407 407 407 262\n60 342 342 342 222\n65 292 292 292 192\n70 252 252 252 168\n75 219 219 219 140\n80 192 192 192 120\n85 170 170 170 113\n90 152 152 152 102\n\nRefer to s 131 about quality of timber.\n* Hardwood includes only Australian Hardwoods of approximately the same strength and\nreliability as Spotted Gum.\n(49) If a timber member is subject to simultaneous axial compression and\ntransverse stress it shall be designed as a beam, or if free at 1 end, a\ncantilever, in which the maximum transverse stress is determined by\n( cf\n2.f p\n+fx + fy ) pounds per square inch\nwhere, in relation to the section under consideration:\nc is a constant, having the value 8000 for ironbark or other Australian\nhardwood timbers, or 3600 for Douglas fir (Oregon pine).\nf is the maximum axial compressive stress.\nfp is the maximum permissible axial compressive stress as prescribed\nin this section for the same member if assumed subject solely to axial\nstress.\nfx and fy are the maximum transverse stresses due to external flexural\nforces acting or resolved about the respective principal rectilinear\naxes.\n(50) If the cross-section of a timber compression member or strut is less\nnear the ends of the member than in the vicinity of the half-length of\nit, the diameter of the inscribed circle referred to in subsections (47)\nand (48) shall, for the purpose of assessing the slenderness ratio, be\nreduced in the ratio—\nDq\n0.75D\nwhere:\n\nD is the diameter of the greatest inscribed circle of a section at the\nhalf-length of the member.\nDq is the diameter of the greatest inscribed circle of the least section\nthat is 1/ 4 of the length of the member from either end.\n(51) The computed early deflection of a timber beam in the direction of\neither the major or minor rectilinear axis of any cross-section shall\nnot exceed 1/ 380 part of the span of the beam.\n(52) The computed early deflection at the extremity of a timber cantilever\nshall not when measured in the direction of either the major or minor\nrectilinear axis of any cross-section, exceed 1/ 190 part of the length of\nthe cantilever.\n(53) The computed early deflection of a timber beam used for scaffolding\nor shoring purposes, shall not exceed 1/ 150 part of the span of the\nbeam, provided that the computed early deflection of platform planks\nof bricklayers’ or similar heavy scaffoldings shall not exceed 1/ 60 part\nof their span, and that the computed early deflection of platform\nplanks of decorators’ or similar scaffoldings of the lightest type shall\nnot exceed 51/ 2 inches.\n(54) For the purpose of computing the deflections the modulus of elasticity\nof the constituent timber shall be deemed to be—\n(a) for ironbark—1 300 tons per square inch; and\n(b) for other hardwoods—1 050 tons per square inch; and\n(c) for Douglas fir (Oregon pine)—715 tons per square inch.\n(55) In computing deflections it shall be necessary to increase the forces\nproducing the deflections in the way provided by section 125.\n(56) Forces shall be considered to act simultaneously and the horizontal\nforces referred to in section 124 shall be included.\n(57) The thickness of a timber beam or cantilever shall not be less than 1/ 4\nof the depth of the beam or cantilever.\n\n(58) If 1 bridge beam only of an overhead traveller crane is supported\nlaterally by effective bracings, the other bridge beam may be\nconsidered to derive from it a measure of lateral support per medium\nof the crab frame and its track wheels, provided the wheels have\ndouble flanges and together with their supports and fastenings are\nconsidered by the chief inspector to be suitable for the purpose.\n(59) In such case the strength of the unbraced beam may be determined by\nplacing the fully-loaded crab at whatever position is productive of the\ngreatest critical stress.\n(60) The maximum stress then resulting at any section of the unbraced\nbeam shall not exceed the maximum stress permissible for the same\nbeam when the laterally unsupported length is deemed to be 3/ 4 of the\nactual span.\n(61) The lateral deflection due to all loads other than those applied by the\ncrab wheels shall not exceed 1/ 2 an inch, when calculated on the\nassumption that the crane is brought evenly to rest from its maximum\ntravelling speed in a distance of 5 feet.\n(62) Other deflections with the crab at any position shall not, however,\nexceed those elsewhere prescribed for beams by this regulation.\n(63) The ratio of slenderness of a tension member shall not exceed 300.\n(64) The ratio shall be determined as though the member were a\ncompression member.\n(65) After being increased as prescribed by subsection (67), the torsional\nstress imposed or developed in any spring made from carbon spring\nsteel shall not exceed the relevant and appropriate maximum stress\nshown in table 126.8.\n(66) It shall not be necessary to increase the computed forces on, or\nmoments in, a spring in the way otherwise prescribed by section 125,\nunless alternation occurs, and in such case the provisions of section\n122 shall apply.\n\nTable 126.8 Maximum torsional stresses permissible in springs of carbon\nspring steel (in pounds per square inch)\ndiameter in inches of greatest circle that may\nbe inscribed within the least section that is\nrelevant of the material of which spring is\nmade\nclassification of part of crane, hoist,\nplant, or scaffolding in which spring\nis employed\n4 3 2 or 1\nnot exceeding 0.085 60 000 75 000 93 000\nabove .085 and no exceeding 0.185 55 000 69 000 85 000\nabove 0.185 and not exceeding 0.32 48 000 60 000 74 000\nabove 0.32 and not exceeding 0.53 42 000 52 000 65 000\nabove 0.53 and not exceeding 0.97 36 000 45 000 56 000\nabove 0.97 and not exceeding 1.5 32 000 40 000 50 000\n(67) To compensate for errors consequential to computation of only\ntorsional stresses in helical or volute springs, the computed torsional\nstress in any helical or volute spring shall be increased in the ratio W,\nthe Wahl factor, shown in table 126.9 as relevant and appropriate to\nthe relationship:\nR = D\nd .\n(68) In subsection (67):\nD is the maximum pitch circle diameter of the spring, measured in\nd is the diameter in inches of the greatest circle that may be inscribed\nwithin the least section that is relevant of the material of which the\nspring is made.\n\nTable 126.9 Compensating ratios, W, or Wahl factors, for stresses in\nhelical or volute springs\nR = W\nWahl factor\n2.0 2.06 4.2 1.38 7.6 1.19\n2.1 1.98 4.3 1.37 7.8 1.19\n2.2 1.90 4.4 1.36 8.0 1.18\n2.3 1.84 4.5 1.35 8.5 1.17\n2.4 1.79 4.6 1.34 9.0 1.16\n2.5 1.75 4.7 1.34 9.5 1.15\n2.6 1.71 4.8 1.32 10.0 1.14\n2.7 1.68 4.9 1.32 10.5 1.14\n2.8 1.64 5.0 1.31 11.0 1.13\n2.9 1.60 5.2 1.30 11.5 1.12\n3.0 1.58 5.4 1.28 12.0 1.12\n3.1 1.56 5.6 1.27 12.5 1.11\n3.2 1.53 5.8 1.26 13.0 1.11\n3.3 1.51 6.0 1.25 13.5 1.11\n3.4 1.49 6.2 1.24 14.0 1.10\n3.5 1.48 6.4 1.24 14.5 1.10\n3.6 1.46 6.6 1.23 15.0 1.10\n3.7 1.44 6.8 1.22 16.0 1.09\n3.8 1.43 7.0 1.21 17.0 1.08\n3.9 1.42 7.2 1.21 18.0 1.08\n4.0 1.40 7.4 1.20 19.0 1.07\n\nR = W\nWahl factor\n4.1 1.39\nNote See also s (69) and s (70) about limiting values of R.\n(69) Springs in which the ratio R referred to in subsection (67) is less than\n6 shall not be used unless specifically approved by the chief inspector.\n(70) If practicable, R shall be made equal to nine.\n(71) The value of G, the modulus of torsional rigidity shall, for carbon\nspring steel, be deemed to be 5 100 tons per square inch.\n(1) If necessary or advisable for safe and continued operation, the\nmembers, components, parts, linkages and attachments of machinery\nmechanisms and gearings shall be machined.\n(2) Machining shall be such as to ensure accurate fitting, smooth and\naccurate working and freedom from shocks due to lost motion or to\nslackness or inaccuracy.\n(3) It shall also ensure truth, precision, correctness and regularity of form\nand of pitch and alignment.\n(4) ‘Lost motion’ shall be eliminated except if it is an essential feature of\ndesign.\n(5) Bolts, studs, set bolts, set screws, grub screws, adjusting screws and\nplain or screwed pins, eyebolts, tie bars, screw clevises and the like\nshall be prevented by positive means from developing undue\nlongitudinal slackness or becoming displaced when used—\n(a) in connecting or securing members between which relative\nmotion occurs; or\n\n(b) in positions in which they are required to be longitudinally slack;\nor\n(c) in positions in which they are liable to become loosened by\nvibration; or\n(d) in positions in which they are subjected to rapid changes of load;\nor\n(e) in positions in which they are subjected to alternations of load;\nor\n(f) in positions in which they are subjected to actions tending to\nunscrew them.\n(6) Split pins shall not be less in diameter than 1/ 4 of the thickness of the\nmetal they traverse.\n(7) If split pins or taper pins are used in floating pins, washers shall be\nprovided between the split or taper pins and adjacent rubbing\nsurfaces.\n(8) Except if slackness is an essential feature of design, keys shall be well\nfitted and tightly driven, and feathers shall be well and tightly fitted.\n(9) Splines shall fit closely.\n(10) Axles, sheave pins, or shafts, pins or spindles carrying revolving or\noscillating parts shall, unless designed as lubricated revolving\nmembers, be effectively locked against rotation as well as against\nlongitudinal displacement.\n(11) Internal threads and nuts shall be of effective axial length at least\nequal to 7/ 8 of the nominal diameter of their thread and shall engage\nwith the male thread for their full length.\n(12) Balance, bias or operating weights of cranks, levers or linkages shall\nbe secured in position by rivets, through bolts, welding or brazing.\n(13) All castings, pressings, stampings, flame cuttings, weldings and\nforgings shall be of true, correct, precise and regular form, pitch and\n\nalignment, well suited to their purpose and free from defects liable to\nimpair their effectiveness or conducive of conditions of hazard,\nuncertainty or danger.\n(14) Lifting hooks that have opened out at the throat by 5% of their throat\ndimension shall not be used.\n(15) Lifting rings of which any internal diameter has increased or\ndecreased by 5% shall not be used.\n(16) If members, components, parts, linkages or attachments are unduly\nloose or slack or unduly worn, deteriorated, or otherwise impaired or\nif they are so cracked, distorted, eroded, burned, fatigued,\nstrain-hardened or in any way defective or so damaged as to be\nproductive or conducive to conditions of hazard, uncertainty or\ndanger, they shall be immediately replaced, or all use of them shall\nbe immediately discontinued and all necessary or desirable action\nimmediately taken to ensure that they are no longer productive or\nconducive to such conditions.\n(17) Members, components, parts, linkages or attachments, particularly\noperating cords, controls and brakes shall be so arranged and\nconstructed that at all times they fulfil their functions freely and\nwithout obstruction.\n(18) They shall be constantly maintained and kept free of obstruction.\n(19) Effective interlocking devices of approved designs shall be\nprovided—\n(a) if machinery or mechanisms are so arranged that they may be\ndriven either manually or by power—to ensure that the means\nby which the agencies are adapted cannot be simultaneously\nengaged; or\n(b) if alternative devices are provided for sustaining or controlling\nany load—to prevent their simultaneous disengagement and\nconsequent loss of control of load; or\n\n(c) in power cranes or power hoists, if any device other than a brake\nor friction clutch is provided for sustaining any load—to prevent\ndriving against the load-sustaining device; or\n(d) to prevent loads or lifting gear being lowered through hatchways\non, or into the path of travel of, travelling cranes, and to prevent\nthe cranes colliding with the loads; or\n(e) to ensure that trolleys, carriages, or crabs cannot overrun or\nbecome otherwise displaced from their tracks, at or near\nmoveable sections of them, or at or near crossovers, switches,\nturntables, or transfer positions; or\n(f) to prevent the operation of any hoist or lift having a moving\nplatform, cage, hopper, box, cradle, skip, kibble, bucket, vessel,\ntine, monkey or yoke while any enclosure door is not fully\nclosed and locked; or\n(g) to prevent the unlocking or opening of any enclosure door of any\nhoist or lift referred to in paragraph (f), except a door relative to\nwhich the platform, cage, hopper, box, cradle, skip, kibble,\nbucket, vessel, tine, monkey or yoke has attained such a position\nthat persons may safely enter the enclosure; or\n(h) as required by subsections (49) and (50) for speed-changing\ndevices.\n(20) Unless the chief inspector so directs, subsection (19) (b) does not\nrequire the interlocking of a brake.\n(21) Subsection (19) (f) does not apply to temporary hoists used in\nbuilding, demolition, excuvation or compressed air work.\n(22) Linkages, including those employing ropes, shall, unless it is an\nessential feature of design, be so devised and constructed that they\ncannot attain ‘deadcentre’ or other self-locking or self-neutralising\npositions.\n(23) If owing to external agency the load supported by a crane or hoist\nmay be subjected to major impact effects, shock absorbers of\n\napproved design shall be fixed in approved positions to relieve the\ncrane or hoist of the effects.\n(24) All of the members, components, parts, linkages and attachments of\ncranes and hoists and lifts and scaffoldings and plant shall be\neffectively and strongly secured in position.\n(25) All load chains and all hand chains shall be caused to book correctly\non their gipsies, sheaves, quadrants or the like by means of chain\nguides.\n(26) To avoid jamming of the chain, guide rollers shall not be used in\nproximity to gipsies.\n(27) Chain guides used with gipsies shall, if practicable, be of the fixed\ntype.\n(28) Hand ropes shall be caused to book correctly on their sheaves,\nquadrants or the like by means of effective rope guides.\n(29) The total force required at the hand chain or hand rope of a crane,\nhoist, scaffolding or plant to raise, lower, handle or control the\nworking load or for purposes of manipulation shall not exceed\n80 pounds.\n(30) However, subsection (29) shall not apply to motions effectively\ncontrolled by trailing bandbrakes, weston type brakes, or automatic\nbrakes analogous to them.\n(31) The end carriages or bogies of the following cranes shall be so\ndesigned, constructed and maintained that breakage of a track wheel\nor its axle will not allow the carriage or bogey to become vertically\ndisplaced by more than 3/ 4 of an inch:\n(a) cranes of the overhead traveller type;\n(b) travelling derrick cranes;\n(c) travelling gallows type cranes or gantries;\n(d) overhead runways other than monorail runways;\n\n(e) travelling portal and semi-portal cranes;\n(f) travelling hammerhead cranes.\n(32) Worm or screw gearing shall not be employed in the machinery,\nmechanisms or gearings operating the following movements of\nscaffoldings, cranes, hoists or plant except when used in conjunction\nwith the protective devices that are approved by the chief inspector:\n(a) the slewing movements of jib cranes;\n(b) the power-driven travelling movements, whether longitudinal or\ntransverse, of cranes.\n(33) However, subsection (32) does not apply to the mechanism by which\nordinary vehicular or mobile cranes are propelled.\n(34) Scaffoldings, cranes, hoists, plant or gear, including their crabs and\ntrolleys, shall be so designed, constructed and maintained that the\nloads are distributed between all supporting track or road wheels in a\nstatically determinate way.\n(35) The slewing motions of power cranes having jibs or cantilevered\nbooms shall be controlled by manually operated brakes.\n(36) The travelling motion of the following cranes shall be controlled from\nand at their main driving stations by manually operated brakes:\n(a) locomotive type power cranes;\n(b) power cranes of the overhead traveller type;\n(c) power cranes of the monorail or double-rail runway type of\nwhich the driver rides with or beside the load or lifting\nmechanism;\n(d) vehicular power cranes;\n(e) power cranes of the caterpillar type.\n\n(37) Cranes, hoists, lifts, scaffolding, plant or gear shall not be lubricated,\ntended or cleaned while in motion or while any member, component,\npart or attachment of them is in motion or while any member,\ncomponent, part or attachment is in any way connected or liable to be\nconnected with any energised associate, or any weight, load or force\ncapable of causing it to move.\n(38) In addition to shutting off the power, effective and dependable\nmechanical means shall be taken to render the members, components,\nparts or attachments immovable and to thereby ensure the safety of\npersons inspecting, examining, testing, lubricating, tending, cleaning\nor adjusting the cranes, hoists, lifts, scaffolding, plant, or gear.\n(39) The application of brakes other than those of the screw-down type\nshall not be deemed to be a dependable mechanical means for\nsubsection (38).\n(40) If it is not practicable to thus render the members, components, parts\nor attachments immobile and immovable in order that inspection,\nexamination, test or adjustment may be safely carried out, a duly\nqualified driver shall remain at and in sole charge of the controls\nduring the whole of the time of the inspection, examination, test or\nadjustment and shall move the members, components, parts or\nattachments only at and in accordance with each plain and specific\ndirection of the person making the inspection, examination, test or\nadjustment, but lubricating, tending, and cleaning shall not be carried\nout in this way.\n(41) This section shall not prevent cranes, engines or gear from being\nlubricated, tended or cleaned by means equally safe to that of\nrendering the members, components, parts and attachments immobile\nand immovable as mentioned in subsection (40).\n(42) Static counterbalance weights of cranes, hoists or scaffolding shall be\neffectively and strongly secured in position.\n\n(43) They shall be so devised and fixed that even if raised from their\nseatings in an emergency they will not become either partly or\ncompletely unshipped.\n(44) All suspended weights shall have such additional constraint, or\nfencing, that in the event of failure of their prime suspension they will\nnot fall to the danger of persons in the vicinity.\n(45) Tapered washers or tapered packers shall be used under the heads and\nnuts or bolts, pins and tie rods that protect from surfaces not normal\nto their longitudinal axes to ensure an even distribution of loading on\nthe heads and nuts.\n(46) Pawls shall not be used as load sustaining devices except—\n(a) if so plainly visible to a person standing or sitting at the controls\nthat the person can readily observe the depth to which each pawl\nhas entered the teeth with which it engages; or\n(b) if an approved indicator is provided to enable a person at the\ncontrols to ascertain the depth of engagement of the pawl as\nmentioned in paragraph (a).\n(47) However, pawls with approved accelerating springs or approved\nlinkages may be used in Weston type brakes.\n(48) Pawls in enclosing casings or boxings shall be of the non-sychronous\nmultiple type.\n(49) If any power-driven mechanism has a speed-changing or adjusting\ndevice by means of which load sustaining parts may be disconnected\nfrom the motive agency, a brake or other approved means shall be\nprovided to control the disconnected parts.\n(50) The brake or alternative means shall, if the chief inspector so requires,\nbe interlocked with the speed changing or adjusting device to prevent\ntheir simultaneous disengagement.\n(51) Brakes of mechanisms that can be reversed either under power or\nmanually shall be fully effective in all directions.\n\n(52) Automatic brakes other than those of the shoe type or of the Weston\n(screw or helix) type shall not be used on the mechanisms.\n(53) All dynamically reversible mechanisms that can be energised by the\naction of gravity, momentum or wind shall have brakes or other\napproved devices by which all movements can be both controlled and\nprevented.\n(54) Electrically opened brakes shall be deemed not to fulfil the\nrequirements of subsection (53).\n(55) A brake restraining a metal track wheel that runs on a metal track rail\nshall not for purposes of design be considered to develop a braking\nforce between wheel and rail in excess of 1/ 10 of the pressure between\nthe wheel and rail.\n(56) Non-automatic brakes shall have approved means by which they may\nbe locked in the fully engaged position.\n(57) However, the locking devices may be omitted for brakes controlling\nthe hoisting motions of overhead traveller cranes that lift or lower\nloads through heights not exceeding 30 feet.\n(58) In addition to any electrically-opened brakes, approved\nsemiautomatic brakes shall be provided on power-driven mechanisms\nhandling workers and materials to control the lowering motions.\n(59) The brakes shall function automatically on the manual release of a\nrestraining device.\n(60) All brakes shall be lined with approved brake lining materials and the\nlinings shall be so strongly and effectively fastened in place that they\nwill not become loose or displaced even when so worn that\nreplacement has become advisable.\n(61) Brake bands that are less in width than 1/ 5 of the diameter of their\ndrums shall have restraining clips or double-flanged drums or other\napproved devices that ensure against their lateral displacement.\n\n(62) All ends of brake bands shall be concentric and hinged to ensure that\nthe ends of the bands will not be subject to bending actions.\n(63) The use of rigid or partly-rigid intermediate joints in brake bands shall\nas far as practicable be avoided but if unavoidable the joints shall be\nof types that will not subject the bands to bending actions.\n(64) All manual and semiautomatic brakes shall be so devised, constructed\nand located that in an emergency they can be instantly applied.\n(65) If manual rotation of a screw thread or nut is necessary, brakes shall\nbe so devised, constructed and located that alternative means of\ninstantaneous application are available.\n(66) Effective means shall be provided for limiting the total movement of\nbrake bands or shoes to the least practicable amount.\n(67) The total movement of a brake band in opening and closing shall be\nlimited to an amount that will ensure against its excessive flexure or\ndisplacement or mounting.\n(68) Brakes shall open and close evenly to ensure correct action and\nregular wear of linings, their action shall be entirely smooth and free\nfrom chatter and they shall not stick or bind.\n(69) The total angular movement or ‘throw’ of the hand lever of any brake\nor clutch or the like shall not exceed 50°, and that of any pedal shall\nnot exceed 30°.\n(70) Brakes shall be capable of exerting braking torques 50% greater than\nthose transmitted to them, assuming conditions of static loading and\nan absence of friction except at the braking surfaces.\n(71) The braking torques shall be exerted by the brakes, if manually\nactuated, on application of a force not greater than 35 pounds to the\nhand lever, or, alternatively, 70 pounds to the foot pedal.\n(72) Every Weston (screw or helix) type brake shall be so designed that\nthe holding torque developed by it at all times exceeds by at least 1%\nthe load torque applied.\n\n(73) Unless specifically designed for operation with lubricated linings,\nbrakes shall, if necessary or desirable, be effectively protected against\nentry of water or other lubricants.\n(74) Subject to subsection (95), the hoisting motions of cranes or hoists of\nthe following types shall be controlled by automatic (trailing) bank\nbrakes, or by approved Weston (screw or helix) type brakes:\n(a) mobile, caterpillar, and locomotive type cranes;\n(b) hand-operated winches;\n(c) hand-operated derrick cranes;\n(d) hand-operated overhead traveller cranes.\n(75) The following motions of cranes or hoists of the following types shall\nbe controlled by Weston (screw or helix) type brakes:\n(a) the hoisting motions of hand-operated stacking machines,\ngibbets, gallows, and chain blocks;\n(b) the boom-elevating motion of mobile or portable conveyors;\n(c) the luffing and hoisting motions of power-driven travelling\nderrick cranes;\n(d) the hoisting motions of cranes and hoists (other than\npower-driven hoisting blocks), that raise and lower loads\nthrough distances not greater than 10 feet.\n(76) Convenient and readily accessible means shall, unless the design\nrenders them unnecessary, be provided by which brakes may be\nreadjusted from time to time to compensate for wear and to ensure\ncorrect functioning.\n(77) Any brake that is closed by springs shall have at least 2 such springs.\n(78) They shall be so devised and arranged that in the event of failure of\neither, the brake will continue to function and to develop at least 1/ 2 of\nthe holding torque prescribed by subsections (70) and (71).\n\n(79) Shoe brakes shall be so devised and constructed that the loads on\nopposing shoes automatically equalise and balance one another.\n(80) Brake show linkages shall be of the floating type so that appreciable\neccentricity of diametral oscillation of brake drums will not cause\nvariation in shoe loads.\n(81) The temperature of the rubbing surface of any brake shall not\nexceed—\n(a) 212° Fahrenheit for brakes lined with wood or fabric; or\n(b) 400° Fahrenheit for brakes lined with bonded asbestos or\napproved non-combustible sintered materials.\n(82) Ropes wrapping round shafts or drums shall not be provided or used\nas brakes.\n(83) All foot pedals, and all foot rests or steps that accommodate only\n1 foot of the user shall have heavily upturned edges or other approved\ndevices to prevent slipping.\n(84) All levers, pedals and control linkages shall be so devised that persons\nusing them cannot be injured by their recoil, backlash, or other\nmovement under power.\n(85) If it is practicable to use trailing type (unidirectional) handbrakes or\nother approved brakes, pawls shall not be used in mechanisms\nholding, supporting or sustaining loads.\n(86) Mechanisms for hoisting or holding Proscenium Safety Fire Curtains\nshall not have pawls.\n(87) Centrifugal brakes or other approved automatic speed regulating\ndevices shall be provided to control the speed of descent of\nProscenium Safety Fire Curtains and of other loads that are required\nto descend unattended.\n(88) Toothed or dog clutches shall not have less than 4 teeth or 4 dogs.\n\n(89) The teeth or dogs and their mating recesses shall be undercut\nsufficiently to prevent inadvertent disengagement of clutches.\n(90) Cone and other friction clutches shall be so designed that they will\nnot seize or become locked in engagement.\n(91) The chief inspector may require any cone clutch to be lined with an\napproved clutch lining material.\n(92) All manually operated clutches shall be actuated by means of levers,\npedals, or other approved controls.\n(93) All clutches shall be so designed and constructed that they can not\ndrift or become otherwise inadvertently engaged or disengaged.\n(94) Worm gearings having machined teeth and other worm gearings in\nwhich the angle of lead of the worm exceeds 3° shall be deemed\nincapable of stopping or holding loads, and mechanisms employing\nthe gearings shall have brakes as prescribed by subsection (53).\n(95) If worm gearing or a solenoid brake is employed in connection with\nany jib or derrick crane for raising or lowering loads, and if the crane\ndepends on gravitational forces for stability, an approved clutch shall\nbe provided in such position that in an emergency the load may, if\ndesired, be released, or alternatively lowered rapidly under the control\nof an approved brake that shall also be provided for the purpose.\n(96) All hoists and lifts used for raising or lowering workers shall have\napproved safety gear that shall be so devised and constructed that if\nthe vehicle in which the workers ride becomes separated or detached\nfrom its hoisting agency, it will immediately and automatically on\nseperation or detachment become securely locked to its guides,\nrunners, or supporting structure and remain so locked even if it is\nreconnected to its hoisting agency and its weight again transferred\nto it.\n(97) However—\n(a) if the safety gear is entirely self-resetting, it may automatically\nrelease its grip on the guides, runners or supporting structure\n\nafter the weight of the vehicle has again been transferred to the\nhoisting agency; or\n(b) the safety gear shall not function while the vehicle is ascending;\nor\n(c) if the distance travelled by the vehicle exceeds 30 feet—the\nchief inspector may require the safety gear to function if and as\nthe vehicle attains a speed 40% greater than its rated speed; or\n(d) if the rated speed is less than 100 feet per minute—the safety\ngear shall function if and as it reaches 140 feet per minute.\n(98) The platforms of all hoists for raising or lowering workers shall have\nsides extending not less in height than 6 feet above the platform\nflooring, and the sides shall constitute continuous surfaces free from\napertures.\n(99) Any side or end not used for loading or unloading or for access shall\nalso be fenced.\n(100) Any side or end that is used for loading, unloading or access shall be\nenclosed or fenced by approved gates or doors extending to the same\nheight, or if approved, by rails set at a height of 3 feet above the\nplatform flooring, and at a distance of 8 inches back from the platform\nedge served.\n(101) The hoist platform shall have a robust roof or head cover to prevent\npersons being struck by falling objects.\n(102) Hand rails or other grips shall be provided overhead, or on the\ncontinuous surfaces mentioned in subsection (98) for the use of\npersons travelling in the hoist.\n(103) If loads are raised or lowered in open topped, open sided or open\nended vessels, kibbles, boxes or trays, or in bags, above workers in\nshafts, well holes, or other confined spaces, monkeys or other\napproved means shall be employed to prevent them colliding with the\nsides of the shaft or well hole, or anything in it.\n\n(104) However, the monkeys or means shall not be deemed necessary if the\nhoisting rope or chain may be freely displaced in any direction\nthrough an angle of 5° from the vertical without the suspended load,\nvessel, kibble, box, or tray coming into contact with the sides of the\nshaft or well hole or anything in it.\n(105) If loads guided by a monkey are raised or lowered above workers in\nconfined or partly confined areas, the monkeys shall have approved\nsafety gear so devised and constructed that if the weight of the\nmonkey is removed from the hoisting agency at any position within\nthe limits of its travel it will immediately and automatically on\nremoval become securely locked to its guides.\n(106) The kibble, truck or vessel the monkey is employed to guide shall be\nso fastened to the monkey that it will only be automatically released\nafter the monkey has attained its lowermost limit of travel.\n(107) If loads are raised, lowered, handled or transported on hooks, or other\nmedia, under circumstances in which it is necessary or desirable to\nprevent them becoming unshipped or displaced from it, approved\nsafety hooks, or other approved means shall be adopted to prevent the\nunshipping or displacement, or to prevent injury (or both) to any\nperson in the vicinity.\n(108) This subsection applies to the following lifting devices:\n(a) grabs, dogs, clamps and magnets;\n(b) all lifting devices that either—\n(i) function by the agency of friction, fluid pressure,\nvacuumatic action, magnetism, local indentation of\nsurfaces, or minor irregularities of surfaces, or any\ncombination of them; or\n(ii) are of such a nature that they are liable to become detached\nfrom the load or otherwise displaced from it in the event of\nthe slackening of their slings or the sudden movement of\nany supporting member.\n\n(109) No lifting device to which subsection (108) applies shall be used to\nraise, lower or transport loads—\n(a) in any circumstances in which any person might be injured\nshould the load or part of it become detached or fall; or\n(b) in any circumstances in which the device might dislodge or\noverturn any material, object or stock to the danger of any\nperson; or\n(c) in any way prejudicial to the safety of any person.\n(110) If in conformity with section 128 rail clamps are provided for locking\nany crane or hoist to its track rails, the clamps shall be so devised and\nconstructed that they function immediately and automatically on the\noperation of an instantaneous type tripping device set closely adjacent\nto the main controls of the crane or hoist.\n(111) The energy required to close and lock the clamps shall be derived\nfrom a descending weight or from springs set in pairs and so arranged\nthat in the event of failure of either, the clamps will continue to\nfunction and to develop at least 1/ 2 of their previous clamping grip on\nthe track rail.\n(112) If a crane or hoist has 2 or more rail clamps, they shall function\nsimultaneously, and the clamping grip of each on its rail shall be\ndirectly proportional to the amount of wind or other loading the clamp\nis required to resist.\n(113) If the weight of any crane or hoist exceeds 100 tons, the rail clamps\nshall have an approved safety device that will effectively prevent\nthem from being opened or relaxed while the velocity of the wind\nexceeds 30 miles per hour in the vicinity of the crane or hoist, and in\nany direction in which it may travel.\n(114) The rail clamps shall be located in positions in which their sudden\napplication is least detrimental to the stability of the crane or hoist.\n\n(115) Permanent end stops shall be provided to ensure that travelling cranes\nor hoists or scaffoldings or any travelling parts of them do not overrun\nor otherwise exceed their limits of safe travel.\n(116) If the speed of travel of the crane or hoist or relevant part of it exceeds\n350 feet per minute, or if the product of its weight in tons and its speed\nof travel in feet per minute is greater than 3 500, the end stops shall\nhave approved spring or fluid buffers.\n(117) If the weight of the crane or hoist or relevant part of it\nexceeds 50 tons, the end stops shall be so devised that should\ncollision occur with them at the maximum speed that may be attained\nin any circumstances, the crane, or hoist or relevant part of it will not\noverturn, and will be brought steadily to rest.\n(118) If a crane, hoist or scaffolding or any travelling part of it travels on 2\nor more tracks or rails, end stops shall be provided at and in relation\nto each track or rail.\n(119) No travelling crane or hoist or travelling part of it shall be operated\nor driven or travelling scaffolding used unless all the end stops are in\nplace, or unless approved effective temporary end stops are in place\ninstead of them.\n(120) Except if running in the bosoms of rolled steel joists, channels, tubes,\ntees, or angles, all track wheels of cranes or hoists or travelling parts\nof them shall have flanges at each side of each rail or track on which\nthey run.\n(121) Alternatively, approved means shall be employed for locating and\nretaining the wheels on their rails or tracks.\n(122) However, a wheel running on twin rails or tracks may have 1 or more\ncentral flanges, and the wheels of locomotive cranes or railway type\ntrucks or bogies need not have double flanges.\n(123) If a crane or hoist or scaffolding travels on uneven or slightly uneven\ntracks or surfaces on track or road wheels that are not fully sprung or\nalternatively shod in an approved way with pneumatic tyres, it shall\n\nbe designed as though any 1 wheel, or group of wheels if they are\narranged in groups, does not carry load.\n(124) The counterbalance and dead loading of a crane or hoist shall be so\narranged and disposed that distortion of the frame structure is\nminimised.\n(125) Jacks used for supporting, levelling, or stabilising cranes or hoists or\nscaffolding or plant shall have dynamically irreversible screw threads\nor other approved devices by which can be applied and finely\nadjusted.\n(126) The jacks shall be so braced or otherwise secured in position that they\ncannot overturn or become in any way displaced.\n(127) If the load plate or instruction plate of any crane or hoist or plant\nprescribes or indicates that jacks shall be used, the jacks shall\naccordingly be used.\n(128) If the plates prescribe or indicate further conditions about the way of\nuse of the jacks, the conditions shall be fully complied with.\n(129) The jibhead sheaves and the jibheads of mobile, caterpillar or walking\ncranes shall be so designed that if the vertical fall of hoisting rope is\ndiverted or displaced laterally 15° or more from the vertical it will be\nautomatically unshipped from the jibhead sheave immediately\nhoisting starts.\n(130) If the hoisting motion of a crane or hoist of the following type has a\nbrake (other than an approved Weston screw or helix type automatic\nbrake) the hand crank handles shall have a neutral position into which\nthey shall be placed and kept completely disconnected from the\nhoisting mechanism while any load is being lowered under the control\nof the brake:\n(a) hand-operated winches; or\n(b) crabs having hand cranks; or\n(c) hand-operated derrick cranes.\n\n(131) Subject to section 135 (3) and (4), the specified motions of the\nundermentioned cranes, hoists and scaffolding, shall, if under power,\nhave approved limiting devices by which overwinding, overluffing,\noverslewing and overtravelling shall be obviated.\n(132) The devices shall effectively prevent the crane, hoist or scaffolding\nor relevant part of it, or the load, from colliding with or being drawn\nor forced into contact with any relatively fixed part or object.\n(133) If the platform, cage, box, yoke, lifting hook or analogous media of\nthe cranes or hoists mentioned in subsection (134) (a), (c) and (d)\ncannot be lowered to the level of the lowest floor or surface served by\nthem without unwinding the hoisting rope, chain, rack, thread or other\nagency to an unsafe or undesirable degree, limiting devices\nmentioned in subsections (131) and (132) shall also be provided to\nobviate the unwinding.\n(134) However, if the chief inspector is satisfied that such collision or\ncontact or unwinding will not damage the crane, hoist or scaffolding,\nor part of it, or be in any way dangerous, the chief inspector may\nwaive the following requirements of subsections (131) to (133):\n(a) the hoisting motions of overhead traveller cranes;\n(b) the hoisting and luffing motions of all mobile or caterpillar jib\nor derrick cranes;\n(c) the hoisting motions of hoists other than those used in building\nwork, excavation work, or demolition work, for handling\nmaterials;\n(d) the hoisting motions of stacking machines;\n(e) the hoisting motions of fork-lift trucks including those equipped\nwith trays, scoops, arms or jibs, or other media by which loads\nare handled;\n(f) the slewing motions of mobile cranes—\n(i) if continuous unidirectional slewing is not provided; or\n\n(ii) if the crane has not been designed for use with the jib or\nderrick in all positions.\n(135) Limit devices shall be self-resetting and shall be so devised that on\ntheir functioning, the mechanism, or motion they control will be\nbrought to rest and remain safely at rest.\n(136) Power hoists for raising or lowering workers or for raising or\nlowering loads above workers in confined or partly confined areas\nshall have approved limiting devices as mentioned in\nsubsection (131) to obviate both overwinding and overlowering, and\nall dangers attendant on them.\n(137) If any member of a crane or hoist or scaffolding is moved under\npower by a screw thread or rack, an approved limiting device shall be\nprovided to prevent the thread or rack from being completely\nunwound from its nut or pinion.\n(138) If any crane, hoist, lift or scaffolding or part of it travels in any\ndirection under power, and if the tractive or propulsive force is\napplied by any means other than the fractional adhesion of track\nwheels to track rails, a clearance of approved magnitude and extent\nshall be provided and maintained at and beyond each limit of travel\nas a safeguard against overrunning and consequent overloading, and\nto ensure the effective operation of the limiting devices prescribed by\nsubsections (131) to (137).\n(139) Instead of the overrunning clearances, effective alternative devices\nmay, if specifically approved by the chief inspector, be employed for\nthe purposes aforesaid.\n(140) Except as prescribed by subsection (129), approved means, other than\nfixed guards, shall be provided to prevent ropes or chains from\nslackening on, or becoming displaced from or on their drums,\nsheaves, or other winding media.\n(141) If a crane, hoist, lift, scaffolding, or plant is driven by power and is of\nthe following type, such means shall be so devised, and constructed\nthat slackening of the rope or chain will automatically, and\n\nimmediately, cause the drum, sheave or other winding medium to\nstop with the brake fully applied:\n(a) automatic or semiautomatic hoists having moving platforms,\ncages, boxes, hoppers, cradles, skips, kibbles, buckets, vessels,\ntines, monkeys, or yokes;\n(b) lifts;\n(c) stacking machines.\n(142) However, if the chief inspector is satisfied that the crane, hoist, lift or\nscaffolding, or plant is so devised, constructed and enclosed that\nabsence of the safeguards required by subsection (141) would not\nresult in danger to any person, the chief inspector may waive the\nrequirements.\n(143) Hoists used in building work, excavation work, and compressed air\nwork for raising or lowering workers, shall have detaching safety\nbells, or other approved devices by which in the event of the lifting\ncage, car, or vessel overrunning and closely approaching collision\nwith the overhead structure the hoisting rope or chain will be\nautomatically and instantly disconnected from the cage, car or vessel,\nand by which the cage, car, or vessel will remain safely suspended\nindependently of the safety gear prescribed by subsections (96) and\n(97).\n(144) Hoisting ropes or chains disconnected as prescribed by subsection\n(143) shall be so guided and arranged that they can be wound freely\nback by and to their tractive mechanisms without danger and without\nfouling headbeams, sheaves, projections, or neighbouring buildings,\nstructures, or plant.\n(145) No uncommon device, extra, or innovation capable of affecting\nordinary, normal, or customary functioning shall be added to or\nincorporated in any member, component, part or attachment of any\nmachinery, mechanisms, or gearing unless approval of the chief\ninspector has first been obtained in regard to it.\n\n(146) The slewing motions of caterpillar cranes and hoists shall be locked\nwhile the travelling motion is in use.\n(147) Interconnecting mechanisms of cranes, lifts, hoists, scaffolding or\nplant, shall be so devised and constructed that no motion can become\ninadvertently engaged or disengaged during operation of any other\nmotion.\n(148) Members, components, parts or attachments of the frame structure of\ncranes, lifts, hoists or scaffoldings shall not be connected or\ninterconnected by clamps or clamping devices, except if the specific\napproval of the chief inspector has first been obtained.\n(149) The chief inspector’s approval of any clamp or clamping device shall\nnot be deemed to include approval of its general use, but only its use\nfor the purposes and applications that are particularised in the\napproval.\n(150) If the luffing mechanism of a derrick or jib crane is driven by\ninterconnection with the hoisting mechanism, the crane and\nmechanism shall be so designed that the working load is luffed in a\nline that is as nearly horizontal as is practicable.\n(151) In addition the crane and its mechanisms shall be so designed that\nthere will not be any danger of the clutch being driven out of\nengagement while luffing.\n(152) Fork-lift trucks, or stacking machines, or appliances analogous to\nthem, shall not be equipped or used with jibs capable of lifting or\nhandling loads at greater horizontal radii from the masts of the trucks\nor machines than those measured horizontally from the masts to the\nmidlength points of the tines, platforms, trays, or scoops with which\nthe trucks or machines would ordinarily be equipped in conformity\nwith this regulation, unless alternatively, the approval of the chief\ninspector has first been obtained.\n(153) Approved effective permanent facilities shall be provided by which\npersons may safely lubricate, tend, and inspect the machinery and\nother working parts or cranes, lifts, hoists, scaffoldings and plant.\n\n(154) The facilities shall include approved permanent safe means of access.\n(155) Approved permanent safe means of access shall be provided to the\ncabins, driving stations, and machinery houses of all cranes, hoists,\nscaffoldings and plant.\n(156) In order that persons may not be obliged to traverse dangerous zones\nunnecessarily, access facilities of cranes, hoists, scaffoldings or plant\ntravelling on elevated tracks shall if practicable give access directly\nto driving cabins, or driving stations.\n(157) A clear unobstructed headroom clearance of not less than 6 feet shall\nbe provided and maintained above the upper surfaces of main access\nplatforms of every crane, hoist, scaffolding or plant that travels under\npower.\n(158) If secondary platforms function as walkways between other platforms\nthe same headroom clearance shall be provided and maintained above\nthem as above main platforms, or alternatively, the secondary\nplatforms shall be roofed in an approved way.\n(159) Grabs, travelling carriages, or telphers, shall not project over, or\notherwise overhang, any access platform, ladder or walkway.\n(160) Access facilities to cranes, lifts, hoists, scaffoldings, building works,\nexcavation works, compressed air works and plant shall be free and\nshall be kept free of obstruction or partial obstruction, except if partial\nobstruction is specifically approved by the chief inspector.\n(161) Access facilities shall be so devised, constructed, placed, and fenced\nthat persons using them are safe from injury by machinery, cranes,\nlifts, hoists, scaffoldings, plant or loads being handled, or by building\nor excavation work or compressed air work, or by electricity,\nexplosives, hot or dangerous liquids or substances, gases, vapours or\nfumes, or by falls or by being crushed.\n(162) The owner or person in charge of any crane that travels under power\nshall prevent all persons entering on the elevated runway structure of\nthe crane, and no person shall enter on the elevated structure unless,\n\nand until, approved effective measures have been taken to ensure the\nperson’s safety.\n(163) If an accident has occurred in connection with any crane, lift, hoist,\nscaffolding, or plant, or in connection with building or excavation\nwork, or compressed air work, or any roof, an inspector may take\npossession of any part, piece, or item that the inspector considers has\nbeen concerned, for close or radiographic examination, analysis or\ntest.\n(164) Alternatively, the inspector may take possession of and preserve the\npart, piece, or item as an exhibit for production at any coronial\ninquiry.\n(165) Notwithstanding the provisions of section 4 the peripheral contours\nof the track wheels of cranes, hoists, scaffolding or plant travelling on\nrailroad type tracks shall conform with diagram 127.\n\nDiagram 127\n(166) The owner or person in charge of any crane or hoist, other than a hoist\nconforming with subsections (96) and (97), shall prevent all persons\nriding on the load, or on the lifting hook, or platform, or tines or box,\nor vessel, or other lifting medium, and no person shall so ride, except\nthat the following persons may do so subject to the following\nlimitations (if any):\n(a) a dogger whose name is exhibited in an approved notice at the\nmain driving station of the crane concerned;\n(b) persons authorised in writing by the chief inspector, for the\npurposes as may be prescribed in the authority.\n(167) No crane, lift, hoist or scaffolding shall be constructed in whole or in\npart of, or include or incorporate, any second-hand material or part.\n\n(168) However, subsection (167) does not preclude the dismantling and\nre-erection of the crane, lift, hoist, or scaffolding in accordance with\nthe Act and this regulation.\n(169) Also,second-hand materials may be used—\n(a) if not subject to stress; or\n(b) if the material is amorphous; or\n(c) if specifically approved by the chief inspector.\n(170) All enclosed gearings used in connection with cranes, lifts, hoists, and\nscaffoldings, shall have readily accessible inspection apertures with\ncovers that may be readily removed without dismantling or placing\nthe gearing out of commission.\n(171) The apertures shall be as large as is practicable and shall be so placed\nthat the gearings may be effectively and conveniently inspected.\n(172) Unless otherwise approved all joints within members of the frame or\nsupporting structures of cranes, lifts, hoists, plant, or scaffolding shall\nbe plated with splice plates on all surfaces, but this shall not be\nnecessary if the joint is welded in an approved way.\n(173) If more specific provision is not made in this regulation, and unless\nthe chief inspector otherwise directs, all cranes, hoists, plant and\nscaffolding and the members, components, parts and attachments of\nthem and to them shall conform with the following Rules of Standards\nAustralia, Crane and Hoist Code No C.B.2, 1938, and the rules shall\nbe interpreted and applied in accordance with the code:\nrule\nNo\nNo\n317 Concrete-cement, etc 481 Track rail webs\n319 Welding 482 Track rail clearances\n407 Loads—temperature effect 483 Track rail fastening\n408 Loads—erection stresses 484 Track rail stops\n\nrule\nNo\nNo\n","sortOrder":19},{"sectionNumber":"429","sectionType":"section","heading":"Latticing and plating of struts 486 Runway crane clearances","content":"429 Latticing and plating of struts 486 Runway crane clearances\n430* Struts—minimum lattice bar\ndimen-sions\n488 Outside crane equipage\n431 Struts—angle of lattice bars 501 Grooving for drums and\npulleys\n432 Struts—batten plates 502 Ungrooved rope drums\n434 Struts—spacing of bars and\nplates\n507 Shaft keys, types of\n435 Struts—rivets in columns 511 Sheave diameters\n437 Effective span of members\n521 Track wheels, avoid\noverhang\n438 Effective depth of members\n523 Track wheels, size and\n444 Strength and ‘Z’ of members\n524 Track wheels, diameters\n445 Strength and ‘Z’ of plate girders 525 Track wheels, tread width\n446 Plate girder flange rivets 540 Holding brakes on manual\nhoists\n447 Distribution of wheel loads on\nplate girders\n542 Pressure gauges, visible to\ndriver\n448 Plate girder flange section 543 Engine exhausts\n449 Plate girder and stiffeners 544 Cylinder drain cocks, etc\n451 Plate girder stiffeners at loads 548 Controls handy and easy\n452 Plate girder stiffeners on both\nsides of web\n811 Drilling\n\nrule\nNo\nNo\n453 Plate girder stiffener\nproportioning\n812 Punching\n456 Truss web tension members 813 Reaming\n458 Camber of girders and trusses 814 Countersunk rivets\n461 Joint splice plate, symmetry of 815 Riveting method\n462 Joint splice plate, section of 817 Clearances for bolts\n463 Web joints 818 Washers\n464 Rivet shearing area 820 Shop painting\n466 Rivet minimum pitch 821 Painting of inaccessible parts\n467 Rivet maximum pitch 822 Field painting\n468 Rivet edge distance 823 Painting, general\n469 Rivets through packings 824 Bright or machined surfaces\n470 Rivets in tension 825 Surfaces to be concrete\nprotected\n471 Rivet gauge lines 1006 No passengers on cranes\n472 Rivet effective diameter 1007 Cabin, location, size, etc\n473 Drainholes to prevent corrosion 1008 Warning devices\n474 Brickwork bearing pressures 1009 Cabin protection in hot\nplaces\n475 Concrete bearing pressures 1121 Driver, duties on leaving\ncabin\n476 Pier tops 1122 Driver must lock crane\nagainst wind\n477 Bearing pressures, eccentric 1301 Repair authorisation\n\nrule\nNo\nNo\n478 Piles 1302 Repair man, duties before\nrepair\n479 Foundations (bearing pressures) 1303 Repair man, to prevent parts\nfalling\n480 Track rail sizes\n* It shall not be necessary to conform with rule 430, par 2.\n(174) Earth, clay, shale, sand, grit, powders, chippings, borings, spalls,\npunchings, clippings, swarf, offcuts or other aggregates or liquids\nshall not be used as counter or other balance, bias or operating\nweights unless encased in accordance with a design first submitted to\nand approved by the chief inspector.\n(175) Every portable counter, bias, balance or operating weight shall have\npermanently, clearly and distinctly stamped, engraved or embossed\non them, its correct weight in pounds.\n(176) If a weight consists of detachable or demountable sections, each\nsection shall be so marked with its own individual weight, only.\n(177) The figures and letters used in marking weights shall not be less than\n1/ 2 an inch in depth.\n(178) No figures other than those stating the weight as mentioned in\nsubsections (175) to (177) shall be marked on any portable weight.\n(179) Live counter, bias, balance or operating weights that are not of metal\nshall be encased, framed, or otherwise protected or fenced in a way\napproved by the chief inspector.\n(180) The chief inspector may, if the chief inspector considers appropriate,\ndisallow the use of any such material or the chief inspector may\nrequire the use of an appropriate metal instead of it.\n\n(181) If a portable counter, bias, balance or operating weight has a\npermanent handle, the handle shall be of round section mild steel of\nnot less than 5/ 8 of an inch in diameter and shall be so devised as to\neliminate all corners, vees, or other features that might damage\nlashings or other ropes used in connection with it.\n(182) Drawings of all portable counter, bias, balance or operating weights\nthat are of concrete, stone or encased materials shall be submitted to\nthe chief inspector for approval before manufacture and the weights\nshall not be used unless manufactured in accordance with an\napproved design.\n(183) The thickness of a brake band shall not exceed 1/ 125 part of the\ndiameter of the drum on which it wraps.\n(184) However, no brake band shall exceed 1/ 2 an inch in thickness.\n(185) No transverse fillet weld shall be made on any brake band.\n(186) Single rivets or single bolts shall not be used to connect end fittings\nto brake bands, or to make joints in brake bands.\n(187) If there is more than 1 row of rivet or other holes in a brake band, the\nleast distance measured obliquely between any hole and the nearest\nhole that is in another transverse row shall not be less than 2/ 3 of the\nminimum distance between adjacent holes in any transverse row.\n(188) If brake shoes or brake linings are of timber, only selected timbers of\napproved types shall be used.\n(189) They shall be fastened in place in an approved way.\n(190) The depth of flanges of break drums, measured radially above braking\nsurfaces, shall not be less than twice the combined thickness of brake\nband and brake lining.\n(191) If the lining consists of wooden blocks, it may for the purpose of\nfixing flange depths, be deemed to be 1/ 4 of an inch in thickness.\n(192) U-clips attached to brake bands to prevent their lateral displacement\nfrom break drums, shall overlap the edges of the drums by a distance\n\nat least equal to 3 times the combined thickness of brake band and\nlining.\n(193) If the lining consists of wooden blocks, it may, for the purpose of\nfixing the overlap, be deemed to be 1/ 4 of an inch in thickness.\n(194) Aluminium rivets or pegs shall not be used to secure brake linings.\n(195) Brake linings of metal, except approved sintered metal, shall not be\n(196) The linings of brake bands shall extend at least to the edges of the\nbands to which they attach.\n(197) The edges of brake bands, and brake linings, shall be cleanly finished\nand smooth.\n(198) Leather or combustible fabric brake bands may be used only if\nspecifically approved.\n(199) Closing weights used in solenoid brakes shall not move through a\ntotal distance greater than 3 inches unless effectively cushioned to\neliminate hammering and impact effects.\n(200) Stops shall be provided to ensure that the shoes of shoe type brakes\ndo not trail on the drums when the brakes are open.\n(201) The angular movement of a pawl about its hinge pin while idling over\nits mating teeth shall not exceed 12°.\n(202) If practicable, pawls shall have springs to accelerate their speed of\nengagement.\n(203) The springs shall be of approved design.\n(204) Pawls shall not have devices for locking them in engaged or\ndisengaged positions.\n(205) However, subsection (204) does not prevent the use of approved\ninterlocking devices.\n\n(206) If a pawl has attached to it an operating grip, handle, or trigger, the\nattachment shall be so devised, and located that it may be safely used.\n(207) Apparatus including the grips, handles and triggers as mentioned in\nsubsection (206) for disengaging and holding pawls in the disengaged\nposition shall be devised and arranged to be actuated by a person\nlocated at the driving or operating position of the mechanism or\nmachinery concerned.\n(208) The pawl disengaging and holding apparatus shall not be actuated by\nfoot, but shall comprise a simple hand mechanism.\n(209) It shall be so devised and arranged that it will, when suitably actuated,\nreturn the pawl to the engaged position by reliable and effective\nmeans.\n(210) It shall be so devised and located that it shall not be necessary for a\nperson to stoop or relax his or her grip on any crank handle while\nactuating the pawl mechanism.\n(211) Pawls shall be so designed that their active extremities alone, make\ncontact with the mating teeth.\n(212) Pawls or the teeth with which they engage (or both) shall be so\ndesigned that the pawls tend to lock in engagement and so that the\nload holds the pawl in engagement.\n(213) The angle contained between the 2 lines joining the tip of a pawl to\nthe respective centres of rotation of the pawl and its mating teeth shall\nnot be less than 105° and not more than 120°.\n(214) If the pawl is used in tension, the angle contained between the 2 lines\njoining the tip of the engaged tooth of the rachet and the centres\nmentioned in subsection (213) shall not be less than 60° or more than\n75°.\n(215) Gravity operated pawls shall be so balanced that if released while\ndisengaged, they will immediately and automatically re-engage with\ntheir mating teeth.\n\n(216) Safety non-splintering glass or non-splintering non-inflammable\nplastic shall be used in all transparent wind or weather screens of\ndriving stations, if liable to be struck by loads or by slings, hooks or\nother lifting media.\n(217) Petrol and other inflammable liquids shall be stored in robust metal\ntanks having screwed filling plugs and screw-down outlet valves.\n(218) The tanks shall be so located that they are not subject to undue\nheating, and all desirable provision shall be made to ensure that fumes\ndo not become ignited and do not accumulate.\n(219) Tanks shall be well clear of all electrified wirings, switchgear, control\ngear and apparatus.\n(220) If practicable inflammable liquid tanks shall be located on the outer\nsides of driving stations.\n(221) They shall not be closely adjacent to access facilities.\n(222) If cranes, lifts, hoists, scaffolding or plant having internal-combustion\nengines are required to operate indoors or in confined or poorly\nventilated places, effective means shall be taken to remove all exhaust\ngases and to ensure all desirable ventilation.\n(223) Exhaust steam, hot water, and the exhaust gases from\ninternal-combustion engines, shall be effectively conveyed and\ndirected away from driving stations and from crane and hoist crews.\n(224) If any jib or derrick crane or hoist is not designed to lift its maximum\nsafe working load at all attainable postions of the jib or derrick\nwithout breach of the provisions of this regulation, it shall have an\napproved load-radius indicator, and the indicator shall be constantly\nmaintained in good working order and condition.\n(225) The load-radius indicator previously mentioned shall function\nautomatically, and be so devised and constructed that for each\nposition in which the jib or derrick may be placed, it exhibits and\nindicates clearly and conspicuously to the crane driver at the main\n\ndriving station of the crane the safe working load corresponding to\nthe position, determined in accordance with this regulation.\n(226) The load markings on a load-radius indicator shall be of a permanent\nnature, and it shall be an offence to obliterate or to incorrectly mark\nor incorrectly graduate, the indicator, or to so alter the indicator that\nit reads or indicates incorrectly.\nStability\n(1) Every crane and hoist shall have and at all times retain at least the\nratios of stability against overturning shown in table 128 as\nappropriate to its type, and to the loadings acting on it.\n(2) If more than 1 such ratio is shown, the stability shall be separately\nassessed with regard to each set of contributing circumstances.\n\nPart 11 Basic requirements about design and construction, erection, use, maintenance, inspection and testing with particular\nTable 128\nstationary crane or hoist or\nany travelling crane or\nhoist other than\nundermentioned\nA \n\n include\nomit\nomit\nomit\n. .\n. .\nomit\nomit\nomit\nomit\n1.3\n1.8\n1.5\n\ntravelling slewing cranes\nand tower slewing cranes\nB\nomit\nomit\nomit\nomit\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nomit\nomit\nomit\n. .\n. .\nomit\n. .\nomit\nomit\ninclude wind\nacting from\nthe rear.\ninclude wind\nacting from\nfront or from\nside\nomit\nomit\nomit\nomit\nomit\n1.3\n1.0\n1.4\n1.0\n1.5\n1.0\n\nPart 11 Basic requirements about design and construction, erection, use, maintenance, inspection and testing with particular\nrepeat all shown for stationary cranes and add—\nfloating cranes C\nomit\n\n\n\n\n\n\n. .\n. .\nomit\nomit\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\ncrane must maintain\nat least 1 foot of\nfreeboard under these\nconditions\nReference B includes cranes travelling on horizontal, level tracks, without superelevation. If these conditions are not ensured, full allowance\nmust be made for more adverse circumstances.\n\n(3) The ratio of stability of any crane or hoist shall be determined in each\ninstance by dividing the moment of the loadings that stabilise the\ncrane or hoist by the moment of the loadings that tend to overturn it,\nall the moments being measured about the point or line around which\noverturning takes place.\n(4) In assessing the overturning loadings, the provisions of section 125\nshall be disregarded.\n(5) Unless and until approved by the chief inspector, rail clamps,\noutriggers or other devices for augmenting the stability of cranes or\nhoists shall be disregarded in assessing overturning moments.\n(6) If the dead load of any crane or hoist is insufficient to prevent the\ncrane or hoist being blown along its tracks with all track wheels\nlocked, or if the brakes are incapable of completely locking all the\ntrack wheels, approved means shall be adopted by which the crane or\nhoist may be secured against wind loadings.\n(7) In assessing the braking grip of wheels on track rails a coefficient of\nfriction not greater than 0.1 shall be assumed.\n(8) Wind loadings in accordance with section 123 shall be assumed, but\nirrespective of whether the crane is in operation or not, the intensity\nof wind loading shall be assumed to be that appropriate when the\ncrane is not operating.\nTest loads\n(1) Except if the chief inspector otherwise requires, each test load shall\nweigh 11/ 4 times the working load of the crane, hoist or part of it that\nis to be tested.\n(2) No person shall apply any greater test load unless the person has first\nobtained the assent of the chief inspector.\n\n(3) Not more than 1 test load shall be raised, lowered or transported by\nor on any crane or hoist or lift or scaffolding at any 1 time.\n(4) If a greater number of simultaneous test loads are necessary the\napproval of the chief inspector shall be obtained before the loads are\nraised, lowered or transported.\nMechanical\n(1) The diameter of the shank of any forged steel lifting hook shall not,\nwhen measured at the bottom of the thread, be less than that\nt = 0.65 w inches.\n(2) In subsection (1):\nt means the diameter of the hook shank in inches.\nw means the maximum tensile load in tons in the hook shank.\n(3) For subsection (1) the increases in load w otherwise prescribed by\nsection 125 may be disregarded, except if the hoisting mechanism of\nthe crane is within classification 4, in which case the compensating\nratio shall be assumed to be 1.2, and the hook designed for the\nincreased load.\n(4) If the shank of a lifting hook is not provided with a screw thread, the\nhook shall be proportioned as though it were so provided, but if\ninstead of a screw thread the shank is recessed in an approved way to\naccommodate a split washer or cone, the tensile stress at the recessed\npart may exceed that permissible if a screw thread were used in the\nratio 1.67:1.\n(5) Upset heads shall not be formed on hook shanks after the shanks have\nbeen inserted in their trunnions, shackles, swivels or other supports.\n\n(6) Notwithstanding the provisions of section 4, no lifting hook shall be\nof less computed strength than one of forged steel proportioned in\naccordance with diagram 130.1 and diagram 130.2, having regard to\nthe bight diameter, C, which shall be determined from the formula—\nC = 1.84 w\nfor hooks for loads not greater than 31/ 2 tons, or\nC=1.5 w\nfor hooks for greater loads.\n(7) In subsection (6):\nw—see subsection (2).\n\nPart 11 Basic requirements about design and construction, erection, use, maintenance, inspection and testing with particular\nDiagram 130.1\n\nDiagram 130.2\n\n(8) Except as may be provided in the following subsections, all lifting\nhooks shall be precisely of the form defined by diagram 130.1 and\ndiagram 130.2.\n(9) Ramshorn lifting hooks shall be precisely of the form defined by\ndiagram 130.3.\n(10) No ramshorn hook shall be of less computed strength than one of\nforged steel, proportioned in accordance with diagram 130.3, having\nregard to the shank throat diameter t, which shall be measured at the\nbottom of the thread.\nDiagram 130.3\n\n(11) The stress in any rope drum shall be determined from the formula—\n√ ƒ 2\n( T\npt ) 2\npounds per square inch.\n(12) In subsection (11):\nƒ means the maximum transverse stress in pounds per square inch.\np means the pitch of the rope grooves or least distance measured\ncentre to centre between adjacent turns of rope on the drum.\nt means the radial thickness of the drum.\nT means the maximum tensile load in any 1 rope winding on the\ndrum, in pounds.\n(13) For grooved drums t shall be measured at the bottom of the grooves;\np and t shall be measured in inches.\n(14) The stress so determined shall not exceed—\n(a) 4 800 pounds per square inch for cast iron drums; or\n(b) 9 600 pounds per square inch for cast steel drums; or\n(c) 12 000 pounds per square inch for mild steel drums.\n(15) In determining the stresses in a rope drum it shall not be necessary to\nincrease the forces or moments producing the stresses in the ratios\notherwise prescribed by section 125.\n(16) If a metal shaft of circular section is subject to simultaneous\ntransverse and torsional stresses the resultant shearing stress shall be\nƒ 2 + 4ƒs2\n2 tons per square inch.\n\n(17) In subsection (16):\nƒ means the maximum transverse stress at the section under\nconsideration.\nƒs means the maximum torsional stress at the same section.\n(18) If a metal shaft of circular section is subject to simultaneous\ntransverse and torsional stresses the resultant tensile stress shall be\n0.375ƒ + 0.625 ƒ 2 + 4ƒs2 tons per square inch.\n(19) In subsection (18):\nƒ—see subsection (17).\nƒs—see subsection (17).\n(20) The computed linear deflection of a metal shaft shall not exceed 1/ 1200\npart of the span of the shaft.\n(21) If the shaft functions as a cantilever, the deflection shall not\nexceed 1/ 600 part of the length of the cantilever.\n(22) For the purpose of computing linear deflections the modulus of\nelasticity of mild steel shall be deemed to be 13 000 tons per square\ninch and it shall not be necessary to increase the forces producing\ndeflections in the way otherwise provided by section 125.\n(23) If any shaft has a keyway, featherway, or similar recess greater in any\nsectional dimension than that provided by British Standard\nSpecification No 46, part 1, 1929, or if a shaft is within classification\n3 or 4 or is subject to alteration of stress under power and has any\nkeyway, featherway or similar recess, the stress in the shaft shall be\nconsidered to be increased thereby in the ratio—\n1 — 0.2b\nD — 1.1d\nD .\n\n(24) In subsection (23):\nb means the breadth.\nd means the depth of the keyway, featherway or similar recess.\nD means the diameter of the shaft.\n(25) For subsections (23) and (24), all dimensions must be measured in the\nsame units.\n(26) For the purposes of design only, spur gears that are not within the\ncentral 1/ 3 of the span of their supporting shafts, and cantilevered spur\ngears that are spaced at a greater distance than 1/2 of their own face\nwidth from the nearest support shall be classified in the next higher\ngroup than the mechanisms with which they are integral.\n(27) Spur gears of mechanisms within classification 4 shall not be\nmounted in positions that would subject them to such restriction.\n(28) If mounted on short heavy shafts and contained in rigid, close-fitting\nboxings that have been machined by methods ensuring correct\nalignment and meshing, spur gears with machined teeth may, if\nrunning in lubricant and completely protected against entry of foreign\nmatter, be classified in the next lower group than the mechanisms\nwith which they are integral.\n(29) This classification shall apply to spur gears of mechanisms within\nclassifications 2, 3 or 4, and is solely for purpose of design.\n(30) Unless approved by the chief inspector spur, spiral or worm gears\nhaving other than machined teeth shall not be used in hoisting or\nluffing mechanisms within classifications 3 or 4, or in hand or power-\noperated chain or wire rope lifting blocks.\n(31) Notwithstanding the provisions of subsection (38) for purposes of\ndesign only, spur, spiral or worm gears used as follows may, if not\n\notherwise in a lower classification, be considered to be within\nclassification 2—\n(a) in travelling or traversing mechanisms of cranes or hoists where\npromoting or controlling movements in only horizontal paths,\nand not subject to wind loadings; and\n(b) in mechanisms driving continuous unidirectional conveyors that\nare provided with independent automatic devices to prevent\nreversal.\n(32) Spur teeth that are not machined shall be considered as simple\ncantilevers, each bearing at its free extremity a tangential bending\nforce equal to the pitch circle load the spur gear is required to\ntransmit, having due regard to the increases prescribed by\nsection 125.\n(33) The stresses so determined shall not exceed the relevant and\nappropriate maximum prescribed by section 126, and modified by\nsubsection (47).\n(34) If spur teeth are effectively supported by a single shroud extending in\nheight to at least the pitch circle, tooth stresses may be considered to\nhave been thereby reduced by 10%.\n(35) Effective double shrouds of such height may be considered to reduce\ntooth stresses by 33%.\n(36) These reductions shall not be made if the face of the spur gear\nconcerned exceeds 3 times the circumferential pitch of the teeth for a\nsingle shroud, or 5 times the pitch for double shrouds.\n(37) Subject to the same limitations, an effective single shroud extending\nto the top of the teeth may be considered to reduce tooth stresses\nby 16%, and effective double shrouds of the same height by 50%.\n(38) Spur gears of the following materials shall not, for the purposes of\ndesign, be considered to be in a lower group than classification 2 if\nmachined, or classification 3 if not machined:\n\n(a) cast metals, other than steel;\n(b) extruded metals;\n(c) synthetics, including impregnated fabrics and fibres;\n(d) leather;\n(e) timber, including vegetable fibres.\n(39) The transverse stress at the base of a machined straight involute tooth\nof a plain or helical spur gear shall be determined from the formula—\nWP\nFZ pounds per square inch.\n(40) In subsection (39):\nF means the effective face of the spur gear measured in inches parallel\nto the axis of rotation of the gear.\nP means the diametral pitch in the diametral plane of rotation.\nW means the tooth load in pounds as referred to in subsection (45).\nZ means a coefficient to be obtained from table 130.1, relevant and\nappropriate to the number of teeth of the gear and to the obliquity of\nthe path of contact of mating teeth from planes tangential to the\nshortest line joining the centre of rotation of the gear to the like centre\nof its mating gear.\n(41) If the tooth is machined in accordance with Fellows standard 20° stub\nproportions, P shall be the diametral pitch in the diametral plane of\nrotation.\n(42) The transverse stress determined in accordance with subsection (39)\nshall not exceed the relevant and appropriate maximum prescribed by\nsection 126 and modified by subsection (47).\n\nTable 130.1 Coefficients Z relating to teeth of spur gearing\n141/ 2°\nteeth or\ncycloidal\n20°\n20°\nstub\nFellow’s 20° stub teeth of undermentioned nominal diametral pitch\nNo of\nteeth 4/ 5 5/ 7 6/ 8 7/ 9 8/ 10 9/ 11 10/ 12 12/ 14\n10 0.176 0.201 0.261\n11 .192 .226 .289\n12 .210 .245 .311 0.302 0.348 0.320 0.314 0.302 0.314 0.292 0.289\n13 .223 .264 .324 .318 .361 .336 .332 .317 .327 .308 .302\n14 .236 .276 .339 .330 .374 .352 .348 .332 .339 .320 .314\n15 .245 .289 .349 .339 .386 .364 .361 .346 .348 .330 .324\n16 .255 .295 .360 .348 .396 .374 .370 .355 .354 .340 .333\n17 .264 .302 .368 .358 .405 .383 .380 .364 .366 .349 .342\n18 .270 .308 .377 .368 .411 .390 .390 .374 .374 .358 .349\n19 .277 .314 .386 .374 .414 .398 .398 .383 .380 .364 .355\n20 .283 .320 .393 .380 .425 .405 .405 .390 .386 .371 .361\n21 .289 .326 .399 .386 .431 .411 .411 .396 .392 .377 .366\n22 .292 .330 .404 .391 .436 .417 .417 .402 .397 .382 .371\n23 .296 .333 .408 .396 .441 .422 .422 .407 .402 .387 .377\n24 .302 .337 .411 .401 .446 .427 .427 .411 .405 .392 .381\n25 .305 .340 .416 .405 .449 .432 .432 .417 .409 .396 .386\n26 .308 .344 .421 .409 .455 .436 .436 .421 .413 .401 .389\n27 .311 .348 .426 .414 .458 .440 .440 .425 .417 .405 .392\n28 .314 .352 .430 .417 .461 .443 .444 .427 .421 .409 .396\n29 .316 .355 .434 .421 .465 .446 .448 .430 .424 .412 .399\n30 .318 .358 .437 .425 .468 .449 .452 .433 .427 .415 .402\n32 .322 .364 .443 .430 .471 .455 .458 .440 .431 .419 .408\n33 .324 .367 .445 .432 .474 .458 .460 .443 .432 .422 .411\n35 .327 .373 .449 .436 .480 .463 .465 .449 .438 .427 .415\n37 .330 .380 .454 .440 .484 .468 .468 .453 .442 .433 .419\n39 .335 .386 .457 .443 .488 .471 .472 .456 .445 .438 .423\n40 .336 .389 .459 .446 .490 .475 .474 .458 .446 .440 .425\n45 .340 .399 .468 .455 .500 .484 .484 .464 .455 .446 .433\n\n141/2°\nteeth or\ncycloidal\n20°\n20°\nstub\nFellow’s 20° stub teeth of undermentioned nominal diametral pitch\nNo of\nteeth 4/ 5 5/ 7 6/ 8 7/ 9 8/ 10 9/ 11 10/ 12 12/ 14\n50 .346 .408 .474 .461 .506 .490 .490 .471 .461 .452 .439\n55 .352 .415 .480 .465 .510 .495 .496 .477 .467 .458 .444\n60 .355 .421 .484 .471 .515 .500 .500 .483 .471 .465 .449\n65 .358 .425 .488 .476 .518 .503 .503 .487 .474 .468 .452\n70 .360 .429 .493 .480 .521 .506 .506 .490 .477 .471 .455\n75 .361 .433 .496 .484 .525 .509 .509 .493 .480 .474 .458\n80 .363 .436 .499 .488 .528 .512 .512 .496 .483 .477 .461\n90 .366 .442 .503 .492 .532 .517 .516 .499 .487 .481 .466\n100 .368 .446 .506 .496 .536 .521 .521 .503 .490 .484 .471\n150 .375 .458 .518 .509 .546 .534 .531 .515 .503 .496 .484\n200 .378 .463 .524 .515 .553 .540 .536 .521 .509 .503 .509\n300 .382 .471 .534\nRack .390 .484 .550 .543 .578 .562 .553 .540 .534 .528 .521\n(43) The strength of the ‘straight’ type involute tooth of a bevel spur gear\nshall be deemed to be less than that of the tooth of a plain spur gear\nof the same material, diametral pitch, pitch diameter, face, and\nnumber of teeth, in the ratio—\ndiameter of least pitch circle of bevel gear\ndiameter of greatest pitch circle of same spur gear.\n(44) The strength of the involute tooth of a worm wheel shall be deemed\nequal to that of a plain spur gear of the same material, diametral pitch,\npitch diameter, face, and number of teeth.\n(45) Except if the chief inspector otherwise approves, each tooth of a spur\ngear shall be considered to bear a load equal to the pitch circle load\nthe spur gear is required to transmit, having due regard to the\nincreases prescribed by section 125.\n\n(46) Alternatively to the method prescribed by section 130 (39) the\nstrength of the machined straight involute tooth of a plain or helical\nspur gear may be determined by the procedure prescribed by British\nStandard Specification No 436-1940, ‘Machine Cut Gears, Helical\nand Straight Spur’, provided that the approval of the chief inspector\nis first obtained in relation to all allowances to be made and margins\nto be preserved.\n(47) To make allowance for dynamic effects the limiting permissible\nstresses prescribed by section 126 shall for power-driven gear teeth\nbe further reduced in the ratio—\n600 for metallic teeth, or 200 + V\n4 for nonmetallic teeth\n600 + V 200 + V\n(48) In subergulation (47):\nV means the speed of meshing of the gear teeth measured at their\npitch circle in feet per minute.\n(49) For the purpose of determining pressures on lubricated bearing\njournals or surfaces between which relative movement occurs, the\nforce and moment increases prescribed by section 125 may be\ndisregarded.\n(50) The maximum intensity of bearing pressure between a gunmetal bush\nor bearing and the plain parallel journal of a mild steel shaft revolving\nrelatively to it, and being a machine shaft of the mechanism of a crane\nor hoist, or lift or scaffolding, shall not exceed that recommended by\nStandards Australia Crane and Hoist Code No CB2-1938, rule 510 as\nappropriate and relevant to the use, speed, clearances and system or\nconditions of lubrication of the bearing.\n(51) The maximum intensities of bearing pressures between other\nlubricated journals or surfaces shall not exceed those shown in\ntable 130.2, relevant and appropriate to the rubbing speeds, materials\nand conditions or way of use.\n\nNotes referring to tables\nIntermediate values may be interpolated—\n* Maximum permissible pressures at higher speeds shall not exceed those prescribed for 2 inch\ndiameter shafts by Standards Australia Crane & Hoist Code No C.B.2—1938, rule 510.\n‡ Maximum permissible pressures at higher speeds shall not exceed by more than 25% those\n§ Maximum permissible pressures at higher speeds shall not exceed by more than 15% those\n† Maximum permissible pressures at higher speeds shall not exceed by more than 45% those\nM.S. means mild steel\nMed. S. means steel having a surface hardness of not less than 200 Brinell.\nH.S. means steel having a surface hardness of not less than 550 Brinell.\nC.S. means mild cast steel.\nG.M. means gunmetal.\nW.M. means white metal\nP.B. means phosphor bronze having a surface hardness not less than 190 Brinell.\nC.I. means cast iron.\n\nPart 11 Basic requirements about design and construction, erection, use, maintenance, inspection and testing with particular\nTable 130.2 Maximum permissible intensities of bearing pressures for plain parallel lubricated bearings, in pounds\nper square inch (if more specific provision is not made elsewhere in this regulation)\nmaterial in\nbush\nor\nmaximum rubbing speed of journal on bush or bearing in feet/min\ntype of Bearing jour-\nnal\nbear-\ning\n6 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 300 400 500 1 500 note\nsheave pins,\ntrack wheel\naxles, winding\ndrum spindles,\npivots, jib\nhinges,\ntrunnions, and\nother plain\nparallel\nbearings\nanalogous\nthereto\nM.S.\nM.S.\nM.S.\nM.S.M\n.S.\nM.S.\nH.S.\nC.I.\nG.M.\nW.M.\n1 800\n2 200\n1 400\n3 600\n3 750\n1 250\n2 800\n3 150\n2 200\n1 700\n2 100\n1 750\n1 100\n1 350\n‡480\n*260\n\n\n\n\n\n\nmaterial in\nbush\nor\nmaximum rubbing speed of journal on bush or bearing in feet/min\ntype of Bearing jour-\nnal\nbear-\ning\n6 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 300 400 500 1 500 note\nsheave pins,\ntrack wheel\naxles, winding\ndrum spindles,\npivots, jib\nhinges,\ntrunnions, and\nother plain\nparallel\nbearings\nanalogous\nthereto\nM.S.\nH.S.\nH.S.\nH.S.\nM.S.\nH.S.\nC.I.\nP.B.\nor\nW.M.\n3 000\n7 000\n5 000\n6 000\n5 300\n3 600\n5 650\n4 300\n2 700\n4 900\n3 750\n2 250\n4 400\n3 350\n3 100\n3 650\n2 900\n1 750\n3 400\n3 000\n2 400\n1 400\n2 800\n1 100\n2 500\n1 150\n2 230\n\n\n\n\n\nC.I.\nW.M.\nP.B.\n3 120\n4 600\n4 600\n2 400\n4 300\n4 140\n3 620\n3 220\n1 020\n2 990\n2 530\n2 410\n1 960\n2 010\n1 550\n1 265\n1 035\n†550\n§300\n\n\n\n\n\nC.I.\nC.I.\nC.I.\nC.I.\nG.M.\nW.M.\n1 800\n3 500\n2 750\n1 000\n1 900\n1 200\n1 000\n*450\n\n\n\n\n\n\n(52) The maximum intensities of bearing pressures between the surfaces\nof lubricated plain thrust bearings shall not exceed those shown in\ntable 130.3, relevant and appropriate to the rubbing speeds, materials\nand way of use.\nTable 130.3 Maximum permissible intensities of bearing pressures for\nlubricated plain thrust bearings, in pounds per square inch (if\nmore specific provision is not made elsewhere in this regulation).\nIntermediate values may be interpolated\nmaterials in maximum peripheral rubbing speed in feet/min—\ncontact 10 20 40 80 100 150 200 500 note\nM.S on G.M. 1 500 850 320 110 100 80 60 50\nM.S. on W.M. 1 800 1 100 460 170 160 150 120 100\nMed.S. on P.B. 2 500 1 650 750 170 165 155 145 80\nMed.S. on W.S. 2 500 1 880 1 000 300 200 190 180 110\nPressures\ngiven are for\nintermittent\nrunning\n\n\nH.S. on P.B.\nor\nH.S. on W.M.\n4 000 2 600 1 500 600 500 460 410 150\n750 400 110 60 50 40 30 10\n(53) The maximum intensities of bearing pressures between lubricated\nplain sliding surfaces shall not exceed those shown in table 130.4,\nrelevant and appropriate to the rubbing speeds, materials and way of\nuse.\nTable 130.4 Maximum permissible intensities of bearing pressures for\nlubricated plain sliding surfaces, in pounds per square inch (if\n\nmore specific provision is not made elsewhere in this regulation).\nIntermediate values may be interpolated\nmaterials maximun rubbing speed in feet/min—\nin contact 209 300 1 200 S note\n\n\nC.I. on C.I.\nor\nC.I. on M.S. 100 88 49\n1 760\nS + 100 \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nthan\nmore\nnotbut\nPressures given are for continuous\nbut reciprocating motions. The\nbearing pressure for a unidirectional\nslide shall not exceed one half of\nthat provided for a corresponding\nbut reciprocating slide\nW.M. on C.I. 300 264 147\n5 280\nS + 100 \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nthan\nmore\nnotbut\n(54) If the diameter of the journal is less than 1 1/ 4 inches, the maximum\nintensity of bearing pressure shall not exceed that obtained by\nmultiplying the pressure shown in table 130.2 by the coefficient\nshown in table 130.5, appropriate to the diameter of the journal.\nTable 130.5 Reduction coefficients for bearing pressures for lubricated\nbearings of which the journals are less than 11 /4 inches in\ndiameter of journal\nin inches\ncoefficient diameter of journal\nin inches\ncoefficient\n1.125 0.7 0.5 0.3\n1.0 0.5 0.25 or less 0.25\n0.75 0.35\n\n(55) For the purpose of determining loads on hard steel precision ball or\nroller bearings of at least equal quality to those complying with\nBritish Standard Specification No 292—1927, the force and moment\nincreases prescribed by section 125 may be disregarded.\n(56) The basic load of a ball or roller bearing shall not exceed that relevant\nand appropriate to the particular speed, size, type and construction of\nbearing, as tabulated for a 500 hours critical test life by an approved\nball or roller bearing maker or an approved representative of the\nmaker in an approved catalogue of the maker or representative.\n(57) Approved ball and roller bearing makers and approved catalogues\ninclude—\n(a) The S.K.F. Ball Bearing Co., Australia Proprietary Limited,\nCatalogue having registered number 1203 over A.N. 50; or\n(b) The Ransome and Marles Bearing Co. Limited, England,\nCatalogue ‘Publication No 28, August, 1946’; or\n(c) The Bearing Service Company of Australia Proprietary Limited,\nCatalogue entitled ‘B.S.C. Engineering Manual’, 2nd Edition,\n1951; or\n(d) Ball Bearings Proprietary Limited, Catalogue entitled ‘Hyatt\nRoller Bearings’ having registered number D8-8; or\n(e) G. Vaccari & Company, Melbourne, Catalogue entitled ‘R.I.V.\nGeneral Catalogue’, serial number 51-03-141A.\n(58) The maximum load on a hard steel precision ball or roller bearing of\nthe quality prescribed by subsection (55) shall not exceed that\nobtained by dividing the basic load by a life factor of—\n(a) 1.75 if the bearing is within classification 1; or\n(b) 2.25 if the bearing is within classification 2; or\n(c) 2.75 if the bearing is within classification 3; or\n(d) 3.5 if the bearing is within classification 4.\n\n(59) Ball or roller bearings of a lower quality than those conforming with\nBritish Standard Specification No 292—1927 shall not be used unless\nthe written approval of the chief inspector is first obtained.\n(60) The bearings shall not be used in contravention of any condition or\nstipulation made by the chief inspector in the chief inspector’s\napproval.\n(61) The approval of the chief inspector in relation to any maker, or any\ncatalogue of any maker of ball or roller bearings, may be conditional.\n(62) If the outer race of a self-aligning radial ball bearing rotates, the basic\nload shall be reduced to 90% of the value prescribed by subsection\n(56).\n(63) If the outer race of any other type of radial bearing rotates the basic\nload shall be reduced to 75% of the value prescribed by\nsubsection (56).\n(64) Bush roller chains, and other types of parallel or flat link chains,\nincluding Renolds, Morse and Coventry types, shall not be loaded\nbeyond 1/ 5 part of that load that would produce a permanent\nelongation of 21/ 2% of the length of the chain.\n(65) For subsection (64) the increases in applied load prescribed by section\n125 may be disregarded, except if the chain is within classification 4,\nin which case the compensating ratio shall be assumed to be 1.2.\n(66) Because of its lateral inflexibility this type of chain shall not be used\nas a load chain to suspend loads.\n(1) No crane, hoist, lift, scaffolding, or plant, or member, component,\npart, or attachment of it shall be either in part or in whole of any\nmaterial, composition or substance, or use or employ any fluid,\nunless—\n\n(a) the physical and chemical properties of the material,\ncomposition, substance or fluid are shown in, and are in\naccordance with, a standard specification approved and\npromulgated by Standards Australia and the use is not\ndisapproved by the chief inspector; and\n(b) a specification setting out its physical and chemical properties,\nas well as fully detailed and fully dimensioned drawings\nshowing how it is to be utilised and employed, has first been\nsubmitted to the chief inspector and approved by the chief\ninspector; and\n(c) the chief inspector has been advised, in writing, of the physical\nand chemical properties of the material, composition, substance,\nor fluid, as in the state in which it is to be placed into\ncommission.\n(2) However, the following materials may if not disapproved by the chief\ninspector, or subject to any more specific provision made elsewhere\nin this regulation, be deemed to conform with subsection (1):\nearth rubber salt\nclay timber air\nsand paper water\nstone fuels solvents\nbrick lubricants detergents\nvitrified clay coolants paints\nporcelain graphite enamels\nglass asphalt varnishes\nasbestos bitumen lacquers\nleather tar\n(3) Stressed timbers of cranes, hoists, lifts, scaffolding and plant shall\nconform to the requirements of the Australian Standard Grading\nRules for sawn and hewn timbers of select grade, Standard\nNumber (E) 0.54—1942.\n\n(4) Jarrah, karri and wandoo shall conform to the requirements of\nAustralian Standard Grading Rules for such timbers of select grade,\nStandard Number 0.10 to 45—1948.\n(5) The rules mentioned in subsections (3) and (4) being those\npromulgated by Standards Australia.\n(6) If sizes or dimensions of timbers or other materials are prescribed or\notherwise cited in this regulation, they shall mean actual sizes, as\ndistinct from nominal or reputed sizes.\n(7) Unless otherwise stated all bolts, setbolts, setscrews, tapbolts, screws\netc referred to in this regulation shall be of steel.\n(8) Timbers shall not be painted with any opaque or partly opaque paint\nor preparation, or be encased or enclosed in any way that will obscure\nthe timber or interfere with ready inspection of it.\n(9) If practicable, bolts in timber shall be spaced at staggered pitches.\n(10) If practicable, effective stitch bolts shall be employed transversely to\nthe bolts of all main connections of, or to, timber members.\n(11) If the lower ends of timbers enter metal sockets, adequate drain holes\nshall be provided.\n(12) The sockets shall be tapered and the timbers shall fit tightly in them.\n(13) If metal is to be bolted or otherwise secured to the surface of timber,\napproved bituminous paper or felt sheeting shall be inserted within\nand throughout the full area of the joint.\n(14) Bolts passing through timber shall have washers under heads and\nnuts, except if equivalent metal work renders washers unnecessary.\n(15) Unless otherwise approved, timbers shall be joined by employing\nsimple butt joints only.\n(16) Unfilled holes or notches in timber shall be filled by tightly fitting\ntimber plugs to prevent weathering and decay, and the breaking away\nof adjoining timber.\n\n(17) The filling of any hole or notch as mentioned in subsection (16) shall\nnot be deemed to restore or increase the strength or any dimension of\nthe timber.\n(18) No laminated or glued timber shall be employed unless approved, or\nunless so used that its failure would not be productive or conducive\nof danger to life or limb.\n(19) Cast iron shall not be used in the following applications or for the\nfollowing purposes, unless the specified approval of the chief\ninspector has first been obtained:\n(a) the foot lugs or jibs or derricks of power cranes of all types, or\nthe jib or derrick supporting lugs of the cranes;\n(b) soleplates, spiders, or slewing race pinions or slewing\nracewheels of power derrick or power jib cranes or the brackets\ncarrying slewing race pinions of the cranes;\n(c) masthead castings of derrick or jib cranes;\n(d) straight spur gears of chain blocks;\n(e) main frame or cheek castings of winches used in connection\nwith scaffolding;\n(f) pawls;\n(g) dog or toothed clutches;\n(h) cranks or crank handles;\n(i) hooks or their trunnions or yokes;\n(j) structural beams or cantilevers, or loadbars or yokes subject to\nprimary transverse stress.\n(20) Diecast metals or alloys shall not be used for any purpose unless\nspecifically approved by the chief inspector.\n(21) All steel castings subject to primary transverse stress shall be\nradiographically examined by an approved authority, and if defects\n\nare observed, the casting concerned shall not be placed into\ncommission unless the chief inspector specifically approves.\nFencing—general\n(1) The following members, components, parts or attachments of\nscaffoldings, cranes, hoists, plant, lifts or gear shall be effectively\nguarded so that they shall not be dangerous to persons nearby or\npersons driving, examining, testing, lubricating, tending, cleaning or\nadjusting the scaffoldings, cranes, hoists, plant, lifts or gear:\n(a) toothed wheels of builders’ power hoisting winches;\n(b) friction wheels of builders’ power hoisting winches;\n(c) toothed wheels of the longitudinal travelling mechanism of\npower-driven overhead travelling cranes if exposed above or\npartially above access platforms, access facilities or end\ncarriages;\n(d) toothed wheels of locomotive type power cranes and power\ncranes having an analogous arrangement of machinery if the\nwheels revolve in close proximity to crane frame structures;\n(e) toothed wheels of, and adjacent to, the mixing vessels of power-\ndriven concrete mixers and like mixers, including positions at\nwhich the wheels revolve in close proximity to the frame\nstructures of the mixers;\n(f) those members, components, parts or attachments that are within\nreach of access facilities, floors, the ground, or other working\nsurfaces and that revolve and are of irregular, radially variable,\nintermittent, broken or gapped contour or have projecting keys,\nsetscrews, bolt ends, nuts, pins (including split pins), bosses,\ndogs, lugs, ribs, fins, arms or the like because of which they may\ndirectly or indirectly engage the person or clothing.\n\n(g) ends of revolving shafts, spindles, pins or axles that are within\nreach and that project more than 2 inches beyond their supports;\n(h) transmission belting and transmission chains that are within\nreach;\n(i) power-driven revolving shafts, spindles, pins or axles if exposed\nat or near accessholes, hatchways, doorways, gateways or like\nfacilities, or if exposed in such positions with regard to access\nfacilities that persons are likely to make contact with them;\n(j) power-driven shafts, spindles, pins, axles, drums, couplings,\ntoothed wheels, rollers or the like revolving above the upper\nsurfaces of floors, platforms, walkways, pathways and the like\nwherever an unobstructed minimum clearance of 21/ 2 inches\ndoes not at all times exist between the revolving member and the\nsurface;\n(k) power-driven spoked wheels and wheels having web apertures\nif the wheels revolve in close proximity to the frame structures\nof cranes, engines or gear;\n(l) power-driven fans or blowers, including cooling fans of\ninternal-combustion engines;\n(m) hoods or cowlings that may be readily removed or displaced\nshall not be deemed to be effective guards;\n(n) all members, components, parts of attachments liable to attain a\ntemperature in excess of 140° Fahrenheit or that are liable to\ndischarge flame, gas, vapour or liquid exceeding that\ntemperature.\n(2) In subsection (1) (f), ordinary, plain, concentric spur or worm gearing\nshall not be deemed to be of irregular, radially variable, intermittent,\nbroken or gapped contour.\n(3) The guards shall be constantly maintained in position in a state of\ncomplete effectiveness.\n\n(4) If so situated that a person may climb or rest on it each guard shall be\ncapable of sustaining, without permanent distortion, a weight of 170\npounds placed in any position on it, together with a simultaneous\nforce of 50 pounds applied horizontally in the same or any other\n(5) Protruding or projecting levers, handles, rods, links, bolts, spikes,\npins, or other members of less than 2 square inches sectional area\nshall be so guarded or fenced that they will not endanger the eyes of\npersons in the vicinity.\nJointers\n132A\n(1) No jointer that is plant shall be used for overhead planing unless—\n(a) it is fitted with a cylindrical cutter block the slots of which are\nnot more than 5/ 8 of an inch in width and not more than 7/ 16 of\nan inch in depth or are of a greater width or depth that is\napproved; and\n(b) the edges of the table that form the slot or opening in which the\ncutter block revolves are kept as close to the block as is possible,\nconsistently with the proper working of the machine.\n(2) In this section:\njointer means the woodworking machine commonly known as a\njointer, surface planer or buzzer.\nout of reach means 8 feet above the nearest floor or other working\nsurface, or object on which a person might reasonably step or stand\nwithout climbing. An object may be regarded as out of reach if it is 7\n\nfeet above the nearest edge of a floor or working surface, and at the\nsame time displaced 21 inches laterally outwards from the edge, or 6\nfeet above and 30 inches laterally, or 5 feet above and 40 inches\nlaterally, or 4 feet above and 48 inches laterally.\n(2) Except if provision is made elsewhere in this regulation the electrical\nwiring and equipment of all cranes, lifts, hoists, scaffolding, plant and\ngear as also that used in building, excavation and compressed air\nworks shall conform with the S.A.A. Wiring Rules.\n(3) Electrified conductors, terminals, fittings and apparatus within reach\nof access facilities, floors, platforms or other working surfaces, or\nstairs or ramps, or stacks of materials or goods on which persons may\nreadily climb, or within reach of any part of any crane, lift, hoist,\nscaffolding, or plant, to which the driver or an attendant is liable to\nresort for the purposes of inspecting, lubricating, or tending, shall be\nsafely enclosed or safely fenced.\n(4) For subsection (3), the dielectric of the conductor, terminal, fitting or\napparatus shall not be considered to be a safe enclosure or fence.\n(5) Subsection (3) shall not apply to flexible cords, or, as far as the bridge\nplatforms are concerned, to the bare conductors between or on the\nbridge beams of overhead traveller cranes.\n(6) Flexible cords shall not, in damp places, be within reach unless boxed\nor enclosed in an approved way.\n(7) No indoor electrified bare conductor, terminal, fitting or apparatus\nshall be set at a less distance above ground level, or above the level\nof any floor, platform or other working surface, or stair or ramp or\nany readily accessible equipment than 12 feet.\n(8) However, if the type of goods or materials or equipment being\nhandled in the vicinity is such that inadvertent contact might be\nexpected with the electrified members, the distance shall be increased\nto at least 16 feet.\n(9) If approved, collector wires or conductors may be of steel.\n\n(10) All parts of electrically operated cranes, hoists, scaffolding and plant\nthat are of metal shall, in earthed situations, be effectively earthed.\n(11) However, subsection (10) shall not necessitate earthing of isolated\nmetal parts of timber appliances if the parts cannot reasonably\nbecome electrified.\n(12) Unless fixed in position and free from working movements, earthing\nconductors shall be flexible.\n(13) All earthing conductors shall be effectively protected against\nmechanical damage.\n(14) Flexible earthing conductors of copper or bronze shall not contain any\nwire of greater diameter than 1/ 100 part of an inch.\n(15) Each earthing conductor of every iceworks crane or hoist shall be of\nat least 1/ 10 of 1 square inch in section area, and each crane track rail\nshall be separately earthed.\n(16) Cranes or hoists used for supporting objects that are being electrically\nwelded shall be effectively earthed with an earthing conductor not\nless in area than 1/ 10 of 1 square inch.\n(17) Cranes or hoists, other than caterpillar or mobile cranes or hoists,\nshall not be set up or built or set or placed in position in proximity to\nany electrified equipment or apparatus unless effective permanent\nfencing or other approved safeguard has first been provided and fixed\nto ensure the safety of persons using, or working in connection with,\nthe crane or hoist.\n(18) Caterpillar, mobile or portable cranes, hoists or plant in the proximity\nof electrified equipment or apparatus shall be effectively earthed in a\nway that will ensure the safety of persons using or working in\nconnection with the cranes, hoists or plant.\n(19) If cranes or hoists are required, unavoidably, to handle loads in close\nproximity to electrified conductors, as may occur in the erection of\ncity buildings, all loads shall be controlled by dry tail ropes of fibre\n\nor other dielectric material, and thereby prevented from approaching\nor being blown within 5 feet of any electrified conductor.\n(20) Pendant switches attached to flexible conduit or other flexible\nsupports shall not be employed in damp places.\n(21) Plug sockets for flexible conductors or flexible cords shall be wired\nidentically, so that identical phases will be selected by the pins of the\nplugs when inserted in different sockets.\n(22) The identity of active and neutral connections shall be preserved in a\nlike way.\n(23) Electrical emergency limiting devices prescribed by\nsection 127 (131) to (135) shall be wired in series with the motors\nconcerned, and shall directly, mechanically and without recourse to\nrelays, interrupt the whole current to it.\n(24) Approved effective permanent facilities shall be provided by which\npersons may safely inspect, tend and adjust all electrical equipment.\n(25) The facilities shall include approved permanent safe means of access.\n(26) The circuit breakers of cranes, hoists, scaffolding and plant shall be\nlocated at the main driving stations of them, closely adjacent to the\ncontrols, and shall be so devised and fixed that the driver may, in\nemergency, instantly open them.\n(27) Manual circuit breakers shall be so devised that if opened by remote\npush-button or switch they cannot be manually closed, either\nmomentarily or otherwise, until the remote push-button or switch\nconcerned has been manually reset.\n(28) The principal isolating switch of every electric crane or hoist that\ntravels on elevated tracks shall be a simple manually operated series\nswitch and shall be set closely adjacent to the foot of the ladder or\nstair that gives access to the crane or hoist.\n(29) If access to the crane or hoist is obtained from an adjacent floor or\nanalogous permanent elevated surface, the switch shall be set closely\n\nadjacent to the position at which the driver is to embark and\ndisembark.\n(30) The principal isolating switch shall manually isolate all downshop\nconductors from the incoming supply of electrical current.\n(31) It shall be plainly marked ‘Crane Switch’ or ‘Hoist Switch’ according\nto its purpose, and at least 2 square feet of the immediate background\nbehind the switch shall be painted a distinctive bright yellow colour.\n(32) In addition to the isolating switch, emergency push-buttons or\nswitches shall be set not more than 6 feet above the principal floor or\nfloors served and at such positions that the crane or hoist cannot travel\na greater distance than 100 feet from its position when immediately\nadjacent to the nearest emergency switch.\n(33) The emergency switches shall, when operated, isolate all downshop\nconductors from the incoming supply of electrical current, and shall\nbe so devised that the conductors cannot again be electrified until the\nemergency switch concerned has been manually reset.\n(34) If the floor served by the crane or hoist is so obstructed that speedy\naccess to all emergency switches is not assured, additional emergency\nswitches shall be fixed so that the distance of travel of the crane or\nhoist is reduced to 50 feet or to any other distance that the chief\ninspector may direct.\n(35) The electrical switches and control and protective equipment of each\ncrane, lift, hoist, scaffolding or item of plant shall be clearly and\ndistinctively marked and partitioned off from all other electrical\nswitches and control or protective equipment.\n(36) To avoid interference with access facilities and so that they may be\nmore readily observed by the driver, the downshop conductors\nsupplying electrical energy to any crane or hoist that travels on\nelevated tracks shall be adjacent to that track that is most remote from\nthe main driving station of the crane or hoist.\n\n(37) Collectors shall be so devised that downshop or other conductors\ncannot become displaced from them, and vice versa.\n(38) If static access platforms, other than small platforms provided solely\nas a means by which persons may embark or disembark, are fixed in\nconnection with any travelling crane, hoist or scaffolding, a simple\nmanually operated series switch shall be provided on the crane, hoist\nor scaffolding within easy reach of the static platform.\n(39) The switch shall, when opened, isolate the travelling motion of the\ncrane, hoist or scaffolding from the incoming supply of electric\ncurrent.\n(40) Slots provided in floors, platforms, wharf deckings, or analogous\nsurfaces or in other readily accessible places for electrical collectors\nof travelling cranes or hoists shall not exceed 1 1/ 2 inches in width.\n(41) The bare conductors under them, or adjacent to them, shall be so\nplaced that they are at least 11/ 2 inches clear of any straight rod that\nmay be inserted through the slot.\n(42) Control pendants of electric cranes and hoists shall be so devised and\narranged that the person operating them is able to conveniently stand\nat least 6 feet from the suspended load.\n(43) Markers or yokes suspended on pendant cords shall be of a type and\nfixed at a height that they will not injure persons who may collide\nwith or be struck by them.\n(44) Downshop and other bare conductors may be supported by and on\napproved single insulators.\n(45) End straining or tensioning screws shall not be locked or otherwise\nrigidly attached to their supports, but shall be free to align themselves\nwith the conductors.\n(46) Locknuts, or other locking devices shall be employed but in a way\nthat will permit such freedom.\n\n(47) If collector wires or conductors of an overhead traveller crane are on\na bridge platform of them, the ends and other points of entry to the\nplatform shall be fenced with approved gates, each bearing an\napproved warning notice.\n(48) Unless an approved safety fence is erected on the platform, no other\nequipment, mechanism or apparatus that may require inspection or\nattention shall be placed on the platform on which collector wires or\nconductors are located.\n(49) Electrical switch or control or protective gear shall not be placed on\nthe bridge platforms of overhead traveller cranes or of gallows or\ngantry cranes unless the approval of the chief inspector has first been\nobtained.\n(50) Switches and controllers actuated by pendants shall be so devised and\nconstructed that in the event of 1 pendant becoming detached, the\nweight of the other will not prevent the switch or controller returning\nto the neutral or open position.\n(51) Pendant controls shall not be employed if they may foul or become\notherwise jammed or entangled in any obstruction.\n(52) Electric lights and the conductors supplying them with current shall\nnot if used within reach in excavation work, or in earthed situations,\nbe at a higher potential than 32V alternating current or 50V direct\ncurrent above earth or the earthed situation.\n(53) However, subsection (52) shall not apply if the conductors are in\nmetal conduit and the lights fixed permanently in position.\n(54) Electrified conductors used in building, excavation or compressed air\nworks shall be fixed overhead and if practicable out of reach.\n(55) If within reach, they shall be in metal or approved rubber conduit.\n(56) If it is necessary to lay conductors on or closely adjacent to floors,\nthey shall be in metal conduit.\n\n(57) Rubber conduit shall in such case be used only in approved\ncircumstances if damage is not to be expected.\n(58) Subsection (54) to (57) shall not prevent the use of approved flexible\ncords for portable lights, tools and portable plant provided the\nconductors are of the least reasonable working length that can be\n(59) Electrified bare conductors, fittings or apparatus shall not be within\nreach of windows, openings or edges of floors of other working\nsurfaces at building, demolition, excavation or compressed air works.\n(60) Electrified conductors, fittings and apparatus under wharves shall be\neffectively fenced for the protection of persons in boats or climbing\nunder the wharves.\n(61) Electrified conductors and apparatus shall at all times be at\nleast 6 feet clear of vessels containing gas under pressure.\nStiff-leg derrick cranes\n(1) The main members of a stiff-leg derrick crane shall be considered to\nbe on its left-hand side if they are to the left of a vertical plane\nextending through the top and bottom pivots, and passing through a\npoint halfway along a line joining the 2 backstay foot anchorages, the\ndirection of vision being from the last mentioned point towards the\npivots.\n(2) In determining which members or parts are on the left, and which on\nthe right-hand side, the jib shall be deemed to be in the plane so\ndefined.\n(3) If 1 backstay of a crane is shorter in length than the other, the shorter\nstay shall be on the left-hand side of the crane.\n\n(4) Jibhead bridles shall be of approved fabricated construction or of\nflexible steel wire rope having in each part or single not less\nthan 6 strands, each containing not less than 19 wires.\n(5) Approved connections shall be made between rope bridles and\njibhead pins.\n(6) If any rope is in more than 1 part or single, the loads in the respective\nparts or singles shall be effectively equalised.\n(7) Ropes and their sheaves and bridles shall be so devised and\nconstructed that they do not foul the crane members or parts, or any\nobstructions, particularly during slewing or luffing.\n(8) The mast bridle collar shall be bolted through the top pivot by means\nof a tight-fitting bolt.\n(9) The nut of the bolt shall be secured by a split pin.\n(10) All other collars on the top pivot shall be secured in the same way as\nthe mast bridle collar.\n(11) The maximum total ‘slack’, or combined longitudinal take-up\nclearance, of all members encircling the top pivot shall not\nexceed 1/ 16 of an inch.\n(12) The total diametral clearance of any gland on the top pivot or on any\nsleeper pin, or of any member on an anchorage pin, shall not exceed\nwhen worn 1.5 / 10 of an inch.\n(13) Bolts, or pins with nuts, shall be used to secure bridles, and backstays\nto top pivot fittings.\n(14) The nuts shall be secured with split pins.\n(15) Unless secured by approved locking plates, the pins of all sheaves\nshall be secured by nuts having split pins.\n(16) Pins securing bottom glands to sleepers or to foundations shall have\nnuts secured by split pins.\n\n(17) Race pinions, and their shafts, shall be secured by keep plates in\naddition to keys or splines.\n(18) Keys or feathers shall not be used in connection with sliding pinions\nor sliding clutches, unless the keys or feathers are formed as an\nintegral part of, and in 1 piece with, the shaft.\n(19) The soleplates of all derrick cranes shall be effectively fastened down\nto prevent uplifting.\n(20) Effective positive devices shall be employed to prevent all masts from\nlifting from their bottom pivots.\n(21) Topmost ends of backstay timbers shall have metal weatherings to\nexclude moisture.\n(22) Regular inspections shall be made of all members, components, parts\nand attachments of derrick cranes that shall at all times be kept in\ngood order and condition.\n(23) Particular attention must be given to connections and fastenings,\nespecially if members are of timber.\n(24) In addition to any moving flexible earthing conductor that may be\nused, electric derrick cranes shall be effectively earthed from the\nsoleplate or other static part of the framework.\n(25) The racewheels and pinions and other parts of the slewing\nmechanisms shall be kept in such adjustment that lost motion at the\njibhead shall not exceed a total of 2 feet, measured horizontally.\n(26) The controls of derrick cranes shall be grouped conveniently at the\nleft-hand side of the main driving station, and the station shall be so\ndevised and constructed that while at the controls the driver has a\ngood view of the load.\n(27) The counterbalance weights of derrick cranes shall be so devised,\nconstructed and attached that they do not subject the backstays or\nsleepers or pivots to bending actions.\n\n(28) If the sleepers or backstays of a derrick crane are lashed down, the\nlashings shall be of a type that may be readily tightened by shortening\nfrom time to time without the use of wedges.\n(29) Packings greater in thickness than 3 inches shall not be used under\ncranes depending on lashings, unless approved.\n(30) If derrick cranes are mounted on trucks or bogies, a rigid spar, or other\nrigid member, shall be secured between the 2 backstay foot trucks or\nbogies to ensure their correct spacing and relationship.\n(31) Permanent blockings shall be fixed under each truck or bogie, to\nensure that in the event of its derailment or axle failure, the crane\nmembers will not descend or fall more than 1 1/ 2 inches.\nCaterpillar cranes and mobile cranes\n(1) Subject to subsections (3) and (4), if the jib is of the cantilevered type\nan approved limiting device shall be provided by which overluffing\nis prevented, and by which, in addition, the jib is prevented from\nbeing lowered on the lifting hook or block or analogous medium, or\nthe hook, block or medium from being wound into contact with the\njib.\n(2) The limiting device shall be effective and shall be constantly\nmaintained in good working order and condition.\n(3) If the chief inspector so directs, or if it is advisable not to equip any\ncaterpillar or mobile crane with the limiting devices mentioned in\nsubsection (1), or those prescribed by section 127 (131) to (135), the\ncrane shall instead of it be equipped with approved devices by which\nthe loads in the crane ropes or other hoisting or luffing media shall be\neffectively limited in magnitude to an approved amount.\n(4) Alternatively, the crane shall be so designed and constructed that the\nloads will be automatically limited as previously mentioned.\n\n(5) Hydraulic or fluid pressure rams used in connection with hoisting or\nluffing shall have at their fluid outlet connection a restricting or\nthrottling device that will, in the event of breakage of the pipe\nconveying fluid, effectively prevent the load, or the jibhead from\ndescending at a greater speed than 100 feet per minute.\n(6) Correctly prepared blocks or approved stops shall be provided by\nwhich the elastic action of the road wheel springs may be restricted\nor eliminated if desirable.\n(7) If necessary or advisable, jacks shall be provided for adjusting the\ncrane chassis to level the jib hinges.\n(8) The jacks shall be complete with all auxiliary equipment necessary or\nadvisable for their safe and effective operation.\n(9) Jacks shall be so devised and constructed that they will strongly resist\nlateral and longitudinal movements of the crane.\n(10) Each jack shall incorporate a dynamically irreversible screw thread\nadjustment as to length and shall have a foot of sufficient area and\nstrength to ensure against settlement into ordinary dry soil surfaces.\n(11) A low arm or rail shall be provided at the off side of the driver’s seat\nto prevent the driver sliding under the crane or losing control should\nit tilt or overturn laterally.\n(12) If the driver operates the crane from a position in which the driver\nmight be injured by the jib, derrick or load, should either fall or\nrebound, an approved structure shall be provided for the driver’s\nprotection.\n\nGravity operated overwinding limit devices\n(1) A gravity operated limit device consists of an electric switch opened\nby a weight attached directly or indirectly to a crank, drum, sheave or\nquadrant controlling the switch spindle.\n(2) A weight of greater predominance, attached in a somewhat similar\nway, holds the switch in the closed position until raised by some\nmoving part of the mechanism that the limiting device is required to\ncontrol.\n(3) As the predominant weight is raised, the opening weight takes effect.\n(4) The effective radius at which the switch opening weight acts shall be\nneither less than 4 inches nor more than 15 inches, measured from\nlongitudinal axis of switch spindle, to centre of gravity of opening\nweight.\n(5) The torque developed by the opening weight shall not be less than 100\npounds-inches at the switch spindle at all times, irrespective of the\nposition of the switch actuating quadrant, or crank, or opening weight.\n(6) When the switch is equipped with ‘hammer’ or ‘impulse’ weights to\nopen, or assist in opening it, the abovementioned torque shall be\nincreased by 11/ 4 times the maximum torque required at the switch\nspindle to raise and trip the ‘impulse weights’.\n(7) Approved resilient pads or stops shall be provided at both limits of\ntravel of the opening weight to relieve the switch components of\nundue impact.\n(8) The switch actuating cord, as also all other cords employed, shall be\ngalvanised flexible steel wire cord, not less than 3/ 4 of an inch in\ncircumference and shall lead directly from the striking mechanism to\nthe opening mechanism, without guides of any kind.\n\n(9) If the use of a diverting, or deflector, sheave is unavoidable, 1 only\nmay be used to deflect the actuating cord in the desired direction,\nprovided that—\n(a) the sheave is not less than 4 inches in diameter at the bottom of\nthe rope groove; or\n(b) the sheave has a symmetrical rope groove at least 1 inch deep,\nwith sides enclosing a total angle of 60°; or\n(c) the sheave is bored at least 1/ 64 of an inch larger in diameter than\nthe pin on which it is to work and if practicable fitted with a self-\nlubricating bush; or\n(d) the sheave shall not be fitted with any form of rope guard but\nshall work freely on a pin securely fastened in a rigid position\non the adjacent structure, and sufficient clearances shall be\nallowed to ensure that the steel cord will not catch or jam in the\nevent of it becoming frayed or displaced from the sheave; or\n(e) free, or floating, sheave blocks attached to ropes shall not be\nused to deflect actuating cords.\n(10) All freely suspended weights shall have at least 1 additional approved\nsafety cord, chain, or device, attached to them, to prevent the weight\nfalling in the event of failure of its normal supports.\n(11) Suspended weights shall not have guides, or be enclosed in casings.\n(12) Suspended switch-closing, or ‘striking’ weights, above lifting hooks\nor other analogous media, shall be loosely connected to the hoisting\nropes, or otherwise restrained, by approved means, to prevent undue\nrelative displacement.\n(13) Knife switches shall not be used.\n(14) If the torque required at the switch spindle to open the switch, when\nin normally good condition and free of all actuating mechanisms,\nexceeds or may feasibly exceed 10 pounds-inches, additional opening\ntorque of approved magnitude shall be provided.\n\n(15) Layshafts or intermediate shafts shall not be used, but this shall not\nprevent extension of the switch spindle in an approved way.\nFork-lift trucks\n(1) A fork-lift truck means a short-wheelbase mobile truck or carriage\nhaving at the front end a rigid vertical steel frame or mast, usually\ntelescopic, and commonly capable of being inclined from the vertical\na few degrees fore or aft.\n(2) On or between the members of the mast a trolley moves in a vertical\nor near-vertical path, and carries projecting horizontal tines by means\nof which loads are raised and lowered.\n(3) Instead of tines, other lifting media such as a jib, pole, platform,\nscoop, or bucket may be used.\n(4) The basic safe working load for which a fork-lift truck is rated shall\nbe determined as though the load were placed on the tines with its\ncentre of gravity at a horizontal distance from the vertical faces of the\ntines equal to 1 inch plus 1/ 2 of the length of the longest pallet for\nwhich the tines are designed.\n(5) The vertical height of the centre of gravity of the load shall be\nassumed to be 30 inches above the tines.\n(6) Fork-lift trucks shall have approved robust overhead framings and\ngrids to protect drivers against falling objects.\n(7) Grid apertures shall not be greater than 6 inches by 3 inches, but shall\nbe sufficiently small to reject objects or articles of the least size\nhandled by the truck, and must not, except if approved, reject\nanything less than a ball 1 inch in diameter.\n(8) To promote good vision, grid apertures shall be rectangular, and\ncrimped meshings shall be used only if approved.\n\n(9) Guards shall be provided to prevent drivers’ feet from being injured\nby moving members of the mast, or the trolley or lifting equipment.\n(10) An effective back guard shall be provided and fixed to the mast trolley\nto function as a back apron, and to prevent projecting loads from\nengaging the mast or lifting chains or mechanisms, or from becoming\ndisplaced.\n(11) The guards shall project at least 9 inches beyond each side of the mast\nstructure.\n(12) Fork-lift trucks shall, when bearing loads, be used only on hard level\nsurfaces.\n(13) If it is necessary for a fork-lift truck to negotiate a ramp or other\nincline, the mast end of the truck shall at all times be uphill.\n(14) While transporting loads, the tines or other analogous media shall not\nbe raised above the level of the mast hinges.\n(15) While equipped with jibs, the masts shall be kept in the vertical\n(16) Reference should be made to section 127 (152) in regard to jibs.\n(17) Masts shall not be inclined forward, away from trucks, except when\nthe tines are near floor level, or when the truck is close to the stack of\ngoods or materials being handled.\n(18) Hooks of jibs of fork-lift trucks shall be so suspended that they can\nbe freely displaced in any direction through an angle of at\nleast 30° from the vertical.\n(19) Only approved load markings and notices shall be exhibited on\nfork-lift trucks.\n(20) The forward movement or inclination of the mast of a fork-lift truck\nshall not exceed 4° from the vertical.\n(21) The backward movement, towards the truck, shall not exceed 6° from\nthe vertical.\n\nCommercial type hoists\n(1) A commercial type hoist means a power-driven hoist winding or\nunwinding ropes, chains or other flexible media by which loads are\nraised or lowered from 1 floor or working surface to another.\n(2) The natural lateral oscillations of the loads are either entirely\nunconstrained or loosely constrained by flexible guides or by\ngravitationally induced pressure against skids.\n(3) Whether or not flexible guides or skids are employed, it is essential\nthat the load be free to swing laterally and pass any 12 inch diameter\nobstruction that may enter its path.\n(4) In addition to other notices, brands or markings that may be\nprescribed elsewhere in this regulation, every such hoist shall be\nclearly, conspicuously and permanently branded with the name of its\nmanufacturer, and with an appropriate and distinctive serial number.\n(5) All stations from which the hoist can be controlled shall be so placed\nor equipped that a driver at it can at all times clearly see the load.\n(6) If there is more than 1 control station, the controls at each station shall\nhave a master control that must be actuated before the controls\nbecome operable.\n(7) On actuation of the master control at any station the controls of all\nother stations shall automatically become inoperable.\n(8) Landing flaps or rolling platforms shall not be used unless\nspecifically approved.\n(9) The upper surfaces of landing flaps shall be inclined upwards towards\ntheir outer edges at an angle of not less than 15° to the horizontal.\n(10) Rolling platforms shall be securely fenced to prevent persons falling\nthrough floor openings or well holes, and shall be so devised that they\ndo not at any time leave exposed openings.\n\n(11) Wherever practicable, means shall be provided by which persons may\nsafely land or ship loads without having to closely approach the edges\nof floors or other working surfaces.\n(12) Well holes and floor openings shall be securely fenced and provided\nwith toe boards not less than 4 inches in depth.\n(13) However, fencings and toe boards may be temporarily removed\nat 1 side only while loads are being landed or shipped, and that on\ncompletion of the operation, the fencings and boards shall be\npromptly replaced.\n(14) If well holes or floor openings have trapdoors, the doors shall be in\npairs, and shall open upwards.\n(15) Each door shall in opening swing through an angle approximately\n100° and shall constitute a fence or guard not less than 3 feet high for\nthe opening otherwise exposed.\n(16) The ends of the opening shall, while the doors are open, be fenced as\nprovided by subsections (12) and (13).\n(17) The edges of floors or working surfaces adjacent to which loads are\nraised or lowered shall be securely fenced.\n(18) However, fencings may be temporarily removed only while loads are\nbeing landed or shipped, and that on completion of the operation the\nfencings shall be promptly replaced.\n(19) If loads are to pass through openings, the least horizontal dimension\nof any of the openings shall be not less than the greatest horizontal\nlength or diagonal or diameter of the load, or of the platform, box,\nyoke or vessel containing the load, whichever is the greater,\nplus 2 feet.\n\nTower hoists for constructional, building, demolition, or\nexcavation works\n(1) A hoist tower means a vertical tower of rectangular section, within\nwhich loads are raised or lowered by means of a guided platform,\nguided bucket, or other convenient guided medium.\n(2) The tower is maintained in an upright position by guys or struts, or\nmore commonly by being secured to an adjacent building or structure.\n(3) Each of the 4 sides, or faces, of the tower shall comprise a simple\ntruss of plain orthodox design, capable of resisting transverse forces.\n(4) Neither the horizontal width nor the horizontal depth of a hoist tower\nshall exceed 6 feet, or be less than 5 feet.\n(5) All hoist towers shall be constructed of members not less in strength,\nrigidity and reliability than those prescribed by table 139, and no\ntower shall exceed the relevant and appropriate height prescribed, nor\nshall any panel of it be of any greater panel length.\n\nPart 11 Basic requirements about design and construction, erection, use, maintenance, inspection and testing with particular\nTable 139 Tower hoists for constructional, building, demolition or excavation works (for hoisting materials only),\nmaximum heights and panel length and minimum dimensions of members\nmaximum height of\ntower in feet\nII\nII\nII\nbracing II\ntop\n#\ntop\n#\nof head-\nhead-\ntower base\ntower\nbase\nwhalingsguyed supported‡ material\n†max\npanel\nof\nvertical\nof section\nof vertical\n200 200 pine\ntimber *\n60 rect-\none 4 × 4 or\ntwo 5 × 2\nrect-\n5 × 2 rect-\n5 × 2 rect-\n10 deep ×\n3 1/ 2 wide\nrect-\nhard-\nwood\ntwo 6\ndeep × 4\nwide\nrectangular 5 deep × 2\nwide\n200 200 mild\nsteel\n60 angle 3 × 3 × 5/ 16 angle 2 1/ 2 x 2 1/ 2\nx 1/ 4\nangle or 2\nflats\n2 1/ 2 x 2 1/ 2\nx ¼\nTwo 2 ×\n1/ 4\nchannel 7 deep × 3\nwide\nchannel 6 deep × 3\nwide\nchannel or\nangle\n4 deep ×\n2 wide\n3 × 3 ×\n5/ 16\n\nmaximum height of\ntower in feet\nII\nII\nII\nbracing II\ntop\n#\ntop\n#\nof head-\nhead-\ntower base\ntower\nbase\nwhalingsguyed supported‡ material\n†max\npanel\nof\nvertical\nof section\nof vertical\n100 § 200 mild\nsteel\n60 round\n0.192 wall\n1.9\n× 0.192\nwall\n0.192 wall\nditto ditto ditto ditto round tube\n**\n1.9\n× 0.192\nwall\n120 § 200 alum-\ninium\nalloy *\n60 round\n1.9\n× 0.176\nwall\nor\nto be framed in an\napproved way\nditto ditto round tube\n**\n\n* These must be of approved type and quality and material.\n† This may be measured as a vertical distance from centre to centre of the\nhorizontal braces referred to in note II below.\n‡ Provided tower is fully supported against wind and other lateral forces by being\nbraced in an approved way to a building or structure equivalent to it.\n§ This height may be increased by 30 feet if the major load or reaction applied\nby headbeams to tower is divided equally between 2 main verticals.\nII ie, internal bracings forming the web system of the tower, as distinct from the\nexternal bracings referred to in ‡ above.\n# ie, the particular whaling carrying greatest load from the headbeams, other\nwhalings may be 6 in × 3 in pine timber. If practicable, however, the\nheadbeams should be supported directly by the runners or by the corner posts\nor verticals of the tower, and in such case smaller whalings could be used.\n** The vertical tubes shall in addition have approved feet or base plates.\nUnless otherwise stated, all dimensions are in inches.\n(6) No person shall set up, or build, or set or place in position any hoist\nof greater size, or speed, or for bearing greater loads, or of different\nconstruction than prescribed in this section, until the person has\nsubmitted drawings of it to the chief inspector and obtained the chief\ninspector’s approval.\n(7) The combined weight of the safe working load and the platform,\nbucket, or other medium by means of which it is raised or lowered\nshall not exceed 1 ton.\n(8) No person shall attach to or impose on any hoist tower, or any part of\nit, any load other than that borne by the platform, bucket, or medium\nanalogous to it, and no person shall attach to any hoist tower or to any\npart of it any device capable of imposing such load, unless approved\nby the chief inspector.\n(9) However, subsection (8) shall not prevent the use of a dynamic\ncounterbalance weight as prescribed in this section.\n\n(10) The speed at which any load is raised or lowered shall not exceed 600\nfeet per minute.\n(11) If dynamic (flying) counterbalance weights are employed, they shall\nnot balance more than 70% of the unladen weight of the platform,\nbucket, or other medium by means of which loads are raised or\nlowered.\n(12) The corner posts or verticals of every hoist tower shall be braced\ntogether with horizontal braces and by it divided into panels each not\ngreater in vertical height than 5 feet.\n(13) Every such panel shall contain 1 rigid, or alternatively 2 flexible\nbraces, fixed diagonally to provide against shearing forces, and to\ncomplete the web system of the 4 trusses comprising the tower.\n(14) If, for purposes of access, it is necessary to omit any diagonal brace,\nthe panel thus weakened shall be adequately strengthened by other\nbracing at least equivalent to that omitted.\n(15) No bolt less in diameter than 5/ 8 of an inch shall be used to connect\nor interconnect the members of a hoist tower, or to attach guides or\nrunners to it.\n(16) Not less than 6 such bolts shall be effectively used in each splice made\nin the posts or verticals of every hoist tower, 3 being above, and 3\nbelow the joint.\n(17) Each splice in the verticals of towers of metal or alloy tubes shall be\ndesigned for the full comprehensive load, and alternatively a tensile\nload of not less than 2 tons.\n(18) Every hoist tower shall be effectively supported laterally, at a level of\nnot more than 30 feet above its base, and after that at levels not more\nthan 30 feet apart, so that no greater length of tower than 30 feet\nremains unsupported.\n(19) In addition, the top of the tower shall be so supported if more than 20\nfeet above the next lower lateral supports, and in any case if carrying\na hopper or tipping bucket or analogous device.\n\n(20) The lateral supports shall comprise at each such level not less\nthan 4 flexible or extra flexible steel wire rope guys, each not less in\ncircumference than 11/ 2 inches and each having an ultimate tensile\nvalue of not less than 57/10 tons.\n(21) Each guy rope shall have not less than 6 strands and each such strand\nshall have at least 19 wires.\n(22) All guys shall be effectively secured to the corner posts or verticals\nof the tower.\n(23) Alternatively, at the levels previously mentioned, the tower shall be\neffectively braced in an approved way to an adjacent building or other\nstructure self-evidently capable of affording the tower complete\nsupport.\n(24) In plan view all guys shall appear as straight line continuations or\nextensions of the diagonals of a section of the tower.\n(25) A closely boarded platform of planks not less in thickness\nthan 11/ 2 inches if pine timber and 11/ 8 inches if hardwood, shall be\nprovided and fixed adjacent to the tower-head rope-sheaves as\nprescribed by section 127 (153) and (154).\n(26) The platform shall be protected on sides and ends by guardrails\nconforming with section 154.\n(27) If access to the platform cannot be safely obtained from the platform\nor bucket of the hoist, safe access ladders and platforms in accordance\nwith section 154 shall be provided and fixed.\n(28) The hoist tower shall be effectively enclosed and shall be kept so\nenclosed, by close-fitting timber boarding not less than 3/ 4 of an inch\nin thickness or by 18-gauge wire netting having a mesh not greater\nthan 2 inches, or by black or galvanised steel sheeting of thickness\nnot less than 24 gauge, positively fixed to the outside of the tower\nframe to a height of not less than 6 feet above the level of every floor\nsurface, scaffolding, platform or stairway adjacent to the hoist tower.\n\n(29) The verticals of hoist towers of metal shall not be subjected to\ntransverse (bending) forces, and no rope deflector block or other\ndevice or attachment capable of applying such forces shall be fixed\nor applied to the verticals, or used.\n(30) Guardrails conforming with section 154 shall be provided and fixed\nacross all openings giving access to the interior of all hoist towers.\n(31) The rails shall be so pivoted at at least 1 side of the opening that access\nis obtained by raising the rail or rails, which may be suitably\ncounterbalanced.\n(32) Brackets or stops shall be provided which shall prevent guardrails\nbeing lowered below horizontal.\n(33) Guardrails shall be set 12 inches back from the tower face served by\nthem.\n(34) No person shall raise or otherwise displace any guardrail unless the\nhoist platform is stationary and level with the floor or surface served\nby the rail, and all rails shall be replaced in the safe horizontal position\nbefore the platform moves from the floor or surface.\n(35) The horizontal clearance between the front or back edge of a hoist\nplatform and the adjacent interior face of the tower bracings shall not\nexceed 2 inches.\n(36) An efficient and safe signalling arrangement shall be provided for the\npurpose of transmitting signals to the hoist driver as to when to raise\nand to lower the hoist platform or vessel, and also as to when to stop\nall motion of the hoist.\n(37) The signalling system shall be arranged so that its operation must be\nintentional on the part of the operator.\n(38) A warning bell, the sound of which will be distinctly and\ncontinuously heard when the platform is moving in any position of its\ntravel, shall be fitted to every hoist platform.\n\n(39) No person other than a worker engaged in bona fide maintenance\nwork shall ride on the hoist platform, bucket, or other medium by\nmeans of which loads are raised or lowered.\n(40) No person shall instruct, permit, or allow any other person so to do.\n(41) However, subsections (39) and (40) shall not apply for hoists\ndesigned and constructed in accordance with this regulation for\nraising or lowering workers.\n(42) A notice stating that persons are prohibited from riding on the\nplatform or other lifting medium shall be fixed and kept so fixed in\nsuch a position on the hoist platform or medium that it can be clearly\nread by a person standing at least 3 feet away from the edge of the\nhoist platform, bucket, or other lifting medium.\n(43) However, subsection (42) shall not apply for hoists designed and\nconstructed in accordance with this regulation for raising or lowering\nworkers.\n(44) Every hoist winch shall have legibly painted, and kept so painted on\nit, a number for purposes of identification and record.\n(45) The safe working load shall be painted in positions where it will be\nclearly discerned by the hoist driver and by persons loading the hoist.\n(46) All openings in floors, walls, or other parts of the building or structure\nthrough which a hoist operates shall be fenced with guardrails\nconforming with section 154.\n(47) The rails shall be set 12 inches back from the adjacent edges of the\nopenings.\n(48) All winch control levers, and the controls of the engine or electric\nmotor driving the winch, shall be so grouped that every such control\nlever and control is within workable reach of the person acting as\ndriver in charge of the hoist from the position that the person takes up\nwhen driving the hoist.\n\n(49) The maximum throw of the control lever of a friction hoist winch\nshall not exceed 60°.\nWhip or sheerleg hoists for constructional, building,\ndemolition, or excavation works\n(1) A whip hoist means a simple sheerlegs or other approved frame, set\nat the brink of an elevated platform or surface, or of a hole, and\ncarrying rope and sheave equipment by means of which loads are\nraised or lowered.\n(2) The loads commonly consisting of barrows of building material, and\nbeing steadied and guided to some extent by being allowed to slide or\ndrag against skidboards or equivalent devices during ascent and\ndescent.\n(3) Each leg of the sheerlegs shall, if of pine timber, be not less in section\nthan 5 inches by 3 inches.\n(4) It shall be of sufficient length to extend at least 12 inches above the\ntop connecting bolt.\n(5) The horizontal distance between the lower ends of the legs of the\nsheerlegs shall not be greater than 7 feet 6 inches, and the vertical\nheight of the top connecting bolt of the sheerlegs shall not be less than\n14 feet above the level at which that horizontal distance is measured.\n(6) Alternatively or if a large sheerlegs is required, the angle contained\nbetween either leg and the horizontal shall not be less than 75°.\n(7) Sheerlegs shall be symmetrical in construction.\n(8) The top connecting bolt mentioned in subsection (4) shall not be less\nin diameter than 3/ 4 of an inch and the nut shall be locked.\n(9) The legs of the sheerlegs shall rest on a base plank not less in section\nthan 12 inches in horizontal width by 2 inches thick.\n\n(10) The legs shall be prevented from spreading, and from moving towards\nthe edges of the base plank by hardwood battens 3 inches by 2 inches\nin section, bolted to the base plank by bolts not less in diameter than\n1/ 2 inch.\n(11) In addition the legs shall be prevented from lifting over the battens by\nwire rope lashings passing through holes drilled not less than 6 inches\nabove the lower ends of the legs.\n(12) The topmost hoisting block shall be suspended on a 11/ 2 inch\ncircumference steel wire rope snotter having not less than 6 strands\neach containing not less than 24 wires, and the snotter shall lie or rest\nin the topmost V formed between the legs, above the top connecting\nbolt.\n(13) The back guy shall be of steel wire rope at least 1 3/ 8 inches in\ncircumference, having not less than 6 strands each containing not less\nthan 19 wires.\n(14) It shall be secured to the sheerlegs at their intersection, by at\nleast 2 full turns and 2 approved wire-rope grips.\n(15) Alternatively, this fastening may comprise 2 full turns and a spliced\neye.\n(16) The front, or lazy guy, shall be of rope of the same construction as\nthe back guy, not less in circumference than 1 1/ 8 inches, fastened as\npreviously mentioned.\n(17) Alternatively, the front guy may be of approved fibre rope not less in\ncircumference than 21/ 2 inches.\n(18) The guys shall be so adjusted that the total fore and aft movement of\nthe topmost bolt of the sheerlegs shall not exceed 30 inches in any\ncircumstances.\n(19) Smooth skids not less in horizontal width than 45 inches shall be\nprovided and fixed in such a way that they guide the barrow or other\nlifting medium and its load smoothly from level to level.\n\n(20) Landings for barrows, or loads, shall be not less than 9 feet in width\nby 14 feet in length, and shall be provided with handrails at the idle\nsides.\n(21) The hauling rope shall lead or pass from the top block in a direction\nas nearly as practicably parallel to 1 of the legs of the sheerlegs, and\nthen through a guide or deflector block secured to the foot of the leg,\nor to a point closely adjacent to it, before passing to the winch.\n(22) Guardrails shall be provided and so fixed, that persons not actively\nengaged in the hoisting operations are restrained from entering within\n15 feet of the skids, and no person unless so engaged shall so enter.\n\n(1) All plant and gear and every part of it shall be of sound material, good\n(2) If in this part reference is made to any of the rules, codes or\nspecifications of Standards Australia or the British Standards\nInstitution, each shall be interpreted as intended by the rules, codes or\nspecifications.\n(3) Unless elsewhere more specifically prescribed by this regulation all\nhooks, rings, egg links, intermediate links, shackles, Bordeaux\nconnections, rope clips, rope sockets, eyebolts, rigging screws,\nturnbuckles, swivels, and analogous media that conform in all\nrespects with the requirements of a standard specification\npromulgated by Standards Australia shall be deemed to be within\nclassification 3 of section 122.\n(4) If the media are to be used in connection with any crane, lift, hoist,\nscaffolding or plant within classification 4 of section 122, they shall\nbe further increased in strength by not less than 181/ 2% .\nladder means an appliance usually consisting of 2 side rails or stiles\njoined at regular intervals by cross pieces called steps, rungs or treads,\non which a person may rest or step in ascending or descending.\n\nsingle ladder means a non-self-supporting portable ladder,\nnon-adjustable in length consisting of but 1 section and its size is\ndesignated by the overall length of a side rail.\nextension ladder means a non-self-supporting portable ladder\nadjustable in length, consisting of 2 or more sections being in guides\nor brackets so arranged to permit length adjustment and its size being\ndesignated by the maximum extended working length of the ladder\nmeasured along the side rails.\nstepladder means a self-supporting portable ladder, non-adjustable in\nlength, having flat steps or treads and hinged back legs and its size\nbeing designated by the overall length of the ladder measured along\nthe front edge of the side rails.\ntrestle ladder means a self-supporting portable ladder consisting of 2\nsections hinged at the top to form equal angles with the base and its\nsize is designated by the length of the side rails measured along the\nfront edge.\nfixed ladder means a ladder that is permanently attached to a building\nor structure.\n(2) Timber used in a ladder shall not be painted.\n(3) If a timber preservative is used it shall be and remain transparent on\nthe timber.\n(4) Ladders shall be kept clean and free from dirt, moisture or splashing\nof paint or materials.\n(5) Ladders with broken, split, or otherwise defective or loose\ncomponents shall not be used, or kept or placed where they may be\n(6) All timber shall be dressed on all sides and shall have all corners\nrounded and free from splinters or slivers.\n\n(7) Where nails or screws are required in a connection, at least 2 shall be\nused unless otherwise prescribed in this section.\n(8) Unless otherwise approved all materials shall comply with this\n(9) Every ladder and every part of it shall be of sound material, good\nconstruction, adequate strength, free from patent defects, and be\n(10) All timber used in the construction of ladders shall be of Oregon or\nother approved timber.\n(11) All timber shall comply with the provisions of ‘select grade for\nscantlings’ provided in the Australian Standard Grading Rules\n(Emergency Series) for Sawn and Hewn Structural Timbers,\nNo (E) O.54-1942, promulgated by Standards Australia, as amended\nin June, 1944.\n(12) In addition, the slope of the grain shall not exceed 1 inch in 20 inches\nand no defect shall occur except in the middle 3rd of the timber cross-\n(13) Brash (Carrotty) timber shall not be used.\n(14) Low density timber of weight less than 30 pounds per cubic foot shall\nnot be used.\nSingle ladders—ladders not to exceed 30 feet in length\n(15) Single ladders exceeding 30 feet in length shall not be used unless\nSingle ladders—side rails (stiles)—dimensions\n(16) The dimensions of side rails shall be not less than those provided in\ntable 142.1:\n\nTable 142.1 Dimensions of timber single ladders\nladder length\nside rails (stiles) least dimensions\n(in inches)\n14 and under 21/ 2 × 13/ 8\n15 to 22 31/ 4 × 13/ 8\n22 to 30 33/ 4 × 13/ 4\nSingle ladders—side rails (stiles)—drilling for rungs\n(17) All holes for rungs shall be accurately bored through the centre-line\nof the wide face of each side rail.\n(18) If practicable rungs shall not fit through the full thickness of side rail.\n(19) The holes for rungs shall be 1/ 16 of an inch deeper than the rung tenon\nSingle ladders—side rails (stiles)—spacing between side rails\n(20) The width between inside faces of side rails shall be not less\nthan 101/ 2 inches and shall not be more than 14 inches, unless\nSingle ladders—side rails (stiles)—spacing of rungs\n(21) All rungs shall be equally spaced.\n(22) The spacing shall be not less than 81/ 2 inches or more\nthan 101/ 2 inches measured centre to centre unless otherwise\n(23) The distance from the bottom of the side rails to the centre of the\nnearest rung shall be the same as the spacing of the rungs.\n\nSingle ladders—rungs—material\n(24) All rungs shall be of spotted gum or other timber of at least equivalent\nstrength and suitability.\n(25) All timber so used shall be well-seasoned, straight-grained, free from\nsap wood, knots and other defects.\nSingle ladders—rungs—dimensions\n(26) Rungs shall be 11/ 8 inches diameter reduced at each end to form\ntenons 7/ 8 of an inch diameter.\n(27) Rungs shall extend at least 3/ 4 of an inch into side rails and if\npracticable shall finish 5/16 of an inch from the outer face of side rails.\nSingle ladders—rungs—attachment of rungs to side rails\n(28) Rung tenons shall be a tight fit in the side rails and the shoulders shall\nfit accurately against the side rails.\n(29) Each rung tenon shall be prevented from turning by means of a nail\nat least 0.104 inches diameter (12 gauge), driven through the narrow\nedge of the side rail and passing completely through the rung tenon.\nSingle ladders— ties—side rail to side rail—material\n(30) Ties shall be of steel or other approved material.\nSingle ladders— ties—side rail to side rail—dimensions\n(31) Ties of steel shall be not less than 1/ 4 or more than 3/ 8 of an inch\ndiameter and shall be fitted with washers at each end made of at least\n0.05 inches thickness (18 gauge steel), twice the diameter of the tie\nrod hole in each side rail.\nSingle ladders— ties—side rail to side rail—spacing of ties\n(32) A tie shall be fitted at the top and bottom rungs.\n\n(33) Intermediate ties shall be fitted to at least every 6th rung.\n(34) Ties shall be equally spaced if practicable and shall be fitted\nimmediately below their adjacent rungs, pass through the centre-line\nof the wide face of each side rail and be well rivetted over washers at\ntheir ends to prevent spreading of the side rails.\nExtension ladders—extension ladders not to exceed 50 feet in length\n(35) An extension ladder exceeding 50 feet in length shall not be used\nunless otherwise approved.\nExtension ladders—side rails (stiles)—dimensions\n(36) Side rails shall have dimensions not less than those provided in\ntable 142.2.\nNote Table 142.2 is after s (66).\nExtension ladders—side rails (stiles)—drilling for rungs\n(37) All holes for rungs shall be accurately bored through the centre-line\nof the wide face of side rails.\n(38) If practicable rungs shall not fit through the full thickness of side rail.\n(39) The holes for rungs shall be 1/ 16 of an inch deeper than the rung tenon\nExtension ladders—side rails (stiles)—spacing of rungs\n(40) All rungs shall be equally spaced.\n(41) The spacing shall be 12 inches measured centre to centre.\nExtension ladders—side rails (stiles)—spacing between side rails\n(42) The width between inside faces of side rails shall be not less\nthan 101/ 2 inches and not more than 15 inches.\n\nExtension ladders—side rails (stiles)—reinforcing of side rails\n(43) The tension edge of each side rail shall be grooved and fitted with\ngalvanised steel reinforcing wire or its approved equivalent.\n(44) Wire of size not less than 0.128 inches diameter (10 gauge) shall be\nused for extension ladders of 32 feet or under and wire of size of not\nless than 0.16 inches diameter (8 gauge) shall be used for extension\nladders over 32 feet in length.\n(45) This wire shall be so fitted that when the ladder is straight the wire is\nsufficiently tensioned to keep it taut at the bottom of the groove.\n(46) The wire shall be stapled in the groove and anchored at each end in\nan approved way.\nExtension ladders—side rails (stiles)—overlap of side rails when fully extended\n(47) The overlap of each side rail in the fully extended position shall be\nnot less than that in table 142.2.\nNote Table 142.2 is after s (66).\nExtension ladders—rungs—material\n(48) All rungs shall be made of spotted gum or other approved timber of\nequivalent characteristics and suitability.\n(49) The timber so used shall be well-seasoned, straight-grained, free from\nsapwood, knots and other defects.\nExtension ladders—rungs—dimensions\n(50) Rungs shall be 11/ 8 inches diameter reduced at each end to form\ntenons 7/ 8 of an inch diameter.\n(51) Rungs shall extend at least 3/ 4 of an inch into side rails and if\npracticable shall finish 5/16 of an inch from the outer face of side rail.\n\nExtension ladders—rungs—attachment of rungs to side rails\n(52) Rung tenons shall be a tight fit in the side rail and the shoulders shall\nfit accurately against the same.\n(53) Each rung tenon shall be prevented from turning by means of a nail\nat least 0.092 inches diameter (13 gauge) driven through the narrow\nedge of the side rail and passing completely through the rung tenon.\nExtension ladders—safety lock fittings and side rail guides\n(54) Every extension ladder shall be fitted with an approved lock and\nguide brackets that shall effectively allow the ladder to be extended,\nretracted and locked in any position.\n(55) The lock shall be reliable in principle, simple in detail and capable of\nsafe operation in any extended position of the ladder.\n(56) It shall be so arranged that it will maintain the sections of the ladder\nin the relative position to each other that the rungs of the sections\noverlapping in every stage of extension shall form double treads.\nExtension ladders—extension ropes and pulleys\n(57) All extension ladders longer than 14 feet when fully extended shall\nbe provided with extension ropes that shall be fibre rope of approved\nquality not less than 1 inch circumference.\n(58) Extension ladders longer than 34 feet when fully extended shall be\nfitted with 2 fibre ropes.\n(59) The ropes shall be effectively anchored and maintained.\n(60) Pulleys shall be fitted to properly accommodate the extension ropes,\nand shall have axles not less than 1/ 4 of an inch in diameter.\n(61) The pulleys shall be fitted to either side(s) or centre of ladder.\n\nTies—side rail to side rail—material\n(62) Ties shall be of steel or other approved material.\nTies—side rail to side rail—dimensions\n(63) Ties, if of steel, shall be 1/ 4 of an inch diameter and shall be fitted\nwith washers at each end at least 0.05 inches thickness (18 gauge\nsteel), twice the diameter of the tie rod hole in each side rail.\nTies—side rail to side rail—spacing of ties\n(64) A tie shall be fitted at the top and bottom rungs if practicable.\n(65) Intermediate ties shall be fitted to at least every 6th rung.\n(66) Ties shall be equally spaced if practicable and shall be fitted\nimmediately below their adjacent rungs, pass through the centre-line\nof the wide face of each side rail and be well rivetted over washers at\ntheir ends to prevent spreading of the side rails.\nTable 142.2 Dimensions of timber extension ladders\nladder length\nfully extended\nminimum overlap\nof side rails\nside rails (stiles)\nleast dimensions\n(in inches)\n26 and under 2 21/ 4 x 11/ 4\n28 to 30 2 21/ 2 x 13/ 8\n32 to 34 4 21/ 2 x 13/ 8\n36 to 46 4 23/ 4 x 13/ 4\n48 to 50 6 31/ 4 x 13/ 4\nStepladders not to exceed 18 feet in length\n(67) A stepladder exceeding 18 feet in length shall not be used unless\n\nSide rails (stiles) and back legs—dimensions\n(68) Side rails and back legs shall have dimensions not less than those\nprovided in table 142.3.\nSide rails (stiles) and back legs—spacing and spread between side rails\n(69) The width between inside faces of side rails measured at the top tread\nshall be not less than 111/ 2 inches, and shall be not more than 13\n(70) This distance shall increase towards the lower treads at a rate of not\nless than 1 1/2 inches and not more than 13/ 4 inches per foot length of\nside rail.\nSide rails (stiles) and back legs—spacing and spread between back legs\n(71) Spacing and spread between back legs shall be the same as for side\nrails.\nSide rails (stiles) and back legs—spread between side rails and back legs\n(72) In the fully-opened position, the spread between side rails and back\nlegs shall be not less than 8 inches or more than 9 inches per foot\nlength of side rails.\nStepladders—restraining rope\n(73) The spread between side rails and back legs shall be restrained by\nmeans of first quality fibre rope not less than 3/ 4 of an inch in\ncircumference fitted between each back leg and its respective side\nrail.\n(74) These ropes shall be effectively anchored at 1 end through the centre\nof the wide face of each side rail immediately below the tread\n2nd from the bottom, and at the other end through the centre of the\nwide face of each back leg at the same level.\n\n(75) Alternatively, other approved means of restraining the side rails and\nback legs may be used.\nStepladders—bracing for back legs—battens\n(76) Back legs shall be battened together with battens of timber or other\napproved material.\n(77) If of timber, they shall have dimensions not less than those provided\nin the table after subsection (117).\n(78) Back legs shall be battened together at the hinge and also at the level\nof the 2nd tread from the bottom.\n(79) Stepladders over 8 feet in length shall have extra battens fitted and\nequally spaced.\n(80) In no case shall the distance between adjacent battens exceed 6 feet.\n(81) Battens shall be screwed, nailed or bolted.\nStepladders—bracing for back legs—diagonal bracing\n(82) Doubled diagonal bracing of timber or other approved material shall\nbe screwed, nailed, or bolted to the back legs between and against\nadjacent battens.\n(83) The bracing, if of timber or mild steel, shall have dimensions not less\nthan those provided in table 142.3.\nStepladder—treads—material\n(84) Treads shall be constructed of timber.\nStepladders—treads—dimensions\n(85) Treads shall have dimensions not less than those provided in\ntable 142.3.\n\nStepladders—treads—spacing\n(86) Treads shall be equally spaced from the bottom of side rails to the top\nof top step.\n(87) The spacing shall be not less than 10 inches or more than 12 inches\ntop to top of treads.\n(88) Treads shall be parallel and level when the stepladder is in position\nfor use.\nStepladders—treads— attachment of treads to side rails\n(89) Treads shall be recessed into the side rails or secured to them in an\napproved way.\n(90) If the treads are recessed into the side rails, the recesses in the rails\nfor the treads shall be not more than 1/ 4 of an inch deep or less\nthan 3/ 16 of an inch deep and shall properly accommodate their treads.\n(91) Treads so fitted shall be double screwed to the side rails at each end\nusing wood screws of 0.189 inches diameter (10 gauge) not less than\n11/ 2 inches or more than 13/ 4 inches long.\n(92) The screws shall be screwed into the centre-line of the tread at each\nend.\nStepladders—bracing for treads—material\n(93) Bracing for treads shall be of timber or other approved material and\nshall be screwed or nailed in position.\nStepladders—bracing for treads—dimensions\n(94) Bracing for treads shall have dimensions not less than those provided\nin table 142.3.\n\nStepladders—bracing for treads—attachment of bracing to treads\n(95) The backs of treads shall be braced each side adjacent to the side rails\nwith a bracing strip fitted in a direction parallel with the side rails.\n(96) The bracing strips shall be so fitted that distance between them\nmeasured along a tread shall be not less than 10 1/2 inches.\n(97) The distance between the outside face of a side rail and the inner edge\nof adjacent bracing strip shall not exceed 4 inches.\nStepladders—top step—material\n(98) The top step at the extreme top of the stepladder shall be constructed\nof timber.\nStepladders—top step—dimensions\n(99) The top step shall be not less than 15 inches long, 41/ 2 inches wide,\nand 13/ 16 of an inch thick, or more than 16 inches long, 5 inches wide\nand 1 inch thick.\nStepladders—back support plate for top step—material\n(100) The back support plate shall be of timber or other approved material.\nStepladders—back support plate for top step—dimensions and fitting\n(101) The back support plate, if of timber, shall be not less than 15 inches\nlong, 3 1/ 2 inches wide and 13/ 16 of an inch thick.\n(102) This plate shall properly accommodate the strap hinges if they are\nused and shall with the side rails properly support the top step.\nStepladders—hinges\n(103) Stepladders whose length is 8 feet or less shall have the back legs\nhinged by means of 2 (two) 6 inch steel strap hinges or other approved\nmethod.\n\n(104) The strap hinges shall be of not less than 0.062 inches thickness\n(16 gauge steel) and shall be secured by bolts or wood screws, both\nbolts or screws to be not less than 0.149 inches diameter (7 gauge) 3/ 4\nof an inch long.\n(105) Cast hinges shall not be used.\n(106) Stepladders whose length exceeds 8 feet shall have their back legs\nhinged direct to the side rails.\n(107) For this purpose, the back legs shall be so arranged that they lie on\nthe outside of their respective side rails, wide face to wide face.\n(108) The hinge shall consist of 2 bolts not less than 3/8 of an inch or more\nthan 1/ 2 an inch in diameter, each bolt connecting a back leg and its\nadjacent side rail each side.\n(109) Each hinge bolt shall pass through the centre-line of the wide faces of\nadjacent members, shall be in line and be fitted not less than 3 inches\nfrom the ends of side rails and back legs and nuts shall be properly\nriveted over.\n(110) Metal bearing plates of at least 0.05 inches (18 gauge) thickness shall\nbe fitted to each face of each back leg and side rail on which the hinge\nbolts shall bear.\n(111) A clearance hole 1/ 16 of an inch greater in diameter than the hinge bolt\nshall be drilled in the side rails and back legs for this purpose.\nStepladders—ties—side rails to side rails—material\n(112) Ties shall be of steel or other approved material.\nStepladders—ties—side rails to side rails—dimensions\n(113) Ties, if of steel, shall be not less than 1/ 4 or more than 3/ 8 of an inch\nin diameter and be fitted with washers at each end at least 0.05 inches\nthickness (18 gauge steel) twice the diameter of the tie rod hole in\neach side rail.\n\nStepladders—ties—side rails to side rails—spacing and attachment of ties\n(114) Ties shall be fitted to all stepladders whose lengths exceed 5 feet.\n(115) Ladders over 5 feet in length shall have at least 2 ties.\n(116) One tie shall be fitted at the bottom tread, ties shall be equally spaced\nif practicable, and the maximum distance between ties or tie and top\nstep shall not exceed 5 feet.\n(117) Ties shall be fitted immediately below their adjacent treads, pass\nthrough the centre-line of the wide face of each side rail and be well\nriveted over washers at their ends to prevent spreading of the side\nrails.\nTable 142.3 Dimensions of timber stepladders\nleast dimensions of components (in inches)\ndiagonal bracing for\nback legs\nladder\nside rails\n(stiles) back legs treads\nbattens for\nback legs timber mild steel\nbracing for\ntreads\n8 and\nunder\n3 × 1 23/4 x 3/4 31/2 x 13/16 23/4 x 3/4 13/4 x 5/16 3/4 x 1/8 13/4 x 5/16\n9 to 12 31/4 x 1 3 × 1 31/2 x 13/16 23/4 x 3/4 13/4 x 5/16 3/4 x 1/8 13/4 x 5/16\n13 to 18 33/4 x 1 31/4 x 1 3 x 1 23/4 x 3/4 13/4 x 5/16 3/4 x 1/8 13/4 x 5/16\nTrestle ladders—trestle ladders not to exceed 16 feet in length\n(118) A trestle ladder exceeding 16 feet in length shall not be used unless\nTrestle ladders—side rails (stiles)—dimensions\n(119) Side rails shall have dimensions not less than those provided in\ntable 142.4.\n\nNote Table 142.4 is after s (150).\nTrestle ladders—side rails (stiles)—spacing and spread between adjacent side\nrails\n(120) The width between inside faces of side rails measured at the top rung\nshall be not less than 15 inches or more than 21 inches for trestle\nladders up to and including 8 feet in length, and not less than 19\ninches or more than 21 inches for trestle ladders over 8 feet in length.\n(121) This dimension shall increase towards the lower rungs at the rate of\nnot less than 11/ 2 inches and not more than 1 3/ 4 inches per foot length\nof side rails.\nTrestle ladders—side rails (stiles)—spread between the pairs of side rails in the\nfully opened position\n(122) In the fully opened position the spread between the pairs of side rails\nshall be not less than 4 inches or more than 8 inches per foot length\nof side rails.\nTrestle ladders—side rails (stiles)—holes in side rails for rungs\n(123) All holes for rungs shall be accurately machined so that all rungs pass\nthrough the centre-line of the wide faces of the side rail.\n(124) If practicable rungs shall not fit through the full thickness of side rails.\n(125) The holes for rungs shall be 1/ 16 of an inch deeper than the rung tenon,\nTrestle ladders—side rails (stiles)—spacing of rungs\n(126) All rungs shall be equally spaced.\n(127) The spacing shall be not less than 20 inches or more than 24 inches\ncentre to centre.\n\n(128) Rungs spacing in pairs of side rails shall be staggered so that when\nthe trestle ladder is in the closed position the rungs will present an\nequal spacing of 1/ 2 that on either pair of side rails.\n(129) The top rung on either pair of side rails shall not be closer to the top\nthan 6 inches.\nTrestle ladders—restraining rope\n(130) The spread between the pairs of side rails shall be restrained by means\nof first quality fibre rope not less than 3/ 4 of an inch in circumference.\n(131) These ropes shall be effectively anchored at 1 end through the centre\nof the wide face of each side rail at the same level and at about the\n2nd rung from the bottom.\n(132) Alternatively, other approved means of restraining the side rails may\nbe used.\nTrestle ladders—rungs—dimensions\n(133) Rungs shall have dimensions not less than those set out in table 142.4.\nNote Table 142.4 is after s (150).\n(134) In addition, the cross-section shall be reduced at each end to form a\nshoulder for tenons, whose cross-section shall be not less than 3/ 4 of\nan inch wide and 11/ 2 inches deep, and not more than 7/ 8 of an inch\nwide and the depth of the rung.\n(135) Tenons shall be not less than 1 inch long and if practicable shall finish\nat least 5/ 16 of an inch from the outer face of side rails.\nTrestle ladders—rungs—attachment of rungs to side rails\n(136) Rung tenons shall be a tight fit in the side rail and the shoulders shall\nfit accurately against them.\n\n(137) Each tenon shall be secured by means of 2 nails at least 0.104 inches\ndiameter (12 gauge) driven through the narrow edge of the side rail\npassing completely through the tenon.\nTrestle ladders—hinges\n(138) Trestle ladders shall have their pairs of side rails hinged together at\nthe top by means of hinges constructed of steel not less\nthan 11/ 4 inches wide and not less than 1/ 4 of an inch thick.\n(139) The securing bolts shall be 5/ 16 of an inch diameter.\n(140) The hinge pins shall be of steel not less than 5/ 16 of an inch in diameter\nand shall be in line.\n(141) Alternatively, other approved means of hinging may be used.\n(142) Cast hinges shall not be used.\nTrestle ladders—hinges—trestles 12 feet or less\n(143) Trestle ladders 12 feet or less in length shall have hinges not less than\n10 inches long each side of the hinge pin, and each side secured to\nside rails with 2 bolts.\nTrestle ladders—hinges—trestle ladders more than 12 feet\n(144) Trestle ladders more than 12 feet in length shall have hinges not less\nthan 14 inches long each side of hinge pin, and each side secured to\nside rails with 3 bolts.\nTrestle ladders—ties—side rail to side rail—material\n(145) Ties shall be of steel or other approved material.\nTrestle ladders—ties—side rail to side rail—dimensions\n(146) Ties if of steel shall be not less than 3/ 8 of an inch or more than 7/ 16 of\nan inch diameter and be fitted with washers of at least 0.062 inches\n\nthickness (16 gauge steel) twice the diameter of the tie rod hole in the\nside rail, and 1 end of each tie rod shall be screwed and fitted with a\nstandard nut.\nTrestle ladders—ties—side rail to side rail—spacing and attachment of ties\n(147) Ties shall be fitted to both pairs of side rails in all trestle ladders.\n(148) One tie shall be fitted at the bottom rung and 1 at the top rung.\n(149) The distance between ties shall not exceed 4 feet.\n(150) Ties shall be fitted immediately below their adjacent rungs, pass\nthrough the centre-line of the wide face of each side rail, and be well\nriveted over at their ends to prevent spreading of side rails.\nTable 142.4 Dimensions of timber trestle ladders\nleast dimensions (in inches)\nladder length (in feet) side rails (stiles) rungs\n14 and under 21/ 2 x 13/ 8 21/ 2 x 13/ 8\n14 to 16 23/ 4 x 13/ 4 23/ 4 x 13/ 4\nTrestle ladders—handrails\n(151) Provision shall be made in the construction of all trestle ladders\nexceeding 10 feet in length for the attachment of approved uprights\nand handrails.\nFixed Ladders\n(152) Fixed ladders shall, unless indoor, be of steel.\n(153) If of timber, the ladders shall conform with this section.\n(154) If of steel, ladders shall have stiles not less in section than 2 inches\ndeep by 1/ 4 of an inch in thickness.\n\n(155) The rungs of steel fixed ladders shall be not less than 3/ 4 of an inch in\ndiameter and shall not be spaced further apart than 10 inches,\nmeasured centre to centre.\n(156) They shall be strongly fixed and prevented from rotating.\n(157) Stiles of steel fixed ladders shall be not less than 15 inches apart.\n(158) Ladders shall be set at an angle approximating 15° from the vertical.\n(159) A ladder shall not lean over a person climbing.\n(160) The clearance at the back of the rungs shall not be less than 6 inches,\nand no obstruction shall be within 30 inches of the face of the ladder.\n(161) There shall be not less than 3 inches clearance between the outside of\neach stile and the nearest permanent object at the side.\n(162) Ladders shall conform with section 127 (156) and (159) to (161).\n(163) No ladder shall be of greater length than 20 feet.\n(164) Rest platforms shall be provided at the upper ends of each length, and\nthe platforms shall be not less than 18 inches in width by 22 inches in\nlength, and shall have handrails at outer ends and both sides.\n(165) If it is necessary for a ladder to pass closely through a hole in a\nplatform or floor surface, the edge of the hole that is parallel to the\nladder rungs shall be padded on the underside with rubber or other\nresilient material to prevent injury to persons ascending.\n(166) Ladders, or the stiles of the ladders, shall continue for a distance of at\nleast 45 inches above the upper surface of the platform or landing\nserved.\n(167) They shall have adequate lateral support.\n(168) If practicable the rungs of ladders shall, in plan view appear to be at\nan angle of 90° to the adjacent edge of the platform or surface served.\n(169) Ladders shall be strongly bolted or welded in position.\n\n(170) All ladders from which a person or object might otherwise fall a\ndistance of 20 or more feet shall be enclosed in an approved way with\nheavy gauge steel meshing.\n(171) The approximately vertical sides of the mesh opening shall not\nexceed 5 inches in depth.\nChain for use in connection with cranes, lifts, hoists,\nscaffolding, plant, gear, or building work, excavation work, or\nmaterial—unless otherwise stated all chain referred to in this section\nshall be of mild steel or wrought iron, and the material shall conform\nwith the requirements of the relevant specification referred to in\nsubsections (15) to (19).\nsize of chain means the diameter of the material of which the chain\nis made, measured after the chain has been fabricated.\nnormalising means heat treatment carried out in a furnace so\ndesigned that the chain is heated through and brought up to the\nnormalising temperature of 1 650° Fahrenheit, uniformly throughout\nits mass, the conditions of heating being such that a reducing\natmosphere is maintained, and the chain afterwards being removed\nfrom the furnace and allowed to cool freely in still air.\nannealing means heat treatment carried out in a furnace so designed\nthat the chain is heated through and brought up to the annealing\ntemperature of 1 110° to 1 200° Fahrenheit, uniformly throughout its\nmass, the conditions of heating being that a reducing atmosphere is\nmaintained, and the chain afterwards being removed from the furnace\nand allowed to cool freely in still air.\n\n(2) Chain with bent or otherwise deformed links shall not be used.\n(3) Knotted chains shall not be used.\n(4) Suitable packing shall be provided and used to prevent chain links\ncoming into contact with sharp edges of loads of hard material.\n(5) Chains shall not be exposed to temperatures in excess\nof 500° Fahrenheit.\n(6) Chains constructed of material less than 5/ 16 of an inch diameter shall\nnot be used for load-carrying purposes unless otherwise approved.\n(7) Chains that have been lengthened, altered or repaired, shall, before\nbeing reused, be subjected to a load equal to their safeworking load\nand closely examined as to suitability for further use.\n(8) No chain shall be used that has been subjected to a severe shock.\n(9) No chain shall be heat-treated after being placed into commission.\n(10) No chain sling shall be used if the included angle measured between\nany 2 legs exceeds 150°, or if the angle formed between any sling leg\n(11) Screw threads used in conjunction with chains shall be prevented by\npositive means from unscrewing.\n(12) No chain shall be used if any of its links are locked, or stretched, or\nare without free movement.\n(13) When a load is supported on more than 1 fall, single or part of chain,\nthe load shall be distributed equally by statically determinate\nautomatic means between the falls, singles or parts.\n(14) Every chain and every part of chain shall be of sound material, good\nconstruction, adequate strength, free from patent defects, and be\n\n(15) Mild steel chains shall comply with the provisions of the British\nStandards Specification No 590, 1935, as revised in 1949,\npromulgated by the British Standards Institution, England.\n(16) Wrought iron chain shall comply with the provisions of the British\nStandard Specification No 394, as amended in 1944, or British\nStandard Specification No 465, 1932, promulgated by the British\nStandards Institution, England.\n(17) However—\n(a) every chain shall be classified numerically in conformity with\nthe table entitled ‘Classification of Chain for Purposes of\nDesign, Construction and Use’ after subsection (19); and\n(c) no chain shall be subjected to any greater load than that shown\nin table 143.1 as relevant and appropriate to its size and\nclassification or way of use.\n(18) No chain shall be used if of other design or other material than\nprovided in the British Standard Specifications published by the\nBritish Standards Institution, England, stated in subsections (15) and\n(16), without first being approved.\n(19) A chain shall not be subjected at any time to any greater load than is\nprovided for that chain in this section, unless otherwise approved.\nTable 143.1 Classification of chain (for purposes of design, construction and\nuse)\nclassification of crane, hoist, lift,\nplant or scaffolding in connection\nwith which the chain is used\nchain used for other\n1 classifications 1 and 2 building, excavation or\n\n2 classifications 3 and 4\n\nMaximum safe working loads for chains—Classification 1\n5/16 0 12 1 3 1 1 0 17 0 12 0 6\n3/8 0 17 1 13 1 9 1 4 0 17 0 9\n7/16 1 3 2 4 2 0 1 13 1 3 0 12\n1/2 1 10 2 18 2 12 2 2 1 10 0 16\n9/16 1 18 3 13 3 6 2 14 1 18 1 0\n5/8 2 7 4 11 4 1 3 6 2 7 1 4\n11/16 2 17 5 10 4 19 4 1 2 17 1 10\n\n3/4 3 8 6 11 5 18 4 16 3 8 1 15\n13/16 4 0 7 15 6 18 5 13 4 0 2 1\n7/8 4 12 8 18 7 19 6 10 4 12 2 8\n15/16 5 6 10 5 9 4 7 10 5 6 2 15\n1 6 0 11 12 10 8 8 10 6 0 3 2\n11/16 6 16 13 3 11 16 9 12 6 16 3 10\n11/8 7 12 14 14 13 4 10 15 7 12 3 19\n13/16 8 10 16 8 14 14 12 0 8 10 4 8\n11/4 9 8 18 4 16 6 13 6 9 8 4 17\n\n15/16 10 7 20 0 17 19 14 13 10 7 5 7\n13/8 11 7 21 18 19 13 16 1 11 7 5 18\n17/16 12 8 23 19 21 9 17 10 12 8 6 8\n11/2 13 10 26 1 23 8 19 2 13 10 7 0\n\nMaximum safe working loads for chains—Classification 2\n5/16 0 10 0 19 0 17 0 14 0 10 0 5\n3/8 0 14 1 7 1 4 1 0 0 14 0 7\n7/16 0 19 1 17 1 13 1 7 0 19 0 10\n1/2 1 5 2 8 2 3 1 15 1 5 0 13\n9/16 1 11 3 0 2 14 2 4 1 11 0 16\n5/8 1 18 3 13 3 6 2 14 1 18 1 0\n11/16 2 6 4 9 4 0 3 5 2 6 1 4\n3/4 2 15 5 6 4 15 3 18 2 15 1 8\n\n13/16 3 5 6 5 5 13 4 12 3 5 1 14\n7/8 3 15 7 5 6 10 5 6 3 15 1 19\n15/16 4 6 8 6 7 9 6 2 4 6 2 4\n1 4 18 9 9 8 10 6 19 4 18 2 11\n11/16 5 10 10 13 9 11 7 16 5 10 2 17\n11/8 6 4 12 0 10 15 8 15 6 4 3 4\n13/16 6 15 13 0 11 14 9 11 6 15 3 10\n11/4 7 13 14 15 13 5 10 16 7 13 3 19\n15/16 8 9 16 6 14 13 11 19 8 9 4 7\n\n13/8 9 6 18 0 16 2 13 3 9 6 4 16\n17/16 10 2 19 10 17 10 14 6 10 2 5 5\n11/2 11 0 21 5 19 2 15 11 11 0 5 14\n\nMaximum safe working load for chain used in chain blocks*—Classification 1\nsize of chain safe working load per fall (part) of chain\n(inches) tons cwts\n5/16 0 13\n3/8 0 19\n7/16 1 6\n1/2 1 13\n9/16 2 2\n* The overall width of the links of this chain must not exceed 31/4 times the size of the chain.\nMaximum safe working load for chain used in chain blocks*—Classification 2\nsize of chain safe working load per fall (part) of chain\n(inches) tons cwts\n5/16 0 11\n3/8 0 16\n7/16 1 1\n1/2 1 10\n9/16 2 0\n* The overall width of the links of this chain must not exceed 31/4 times the size of the chain.\nDrums, sheaves and quadrants for chain\n(20) If chain is wound over or on drums, or over or on sheaves or quadrants\nthat are not correctly pocketed, the drums, sheaves, and quadrants\nshall be grooved in an approved way and shall be not less in diameter\nthan 24 times the size of the chain concerned.\n\nSwivel hooks for chain\n(21) Lifting hooks, lifting eyes, attached to single falls (parts) of chain\nother than chain slings, shall be freely rotable under all conditions of\nloading, and if the load exceeds 2 tons shall be of the ball or roller\nthrust-bearing type.\n(22) Provision shall be made to exclude dust and other foreign matter from\nthrust bearings.\nGuards for chain\n(23) Guards shall be provided to prevent persons’ hands or other parts of\ntheir body being injured by the chains and sheaves or gypsies of hook\nblocks or bottom blocks of power cranes or power hoists.\nHeat treatment\n(24) Chains shall be heat-treated after manufacture before being used.\n(25) Mild steel chain shall be ‘normalised’, wrought iron chain shall be\n‘annealed’.\n(26) No chain shall be normalised or annealed after use except as provided\nin subsection (27).\n(27) When chain is required, the affected parts shall be normalised or\nannealed as aforesaid before reuse.\nPeriodic inspection\n(28) No person shall use any chain or any attachment of it unless every\nlink and the attachments of it have been thoroughly cleaned and\nsubjected to close, detailed examination at the intervals that are\nnecessary or advisable to ascertain whether flaws, cracks, or other\ndefects exist and to ensure that defective chains or attachments are\nnot used.\n\n(29) A chain shall not be used if its links or attachments have flaws, cracks,\nor other defects liable to affect its safe use, or if the wear on any link\nor attachment exceeds 10% of the dimension measured.\nTesting of chain\n(30) No person shall use any chain a part of which has not been tested in\naccordance with this section, or in relation to which the provisions of\nthis section about the submitting of a test certificate or copy of the\ncertificate have not been complied with.\n(31) Every person acquiring a chain for use shall within 24 hours of\nacquiring the chain, submit to the chief inspector a test certificate,\ncorrect in all particulars for a part of the chain, and the certificate shall\nbe in accordance with schedule 2, form 14, and shall be signed by the\nmanufacturer or vendor of the chain.\n(32) The manufacturer or vendor of a chain shall test at least 1 part of each\n1 000 feet of chain made, or disposed of, by the manufacturer or\nvendor.\n(33) If the chain is electrically welded mild steel chain, the test shall\ncomprise a breaking test of a 36 inch gauge length of chain and shall\nbe carried out as prescribed by British Standard Specification\nNo 590-1949 for electrically welded mild steel chain, promulgated by\nStandards Australia.\n(34) The test shall include determination of the energy absorption factor.\n(35) If the chain is of wrought iron, all of the tests prescribed by British\nStandard Specifications Nos. 465-1932 and 394-1944 shall be carried\nout.\n(36) Chains shown by the tests mentioned in subsection (35) to be\ndeficient shall not be used.\n(37) No chain that is to be used shall be subjected to any proof or test load\nthat exceeds by more than 25% the safe working load for the chain\nprescribed by this regulation.\n\n(38) If a chain has been made into shorter lengths than 1 000 feet and any\nperson acquires for use any shorter length, the person shall, within 24\nhours of acquiring the shorter length of chain, submit to the chief\ninspector a document that is a true copy of the test certificate correct\nin all particulars issued for the 1 000 feet length of chain mentioned\nin subsection (32) and signed by the manufacturer or vendor.\n(39) The document shall be accompanied by a statutory declaration of the\nmanufacturer or vendor that it is a true copy of the original test\ncertificate issued for the 1 000 feet length of chain.\n(40) The original test certificate must be signed by the person witnessing\nthe test and the person must be the responsible testing officer of a\nlicensed proving house, the testing officer of a government\ndepartment or of a university or other approved engineering school,\nor the testing officer of a manufacturer of chain who has a testing\nmachine on the manufacturer’s premises approved for testing samples\nof the completed chain.\nSteel wire ropes for use in connection with cranes, lifts,\nhoists, scaffolding, plant, gear, or building work, excavation\nwork, or compressed air work\n(1) Reverse bends that are detrimental to the life of a running rope shall\nbe avoided if practicable.\n(2) Suitable packing shall be provided and used to prevent wire rope\ncoming in contact with sharp edges of loads or hard material.\n(3) Steel wire rope shall not be exposed to temperatures\nexceeding 200° Fahrenheit.\n(4) Steel wire rope of circumference less than 5/ 8 of an inch shall not be\nused for load carrying purposes unless otherwise approved.\n\n(5) Kinked ropes shall not be used.\n(6) Ropes shall be stored under cover in a clean, dry place and be raised\nclear of the ground.\n(7) In no case shall the rope be in contact with ashes, clinker or coke.\n(8) The ropes in store shall be examined periodically and the protective\ncoating renewed when required.\n(9) When a load is supported on more than 1 fall, single or part of rope,\nthe load shall be distributed equally by statically determinate\nautomatic means between the various falls, singles or parts.\n(10) No rope shall be used for load carrying purposes that has been\nsubjected to a severe shock or that has been unduly stretched.\n(11) No rope sling shall be used if the included angle measured between\nany 2 legs exceeds 150° or if the angle formed between any sling leg\n(12) Rope slings before being used, and if repaired or altered before being\nreused, shall be subjected to a load equal to their safe working load\nand closely examined about suitability for use or reuse as the case\nmay be.\n(13) Ropes having less than 6 strands, or having any strand containing less\nthan 19 wires shall not be wound on drums or over or on sheaves,\nrollers, or quadrants, or used in any way as running ropes.\n(14) Screw threads used in conjunction with wire ropes shall be prevented\nby positive means from unscrewing.\n(15) If rope is used to support workers, it shall not be less than 1 1/ 8 inches\ncircumference and 3/ 8 of an inch diameter—if hand operated, or 1 5/8\ninches circumference and 1/ 2 an inch diameter—if power operated.\n(16) Every steel wire rope and every part of it shall be of sound material,\ngood construction, adequate strength, free from patent defects, and be\n\n(17) Rope of lang lay shall not be used unless the ends are fixed to prevent\nunlaying of the rope.\n(18) All steel wire rope shall comply with the provisions of Australian\nStandard Specification No B.9-1938, promulgated by Standards\nAustralia.\n(19) However—\n(a) every steel wire ropes shall be classified numerically in\nconformity with table 144.1; and\n(c) no wire rope shall be subjected to any greater load than that\nshown in table 144.1 as relevant and appropriate to its\ncircumference, construction, and classification, or way of use,\nprovided that—\n(i) if it is of a grade of steel of greater or lesser minimum\nultimate tensile value than 80 tons per square inch—the\ntabulated load shall be increased or decreased in the ratio:\ninchsquareperin tonsropeofsteelofstrengthtensileultimateminimum ; and\n(ii) if the rope is used solely as a static guy rope—the tabulated\nload may be increased by 50%; and\n(iii) if the rope comprises the main cable of a cableway—a\nfurther increase in load may be approved by the chief\ninspector; and\n\n(d) no steel wire rope shall be used if of other design or other\nmaterial than provided in the British Standard Specifications\npromulgated by the British Standards Institution, England, or\nAustralian Standard Specification No B9—1938 promulgated\nby Standards Australia, without first being approved.\nTable 144.1 Classification of steel wire rope for purposes of design,\nconstruction and use\nclassification of crane, hoist, lift, plant,\nor scaffolding in connection with\nwhich the steel wire rope is used\nropes used for other\n1 classifications Nos 1, 2 and 3 building, excavation\nor compressed air\nwork\n2 classification No 4\n\nconstruction: 6 strands each containing 12 wires\n5/8 3/16 0 21/2 0 5 0 4 0 31/2 0 21/2 0 11/2\n3/4 1/4 0 31/2 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 31/2 0 2\n7/8 9/32 0 41/2 0 9 0 8 0 61/2 0 41/2 0 21/2\n1 5/16 0 6 0 12 0 10 0 81/2 0 6 0 3\n11/8 3/8 0 8 0 15 0 13 0 11 0 8 0 4\n1 1 /4 13 /32 0 10 0 19 0 17 0 14 0 10 0 5\n\n1 3 /8 7 /16 0 11 1 1 0 19 0 16 0 11 0 6\n1 1 /2 15 /32 0 14 1 7 1 4 1 0 0 14 0 7\n1 5 /8 1 /2 0 17 1 13 1 9 1 4 0 17 0 9\n1 3 /4 9 /16 0 19 1 17 1 13 1 7 0 19 0 10\n1 7 /8 19 /32 1 2 2 2 1 18 1 11 1 2 0 11\n2 5 /8 1 5 2 8 2 3 1 15 1 5 0 13\n2 1 /8 11 /16 1 8 2 14 2 8 2 0 1 8 0 15\n2 1 /4 23 /32 1 12 3 2 2 15 2 5 1 12 0 17\n2 3 /8 3 /4 1 16 3 10 3 2 2 11 1 16 0 19\n2 1 /2 13 /16 1 19 3 15 3 8 2 15 1 19 1 0\n\nconstruction: 6 strands each containing 12 wires\n5 /8 3 /16 0 2 0 4 0 3 1 /2 0 3 0 2 0 1\n3 /4 1 /4 0 3 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 1 1 /2\n7 /8 9 /32 0 4 0 7 1 /2 0 7 0 5 1 /2 0 4 0 2\n1 5 /16 0 5 0 10 0 8 1 /2 0 7 0 5 0 2 1 /2\n1 1 /8 3 /8 0 6 1 /2 0 121 /2 0 11 0 9 0 6 1 /2 0 3 1 /2\n1 1 /4 13 /32 0 8 1 /2 0 161 /2 0 141 /2 0 12 0 8 1 /2 0 4 1 /2\n1 3 /8 7 /16 0 9 1 /2 0 181 /2 0 161 /2 0 131 /2 0 9 1 /2 0 5\n\n1 1 /2 15 /32 0 12 1 3 1 1 0 17 0 12 0 6\n1 5 /8 1 /2 0 141 /2 1 8 1 5 1 0 0 141 /2 0 7 1 /2\n1 3 /4 9 /16 0 16 1 11 1 8 1 3 0 16 0 8 1 /2\n1 7 /8 19 /32 0 181 /2 1 16 1 12 1 6 0 181 /2 0 9 1 /2\n2 5 /8 1 1 2 0 1 16 1 10 1 1 0 11\n2 1 /8 11 /16 1 4 2 6 2 1 1 14 1 4 0 121 /2\n2 1 /4 23 /32 1 7 2 12 2 7 1 18 1 7 0 14\n2 3 /8 3 /4 1 10 2 18 2 12 2 2 1 10 0 151 /2\n2 1 /2 13 /16 1 13 3 4 2 17 2 7 1 13 0 17\n\nconstruction: Six strands each containing nineteen wires\n5/8 3/16 0 31/2 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 31/2 0 2\n3/4 1/4 0 51/2 0 101/2 0 91/2 0 8 0 51/2 0 3\n7/8 9/32 0 7 0 131/2 0 12 0 10 0 7 0 31/2\n1 5/16 0 91/2 0 18 0 16 0 13 0 91/2 0 5\n1/8 1 3/8 0 11 1 1 0 19 0 151/2 0 11 0 6\n11/4 13/32 0 141/2 1 7 1 5 1 0 0 141/2 0 7\n\n3/8 1 7/16 0 161/2 1 12 1 9 1 3 0 161/2 0 81/2\n11/2 15/32 1 0 1 18 1 14 1 8 1 0 0 10\n5/8 1 1/2 1 4 2 6 2 1 1 14 1 4 0 12\n13/4 9/16 1 7 2 12 2 7 1 18 1 7 0 14\n7/8 1 19/32 1 12 3 2 2 15 2 5 1 12 0 161/2\n2 5/8 1 17 3 11 3 4 2 12 1 17 0 19\n21/8 11/16 2 1 3 19 3 11 2 18 2 1 1 1\n21/4 23/32 2 6 4 9 4 0 3 5 2 6 1 4\n23/8 3/4 2 12 5 0 4 10 3 14 2 12 1 7\n\n21/2 13/16 2 16 5 8 4 18 4 0 2 17 1 9\n23/4 7/8 3 8 6 12 5 18 4 16 3 8 1 15\n3 15 /16 4 3 8 6 7 9 6 1 4 3 2 4\n3 1 /4 1 1 /16 5 0 9 13 8 13 7 1 5 0 2 12\n3 1 /2 1 1 /8 5 18 11 8 10 5 8 7 5 18 3 1\n3 3 /4 1 3 /16 6 14 13 0 11 13 9 10 6 14 3 10\n4 1 1 /4 7 12 14 13 13 3 10 15 7 12 3 18\n4 1 /4 1 3 /8 8 10 16 9 14 15 12 1 8 10 4 8\n4 1 /2 1 7 /16 9 13 18 14 16 15 13 14 9 13 5 0\n4 3 /4 1 1 /2 10 14 20 14 18 11 15 3 10 14 5 11\n\n5 1 5 /8 11 16 22 16 20 9 16 14 11 16 6 2\n5 1 /4 1 11 /16 13 3 25 9 22 17 18 13 13 3 6 16\n5 1 /2 1 3 /4 14 8 27 16 24 19 20 7 14 8 7 9\n5 3 /4 1 13 /16 15 13 30 4 27 2 22 2 15 13 8 2\n6 1 7 /8 17 4 33 5 29 16 24 7 17 4 8 18\n\nconstruction: 6 strands each containing 19 wires\n5/8 3/16 0 3 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 11/2\n3/4 1/4 0 41/2 0 81/2 0 8 0 61/2 0 41/2 0 21/2\n7/8 9/32 0 6 0 111/2 0 101/2 0 81/2 0 6 0 3\n1 5/16 0 8 0 151/2 0 14 0 11 0 8 0 4\n1/8 1 3/8 0 91/2 0 181/2 0 161/2 0 131/2 0 91/2 0 5\n11/4 13/32 0 12 1 3 1 1 0 17 0 12 0 6\n\n3/8 1 7/16 0 14 1 7 1 4 0 191/2 0 14 0 7\n11/2 15/32 0 17 1 13 1 9 1 4 0 17 0 81/2\n5/8 1 1/2 1 0 1 19 1 15 1 8 1 0 0 10\n13/4 9/16 1 3 2 4 2 0 1 12 1 3 0 12\n7/8 1 19/32 1 7 2 12 2 7 1 18 1 7 0 14\n2 5/8 1 11 3 0 2 14 2 4 1 11 0 16\n21/8 11/16 1 15 3 7 3 0 2 9 1 15 0 18\n21/4 23/32 1 19 3 15 3 7 2 15 1 19 1 0\n23/8 3/4 2 4 4 5 3 16 3 2 2 4 1 3\n\n21/2 13/16 2 7 4 11 4 1 3 7 2 7 1 5\n23/4 7/8 2 17 5 10 4 19 4 1 2 17 1 9\n3 15 /16 3 10 6 15 6 1 4 19 3 10 1 16\n3 1 /4 1 1 /16 4 4 8 2 7 6 5 19 4 4 2 4\n3 1 /2 1 1 /8 5 0 9 13 8 13 7 1 5 0 2 12\n3 3 /4 1 3 /16 5 13 11 0 9 16 8 0 5 13 2 19\n4 1 1 /4 6 8 12 8 11 2 9 1 6 8 3 6\n4 1 /4 1 3 /8 7 3 13 16 12 8 10 2 7 3 3 14\n4 1 /2 1 7 /16 8 2 15 13 14 1 11 9 8 2 4 4\n4 3 /4 1 1 /2 9 0 17 8 15 12 12 14 9 0 4 13\n\n5 1 5 /8 9 19 19 4 17 5 14 1 9 19 5 3\n5 1 /4 1 11 /16 11 2 21 9 19 4 15 14 11 2 5 15\n5 1 /2 1 3 /4 12 2 23 7 20 19 17 2 12 2 6 5\n5 3 /4 1 13 /16 13 4 25 10 22 17 18 14 13 4 6 17\n6 1 7 /8 14 10 28 0 25 2 20 10 14 10 7 10\n\nconstruction: 6 strands each containing 24 wires\n5/8 3/16 0 3 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 11/2\n3/4 1/4 0 41/2 0 81/2 0 8 0 61/2 0 41/2 0 21/2\n7/8 9/32 0 6 0 111/2 0 101/2 0 81/2 0 6 0 3\n1 5/16 0 8 0 15 0 14 0 111/2 0 8 0 4\n1/8 1 3/8 0 11 1 1 0 19 0 151/2 0 11 0 51/2\n11/4 13/32 0 13 1 5 1 3 0 181/2 0 13 0 7\n\n3/8 1 7/16 0 16 1 11 1 8 1 3 0 16 0 8\n11/2 15/32 0 19 1 17 1 13 1 7 0 19 0 10\n5/8 1 1/2 1 2 2 3 1 18 1 11 1 2 0 111/2\n13/4 9/16 1 5 2 8 2 3 1 15 1 5 0 13\n7/8 1 19/32 1 9 2 16 2 10 2 1 1 9 0 15\n2 5/8 1 14 3 6 2 19 2 8 1 14 0 171/2\n21/8 11/16 1 18 3 13 3 6 2 14 1 18 0 191/2\n21/4 23/32 2 2 4 2 3 14 3 0 2 2 1 2\n23/8 3/4 2 7 4 11 4 1 3 6 2 7 1 4\n\n21/2 13/16 2 14 5 5 4 14 3 17 2 14 1 8\n23/4 7/8 3 4 6 4 5 11 4 11 3 4 1 13\n3 15 /16 3 15 7 6 6 11 5 7 3 15 1 19\n3 1 /4 1 1 /16 4 11 8 16 7 17 6 8 4 11 2 7\n3 1 /2 1 1 /8 5 4 10 1 9 0 7 7 5 4 2 12\n3 3 /4 1 3 /16 5 18 11 8 10 5 8 7 5 18 3 1\n4 1 1 /4 6 17 13 5 11 18 9 14 6 17 3 11\n4 1 /4 1 3 /8 7 13 14 16 13 5 10 17 7 13 3 19\n4 1 /2 1 7 /16 8 10 16 10 14 15 12 1 8 10 4 8\n4 3 /4 1 1 /2 9 13 18 13 16 14 13 13 9 13 5 0\n\n5 1 5 /8 10 12 20 9 18 7 15 0 10 12 5 9\n5 1 /4 1 11 /16 11 12 22 8 20 2 16 8 11 12 6 0\n5 1 /2 1 3 /4 12 12 24 8 21 17 17 17 12 12 6 10\n5 3 /4 1 13 /16 14 0 27 1 24 5 19 16 14 0 7 5\n6 1 7 /8 15 3 29 6 26 5 21 9 15 3 7 16\n\nconstruction: 6 strands each containing 24 wires\n5/8 3/16 0 21/2 0 5 0 41/2 0 31/2 0 21/2 0 11/2\n3/4 1/4 0 4 0 71/2 0 7 0 51/2 0 4 0 2\n7/8 9/32 0 5 0 91/2 0 81/2 0 7 0 5 0 21/2\n1 5/16 0 7 0 131/2 0 12 0 10 0 7 0 31/2\n1/8 1 3/8 0 91/2 0 181/2 0 161/2 0 131/2 0 91/2 0 5\n11/4 13/32 0 11 1 1 0 19 0 151/2 0 11 0 51/2\n\n3/8 1 7/16 0 131/2 1 6 1 3 0 19 0 131/2 0 7\n11/2 15/32 0 16 1 11 1 8 1 3 0 16 0 8\n5/8 1 1/2 0 19 1 17 1 13 1 7 0 19 0 10\n13/4 9/16 1 1 2 1 1 16 1 10 1 1 0 11\n7/8 1 19/32 1 5 2 8 2 3 1 15 1 5 0 13\n2 5/8 1 9 2 16 2 10 2 1 1 9 0 15\n21/8 11/16 1 12 3 2 2 15 2 5 1 12 0 161/2\n21/4 23/32 1 16 3 10 3 2 2 11 1 16 0 181/2\n23/8 3/4 2 0 3 17 3 9 2 17 2 0 1 1\n\n21/2 13/16 2 6 4 9 4 0 3 5 2 6 1 4\n23/4 7/8 2 14 5 4 4 14 3 16 2 14 1 8\n3 15 /16 3 3 6 2 5 9 4 9 3 3 1 13\n3 1 /4 1 1 /16 3 17 7 9 6 13 5 9 3 17 2 0\n3 1 /2 1 1 /8 4 8 8 10 7 13 6 4 4 8 2 6\n3 3 /4 1 3 /16 5 0 9 13 8 13 7 1 5 0 2 12\n4 1 1 /4 5 15 11 2 9 19 8 3 5 15 3 0\n4 1 /4 1 3 /8 6 9 12 9 11 4 9 3 6 9 3 7\n4 1 /2 1 7 /16 7 3 13 16 12 8 10 2 7 3 3 14\n4 3 /4 1 1 /2 8 3 15 15 14 2 11 10 8 3 4 5\n\n5 1 5 /8 8 19 17 6 15 10 12 13 8 19 4 13\n5 1 /4 1 11 /16 9 15 18 17 16 18 13 16 9 15 5 1\n5 1 /2 1 3 /4 10 12 20 10 18 7 15 0 10 12 5 11\n5 3 /4 1 13 /16 11 16 22 16 20 9 16 14 11 16 6 2\n6 1 7 /8 12 15 24 12 22 2 18 1 12 15 6 12\n\nconstruction: 6 strands each containing 37 wires\n1 5/16 0 81/2 0 16 0 15 0 12 0 81/2 0 41/2\n1/8 1 3/8 0 111/2 1 2 1 0 0 161/2 0 111/2 0 6\n11/4 13/32 0 13 1 5 1 21/2 0 181/2 0 13 0 7\n3/8 1 7/16 0 151/2 1 10 1 7 1 2 0 151/2 0 8\n11/2 15/32 0 19 1 17 1 13 1 7 0 19 0 10\n5/8 1 1/2 1 3 2 2 2 0 1 13 1 3 0 12\n\n13/4 9/16 1 6 2 11 2 6 1 18 1 6 0 131/2\n7/8 1 19/32 1 10 2 18 2 12 2 2 1 10 0 151/2\n2 5/8 1 15 3 9 3 2 2 10 1 15 0 18\n21/8 11/16 2 0 3 17 3 9 2 17 2 0 1 1\n21/4 23/32 2 6 4 9 4 0 3 5 2 6 1 4\n23/8 3/4 2 9 4 15 4 5 3 9 2 9 1 6\n21/2 13/16 2 14 5 4 4 13 3 16 2 14 1 8\n23/4 7/8 3 6 6 8 5 15 4 14 3 6 1 14\n3 15 /16 4 0 7 15 6 19 5 13 4 0 2 1\n\n3 1 /4 1 1 /16 4 11 8 16 7 18 6 9 4 11 2 7\n3 1 /2 1 1 /8 5 7 10 7 9 6 7 12 5 7 2 15\n3 3 /4 1 3 /16 6 4 12 0 10 15 8 16 6 4 3 4\n4 1 1 /4 7 2 13 15 12 7 10 2 7 2 3 14\n4 1 /4 1 3 /8 8 2 15 13 14 1 11 9 8 2 4 4\n4 1 /2 1 7 /16 8 18 17 4 15 8 12 12 8 18 4 12\n4 3 /4 1 1 /2 10 0 19 6 17 6 14 3 10 0 5 3\n5 1 5 /8 11 3 21 11 19 6 15 15 11 3 5 15\n5 1 /4 1 11 /16 12 7 23 17 21 8 17 10 12 7 6 8\n5 1 /2 1 3 /4 13 6 25 14 23 1 18 16 13 6 6 17\n\n5 3 /4 1 13 /16 14 13 28 6 25 7 20 14 14 13 7 11\n6 1 7 /8 16 1 31 0 27 16 22 14 16 1 8 6\n\nconstruction: 6 strands each containing 37 wires\n1 5/16 0 7 0 131/2 0 12 0 10 0 7 0 4\n1/8 1 3/8 0 9 0 171/2 0 151/2 0 13 0 9 0 5\n11/4 13/32 0 11 1 1 0 19 0 151/2 0 11 0 51/2\n3/8 1 7/16 0 13 1 5 1 3 0 181/2 0 13 0 61/2\n11/2 15/32 0 16 1 11 1 8 1 3 0 16 0 81/2\n5/8 1 1/2 0 191/2 1 18 1 14 1 8 0 191/2 0 10\n\n13/4 9/16 1 2 2 2 1 18 1 11 1 2 0 111/2\n7/8 1 19/32 1 6 2 10 2 5 1 17 1 6 0 131/2\n2 5/8 1 10 2 18 2 12 2 2 1 10 0 151/2\n21/8 11/16 1 14 3 6 2 19 2 8 1 14 0 171/2\n21/4 23/32 1 19 3 15 3 7 2 15 1 19 1 0\n23/8 3/4 2 1 3 19 3 11 2 18 2 1 1 1\n21/2 13/16 2 5 4 7 3 18 3 4 2 5 1 3\n23/4 7/8 2 16 5 8 4 17 3 19 2 16 1 9\n3 15 /16 3 7 6 10 5 16 4 15 3 7 1 15\n\n3 1 /4 1 1 /16 3 17 7 9 6 13 5 9 3 17 2 0\n3 1 /2 1 1 /8 4 10 8 14 7 16 6 7 4 10 2 7\n3 3 /4 1 3 /16 5 5 10 3 9 2 7 9 5 5 2 14\n4 1 1 /4 6 0 11 12 10 8 8 10 6 0 3 2\n4 1 /4 1 3 /8 6 17 13 4 11 18 9 14 6 17 3 11\n4 1 /2 1 7 /16 7 10 14 10 13 0 10 12 7 10 3 18\n4 3 /4 1 1 /2 8 9 16 8 14 13 11 19 8 9 4 8\n5 1 5 /8 9 8 18 3 16 6 13 6 9 8 4 17\n5 1 /4 1 11 /16 10 8 20 2 18 0 14 14 10 8 5 8\n5 1 /2 1 3 /4 11 4 21 12 19 8 15 17 11 4 5 16\n\n5 3 /4 1 13 /16 12 7 23 17 21 7 17 9 12 7 6 8\n6 1 7 /8 13 10 26 1 23 8 19 2 13 10 7 0\n\nRatio of drum (barrel) or sheave diameter to rope\n(20) When power operated and for rope speeds not greater than 120 feet\nper minute, the diameter of a drum (barrel) roller, sheave or quadrant\nmeasured at the surface on which the rope operates (where\nungrooved) or at the bottom of the groove (where grooved) shall be\nnot less than that provided in table 144.2 as relevant and appropriate\nto the construction of the rope concerned.\n(21) For each increase in rope speed of 60 feet per minute, above 120 feet\nper minute, 71/ 2% shall be added to the diameter of the drum, barrel,\nroller, sheave or quadrant.\n(22) The ratio of drum, barrel, roller, sheave or quadrant diameter to rope\ndiameter when hand operated shall be not less than 10, when\nmeasured at the surface on which the rope operates.\nTable 144.2\nrope construction\nof strands\nnumber of\nwires in each\nstrand note\nminimum diameter of drum,\nbarrel, roller, sheave or\nquadrant expressed in terms\nof ‘d’ the diameter of the rope\nconcerned\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n37 23d.\n6 22\n\n\n\n19d.\n6 37 161/ 2 d.\n6 61 151/ 2 d.\n\nrope construction\nof strands\nnumber of\nwires in each\nstrand note\nminimum diameter of drum,\nbarrel, roller, sheave or\nquadrant expressed in terms\nof ‘d’ the diameter of the rope\nconcerned\n6 10 flattened strand 33d.\n6 25 flattened strand 27d.\n6 27 flattened strand 25d.\n8 19 flattened strand 171/ 2 d.\n17 7 non-spin 20d.\n34 7 non-spin 161/ 2 d.\nEqualising sheaves\n(23) Equalising sheaves and analogous media shall have diameters at the\nbottoms of the grooves not less than 15 times the diameter of the ropes\nconcerned.\nAngle of lead of rope to and from drums or sheaves—for grooved drums or\nsheaves\n(24) The maximum lead angle shall be such that there is no danger of the\nrope being drawn out of its bed in the groove and shall not exceed 5°\n(1 in 12) each side of a plane perpendicular to the axis of rotation of\nthe drum or sheave.\nAngle of lead of rope to and from drums or sheaves—for ungrooved drums\n(25) The maximum lead angle shall be such that there is no danger of the\nrope ‘bunching’ on the drum and failing to lay correctly on it, and\nshall not exceed 3° (1 in 19) each side of a plane perpendicular to the\naxis of rotation of the drum.\n\nGrooving of drums\n(26) If drums are grooved the grooves shall be machined and the contour\nat the bottom of the grooves shall be circular over an angle of 120°.\n(27) The radius of the grooves shall be as shown in table 144.3.\nTable 144.3 Radius of grooves in rope drums\nfor ropes up to and including\n2 inches circumference\nradius of rope plus 1/ 32 of an inch\nfor ropes of 21/ 8 to 23/ 4 inches\ncircumference inclusive\nradius of rope plus 3/ 64 of an inch\nfor ropes of 3 to 31/ 2 inches\ncircumference inclusive\nradius of rope plus 1/ 16 of an inch\nfor ropes of 33/ 4 inches\ncircumference and larger\nradius of rope plus 3/ 32 of an inch\n(28) Grooves shall have a depth of not less than 1/ 3 of the diameter of the\nrope and shall be so pitched that there is a clearance of not less\nthan 1/ 32 of an inch for ropes up to 11/ 2 inches diameter and not less\nthan 1/ 16 of an inch for ropes over 1 1/ 2 inches diameter, between the\nparts of the rope when coiled on the drum.\n(29) The grooves shall be smoothly finished and all sharp edges removed.\nUngrooved drums for rope\n(30) Ungrooved drums shall have flanges extending 1 rope diameter above\nthe surface of the outer layer of rope when the maximum designed\nnumber of turns are wound on it, but in no case shall the total depth\nof the flange measured from the face of the empty drum be less than\n3 rope diameters.\n\n(31) Subsection (30) shall not imply that an additional flange is to be\nprovided when a wheel that is attached to the drum will serve to form\n1 of the flanges.\nRope pulleys and quadrants\n(32) Rope pulleys and quadrants shall be machine grooved to a depth not\nless than 11/ 2 times the diameter of the rope used on it and the\ngrooving shall comply with the provisions of subsections (26) to (29).\n(33) The included angle of flare between the 2 sides of the grooving of a\npulley or quadrant shall be not less than 42° and not more than 52°.\n(34) When ropes are prevented from leaving their grooves, the grooves\nmay be not less in depth than the diameter of the rope concerned.\n(35) Lifting block pulleys shall be provided with suitable guards to keep\nthe ropes in the grooves.\nSwivel hooks\n(36) Lifting hooks and lifting eyes attached to single falls (parts) of steel\nwire rope other than rope slings, shall be freely rotatable under all\nconditions of loading and if the load exceeds 2 tons shall be of the\nball or roller thrust bearing type.\n(37) Provision shall be made to exclude dust and other foreign matter from\nthrust bearings.\nGuards\n(38) Guards shall be provided to prevent persons’ hands or other parts of\ntheir body being injured by the rope or pulleys of hook blocks or\nbottom blocks in power-operated cranes or hoists if the blocks are\nused for loads of less than 5 tons.\n(39) Guards shall be provided if there is a danger that ropes will become\ndisplaced from pulleys, or quadrants.\n\nRope anchorages\n(40) Eye splices, sockets, and rope anchorages shall be capable of\nwithstanding 90% of the guaranteed breaking strength of the rope or\nropes to which they are attached.\n(41) Rope anchorages shall be readily accessible at all times.\n(42) There shall be at least 2 full turns of each rope, remaining on the drum\nor barrel when the hook or other lifting or hauling medium is fully\nlowered or unwound.\nSplicing\n(43) Eye splices shall have at least 3 tucks with each whole strand of the\nrope, and 2 tucks with 1/2 of the wires cut out of each strand, made in\neach case, under and over against the lay of the rope.\n(44) The splice shall be tightly drawn and neatly made.\n(45) Thimbles shall be used if ropes are spliced to hooks, shackles, rings,\nswivels, pins, eyes, and analogous fittings.\nPeriodic inspection of rope\n(46) No person shall use any wire rope or any attachments of it unless the\nrope and the attachments of it have been subjected to close detailed\nexamination at the intervals that are necessary or advisable to ensure\nthat defective ropes or attachments are not used.\n(47) No steel wire rope shall be used if it is excessively worn, corroded, or\notherwise defective, or if in any length equal to 8 diameters of the\nrope the number of visible broken wires exceeds 10% of the total\nnumber of wires in the rope.\n\nIdentification and testing of steel wire rope\n(48) No person shall use any steel wire rope unless the person holds a\npurchaser’s docket or other document, issued to the person and signed\nby the person from whom he or she purchased or obtained the use of\nthe rope, clearly and legibly setting out in the English language the\nlength of rope to which the docket or document applies, the size,\nconstruction and lay of the rope, the maker’s guaranteed minimum\nbreaking tensile strength of the rope, the maker’s identification\nnumber of the coil from which the rope was obtained, and the date of\npurchase or acquisition of the rope.\n(49) Every person using any steel wire rope shall when so required by an\ninspector immediately produce to the inspector, and allow the\ninspector to examine and copy, the docket or document required by\nsubsection (48) to be held by the person for that rope.\n(50) Every person who uses or has in his or her possession for use any\nsteel wire rope shall, if requested by the chief inspector so to do,\nproduce to the chief inspector or to an inspector named in the request,\nat a reasonable place specified in the request and within a reasonable\ntime not exceeding 4 weeks after the receipt of the request, a test\ncertificate for the rope or of rope of which it formed a part, which\ncertificate shall be in accordance with Australian Standard\nSpecification No M4—1955, appendix K, ‘Steel Wire Ropes for\nWinding and Hauling Purposes in Mines’ of Standards Australia, and\nthe person shall, if necessary for compliance with the request, cause\nthe appropriate test to be made.\n(51) Unless the chief inspector directs the production of the original\ncertificate, the production of a true copy of it, if bearing a statement\nsigned by the maker or a vendor of the rope that it is a true copy, shall\nbe a sufficient compliance with the request.\n(52) Any person who in any test certificate given for steel wire rope\nknowingly makes or signs any false statement, or who knowingly\nmakes or signs a false statement that any document is a true copy of\nthe certificate, commits a breach of this regulation.\n\nFibre rope for use in connection with cranes, lifts, hoists,\nscaffolding, plant, gear, or building work, excavation work, or\n(1) All fibre rope and every part of it shall be of sound material, good\n(2) Suitable packing shall be provided and used to prevent fibre rope\ncoming in contact with sharp edges of loads, etc.\n(3) Fibre rope shall not be exposed to extremes of temperature either in\nor out of use.\n(4) Fibre ropes of circumference less than 1 1/ 2 inches shall not be used\nfor load carrying purposes unless otherwise approved.\n(5) If fibre rope is held by hand under load, it shall be not less than\n2 inches circumference.\n(6) Kinked ropes shall not be used.\n(7) Ropes shall be kept clean, stored under cover in a clean dry place, and\nbe raised clear of the ground.\n(8) In no case shall the rope be in contact with ashes, clinker or coke.\n(9) Ropes shall be kept clear of acids and other deleterious chemicals and\ntheir fumes.\n(10) Ropes shall be examined each time before being used.\n(11) If a load is supported on more than 1 fall or single part of rope, the\nload shall be equally distributed by statically determinate automatic\nmeans between the various falls, singles or parts.\n\n(12) No rope shall be used for load-carrying purposes that has been\nsubjected to a severe shock or that has been unduly stretched.\n(13) No rope sling shall be used if the included angle measured between\nany 2 legs exceeds 150°, or if the angle formed between any sling leg\n(14) Rope slings before being used, and if repaired or altered, before being\nreused shall be subjected to a load equal to their safe working load\nand closely examined to ensure suitability for use or reuse as the case\nmay be.\n(15) Fibre rope shall not be exposed to temperatures exceeding\n150° Fahrenheit.\n(16) Fibre ropes that are excessively worn or have been adversely affected\nby weather or by water shall be discarded.\n(17) All fibre rope shall comply with the provisions of Australian Standard\nSpecifications No (E) L.507—1941, or No (E) L.508—1941,\npromulgated by Standards Australia, unless otherwise approved.\n(18) However—\n(a) every fibre rope shall be classified numerically in conformity\nwith table 145; and\n(c) no fibre rope shall be subjected to any greater load than that\ndetermined by multiplying the least ultimate tensile value of the\nrope by the fraction mentioned in subsections (21) and (22)\nrelevant and appropriate to its classification and way of use.\n\n(19) For subsection (18) (c), the least ultimate tensile value of a rope that\nis in the best condition may be deemed equal to the minimum\nbreaking load or strength of that rope prescribed by Australian\nStandard Specification No (E) L.507—1941, for sisal rope or No (E)\nL.508—1941, for Manila rope, whichever is relevant and appropriate,\nthe specifications being those promulgated by Standards Australia.\n(20) For worn rope the ultimate tensile value shall be deemed to be 1/ 2 of\nthat determined in accordance with subsection (18) (c).\n(21) Ropes within classification 1 of table 145.\n(22) Ropes within classification 2 of table 145.\n(23) Unless first approved by the chief inspector no fibre rope shall be\nused of other design or other material than that provided in Australian\nStandard Specifications mentioned in subsection (19).\nTable 145 Classification of fibre rope for purposes of design, construction and\nuse\nclassification of crane, hoist, lift, plant\nor scaffolding in connection with which\nthe fibre rope is used\nrope used for other\n1 classification No 1, 2 and 3 building work,\nexcavation work,\nor compressed air\nwork\n2 classification No 4\nRatio of drum (barrel) or sheave diameter to rope diameter\n(24) The diameter of any drum, barrel, roller, sheave or quadrant measured\nat the surface on which the rope operates shall be not less than 5 times\nthe diameter of the rope concerned if hand-operated, or 10 times the\nrope diameter if power-operated.\n\nGuards\n(25) Guards shall be provided to prevent ropes becoming displaced from\nsheaves, rollers or quadrants.\nRope anchorages\n(26) Each rope anchorage shall be capable of withstanding 75% of the\nultimate tensile strength of the rope attached to it.\n(27) Rope anchorages shall be readily accessible at all times.\n(28) There shall be at least 2 full turns of each rope remaining on the drum\nor barrel when the hook or other lifting or hauling medium is fully\nlowered or unwound.\nSplicing\n(29) Eye splices shall have at least 3 tucks with each whole strand of the\nrope, made under and over against the lay of the rope, and followed\nby effective dog-knotting.\n(30) The splice shall be tightly drawn and neatly made.\n(31) Thimbles shall be used if ropes are spliced to hooks, shackles, rings,\nswivels, pins, eyes or analogous media.\nPeriodic inspection of rope\n(32) No person shall use any fibre rope or any attachment of it unless the\nrope and the attachments have been subjected to close detailed\nexaminations at the intervals that are necessary or advisable to ensure\nthat defective ropes or attachments are not used.\n\nAirlocks\nEvery airlock shall be designed and constructed in accordance with\nthe provisions of the Australian Standard Rules for the Design,\nConstruction, Inspection and Operation of Boilers and Unfired\nPressure Vessels and their Appurtenances published by Standards\nAustralia, as revised in 1942.\nBordeaux connections\nBordeaux connections for connecting wire rope to crane chain, and\nfittings used in a like way shall comply with the provisions of British\nStandard Specification No 461—1932, promulgated by the British\nSockets for wire ropes\nSockets for wire rope and fittings used in a like way shall comply\nwith the provisions of British Standard Specification No 463—1946,\npromulgated by the British Standards Institution, England, except as\nmay be otherwise provided in this regulation.\nThimbles for wire and fibre rope\nThimbles for wire and fibre rope shall be of approved design and\nconstruction.\n\nSteel eye bolts\n(1) Steel eye bolts and analogous fittings shall comply with the\nprovisions of British Standard Specification No 529, parts 1 and 2,\n1944, promulgated by the British Standards Institution, England,\nexcept as may be otherwise provided in this regulation.\n(2) The maximum load in the threaded part of an eye bolt shall not exceed\nthat prescribed by section 126 (38) having due regard to the\nclassification of the eye bolt.\n(3) Eye bolts without collars shall, unless otherwise approved, be used\nonly for direct axial loading.\nMild steel rigging screws, and stretching screws and\nturnbuckles\n(1) Mild steel rigging screws, and stretching screws and turnbuckles and\nanalogous fittings shall comply with the provision of British Standard\nSpecification No 716—1937, promulgated by the British Standards\nInstitution, England, except as may be otherwise provided in this\n(2) The maximum load in the threaded section of any tensile male\ncomponent of these fittings shall not exceed that prescribed by section\n126 (38) having due regard to classification.\nMild steel shackles\nMild steel shackles and analogous fittings shall comply with British\nStandard Specification No 825—1939, promulgated by the British\n\nRings, links alternative to rings, egg links and Intermediate\nlinks\nRings, links alternative to rings, egg links and intermediate links, and\nanalogous fittings shall comply with the provisions of British\nStandard Specification No 781—1938, promulgated by the British\n(1) Except if otherwise provided—\n(a) handrails shall be fixed at a height of 3 feet above the working\nplatforms or surfaces served, and shall be strongly supported at\npoints not further apart than 8 feet; and\n(b) handrails shall be of not less strength and rigidity than the\nfollowing alternative members:\n(i) if of timber—pine timber not less than 3 inches in depth by\n2 inches in horizontal width; or\n(ii) if of steel—steel water pipe of 1 inch diameter nominal\nbore, having a wall thickness not less than 0.144 of an inch;\nor\n(iii) if of rolled mild steel—rolled mild steel angle section 13/ 4\ninches by 13/ 4 inches by 1/ 4 of an inch.\n\n(2) Unless otherwise approved, handrail stanchions or standards shall be\nwelded or bolted in place, with bolts each not less than 3/ 8 of an inch\nin diameter and having washers under heads and nuts.\n(3) Handrails shall be strongly secured to standards by—\n(a) steel U-strips not less than 1 inch in width and 1/16 of an inch in\nthickness, strongly spiked or screwed in place; or\n(b) bolts as for standards; or\n(c) approved cleats or approved lashings; or\n(d) by adequate full-strength welding.\nRope clips\nRope clips shall not be used unless—\n(a) they are of approved design and construction; and\n(b) they are used only for the purpose and in the way approved.\nGin blocks used with fibre rope\nFrames\n(1) The frame shall be either—\n(a) a malleable iron or steel casting, or other approved material; or\n(b) a fabricated wrought steel frame constructed as follows:\n(i) the vertical part of the frames shall be formed from flat\nrectangular mild steel bar with horizontal rope guards (also\nof flat rectangular mild steel bar) welded by an approved\nprocess to the vertical part of the frame; and\n\n(ii) all sharp corners and edges shall be dressed to prevent the\nchafing of the rope.\nClearances\n(2) The openings in the frame shall be adequate to prevent contact with\nand chafing the rope.\n(3) The total clearance between the sheave and the frame shall not\nexceed 1/ 16 of an inch.\n(4) The clearance between the hole in the crosshead and shank of the\nhook, between the axle pin and the holes in the frame, between the\naxle pin and the hole in the sheave and between the side of the cotter\npin and the frame shall not exceed 1/ 64 of an inch.\nLift boxes\n(1) All timber used in the construction of lift boxes shall comply with the\nprovisions of ‘Standard Grade for Scantlings’ set out in the Australian\nStandard Grading Rules (Emergency Series) for Sawn and Hewn\nStructural Timbers, No (E) 054—1942, as amended in June, 1944.\n(2) Lift boxes for loads not exceeding 3 tons shall be made of oregon\ntimber 2 inches thickness, or alternatively of hardwood 1 1/ 2 inches\nthickness.\n(3) Every lift box shall be fitted with 2 carrying straps 3 inches by 5/ 8 of\nan inch mild steel each passing under the bottom and up both sides of\nthe box.\n(4) These straps shall be secured to the timber with bolts 1/ 2 an inch\ndiameter.\n\n(5) The end of each strap at the top of the box shall have a hole formed\nin it to accommodate the lifting tackle.\n\nPart 13 Precautions and measures to be\ntaken for securing the safety of\npersons in connection with roofs\nsheathed with asbestos cement\nor other brittle material\nlarge regulation sheets means corrugated asbestos cement sheets of\nmaterial not less than 1/ 4 of an inch in thickness, having\ncorrugations 17/ 8 inches and over in depth, the pitch of the\ncorrugations being more than 3 inches but not more than 53/ 4 inches\nmeasured centre to centre of adjacent crests or troughs.\nlongitudinal wires means the safety mesh wires parallel to the\ncorrugations of the roof sheathing.\nroof means the roof, or part of it, of any building or structure, except\nof a private dwelling house and its outhouses, the upper surface of\nwhich roof makes an angle of less than 50° with the horizontal.\nsafety mesh means a meshwork of steel wires of size and arrangement\nrequired by this section.\nsmall section sheets means corrugated asbestos cement sheets of\nmaterial not less than 7/ 32 of an inch in thickness, having corrugations\nless than 1 7/8 inches in depth, the pitch of the corrugations being 3\ninches or less measured centre to centre of adjacent crests or troughs.\ntransverse wires means the safety mesh wires at right angles to the\ncorrugations of the roof sheathing.\n(2) No person shall place, lay or fix, or cause to be placed, laid or fixed,\non any roof structure, or part of a roof structure, any roof sheathing\n\nof asbestos cement or other brittle material unless safety mesh has\nfirst been securely fixed in the way provided in this regulation over\nthe area to be sheathed.\n(3) However, the chief inspector may, by written notice, exempt from this\nrequirement any roof—\n(a) if the chief inspector is satisfied that generally the roof\nconstruction is such that it would provide the same degree of\nsafety as would any other roof on which safety mesh has been\nfixed; or\n(b) in which the members immediately supporting corrugated\nasbestos cement sheathing are spaced—\n(i) not more than 1 foot 6 inches apart measured centre to\ncentre for small section sheets; or\n(ii) not more than 2 feet apart measured centre to centre for\nlarge section sheets; or\n(c) vertically below which a substantial and closely boarded floor\nor like structure is located at a distance not greater than 8 feet,\nmeasured from the highest part of the roof.\n(4) Corrugated asbestos cement sheathing for roofs shall be mature and\nfree from cracks and defects liable to impair its strength.\n(5) The distance between purlins or other immediate supports for\ncorrugated asbestos cement roof sheathing shall not when measured\ncentre to centre exceed—\n(a) 4 feet 11/ 2 inches for a large section sheet, measured in the\ndirection of the corrugations; or\n(b) 3 feet for small section sheets, measured as mentioned in\nparagraph (a); or\n(c) the distance approved in writing by the chief inspector for sheets\ndiffering in section from those mentioned in paragraphs (a) and\n(b).\n\n(6) No person shall place, lay or fix asbestos cement sheets on any roof\nstructure unless the person is wearing sandshoes or other approved\nfootwear.\n(7) Safety mesh shall be constructed entirely of steel wire the ultimate\ntensile strength of which is not less than 35 tons per square inch.\n(8) The wire shall be zinc galvanised so that the weight of the zinc coat\nin ounces per square foot shall not be less than the value, appropriate\nto the tensile strength of the wire, as provided in British Standard\nSpecification 443, 1939, table 2, for the testing of the zinc coating on\ngalvanised wires, promulgated by the British Standards Institution,\nLondon, England, as amended in February, 1945.\n(9) Each mesh shall be rectangular in shape and shall not\nexceed 12 inches in length and 6 inches in width.\n(10) The wires forming each mesh shall be strongly secured, one to the\nother, at each corner of the mesh.\n(11) The diameter of the wire with which each type of safety mesh is\nformed shall be as provided in the table after subsection (13).\n(12) Safety mesh shall be fixed to purlins or other anchorages at the\nspacings set out in the table after subsection (13) in any 1 of the\nfollowing ways:\n(a) if the purlins or other anchorages are of timber the longitudinal\nwires shall—\n(i) be bent down and fixed to the sides of the purlins or other\nanchorages with galvanised steel staples of the gauges,\nlengths and spacing as set out in table 158; or\n(ii) be fixed to the tops of them with galvanised steel staples of\nthe gauges, lengths and spacing as set out in table 158; or\n(b) the longitudinal wires of the safety mesh shall be passed once\ncompletely around the purlin, or other anchorage, the tail of each\n\nwire being twisted twice tightly around the main part of the same\nwire; or\n(c) the longitudinal wires of the safety mesh shall be secured to the\npurlins or other anchorages with 10 gauge (0.128 of an inch\ndiameter) galvanised steel wire loops by passing the centre of\nthe tying wire around the longitudinal wire at a point of\nintersection of a transverse wire, so that a transverse wire shall\nbe between that point and the end of the longitudinal wire,\npassing both ends of the tying wire once completely around the\npurlin, or other anchorage, the 2 tails of the tying wire being then\ndrawn in opposite directions over the 2 strands of the tying wire\nand twisted together with at least 3 complete turns.\n(13) All staples shall be driven in such way that a cross wire is between\nthe end of the wire and the staple or the end of the wire is bent back\nand twisted twice around the same wire, so that individual wires\ncannot be drawn from the staple.\nTable 158\ndiameter of\nwire in\nmesh\nmesh\ngauge of\nfastening\nto side of\npurlin:\nlength of\nfastening\nto top of\npurlin:\nlength of\nspacing of\nstaples or\nother\nfastenings\ninch inches s.w.g. inches inches inches\n0.128 12 × 6 10 11/ 4 11/ 2 12\n0.104 6 × 6 11 1 11/ 4 6\n0.092 4 × 4 11 1 11/ 4 8, 4*\n0.080 3 × 3 11 1 11/ 4 6\n* Pairs of wires at 12-inch centres, ie wires alternately at 8-inch and 4-inch centres.\n(14) Safety mesh shall be deemed not to conform to the requirements of\nthis section unless a complete specification and the samples of mesh,\n\nas may be required, have been submitted to the chief inspector and\napproved by him or her.\n(15) Safety mesh shall be fixed immediately and closely under the roof\nsheathing, without other intervention, and so that it rests on each of\nthe roof members; it shall be free from perceptible sag.\n(16) The longitudinal wires shall pass above and across all roof members\nthat immediately support the roof sheathing.\n(17) All the transverse wires shall be located above the longitudinal wires.\n(18) If the longer sides of a mesh exceed 6 inches, the safety mesh shall\nbe so disposed that the lesser sides are parallel to the corrugations.\n(19) If a break of continuity in the longitudinal wires occurs, the wires\nshall be effectively joined to preserve continuity.\n(20) In addition, the longitudinal wires at the adjoining or overlapping\nedges of adjacent lengths of safety mesh shall be strongly fastened\ntogether at intervals not greater than 3 feet.\n(21) Adjacent lengths of safety meshing shall not, when fixed, be more\nthan 1 inch apart.\n(22) Without limiting subsections (1) to (21), the apertures resulting from\njunctions or connections of safety mesh shall not exceed those\nprescribed for the construction of the mesh, or be otherwise oriented.\n(23) No person shall carry out or cause to be carried out any roof sheathing\nwork unless safety mesh has first been fully fixed as a margin around\nall positions where the work is to be carried out.\n(24) If not otherwise limited by the boundaries of the roof structure, or\nboundaries incidental to the application of this section, this margin\nshall be at least 20 feet in width.\n(25) Safety mesh shall not be used if it is likely to be affected by corrosive\nagencies but purlins or battens spaced as provided in subsection (3)\n(b) shall be used in its place.\n\n(26) Safety mesh or its fastenings or supports that has been reduced in\nstrength by corrosion or other agency to less than 90% of the strength\nindicated by this section shall on reduction be renewed by the owner\nof the building, to comply with this section.\n(27) Safety mesh shall not be considered as affording support to the roof\nsheathing.\n(28) The owner of any building (other than a private dwelling house), or\nany structure, having any roof sheathing of asbestos cement or other\nbrittle material, shall provide and fix on each individual slope, curve,\nor flat of roofing of it, the warning or danger notices in the positions,\nand way prescribed in this section.\n(29) The owner shall preserve and maintain the notices in good condition,\nand in a clean and legible state.\n(30) The warning notices shall bear the words—\nWarning\nStand or walk only on lines of nails or screws in\n< _______ THIS ______ > direction\nin heavy block lettering in black on a sharply contrasting yellow\nbackground.\n(31) The words ‘Warning’ and ‘This’ shall be at least 1 3/ 4 inches in height,\nand the remainder of the lettering shall be at least 1 1/ 8 inches in\nheight.\n(32) The word ‘This’ shall be placed centrally between 2 heavy straight\nblack arrows as indicated in subsection (30).\n(33) The word ‘Warning’ shall be heavily underlined in black.\n(34) The warning notices shall not be less than 12 1/ 2 inches in width and\n14 inches in depth and shall be of steel not less in thickness than\n","sortOrder":20},{"sectionNumber":"18","sectionType":"section","heading":"English Imperial Legal Standard Gauge (0.048 of an inch).","content":"18 English Imperial Legal Standard Gauge (0.048 of an inch).\n\n(35) All of the wording and its background shall be executed in vitreous\n(‘porcelain’) enamel and the back and other part of the notice shall, if\nnot otherwise enamelled, have at least a grip coat of vitreous enamel.\n(36) Warning notices shall be strongly fixed in upright positions directly\non and not more than 3 inches above the sheathings of the roofs,\nclosely adjacent to all points of access to the roofs.\n(37) In the same way they shall also be fixed closely adjacent to all valleys\nand other points where persons might reasonably be expected to enter\non the roofs.\n(38) They shall be so placed that they constitute plain and clearly visible\nwarning to persons about to enter on the roofs.\n(39) Each notice shall be so placed and so oriented, that the arrows on\nthem are directly above and point along the line of nails, screws, bolts,\nor other fastenings that secure the roof sheathing to its immediate\nsupports.\n(40) Each notice shall be so placed and so oriented that it clearly indicates\nthose lines that mark the positions and directions of uninterruptedly\ncontinuous supporting members of the roof sheathing.\n(41) No person shall fix a warning notice on a roof until the person has\nfirst ensured that there is an uninterruptedly continuous supporting\nmember along each line of nails, screws, or other fastenings after\nwhich to be indicated by the notice, and if any such member is not\nuninterruptedly continuous the person shall cause it to be made so\nbefore fixing the notice.\n(42) If any supporting member of the sheathing of any roof is incapable of\nsafely supporting a concentrated load of 300 pounds acting vertically\ndownwards and so placed as to be of most adverse effect, no person\nshall fix a warning notice as previously prescribed.\n(43) Instead, danger notices shall be strongly fixed, as prescribed in this\nsection for warning notices.\n(44) Danger notices shall bear the words—\n\nDanger\nKeep off this roof\nin heavy block lettering in red on a white background.\n(45) The word ‘Danger’ shall be at least 1 3/ 4 inches in height and shall be\nheavily underlined in red.\n(46) The remainder of the lettering shall be at least 13/8 inches in height.\n(47) The danger notices shall not be less than 12 inches square and shall\nin all other respects conform with the requirements of this regulation\nfor warning notices.\n\nMiscellaneous and penalties Part 16\nPart 16 Miscellaneous and penalties\nGeneral penalty\n(1) When any matter or thing is by this regulation required, directed or\nforbidden to be done, or if any authority is given by this regulation to\nany person to require, direct or forbid any matter or thing to be done,\nand the matter or thing so required or directed to be done remains\nundone, or the matter or thing so forbidden to be done is done, in\nevery such case every person offending against the requirement,\ndirection or prohibition, commits an offence against this regulation.\n(2) Any person guilty of a breach of this regulation shall, if no other\npenalty is expressly provided in this regulation for the breach, be\nliable to a penalty not exceeding $100.\n\nSchedule 3 Method of treatment of silica paint for the purpose of ascertaining the\npercentage of free silica present\nSchedule 3 Method of treatment of silica\npaint for the purpose of\nascertaining the percentage of\nfree silica present\n1 take 10g of paint and extract with successive portions of a suitable\nsolvent until the residue is free from vehicle\n2 take 0.5g of dry residue and boil for 5 minutes with 50mL of 20%,\nacetic acid containing 5.0g of ammonium acetate, then cool,\ncentrifuge, decant off the supernatant liquid, and wash the residue\nwith 50mL of 20% acetic acid\n3 treat the residue with 50mL of 1:2 hydrochloric acid, boil, cool,\ncentrifuge, decant, and wash with 50mL of 1:2 hydrochloric acid\n4 treat the residue with 25mL of concentrated sulphuric acid containing\n5g of sodium sulphate, then heat to fuming, cool, centrifuge, decant,\nand wash with 25mL of concentrated sulphuric acid, decant and wash\nwith 25mL of water\n5 boil the residue for 5 minutes with 50mL of 10% sodium carbonate,\ncool, centrifuge, decant, and wash with 50mL of 1:10 hydrochloric\nacid\n6 transfer residue to a platinum dish, evaporate to dryness, ignite, and\nweigh (residue A)\n7 treat the residue with 5mL of hydrofluoric acid, containing 0.5mL of\nconcentrated sulphuric acid, then heat on water bath for 1 hour,\nevaporate to dryness over flame, ignite and weigh (residue B)\n8 free silica equals residue A minus residue B\n\nProcesses to which s 73 (1) (o) applies Schedule 4\nSchedule 4 Processes to which s 73 (1) (o)\napplies\n1 dry grinding of surfaces of metal, stone, concrete, or similar materials\nby means of a wheel or discs driven by mechanical power\n2 cutting, dressing, or carving of stone, concrete or similar material by\nmeans of a portable tool driven by mechanical power\n3 chipping, or scaling of painted or corroded metal surfaces or wire\nbrushing of the surfaces by mechanical power\n4 cutting out or cutting off of cold rivets or bolts from any structure or\npart of a structure\n5 welding or cutting of metals by means of an electrical, oxyacetylene\nor similar process\n\nSchedule 5 Method of treatment of a lead compound for the purpose of determining the\npercentage of dry compound of lead\nSchedule 5 Method of treatment of a lead\ncompound for the purpose of\ndetermining the percentage of\ndry compound of lead\n1 the material is to be treated with suitable solvents to remove the oil,\nvarnish, and other media, and the residue to be dried at 100° C and\nthoroughly mixed\n2 a weighed quantity of this extracted, dried and mixed material is to\nbe continuously shaken for 1 hour, at the common temperature, with 1\n000 times its weight of an aqueous solution of hydrochloric acid\ncontaining 0.25% by weight of hydrogen chloride\n3 this solution is then to be allowed to stand for 1 hour and then filtered\n4 the lead salt contained in the clear filtrate is then to be precipitated as\nlead sulphide and weighed as lead sulphate\n\nTable 7.1 Decompression—stoppages after exceeding ordinary time limits\n(see s 99 (21) to (23))\n66 11 29 over 3h ... ... ... ... ... ... 10 30 42\n72 12 32 2 to 3h\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n78 13 341/2 11/2to 21/2h\nover 21/2h\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n\n84 14 37 11/4 to 11/2h\n11/2 to 13/4h\n13/4 to 2h\n2 to 21/2h\n21/4 to 21/2h\n21/2 to 23/4h\n23/4 to 3h\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n\n90 15 40 1h to 1h 12min\n1h 12min to 1hr 20min\n1h 20min to 11/2h\n11/2h to 1h 44min\n2h to 2h 14min\n2h 14min to 21/2h\n21/2h to 2h 44min\n2h 44min to 3h 14min\nover 3h 14min\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n96 16 421/2 55min to 1h 12min ...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n\n1h 12min to 11/2h\n11/2h to 1h 54mins\n1h 54min to 2h 18min\n2h 18min to 21/2h\n21/2h to 2h 54min\nover 2h 54min\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n108 18 48 40 to 50min\n50min to 1h\n1h to 1h 18min\n1h 18min to 1h 44min\n2h to 2h 18min\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n\n2h 18min to 2h 34min\n2h 34min to 2h 50min\nover 2h 50min\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n120 20 531 /2 35 to 50min\n50min to 1h\n1h to 1h 22min\n1h 22min to 1h 44min\n2h to 2h 22min\n2h 22min to 2h 44min\nover 2h 44min\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n132 22 59 30min to 38min ...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n\n38min to 3/4h\n3/4h to 1h\n1 to 11/4h\n11/4h to 11/2h\n11/2h to 13/4h\n13/4h to 2h\n2 to 21/4h\nover 21/4h\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n144 24 641 /2 25 to 32min\n32min to 39min\n39min to 3/4h\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n\n3/4h to 1h\n11/4h to 11/2h\n11/2h to 13/4h\n13/4h to 2h\n2 to 21/4h\n21/4 to 21/2h\nover 21/2h\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n156 26 70 20 to 24min\n24 to 30min\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n\n35 to 45min\n55 to 60min\n1h to 1h 9min\n1h 9min to 1h 18min\n1h 18min to 1h 27min\n1h 27min to 1h 37min\n1h 37min to 1h 47min\n1h 47min to 1h 56min\nover 1h 56min\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n168 28 75 16 to 23min\n23 to 30min\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n\n11/4 to 11/2h\n11/2h to 1h 40min\n1h 40min to 1h 55min\nover 1h 55min\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n180* 30 801/2 14 to 20min\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n\n1h to 1h 11min\n1h 11min to 1h 23min\n1h 23min to 1h 34min\n1h 34min to 1h 46min\nover 1h 46min\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n192* 32 86 13 to 20min\n11/4h to 1h 26min\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n\n1h 26min to 1h 37min\n1h 37min to 1h 48min\nover 1h 48min\n...\n204* 34 911/2 12 to 20min\n1h to 1h 10min\n1h 10min to 1h 20min\n1h 20min to 11/2h\n11/2h to 1h 40min\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n\n1h 40min to 1h 50min\nover 1h 50min\n15 20 25 30 30 35 40 40 238\n* Handworked pumps are unsuitable at this depth.\nTable 7.2 Decompression—ordinary time limits, stoppages and air supply\n(see s 99 (23) to (26))\n\nof\n0-33 0-5 1 /2 0-15 no limit ... ... ... ... ... ... 0 to 1 1 15 to 30† 2\n33-42 5 1 /2-7 15-181 /2 up to 3hr\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n1 to 11 /2\n2 15 to 20 2\n42-48 7-8 181 /2 -21 up to 1h\n1 to 3h\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n11 /2\n6 1 /2\n111 /2\n2 20 2\n48-54 8-9 21-24 up to 1 /2 h\n1 /2 to 11 /2 h\n1 1 /2 to 3h\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n2 20 2\n\nof\n54-60 9-10 24-261 /2 up to 20min\n20 to 45min\n3 /4 to 1 1 /2h\n1 1 /2 to 2h\n2 to 3h\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n60-66 10-11 261 /2 -\n291 /2\nup to 15min\n15 to 30min\n30 to 48min\n48 to 60min\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n\nof\n1 to 11/2 h\n1 1 /2 to 2h\n2 to 21 /2 h\n2 1 /2 to 3h\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n66-72 11-12 291 /2 -32 up to 15min\n15 to 25min\n30 to 45min\n3 /4 h to 1h\n1 to 11 /2 h\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n\nof\n11/2 to 2h ... ... ... ... 10 20 32\n72-78 12-13 32-341 /2 up to 10min\n30 to 38min\n38 to 45min\n3 /4 to 1h\n1 to 11 /4 h\n1 1 /4 to 1 1 /2h\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n78-84 13-14 341 /2 -37 up to 10min ... ... ... ... ... 3 5 2 30† 6\n\nof\n40 to 45min\n55 to 65min\n65 to 75min\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n84-90 14-15 37-40 up to 10min\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n2 30†\n\nof\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n90-96 15-16 40-421 /2 up to 10min\n35 to 45min\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n2 30† 6\n98-108 16-18 421 /2 -48 up to 5min ... ... ... ... ... 3 6 4 20 1\n\nof\n35 to 40min\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n108-120 18-20 48-531 /2 up to 5min\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n4 20 12\n\nof\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n120-132 20-22 531 /2 59 up to 5min\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n\nof\n132-144 22-24 59-641 /2 up to 6min\n6 to 12min\n12 to 16min\n16 to 20min\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n144-156 24-26 641 /2 -70 up to 5min\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n156-168 26-28 70-75 up to 5min ... ... ... ... 2 5 10 4 30† 12\n\nof\n10 to 13min\n13 to 16min\n...\n...\n...\n...\n168-180 28-30 75-801 /2 up to 5min\n5 to 9min\n9 to 12min\n12 to 14min\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n4 30† 12\n180-192‡ 30-32 801 /2 -86 up to 5min\n10 to 13min\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n... ... ...\n\nof\n192-204‡ 32-34 86-911 /2 up to 7min\n7 to 12min\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n* These figures are based on a double-acting pump with cylinder diameter 4 inches, stroke 71/2inches, working at 80% efficiency.\n† If 30 revolutions per minute cannot be maintained, another cylinder may be used instead.\n‡ Handworked pumps are unsuitable at this depth.\n\nTable 7.3 Decompression times for different periods of exposure to working pressure\n(see s 100 (31) and s 101 (31))\nthe\nto\nmin\nfor\n4h\nfor\n3h\nfor\nfor\n2h\nfor\nfor\nfor\n1h\nfor\n3/4h\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\n18 or 19 2 3 4 2.0 3 1.5 3 1.5 2 1.0 2 1.0 2 1.0 1 0.5 1 0.5 1 0.5 1 0.5 1 0.5\n20 or 21\n22 or 23\n24 or 25\n26 or 27\n28 or 29\n4.0\n5.7\n6.8\n7.5\n7.9\n2.3\n3.7\n5.0\n6.0\n6.6\n2.0\n3.0\n3.8\n4.5\n5.0\n1.7\n2.2\n2.8\n3.3\n3.7\n1.3\n2.0\n2.4\n2.8\n3.1\n1.0\n1.5\n2.0\n2.3\n2.7\n1.0\n1.5\n1.8\n2.2\n2.4\n0.7\n1.0\n1.4\n1.7\n1.9\n0.7\n0.7\n1.0\n1.3\n1.6\n0.3\n0.5\n0.8\n1.0\n1.1\n0.3\n0.2\n0.4\n0.5\n0.7\n30 or 31 8 5 64 8.0 54 6.8 43 5.4 32 4.0 27 3.4 24 3.0 21 2.6 17 2.1 14 1.7 10 1.2 6 0.8\n\nthe\nto\nmin\nfor\n4h\nfor\n3h\nfor\nfor\n2h\nfor\nfor\nfor\n1h\nfor\n3/4h\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\n32 or 33\n34 or 35\n36 or 37\n38 or 39\n8.1\n8.2\n8.2\n8.2\n7.0\n7.2\n7.4\n7.6\n5.8\n6.1\n6.4\n6.6\n4.3\n4.6\n4.9\n5.2\n3.8\n4.1\n4.4\n4.7\n3.3\n3.6\n3.8\n4.1\n2.9\n3.1\n3.4\n3.6\n2.3\n2.6\n2.8\n3.0\n1.9\n2.1\n2.3\n2.4\n1.3\n1.5\n1.7\n1.8\n0.9\n1.0\n1.1\n1.2\n\nthe\nto\nmin\nfor\n4h\nfor\n3h\nfor\nfor\n2h\nfor\nfor\nfor\n1h\nfor\n3/4h\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\n40 to 41\n42 or 43\n44 or 45\n46 or 47\n48 or 49\n...\n...\n...\n...\n8.2\n...\n...\n...\n...\n7.6\n7.6\n7.6\n7.6\n7.6\n6.7\n6.7\n6.8\n6.9\n6.9\n5.5\n5.7\n5.9\n6.1\n6.2\n4.9\n5.2\n5.4\n5.6\n5.8\n4.3\n4.6\n4.8\n5.0\n5.2\n3.7\n3.9\n4.1\n4.3\n4.5\n3.1\n3.2\n3.3\n3.5\n3.7\n2.5\n2.6\n2.8\n2.9\n3.1\n1.9\n2.1\n2.2\n2.3\n2.4\n1.2\n1.3\n1.4\n1.5\n1.6\n50 or 51\n52 or 53\n54 or 55\n56 or 57\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n...\n7.6\n...\n...\n...\n...\n6.9\n6.9\n6.9\n...\n6.2\n6.3\n6.3\n6.4\n5.9\n6.0\n6.0\n6.1\n5.3\n5.4\n5.5\n5.6\n4.6\n4.8\n5.0\n5.2\n3.9\n4.1\n4.3\n4.6\n3.2\n3.3\n3.4\n3.6\n2.5\n2.6\n2.7\n2.8\n1.7\n1.8\n1.9\n2.0\n\nthe\nto\nmin\nfor\n4h\nfor\n3h\nfor\nfor\n2h\nfor\nfor\nfor\n1h\nfor\n3/4h\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\ntime\nin\n58 or 59 22 7 ... ... ... ... ... ... 140 6.4 135 6.1 126 5.7 117 5.3 104 4.7 83 3.8 63 2.9 47 2.1\n60 23 7 ... ... ... ... ... ... 146 6.4 141 6.1 134 5.8 125 5.4 112 4.9 91 4.0 69 3.0 51 2.2\nNote ‘Periods’ referred to in column headings are periods of exposure to working pressure, and should not be confused with working\nperiods at the face.\n\nMedical standards and examination report for compressed air workers Schedule 8\n","sortOrder":21},{"sectionNumber":"Sch 8","sectionType":"schedule","heading":"Medical standards and","content":"Schedule 8 Medical standards and\nexamination report for\ncompressed air workers\nThe medical standards required for workers in compressed air are as\nfollows:\n(a) age and physique—\n(i) the worker shall be well-developed and healthy but not\nabove the average weight/height ratio; and\n(ii) the worker shall be intelligent, active and have good sight\nand hearing; and\n(ii) there shall be no marked development of adipose tissue nor\nevidence of premature senility.\n(b) respiratory system—\n(i) there shall be no disease of the respiratory system; or\n(ii) there shall be no disease of the middle ear or blockage of\nthe Eustachian tubes; or\n(ii) there shall be no disease of the the pharynx or frontal\nsinuses.\n(c) circulatory system—\n(i) there shall be no evidence of disease of the heart or the\nblood vessels; and\n(ii) the arteries shall not be thickened or the blood pressure\nabove a figure normal for the age.\n\nSchedule 8 Medical standards and examination report for compressed air workers\n(d) nervous system—\n(i) there shall be no disease of the nervous system or special\nsenses; and\n(ii) ther shall be no evidence of neurasthenia, neurosis or\npsychosis.\n(e) renal system—\n(i) there shall be no evidence of disease of the kidneys or\nbladder; and\n(ii) there shall be no evidence of either albuminuria or\nglucosuria.\n\nMedical standards and examination report for compressed air workers Schedule 8\nExamination report for compressed air workers\nName of applicant…………………………………………age………….\nGeneral physical condition……………………………………………….\nRespiratory system:\nlungs……………………………………………………….……..\nnose, ears, throat…………………………………………………\nsinuses……………………………………………………………\nCirculatory system:\nblood pressure……………………………………………………\nheart………………………………………………………………\nNervous system…………………………………………………………..\nRenal system……………………………………………………………...\nUrine: albu\nglu e\nmin..........................................................................\ncos ...........................................................................\n\n\n\nResult of chest X-ray examination……...………………………………..\nI certify that I have carefully examined…………………………………..\nand consider that he/she is fit/not fit to work under compressed air conditions.\n(In the event of an unfavourable opinion, please state reasons.)\n…………………………………………………………………………….\n…………………………………………………………………………….\nSignature of medical officer\n……………………………..\nDated:\n\n","sortOrder":22},{"sectionNumber":"Sch 9","sectionType":"schedule","heading":"Symptoms and treatment of compressed air illness","content":"Schedule 9 Symptoms and treatment of compressed air illness\nSchedule 9 Symptoms and treatment of\ncompressed air illness\nSymptoms of compressed air illness\n","sortOrder":23},{"sectionNumber":"1","sectionType":"section","heading":"The symptoms of compressed air illness are due to the liberation of","content":"1 The symptoms of compressed air illness are due to the liberation of\nbubbles of nitrogen in the blood or tissues and usually occur after the\nreturn of a person to normal air pressure.\n","sortOrder":24},{"sectionNumber":"2","sectionType":"section","heading":"The time of onset is generally a few minutes after decompression has","content":"2 The time of onset is generally a few minutes after decompression has\nbeen completed, but may be delayed as much as 4 hours, occasionally\na case may occur during decompression.\nForms of compressed air illness\n3 The different forms that compressed air illness may assume are very\nnumerous, and any illness or unusual symptoms after compression\nshould be investigated at once with a view to eliminating compressed\nair illness.\n4 If any doubt exists, it is wise to place the person concerned under a\nsmall pressure to ascertain if there is any alleviation of the symptoms.\n","sortOrder":25},{"sectionNumber":"5","sectionType":"section","heading":"The following forms of compressed air illness are most commonly","content":"5 The following forms of compressed air illness are most commonly\nencountered:\n(1) ‘Bends’ are the most common form of compressed air illness.\nThese are painful and sometimes acute manifestations of the\nillness that affect 1 or more limbs. They are not dangerous\nunless both arms or legs are effected, that may indicate a bubble\nin the spinal cord. Bends are most likely to occur in muscles\nthat have been the hardest worked. The pain begins gradually,\nbut may rapidly assume a very painful climax which, unless\nrelieved by recompression, may be sufficiently severe to make\nthe person cry out. Any symptom of a ‘bend’ should be treated\nby recompression at the earliest possible moment. The longer\nrecompression is delayed the more difficult will be the cure.\n\nSymptoms and treatment of compressed air illness Schedule 9\n(2) Severe pains in the chest or abdomen. The pain in the chest may\nbe accompanied by short, quick, gasping breathing, and the pain\nin the abdomen may lead to vomiting.\n(3) Paralysis of the legs and arms. This is a very serious symptom,\nand unless relieved may lead to permanent loss of use of the\nlimbs.\n(4) Other forms are faintness or unconsciousness, jerky movements\nof the eye or loss of sight, deafness, swelling of the body, loss\nof speech. These forms are less common.\nSymptoms to be reported\n","sortOrder":26},{"sectionNumber":"6","sectionType":"section","heading":"Any attack of ‘bends’, giddiness, vomiting or difficulty in breathing,","content":"6 Any attack of ‘bends’, giddiness, vomiting or difficulty in breathing,\ndisease of the heart, lungs, kidneys, genital organs, a chill, or any\nother disease that may come on a compressed air worker during or\nsubsequent to work may have the most serious consequences to the\nworker’s health.\n","sortOrder":27},{"sectionNumber":"7","sectionType":"section","heading":"Therefore, immediately on noticing the indisposition, the worker","content":"7 Therefore, immediately on noticing the indisposition, the worker\nmust report it to the medical officer or to a medical orderly, or failing\neither, to the contractor or a responsible representative of the\ncontractor.\nTreatment of compressed air illness\n","sortOrder":28},{"sectionNumber":"8","sectionType":"section","heading":"The cure for compressed air illness is immediate and adequate","content":"8 The cure for compressed air illness is immediate and adequate\nrecompression, which causes diminution in the size and final\ndisappearance of the bubble of gas that produced the symptom.\n\n(see s 2)\nNote 1 The Legislation Act contains definitions and other provisions relevant to\nthis regulation.\nNote 2 For example, the Legislation Act, dict, pt 1, defines the following terms:\n• document\n• person.\nNote 3 Terms used in this regulation have the same meaning that they have in\nthe Scaffolding and Lifts Act 1912 (see Legislation Act, s 148). For\nexample, the following terms are defined in the Scaffolding and Lifts Act\n1912, dict:\n• crane\n• dogger\n• gear\n• inspector\n• lift\n• plant.\nanalogous means radically analogous in relation to prime\ncharacteristics.\napproved means approved in writing by the chief inspector.\naxial stress means one produced by a force or load acting parallel to\nand concentrically with the longitudinal neutral axis of the member\nconcerned, and is the initial stress so produced, before any\nredistribution that may accompany resultant elastic deformation of\nthe member.\nbearing pressure, in relation to a pin or shaft in a plain bearing, means\nbearing pressure calculated as for a plane rectangular area of length\nequal to the length of the bearing, and of width equal to the diameter\nof the bearing.\nbirdcage scaffolding—see section 85.\ncantilever scaffolding—see section 85.\n\nconveyor, for part 4 (Lifts)—see section 16.\ndead loads means all loads of which the principal effects remain\nconstant during operation or manipulation of the crane, lift, hoist,\nscaffolding, plant or gear concerned.\ndesigned means effectively and correctly designed for its purpose in\ncomplete accordance with this regulation or, if provision is not\nincluded in this regulation, effectively and correctly designed for its\npurpose in an approved way.\ndrawings means permanent, fully detailed and fully dimensioned and\nannotated engineering drawings, clear, distinct, and to a commonly\nused scale, which are sufficiently complete for engineering workshop\nuse to enable faithful manufacture of all items depicted.\ndynamically irreversible means incapable of being set or kept in\nmotion by energy applied at or to the power output member or part of\nany mechanism, linkage or device.\ndynamically reversible means capable of being set or kept in motion\nby energy applied at or to the power output member or part of any\nmechanism, linkage or device.\nexplosive-powered tool, for part 9A (Explosive-powered tools—\nsafety measures)—see section 118A.\nfixed end means for purposes of stress determination, a fixed end or\nfixed connection so designed that it effectively maintains and\npreserves the tangent to the elastic curve of the end of the member\nconcerned in its original direction and position, irrespective of\napplied loading.\nforged steel means hot forged from steel conforming to Australian\nStandard Specification No E17—(1944 T.) General Locomotive\nForgings of K quality, and Australian Standard Specification\nNo B63—1938 Carbon Steel Forgings (Primarily for Cranes and\nHoists).\n\nfree end means for purposes of stress determination, a free end not\nspecifically secured in a way that will effectively prevent its\ntranslation.\nheavy duty scaffolding—see section 85.\nhigh tensile structural steel means steel conforming to British\nStandard Specification No 548—1934, High Tensile Structural Steel\nfor Bridges etc and General Building Construction, or British\nStandard Specification No 968—1941, High Tensile (Fusion Welding\nQuality) Steel for Bridges, etc, and General Building Construction\npromulgated by Standards Australia.\nhinged end means for purposes of stress determination, a hinged end\nor hinged connection not specifically and effectively designed to\ntransmit major restraining or other moments.\nin commission means in commission but not necessarily active.\nindependent pole scaffolding—see section 85.\nlight duty scaffolding—see section 85.\nlight swinging stage—see section 85.\nlimiting means—\n(a) a maximum such that if it were increased; or\n(b) a minimum such that if it were decreased;\nthe increase or decrease would occasion contravention of the Act or\nthis regulation, or in any way prejudice the safe working of the crane,\nlift, hoist, scaffolding or plant concerned.\nlive loads means all loads of which the principal effects vary during\noperation or manipulation of the crane, lift, hoist, scaffolding, plant\nor gear concerned, and include the working load and all loads due to\ninertia, momentum, braking and wind.\nmild steel means—\n\n(a) except in relation to bolts or rivets—mild steel conforming to\nAustralian Standard Specification No A.1—1940 Rolled Steel\nSections for Structural Purposes; and\n(b) in relation to bolts or rivets—a mild steel approved by the chief\ninspector as being suitable for its purpose.\nprojectile, for part 9A (Explosive-powered tools—safety\nmeasures)—see section 118A.\nqualified operator, for part 9A (Explosive-powered tools—safety\nmeasures)—see section 118A.\nroller means a wheel or cylinder that is either without an axle, or in\nwhich an axle or equivalent device is employed principally for\npurposes of alignment and location as distinct from the transmission\nof loads or forces.\nrun—see section 85.\nS.A.A. Wiring Rules means Australian Standard Rules for the\nelectrical equipment of buildings, structures and premises, published\nby the Standards Australia, known as the S.A.A. Wiring Rules. (First\nissued June, 1931, revised December, 1934, revised January, 1940.\nReprinted including corrigenda of February, 1940, February, 1943,\nand March, 1944. Amendment 3, 1945. All redated 1945.\nAmendment 4, January, 1946, redated 1946.).\nsafety gear, for part 4 (Lifts)—see section 16.\nsafe working load (or working load) means the greatest burden that\nmay be imposed without contravening any provision of this\nregulation in or on the lifting or lowering instrument with which any\ncrane, lift or hoist is provided for lifting or lowering, or on any\nplatform of any scaffold, but does not include wind loads or any\nincrease consequential to section 125 or the weight of the lifting hook,\nyoke, kibble, box, cage, vessel or other medium by which the load is\nraised or lowered, or the weight of the platform or framework of any\nscaffold.\n\nsecond-hand means evidencing previous usage that might reasonably\nbe expected or anticipated to have resulted in wear or abrasion,\ndistortion, fatigue, misalignment, cold working, strain hardening,\noverheating, corrosion, or other damage or deterioration, affecting the\nitem concerned in whole or in part, and, in relation to any material,\nsecond-hand means not plainly self evidently new.\nsection means actual section before any deformation that may follow\nor accompany application of stress and, unless otherwise stated, all\nsections must lie in planes normal to the longitudinal axes of the\nmembers concerned.\nservice lift, for part 4 (Lifts)—see section 16.\nsingle pole scaffolding—see section 85.\nstatic counterbalance weights includes all counterbalance weights\nthat do not move relatively to the crane, hoist, lift, scaffolding, plant\nor gear concerned or to its supporting structure.\nstrength means computed strength except in relation to the strengths\nof materials or ropes, and unless the chief inspector specifically\napproves otherwise.\nstress means stress measured in tons per square inch, after including\nall increases prescribed by this regulation.\nsuspended scaffolding—see section 85.\ntoe board—see section 85.\ntool, for part 9A (Explosive-powered tools—safety measures)—see\nsection 118A.\ntransverse stress means the longitudinal tensile or compressive fibre\nstress resulting at the skin of a member from forces that cause flexure,\nbut not include the axial stress.\nunder power means energised by any agency other than manual or\ngravitational.\n\nuse, an explosive-powered tool, for part 9A (Explosive-powered\ntools—safety measures)—see section 118A (3).\nwork, for part 9A (Explosive-powered tools—safety measures)—see\nsection 118A.\nworking load—see safe working load.\n\n1 About the endnotes\n1 About the endnotes\nAmending and modifying laws are annotated in the legislation history and the\namendment history. Current modifications are not included in the republished law\nbut are set out in the endnotes.\nNot all editorial amendments made under the Legislation Act 2001, part 11.3 are\nannotated in the amendment history. Full details of any amendments can be\nobtained from the Parliamentary Counsel’s Office.\nUncommenced amending laws and expiries are listed in the legislation history and\nthe amendment history. These details are underlined. Uncommenced provisions\nand amendments are not included in the republished law but are set out in the last\nendnote.\nIf all the provisions of the law have been renumbered, a table of renumbered\nprovisions gives details of previous and current numbering.\nThe endnotes also include a table of earlier republications.\n2 Abbreviation key\nam = amended ord = ordinance\namdt = amendment orig = original\nch = chapter par = paragraph/subparagraph\ndef = definition pres = present\ndict = dictionary prev = previous\ndisallowed = disallowed by the Legislative (prev...) = previously\nAssembly pt = part\ndiv = division r = rule/subrule\nexp = expires/expired renum = renumbered\nGaz = gazette reloc = relocated\nhdg = heading R[X] = Republication No\nIA = Interpretation Act 1967 RI = reissue\nins = inserted/added s = section/subsection\nLA = Legislation Act 2001 sch = schedule\nLR = legislation register sdiv = subdivision\nLRA = Legislation (Republication) Act 1996 sub = substituted\nmod = modified/modification SL = Subordinate Law\no = order underlining = whole or part not commenced\nom = omitted/repealed or to be expired\n\nLegislation history 3\nThis regulation was originally a NSW regulation—the Regulations made under the\nScaffolding and Lifts Act 1912 (NSW).\nThe Scaffolding and Lifts Act 1912 (NSW) and this regulation were applied, in a\nmodified form, as ACT laws by the Scaffolding and Lifts Act 1957 (now repealed).\nThis regulation was renamed by the Scaffolding and Lifts Regulations Amendment\nSL1999-19 and later under the Legislation Act 2001.\nUnder the Interpretation Act 1967 (repealed), s 65 all former NSW Acts in force in\nthe ACT immediately before 10 November 1999 (including the Scaffolding and\nLifts Act 1912) became, for all purposes, laws made by the ACT Legislative\nAssembly.\nUnder the Scaffolding and Lifts Act 1912, s 28 (now expired) the Scaffolding and\nLifts Regulation 1950 became, on 29 March 2001, for all purposes, a regulation\nmade under that Act. This completed the process of making the regulation fully into\nan ACT law.\nBefore 11 May 1989, regulations commenced on their notification day unless\notherwise stated (see Interpretation Act 1967 s 50).\nBefore 11 May 1989, ordinances commenced on their notification day unless\notherwise stated (see Seat of Government (Administration) Act 1910 (Cwlth), s 12).\nNSW legislation\nnotified 25 May 1950 (NSW Gaz 1950 No 86)\ncommenced 1 June 1950 (s 1 (1))\nas amended by\nnotified 1 September 1950 (NSW Gaz 1950 No 141)\ncommenced 1 September 1950\nnotified 3 November 1950 (NSW Gaz 1950 No 168)\ncommenced 3 November 1950\n\nnotified 6 March 1953 (NSW Gaz 1953 No 44)\ncommenced 6 March 1953\nnotified 3 December 1954 (NSW Gaz 1954 No 197)\ncommenced 3 December 1954\nnotified 5 August 1955 (NSW Gaz 1955 No 76)\ncommenced 5 August 1955\nnotified 9 March 1956 (NSW Gaz 1956 No 24)\ncommenced 9 March 1956\nnotified 22 June 1956 (NSW Gaz 1956 No 69)\ncommenced 22 June 1956\nnotified 19 October 1956 (NSW Gaz 1956 No 113)\ncommenced 19 October 1956\nnotified 1 March 1957 (NSW Gaz 1957 No 29)\ncommenced 1 March 1957\nCommonwealth legislation\nScaffolding and Lifts Act 1957 A1957-8 sch pt 2 (as am by Ord1968-5;\nOrd1974-26; Ord1976-7; Ord1977-28; Ord1981-15; Ord1982-15;\nOrd1982-68; Ord1983-34)\nnotified 19 September 1957 (Cwlth Gaz 1957 No 51)\ncommenced 19 September 1957\n\nLegislation history 3\nScaffolding and Lifts Ordinance 1968 Ord1968-5\nnotified 21 March 1968 (Cwlth Gaz 1968 No 26)\ncommenced 21 March 1968\nScaffolding and Lifts Ordinance 1974 Ord1974-26\nnotified 30 July 1974 (Cwlth Gaz 1974 No 62)\ncommenced 30 July 1974\nScaffolding and Lifts Ordinance 1976 Ord1976-7\nnotified 24 February 1976 (Cwlth Gaz 1976 No S38)\ncommenced 24 February 1976\nScaffolding and Lifts (Amendment) Ordinance 1977 Ord1977-28\nnotified 1 July 1977 (Cwlth Gaz 1977 No S124)\ncommenced 1 July 1977\nScaffolding and Lifts (Amendment) Ordinance 1981 Ord1981-15\nnotified 30 June 1981 (Cwlth Gaz 1981 No S128)\ncommenced 30 June 1981\nScaffolding and Lifts (Amendment) Ordinance 1982 Ord1982-15\nnotified 7 May 1982 (Cwlth Gaz 1982 No S93)\ncommenced 7 May 1982\nScaffolding and Lifts (Amendment) Ordinance (No 2) 1982\nOrd1982-68\nnotified 18 August 1982 (Cwlth Gaz 1982 No S174)\ncommenced 18 August 1982\n\nScaffolding and Lifts (Amendment) Ordinance 1983 Ord1983-34\nnotified 29 September 1983 (Cwlth Gaz 1983 No S226)\ncommenced 1 October 1983 (s 2)\nRegulations under the Scaffolding and Lifts Act, 1912 of the State of\nNew South Wales in their application to the Territory (Amendment)\nSL1986-9\nnotified 31 July 1986 (Cwlth Gaz 1986 No S375)\ncommenced 31 July 1986\nSelf-Government (Consequential Amendments) Ordinance 1989\nOrd1989-38 sch 2\nnotified 10 May 1989 (Cwlth Gaz 1989 No S160)\ns 1, s 2 commenced 10 May 1989 (s 2 (1))\nsch 2 commenced 11 May 1989 (s 2 (2) and see Cwlth Gaz 1989\nNo S164)\nLegislation after becoming Territory enactment\nScaffolding and Lifts Regulations Amendment SL1999-19\nnotified 30 September 1999 (Gaz 1999 No S57)\ncommenced 30 September 1999 (s 1)\nOccupational Health and Safety Legislation Regulations Amendment\nSL2000-47 pt 3\nnotified 30 November 2000 (Gaz 2000 No 48)\ncommenced 30 November 2000 (s 1)\nStatute Law Amendment Act 2001 A2001-11 sch 3\nnotified 29 March 2001 (Gaz 2001 No 13)\ncommenced 29 March 2001 (s 2)\nLegislation (Consequential Amendments) Act 2001 A2001-44 pt 359\nnotified 26 July 2001 (Gaz 2001 No 30)\ns 1, s 2 commenced 26 July 2001 (IA s 10B)\npt 359 commenced 12 September 2001 (s 2 and see Gaz 2001\nNo S65)\n\nStatute Law Amendment Act 2007 A2007-3 sch 3 pt 3.92\nnotified LR 22 March 2007\ns 1, s 2 taken to have commenced 1 July 2006 (LA s 75 (2))\nsch 3 pt 3.92 commenced 12 April 2007 (s 2 (1))\nWork Safety Legislation Amendment Act 2009 A2009-28 sch 2 pt 2.11\nnotified LR 9 September 2009\ns 1, s 2 commenced 9 September 2009 (LA s 75 (1))\nsch 2 pt 2.11 commenced 1 October 2009 (s 2 and see Work Safety\nAct 2008 A2008-51, s 2 (1) (b) and CN2009-11)\nName of regulation\ns 1 am regs gazetted 9 March 1956; regs gazetted 22 June 1956\nom A1957-8 sch pt 2 (as am Ord1977-28 s 5)\nins SL1999-19 sch\nam R2 LA\ns 2 om A1957-8 sch pt 2 (as am Ord1977-28 s 4)\nins A2007-3 amdt 3.471\nNotes\ns 3 defs reloc to dict A2007-3 amdt 3.470\nsub A2007-3 amdt 3.471\ndef chief inspector ins A1957-8 sch pt 2\nom A2007-3 amdt 3.469\ndef inspector ins A1957-8 sch pt 2\nom A2007-3 amdt 3.469\ndef the Act sub A1957-8 sch pt 2; A2001-11 amdt 3.257\nom A2001-44 amdt 1.3879\ndef the Explosives Act 1905 ins A1957-8 sch pt 2\nom SL1999-19 sch\ns 8 sub regs gazetted 1 September 1950\ns 9 om regs gazetted 1 September 1950\ns 10 sub regs gazetted 1 September 1950\ns 11 sub A1957-8 sch pt 2\n\ns 12 om A1957-8 sch pt 2\npt 3 hdg om A1957-8 sch pt 2\ns 15 om A1957-8 sch pt 2\nInterpretation\ndiv 4.1 hdg ins R2 LA\nDesign, construction and erection of lifts\ndiv 4.2 hdg (prev pt 4 div A hdg) renum R2 LA\ns 17 am A1957-8 sch pt 2; regs renum R2 LA\ns 18 ss renum R2 LA\ns 22 ss renum R2 LA\ns 23 ss renum R2 LA\ns 24 ss renum R2 LA\ns 25 sub regs gazetted 3 December 1954\nss renum R2 LA\ns 27 ss renum R2 LA\ns 28 ss renum R2 LA\ns 29 ss renum R2 LA; ss renum R3 LA\ns 31 ss renum R2 LA\ns 32 ss renum R2 LA\ns 33 ss renum R2 LA\ns 35 am A1957-8 sch pt 2; A2001-11 amdt 3.258\n\ns 39 ss renum R2 LA\ns 40 ss renum R2 LA\ns 41 ss renum R2 LA\ns 46 ss renum R2 LA\ns 51 ss renum R2 LA\ns 56 ss renum R2 LA\ns 61 ss renum R2 LA\ns 62 ss renum R2 LA\ns 63 ss renum R2 LA\nMaintenance of lifts\ndiv 4.3 hdg (prev pt 4 div B hdg) renum R2 LA\ns 67 pars renum R2 LA\nUse of lifts\ndiv 4.4 hdg (prev pt 4 div C hdg) renum R2 LA\ns 68 am SL2000-47 s 11; ss etc renum R2 LA\ns 69 am A1957-8 sch pt 2\ns 70 am SL2000-47 s 12\ns 72A ins regs gazetted 22 June 1956\nsub A1957-8 sch pt 2 (as am Ord1974-26 s 2; Ord1977-28\ns 5)\nam A1957-8 sch pt 2 (as am Ord1981-15 s 2; Ord1982-68 s 2)\nom A1957-8 sch pt 2 (as am Ord1983-34) s 5)\ndiv 5.1 hdg (prev pt 5 div A hdg) renum R2 LA\n\ns 73 am A1957-8 sch pt 2 (as am Ord1976-7 s 2); ss etc renum R2\nLA\ns 75 ss renum R2 LA\ns 76 om regs gazetted 22 June 1956\nConstruction, erecting, adding to, altering, repairing, finishing, painting and\ndiv 5.2 hdg (prev pt 5 div B hdg) renum R2 LA\ns 78 ss renum R2 LA\ns 79 ss renum R2 LA\ns 80 ss renum R2 LA\ns 81 ss renum R2 LA\ns 82 am A1957-8 sch pt 2; A2001-11 amdt 3.259; ss etc renum R2\nLA\ns 83 am A1957-8 sch pt 2; ss etc renum R2 LA\nDemolition of buildings and structures\ndiv 5.3 hdg (prev pt 5 div C hdg) renum R2 LA\ns 84 am regs gazetted 22 June 1956; SL1999-19 sch; ss etc renum\nR2 LA; A2009-28 amdt 2.27\ns 86 ss etc renum R2 LA\ns 87 am regs gazetted 3 December 1954; ss etc renum R2 LA\ns 88 ss renum R2 LA\ns 89 ss etc renum R2 LA\ns 90 ss renum R2 LA\n\ns 91 ss etc renum R2 LA\ns 92 ss etc renum R2 LA\ns 93 ss etc renum R2 LA\ns 94 ss renum R2 LA\ndiv 7.1 hdg (prev pt 7 div A hdg) renum R2 LA\ns 95 am regs gazetted 3 December 1954; regs gazetted 22 June\n1956; ss renum R2 LA\nCofferdams and caissons\ndiv 7.2 hdg (prev pt 7 div B hdg) renum R2 LA\nTrenches\ndiv 7.3 hdg (prev pt 7 div C hdg) renum R2 LA\ns 97 ss renum R2 LA\nShafts, wells and tunnels\ndiv 7.4 hdg (prev pt 7 div D hdg) renum R2 LA\ns 98 ss renum R2 LA\nDiving\ndiv 8.1 hdg (prev pt 8 div A hdg) renum R2 LA\ns 99 am regs gazetted 22 June 1956; A1957-8 sch pt 2; SL1999-19\nsch; ss etc renum R2 LA\nTunnelling\ndiv 8.2 hdg (prev pt 8 div B hdg) renum R2 LA\ns 100 am regs gazetted 22 June 1956; A1957-8 sch pt 2; SL1986-9\ns 3; SL1999-19 sch; ss etc renum R2 LA\nCaissons\ndiv 8.3 hdg renum R2 LA\ns 101 am regs gazetted 22 June 1956; A1957-8 sch pt 2; SL1986-9;\nSL1999-19 s 2 sch; ss etc renum R2 LA\n\npt 9 hdg om SL1999-19 sch\ns 102 om SL1999-19 sch\ns 103 am A1957-8 sch pt 2\nom SL1999-19 sch\ns 104 om SL1999-19 sch\ns 105 om SL1999-19 sch\ns 106 om SL1999-19 sch\ns 107 om SL1999-19 sch\ns 108 om SL1999-19 sch\ns 109 om SL1999-19 sch\ns 110 om SL1999-19 sch\ns 111 om SL1999-19 sch\ns 112 om SL1999-19 sch\ns 113 om SL1999-19 sch\ns 114 om SL1999-19 sch\ns 115 om SL1999-19 sch\ns 116 om SL1999-19 sch\ns 117 om SL1999-19 sch\ns 118 om SL1999-19 sch\n\nExplosive-powered tools—safety measures\npt 9A hdg sub A2007-3 amdt 3.472\ns 118A ins regs gazetted 9 March 1956\ns 118B ins regs gazetted 9 March 1956; ss etc renum R2 LA\ns 118C ins regs gazetted 9 March 1956; ss renum R2 LA\ns 118D ins regs gazetted 9 March 1956; ss etc renum R2 LA\ns 118E ins regs gazetted 9 March 1956; ss etc renum R2 LA\ns 118F ins regs gazetted 9 March 1956; ss renum R2 LA\ns 118G ins regs gazetted 9 March 1956; ss renum R2 LA\ns 118H ins regs gazetted 9 March 1956\nFirst-aid equipment\ndiv 10.1 hdg (prev pt 10 div A hdg) renum R2 LA\ns 119 am regs gazetted 3 December 1954; ss renum R2 LA\nShelter, change and dining accommodation\ndiv 10.2 hdg (prev pt 10 div B hdg) renum R2 LA\ns 120 ss etc renum R2 LA\nSanitary conveniences and washing facilities\ndiv 10.3 hdg (prev pt 10 div C hdg) renum R2 LA\ns 121 am A1957-8 sch pt 2 (as am Ord1968-5 s 2); SL1986-9 s 4; ss\netc renum R2 LA\ns 122 am A1957-8 sch pt 2; ss etc renum R2 LA\ns 123 ss renum R2 LA\ns 124 ss renum R2 LA\n\ns 125 ss renum R2 LA\ns 126 ss etc renum R2 LA\ns 127 am regs gazetted 5 August 1955; A2001-11 amdt 3.260; ss etc\nrenum R2 LA\ns 128 ss renum R2 LA\ns 129 ss renum R2 LA\ns 130 am regs gazetted 3 December 1954; ss renum R2 LA\ns 131 ss renum R2 LA\ns 132 am regs gazetted 5 August 1955; ss etc renum R2 LA\ns 132A ins regs gazetted 1 March 1957; ss renum R2 LA\ns 133 ss renum R2 LA\ns 134 ss renum R2 LA\ns 135 ss renum R2 LA\ns 136 ss renum R2 LA\ns 137 ss renum R2 LA\ns 138 am SL2000-47 s 13; ss renum R2 LA\ns 139 ss etc renum R2 LA\ns 140 ss renum R2 LA\ns 141 ss renum R2 LA\n\ns 142 ss etc renum R2 LA\ns 143 am A1957-8 sch pt 2; A2001-11 amdt 3.261; ss etc renum R2\nLA\ns 144 am regs gazetted 19 October 1956; A2001-11 amdt 3.262; ss\netc renum R2 LA\ns 145 ss etc renum R2 LA\ns 150 pars renum R2 LA\ns 151 ss renum R2 LA\ns 154 pars etc renum R2 LA\ns 156 ss etc renum R2 LA\ns 157 ss renum R2 LA\ns 158 ss etc renum R2 LA\npt 14 hdg om SL2000-47 s 14\ns 159 am regs gazetted 3 December 1954; A1957-8 sch pt 2 (as am\nOrd1976-7 s 3; Ord1977-28 s 5; Ord1983-34) s 5)\ns 160 am regs gazetted 3 December 1954; A1957-8 sch pt 2\ns 161 am regs gazetted 3 December 1954; A1957-8 sch pt 2\npt 15 hdg om SL2000-47 s 14\ns 162 am regs gazetted 3 December 1954; A1957-8 sch pt 2 (as am\nOrd1977-28 s 5; Ord1983-34) s 5)\n\ns 163 om A1957-8 sch pt 2 (as am Ord1983-34) s 5)\ns 164 am A1957-8 sch pt 2 (as am Ord1977-28 s 4); ss renum R2\nLA\nsch 1 am regs gazetted 3 November 1950; regs gazetted 6 March\n1953; regs gazetted 22 June 1956; A1957-8 sch pt 2 (as am\nOrd1976-7 s 2; Ord1977-28 s 5; Ord1982-15 s 2;\nOrd1982-68 s 2)\nom A1957-8 sch pt 2 (as am Ord1983-34) s 5)\nsch 2 am regs gazetted 22 June 1956; regs gazetted 19 October\nMethod of treatment of silica paint for the purpose of ascertaining the\npercentage of free silica present\nsch 3 hdg (prev third sch hdg) renum R2 LA\nsch 3 items renum R2 LA\nProcesses to which regulation 73 (1) (o) applies\nsch 4 hdg (prev fourth sch hdg) renum R2 LA\nMethod of treatment of a lead compound for the purpose of determining the\npercentage of dry compound of lead\nsch 5 hdg (prev fifth sch hdg) renum R2 LA\nsch 5 items renum R2 LA\nsch 6 om SL1999-19 sch\nsch 7 hdg (prev seventh sch hdg) renum R2 LA\nMedical standards and examination report for compressed air workers\nsch 8 hdg (prev eighth sch hdg) renum R2 LA\nsch 8 pars renum R2 LA\nSymptoms and treatment of compressed air illness\nsch 9 hdg (prev ninth sch hdg) renum R2 LA\nsch 9 cl etc renum R2 LA\ndict ins A2007-3 amdt 3.473\ndef analogous reloc from s 3 A2007-3 amdt 3.470\ndef approved reloc from s 3 A2007-3 amdt 3.470\n\ndef axial stress reloc from s 3 A2007-3 amdt 3.470\ndef bearing pressure reloc from s 3 A2007-3 amdt 3.470\ndef birdcage scaffolding ins A2007-3 amdt 3.473\ndef cantilever scaffolding ins A2007-3 amdt 3.473\ndef conveyor ins A2007-3 amdt 3.473\ndef dead loads reloc from s 3 A2007-3 amdt 3.470\ndef designed reloc from s 3 A2007-3 amdt 3.470\ndef drawings reloc from s 3 A2007-3 amdt 3.470\ndef dynamically irreversible reloc from s 3 A2007-3\ndef dynamically reversible reloc from s 3 A2007-3\ndef explosive-powered tool ins A2007-3 amdt 3.473\ndef fixed end reloc from s 3 A2007-3 amdt 3.470\ndef forged steel reloc from s 3 A2007-3 amdt 3.470\ndef free end reloc from s 3 A2007-3 amdt 3.470\ndef heavy duty scaffolding ins A2007-3 amdt 3.473\ndef high tensile structural steelreloc from s 3 A2007-3\ndef hinged end reloc from s 3 A2007-3 amdt 3.470\ndef in commission reloc from s 3 A2007-3 amdt 3.470\ndef independent pole scaffolding ins A2007-3 amdt 3.473\ndef light duty scaffolding ins A2007-3 amdt 3.473\ndef light swinging stage ins A2007-3 amdt 3.473\ndef limiting reloc from s 3 A2007-3 amdt 3.470\ndef live loads reloc from s 3 A2007-3 amdt 3.470\ndef mild steel reloc from s 3 A2007-3 amdt 3.470\ndef projectile ins A2007-3 amdt 3.473\ndef qualified operator ins A2007-3 amdt 3.473\ndef roller reloc from s 3 A2007-3 amdt 3.470\ndef run ins A2007-3 amdt 3.473\ndef S.A.A. Wiring Rules reloc from s 3 A2007-3 amdt 3.470\ndef safety gear ins A2007-3 amdt 3.473\ndef safe working load (or working load) reloc from s 3\nA2007-3 amdt 3.470\ndef second-hand reloc from s 3 A2007-3 amdt 3.470\ndef section reloc from s 3 A2007-3 amdt 3.470\ndef service lift ins A2007-3 amdt 3.473\ndef single pole scaffolding ins A2007-3 amdt 3.473\ndef static counterbalance weights reloc from s 3 A2007-3\ndef strength reloc from s 3 A2007-3 amdt 3.470\ndef stress reloc from s 3 A2007-3 amdt 3.470\ndef suspended scaffolding ins A2007-3 amdt 3.473\ndef toe board ins A2007-3 amdt 3.473\ndef tool ins A2007-3 amdt 3.473\ndef transverse stress reloc from s 3 A2007-3 amdt 3.470\n\n5 Earlier republications\ndef under power reloc from s 3 A2007-3 amdt 3.470\ndef use ins A2007-3 amdt 3.473\ndef work ins A2007-3 amdt 3.473\ndef working load reloc from s 3 A2007-3 amdt 3.470\n5 Earlier republications\nSome earlier republications were not numbered. The number in column 1 refers to\nthe publication order.\nSince 12 September 2001 every authorised republication has been published in\nelectronic pdf format on the ACT legislation register. A selection of authorised\nrepublications have also been published in printed format. These republications are\nmarked with an asterisk (*) in column 1. Electronic and printed versions of an\nauthorised republication are identical.\nRepublication No Amendments to Republication date\n1 SL1986-9 31 October 1993\n2 A2001-44 11 September 2002\n3 A2001-44 4 November 2004\n4 A2007-3 12 April 2007","sortOrder":29}],"analysis":{"flash_summary_failed":{"failed":true,"reason":"A positive credit balance is required for all requests, including BYOK, so fallback providers remain available. Add credits at https://vercel.com/d?to=%2F%5Bteam%5D%2F%7E%2Fai%3Fmodal%3Dtop-up to continue.","source":"analysis-cron"},"kimi_summary":{"_metrics":{"completionTokens":661},"content_quality":"ok","complexity_score":9,"scope_assessment":{"changed":false,"description":"The legislation appears consistent with its original 1950 purpose as a technical safety regulation for scaffolding and lifts. While it has expanded to cover additional equipment and work types (explosive tools, compressed air work), these additions represent natural extensions of industrial safety regulation rather than scope creep. The detailed engineering standards in Part 11 were likely present in original form."},"complexity_factors":["Extensive cross-referencing between Parts (e.g., Part 11 engineering standards apply throughout)","Numerous technical tables with precise numerical specifications (e.g., Table 126.5 with 220 slenderness ratios)","Multiple defined terms in dictionary and inline definitions (e.g., 'corrosion resistant metal' with 8 subsections)","Nested conditional logic (e.g., section 99 with 106 subsections on diving, many with 'except in emergency' clauses)","Integration with external standards (S.A.A. Wiring Rules, Standards Australia codes)","Part 11 contains advanced engineering formulas for stress, deflection, and material properties","Age restrictions, medical examinations, and decompression tables for compressed air work","Specific material requirements (e.g., Oregon pine vs hardwood timber with different stress values)","Multiple exemption and approval mechanisms requiring chief inspector discretion"],"plain_english_summary":"This is an ACT workplace health and safety regulation setting detailed technical and procedural standards for construction and industrial equipment (lifts, scaffolding, excavation, compressed‑air work, cranes, etc.). It imposes legal obligations on contractors, equipment suppliers, installers and workers to meet design, inspection, maintenance and medical‑surveillance requirements.\n\nIt matters because it creates enforceable permits, inspections and safety controls to prevent falls, equipment failures, decompression illness and other serious workplace injuries."},"flash_summary":{"complexity_score":9,"scope_assessment":{"changed":true,"description":"The original 1950 regulation had a focused remit on scaffolding and lifts. Over time its scope expanded materially. The republished instrument now prescribes highly detailed technical requirements for cranes, hoists, plant, wire ropes and chains (Part 11–12), compressed‑air operations including diving and tunnelling (Part 8, Schedules 7–9), explosive‑powered tools (Part 9A), and broad site welfare provisions (Part 10). That expansion moves the instrument beyond purely scaffolding and lift rules into a wide‑ranging workplace safety code for building, excavation and specialist industrial tasks (see Parts 4, 6, 7, 8, 9A, 11 and 12). The chief inspector’s expanded approval and exemption powers (s 5, s 127(35)) institutionalise administrative discretion to accommodate new technologies or materials, but also concentrate decision‑making and can affect how and when novel methods or second‑hand parts may be used. Concrete additions that broaden scope include the compressed‑air medical regime and decompression tables (s 99–101, Schedule 7–9) and the explosive‑powered tools safety part (Part 9A, ss 118A–118H)."},"complexity_factors":["Extensive length (many Parts, 170+ sections and multiple long Schedules and technical Tables)","Numerous defined terms and cross‑references (dictionary + signpost defs; frequent cross‑references to Standards Australia and British Standards)","Highly prescriptive numeric rules and tables (load factors, rope/drum ratios, stress limits, decompression tables) — many conditional thresholds","Nested conditional rules and exceptions (chief inspector approvals and exemptions in many places — s 5, s 17, s 127 etc)","Multiple technical disciplines covered (mechanical design, structural timber, electrical safety, diving/medical, explosives), increasing interpretive complexity","Detailed inspection, testing and certification requirements (chains, ropes, bearings) with documentary obligations (s 143, s 144)","Qualification and administrative obligations (medical badges, training, appointment of medical officers, qualified operator definitions)","Legacy drafting and layers of amendment (pre‑1950 origins, later additions like Part 9A) creating non‑uniform drafting style","Tables and schedules spanning operational, medical and engineering data that must be jointly applied (dynamic load factors + medical decompression tables)"],"plain_english_summary":"**What this regulation does (mechanics)\n\n- Sets technical and operational safety rules for: lifts and escalators (Part 4); scaffolding and staging (Part 6); cranes, hoists and other plant (Part 11 and Part 12); excavation, tunnelling and compressed‑air work (Part 7 & Part 8); demolition, painting, window‑cleaning and other building‑site activities (Part 5); plus ancillary matters (first‑aid, shelters, toilets — Part 10).  It also prescribes safety requirements for explosive‑powered tools (Part 9A).\n\n- Requires permits, plans and approvals for building lift installations (see s 17), periodic testing and inspection (e.g. test loads at s 129; testing/certificates for chain at s 143; rope tests at s 144), and records to be kept and produced to inspectors (s 14, s 119(3), s 144(48)–(51)).\n\n- Gives the chief inspector and inspectors broad powers to inspect, require corrective action, require certificates, grant exemptions in narrowly‑defined circumstances, and enforce the requirements (see s 5, s 6, s 13–14).\n\n- Provides detailed prescriptive technical standards (many numeric limits and tables) for materials, dimensions, sheave and drum sizes, load factors, wind/ horizontal/dynamic load calculations, permissible stresses and deflection limits for timber and metals (Part 11, esp. ss 122–131; many tables and schedules).  It cross‑references Standards Australia and British Standards where useful (see e.g. s 16(2), s 39(2), s 130(46)).\n\n- Imposes worker‑safety processes: e.g. medical examination and badge systems for compressed‑air workers and divers (s 99–101 and Schedule 8–9), responsibilities for employers/owners to provide safety equipment and facilities (s 73, s 119–121), and mandatory safety equipment (e.g. safety belts for window cleaners s 82, car interlocks and safety gear for lifts s 29, s 35).\n\n\nWho must act and who it affects\n\n- Employers, building contractors and plant owners pay the costs of compliance: designing, building, testing, maintaining and marking equipment; providing shelters, first‑aid, sanitary facilities; medical surveillance for compressed‑air workers (see s 73, s 64, s 119, s 99–101).  Owners of lifts must obtain permits and display safe‑working loads and contact information (s 17, s 18, s 70).\n\n- Designers, manufacturers and suppliers of cranes, hoists, ropes, chains, hooks and parts are constrained by material, testing and marking rules (see Pt 11–12 and ss 143–145).\n\n- Operators and crew must be qualified for certain tools and tasks (explosive‑powered tool operators s 118B; divers, drivers, attendants s 99, s 127).  Inspectors and the chief inspector decide approvals, exemptions and enforcement (s 5–6, s 13–14).\n\n\nWhy it matters (effects and trade‑offs)\n\n- Safety mechanism: the regulation is a largely prescriptive safety code.  It reduces technical uncertainty by giving concrete dimensions, load factors and procedural steps (e.g. tables for overrun distances s 24, rope/drum ratios s 144).  Where Standards Australia or British Standards are invoked the regulation incorporates recognised consensus technical practice (s 16(2), s 130(46)).\n\n- Compliance costs and incentives: the requirement to design to the stated factors, submit plans for certain works (s 17), perform periodic tests and keep certificates (s 129, s 143, s 144), and to appoint medical officers and maintain registers (s 99(4)–(16), s 83(19)) creates ongoing costs for businesses and owners.  Those costs fall on owners/contractors and are most material for small operators (extra lifting gear, testing, administrative record‑keeping).  The regulation concentrates benefits (improved safety) and spreads costs (many workplaces and contractors), which is a standard safety policy trade‑off.\n\n- Discretion and approval risk: the chief inspector has discretion to grant exemptions, approve new materials, or vary technical treatments (see s 5 and many places where chief inspector approval is required).  That creates an administrative gatekeeping role that affects how quickly novel materials or new equipment can be deployed — a potential bottleneck and a locus of regulatory discretion (and therefore compliance uncertainty).\n\n- Market effects: prescriptive material and testing standards favour suppliers that can certify to those standards (e.g. approved rope, chain, bearings).  That raises entry costs for alternative suppliers unless they secure approvals (s 143–145).  On the other hand, uniform technical rules reduce buyer search costs and make compliance auditable.\n\n- Practical operation and enforcement risks: the regulation is highly technical and detailed.  Implementing it requires technical expertise—inspectors must interpret tables and design rules, employers must maintain records and test data and ensure qualified operators (s 118B, s 118D).  Under‑resourced enforcement or ambiguous approvals may yield uneven compliance.\n\n- Effects on private choice: the law narrows certain choices (you must use specified materials, rope/chain standards, and safety devices), increases administrative steps before operation (permits and designs for lifts s 17), and constrains informal or ad‑hoc practices (e.g. temporary lashings, second‑hand parts require approval — see s 127 and s 131).  That reduces some operational flexibility but standardises safety.\n\n\nConcrete mechanisms to note (select citations)\n\n- Permit and plan submissions before erecting/altering lifts (s 17(1)–(5)).\n- Employer duty to provide safe scaffolding, fall protection, lighting and ventilation (s 73(1)(a)–(l)).\n- Inspector powers to demand documents and order measures (s 13–14).\n- Detailed design thresholds for cranes, hoists, scaffolding, with numeric classification system and safety factors (s 122–126 and tables 122.1–122.3, 126.1–126.9).\n- Mandatory medical checks, badges and decompression rules for compressed‑air work and diving (s 99–101, Schedule 7–9).\n- Strict rules for rope, chain and fittings, and mandatory test certificates (ss 143–145).\n- Restrictions on explosive‑powered tool use to qualified operators, tool approvals and protective devices (Part 9A, ss 118A–118H).\n\n\nWho pays, who decides, and what behaviour changes\n\n- Who pays: owners, employers and contractors pay for equipment, testing, training, medical exams and administrative compliance (see s 73, s 119, s 99–101, s 129, s 143–144).\n- Who decides: the chief inspector (and inspectors) decide approvals, exemptions, issue permits, inspect and enforce (s 5–6, s 13–14, s 17).  Technical approvals reference Standards Australia and British Standards but the chief inspector retains approval power in many places.\n- Behaviour changes: businesses must plan and document design choices, adopt specified materials/parts, perform periodic tests, appoint competent persons (medical officers, qualified operators), and adapt operating practices to prescriptive safety constraints (e.g. limits on loads, mandatory interlocks, warnings and signage).\n\n\nBottom line (practical utility)\n\nThis is a comprehensive, technical safety code for building‑site vertical access, lifting and associated plant and hazardous processes.  It trades operational flexibility for prescriptive technical certainty and enforceable safety rules.  Compliance focuses costs on owners and contractors but creates an auditable standard that inspectors can enforce; the chief inspector’s approval powers create a single regulatory interface for deviations or innovations (see s 5, s 17, s 127)."},"issue_detection":{"absurdities":[],"contradictions":[]}},"importantCases":[],"_links":{"self":"/api/acts/scaffolding-and-lifts-regulation-1950","history":"/api/acts/scaffolding-and-lifts-regulation-1950/history","analysis":"/api/acts/scaffolding-and-lifts-regulation-1950/analysis","conflicts":"/api/acts/scaffolding-and-lifts-regulation-1950/conflicts","importantCases":"/api/acts/scaffolding-and-lifts-regulation-1950/important-cases","documents":"/api/acts/scaffolding-and-lifts-regulation-1950/documents"}}